Docstoc

tx-matrix-hwguide

Document Sample
tx-matrix-hwguide Powered By Docstoc
					TX Matrix™ Platform




Hardware Guide




Juniper Networks, Inc.
1194 North Mathilda Avenue
Sunnyvale, California 94089
USA
408-745-2000
www.juniper.net
Part Number: 530-021926-01, Revision 1
This product includes the Envoy SNMP Engine, developed by Epilogue Technology, an Integrated Systems Company. Copyright © 1986-1997, Epilogue
Technology Corporation. All rights reserved. This program and its documentation were developed at private expense, and no part of them is in the public
domain.

This product includes memory allocation software developed by Mark Moraes, copyright © 1988, 1989, 1993, University of Toronto.

This product includes FreeBSD software developed by the University of California, Berkeley, and its contributors. All of the documentation and software
included in the 4.4BSD and 4.4BSD-Lite Releases is copyrighted by the Regents of the University of California. Copyright © 1979, 1980, 1983, 1986, 1988,
1989, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994. The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

GateD software copyright © 1995, the Regents of the University. All rights reserved. Gate Daemon was originated and developed through release 3.0 by
Cornell University and its collaborators. Gated is based on Kirton’s EGP, UC Berkeley’s routing daemon (routed), and DCN’s HELLO routing protocol.
Development of Gated has been supported in part by the National Science Foundation. Portions of the GateD software copyright © 1988, Regents of the
University of California. All rights reserved. Portions of the GateD software copyright © 1991, D. L. S. Associates.

This product includes software developed by Maker Communications, Inc., copyright © 1996, 1997, Maker Communications, Inc.

Juniper Networks, the Juniper Networks logo, NetScreen, and ScreenOS are registered trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc. in the United States and other
countries. JUNOS and JUNOSe are trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc. All other trademarks, service marks, registered trademarks, or registered service
marks are the property of their respective owners.

Juniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document. Juniper Networks reserves the right to change, modify, transfer, or
otherwise revise this publication without notice.

Products made or sold by Juniper Networks or components thereof might be covered by one or more of the following patents that are owned by or licensed
to Juniper Networks: U.S. Patent Nos. 5,473,599, 5,905,725, 5,909,440, 6,192,051, 6,333,650, 6,359,479, 6,406,312, 6,429,706, 6,459,579, 6,493,347,
6,538,518, 6,538,899, 6,552,918, 6,567,902, 6,578,186, and 6,590,785.

TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide
Copyright © 2007, Juniper Networks, Inc.
All rights reserved. Printed in USA.

Writing: Charissa Fleischer, Elizabeth Gardner, Jerry Isaac
Editing: Stella Hackell
Illustration: Faith Bradford Brown
Cover Design: Edmonds Design

Revision History
5 October 2007—530-021926-01. Revision 1. Updated JUNOS release recommendation for graceful switchover, fiber-optic cleaning and cabling instructions,
DC input voltage specification, torque specification for securing the cable to a DC power supply, description of the routing engines, taking the host subsystem
offline procedure, replacing a DC power cable procedure, and maintaining the power supplies section. Added information about nonstop routing.
28 August 2005—530-011711-01. Revision 5. Corrected “Routing Matrix Architecture” and “Routing Matrix Control Plane Architecture” figures, revised the
description of the system architecture, and added a paragraph to “Running Different JUNOS Software Releases on the Routing Engines.”
5 January 2005—530-011711-01. Revision 4.
9 December 2004—530-011711-01. Revision 3. Corrected “Chassis Dimensions and Clearance Requirements” figure, changed TX-CIP power requirements,
and made general updates.
3 December 2004—530-011711-01. Revision 2.
12 November 2004—530-011711-01. Revision 1.

The information in this document is current as of the date listed in the revision history.

YEAR 2000 NOTICE

Juniper Networks hardware and software products are Year 2000 compliant. The JUNOS software has no known time-related limitations through the year
2038. However, the NTP application is known to have some difficulty in the year 2036.




ii   ■
End User License Agreement

READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) BEFORE DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING, OR USING THE SOFTWARE. BY DOWNLOADING,
INSTALLING, OR USING THE SOFTWARE OR OTHERWISE EXPRESSING YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE TERMS CONTAINED HEREIN, YOU (AS CUSTOMER
OR IF YOU ARE NOT THE CUSTOMER, AS A REPRESENTATIVE/AGENT AUTHORIZED TO BIND THE CUSTOMER) CONSENT TO BE BOUND BY THIS
AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT OR CANNOT AGREE TO THE TERMS CONTAINED HEREIN, THEN (A) DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, OR USE THE SOFTWARE,
AND (B) YOU MAY CONTACT JUNIPER NETWORKS REGARDING LICENSE TERMS.

1. The Parties. The parties to this Agreement are Juniper Networks, Inc. and its subsidiaries (collectively “Juniper”), and the person or organization that
originally purchased from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller the applicable license(s) for use of the Software (“Customer”) (collectively, the “Parties”).

2. The Software. In this Agreement, “Software” means the program modules and features of the Juniper or Juniper-supplied software, and updates and
releases of such software, for which Customer has paid the applicable license or support fees to Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller. “Embedded
Software” means Software which Juniper has embedded in the Juniper equipment.

3. License Grant. Subject to payment of the applicable fees and the limitations and restrictions set forth herein, Juniper grants to Customer a non-exclusive
and non-transferable license, without right to sublicense, to use the Software, in executable form only, subject to the following use restrictions:

a. Customer shall use the Embedded Software solely as embedded in, and for execution on, Juniper equipment originally purchased by Customer from
Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller.

b. Customer shall use the Software on a single hardware chassis having a single processing unit, or as many chassis or processing units for which Customer
has paid the applicable license fees; provided, however, with respect to the Steel-Belted Radius or Odyssey Access Client software only, Customer shall use
such Software on a single computer containing a single physical random access memory space and containing any number of processors. Use of the
Steel-Belted Radius software on multiple computers requires multiple licenses, regardless of whether such computers are physically contained on a single
chassis.

c. Product purchase documents, paper or electronic user documentation, and/or the particular licenses purchased by Customer may specify limits to
Customer’s use of the Software. Such limits may restrict use to a maximum number of seats, registered endpoints, concurrent users, sessions, calls,
connections, subscribers, clusters, nodes, realms, devices, links, ports or transactions, or require the purchase of separate licenses to use particular features,
functionalities, services, applications, operations, or capabilities, or provide throughput, performance, configuration, bandwidth, interface, processing,
temporal, or geographical limits. In addition, such limits may restrict the use of the Software to managing certain kinds of networks or require the Software
to be used only in conjunction with other specific Software. Customer’s use of the Software shall be subject to all such limitations and purchase of all applicable
licenses.

d. For any trial copy of the Software, Customer’s right to use the Software expires 30 days after download, installation or use of the Software. Customer
may operate the Software after the 30-day trial period only if Customer pays for a license to do so. Customer may not extend or create an additional trial
period by re-installing the Software after the 30-day trial period.

e. The Global Enterprise Edition of the Steel-Belted Radius software may be used by Customer only to manage access to Customer’s enterprise network.
Specifically, service provider customers are expressly prohibited from using the Global Enterprise Edition of the Steel-Belted Radius software to support any
commercial network access services.

The foregoing license is not transferable or assignable by Customer. No license is granted herein to any user who did not originally purchase the applicable
license(s) for the Software from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller.

4. Use Prohibitions. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the license provided herein does not permit the Customer to, and Customer agrees not to and shall
not: (a) modify, unbundle, reverse engineer, or create derivative works based on the Software; (b) make unauthorized copies of the Software (except as
necessary for backup purposes); (c) rent, sell, transfer, or grant any rights in and to any copy of the Software, in any form, to any third party; (d) remove
any proprietary notices, labels, or marks on or in any copy of the Software or any product in which the Software is embedded; (e) distribute any copy of
the Software to any third party, including as may be embedded in Juniper equipment sold in the secondhand market; (f) use any ‘locked’ or key-restricted
feature, function, service, application, operation, or capability without first purchasing the applicable license(s) and obtaining a valid key from Juniper, even
if such feature, function, service, application, operation, or capability is enabled without a key; (g) distribute any key for the Software provided by Juniper
to any third party; (h) use the Software in any manner that extends or is broader than the uses purchased by Customer from Juniper or an authorized Juniper
reseller; (i) use the Embedded Software on non-Juniper equipment; (j) use the Software (or make it available for use) on Juniper equipment that the Customer
did not originally purchase from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller; (k) disclose the results of testing or benchmarking of the Software to any third
party without the prior written consent of Juniper; or (l) use the Software in any manner other than as expressly provided herein.

5. Audit. Customer shall maintain accurate records as necessary to verify compliance with this Agreement. Upon request by Juniper, Customer shall furnish
such records to Juniper and certify its compliance with this Agreement.

6. Confidentiality. The Parties agree that aspects of the Software and associated documentation are the confidential property of Juniper. As such, Customer
shall exercise all reasonable commercial efforts to maintain the Software and associated documentation in confidence, which at a minimum includes
restricting access to the Software to Customer employees and contractors having a need to use the Software for Customer’s internal business purposes.




                                                                                                                                                          ■     iii
7. Ownership. Juniper and Juniper's licensors, respectively, retain ownership of all right, title, and interest (including copyright) in and to the Software,
associated documentation, and all copies of the Software. Nothing in this Agreement constitutes a transfer or conveyance of any right, title, or interest in
the Software or associated documentation, or a sale of the Software, associated documentation, or copies of the Software.

8. Warranty, Limitation of Liability, Disclaimer of Warranty. The warranty applicable to the Software shall be as set forth in the warranty statement that
accompanies the Software (the “Warranty Statement”). Nothing in this Agreement shall give rise to any obligation to support the Software. Support services
may be purchased separately. Any such support shall be governed by a separate, written support services agreement. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY LAW, JUNIPER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOSS OF DATA, OR COSTS OR PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES,
OR FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT, THE SOFTWARE, OR ANY JUNIPER OR
JUNIPER-SUPPLIED SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT SHALL JUNIPER BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES ARISING FROM UNAUTHORIZED OR IMPROPER USE OF ANY
JUNIPER OR JUNIPER-SUPPLIED SOFTWARE. EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THE WARRANTY STATEMENT TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW,
JUNIPER DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES IN AND TO THE SOFTWARE (WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY, OR OTHERWISE), INCLUDING
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT DOES JUNIPER
WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE, OR ANY EQUIPMENT OR NETWORK RUNNING THE SOFTWARE, WILL OPERATE WITHOUT ERROR OR INTERRUPTION,
OR WILL BE FREE OF VULNERABILITY TO INTRUSION OR ATTACK. In no event shall Juniper’s or its suppliers’ or licensors’ liability to Customer, whether
in contract, tort (including negligence), breach of warranty, or otherwise, exceed the price paid by Customer for the Software that gave rise to the claim, or
if the Software is embedded in another Juniper product, the price paid by Customer for such other product. Customer acknowledges and agrees that Juniper
has set its prices and entered into this Agreement in reliance upon the disclaimers of warranty and the limitations of liability set forth herein, that the same
reflect an allocation of risk between the Parties (including the risk that a contract remedy may fail of its essential purpose and cause consequential loss),
and that the same form an essential basis of the bargain between the Parties.

9. Termination. Any breach of this Agreement or failure by Customer to pay any applicable fees due shall result in automatic termination of the license
granted herein. Upon such termination, Customer shall destroy or return to Juniper all copies of the Software and related documentation in Customer’s
possession or control.

10. Taxes. All license fees for the Software are exclusive of taxes, withholdings, duties, or levies (collectively “Taxes”). Customer shall be responsible for
paying Taxes arising from the purchase of the license, or importation or use of the Software.

11. Export. Customer agrees to comply with all applicable export laws and restrictions and regulations of any United States and any applicable foreign
agency or authority, and not to export or re-export the Software or any direct product thereof in violation of any such restrictions, laws or regulations, or
without all necessary approvals. Customer shall be liable for any such violations. The version of the Software supplied to Customer may contain encryption
or other capabilities restricting Customer’s ability to export the Software without an export license.

12. Commercial Computer Software. The Software is “commercial computer software” and is provided with restricted rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure
by the United States government is subject to restrictions set forth in this Agreement and as provided in DFARS 227.7201 through 227.7202-4, FAR 12.212,
FAR 27.405(b)(2), FAR 52.227-19, or FAR 52.227-14(ALT III) as applicable.

13. Interface Information. To the extent required by applicable law, and at Customer's written request, Juniper shall provide Customer with the interface
information needed to achieve interoperability between the Software and another independently created program, on payment of applicable fee, if any.
Customer shall observe strict obligations of confidentiality with respect to such information and shall use such information in compliance with any applicable
terms and conditions upon which Juniper makes such information available.

14. Third Party Software. Any licensor of Juniper whose software is embedded in the Software and any supplier of Juniper whose products or technology
are embedded in (or services are accessed by) the Software shall be a third party beneficiary with respect to this Agreement, and such licensor or vendor
shall have the right to enforce this Agreement in its own name as if it were Juniper. In addition, certain third party software may be provided with the
Software and is subject to the accompanying license(s), if any, of its respective owner(s). To the extent portions of the Software are distributed under and
subject to open source licenses obligating Juniper to make the source code for such portions publicly available (such as the GNU General Public License
(“GPL”) or the GNU Library General Public License (“LGPL”)), Juniper will make such source code portions (including Juniper modifications, as appropriate)
available upon request for a period of up to three years from the date of distribution. Such request can be made in writing to Juniper Networks, Inc., 1194
N. Mathilda Ave., Sunnyvale, CA 94089, ATTN: General Counsel. You may obtain a copy of the GPL at http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html, and a copy of
the LGPL at http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html.

15. Miscellaneous. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of California without reference to its conflicts of laws principles. The provisions
of the U.N. Convention for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this Agreement. For any disputes arising under this Agreement, the Parties
hereby consent to the personal and exclusive jurisdiction of, and venue in, the state and federal courts within Santa Clara County, California. This Agreement
constitutes the entire and sole agreement between Juniper and the Customer with respect to the Software, and supersedes all prior and contemporaneous
agreements relating to the Software, whether oral or written (including any inconsistent terms contained in a purchase order), except that the terms of a
separate written agreement executed by an authorized Juniper representative and Customer shall govern to the extent such terms are inconsistent or conflict
with terms contained herein. No modification to this Agreement nor any waiver of any rights hereunder shall be effective unless expressly assented to in
writing by the party to be charged. If any portion of this Agreement is held invalid, the Parties agree that such invalidity shall not affect the validity of the
remainder of this Agreement. This Agreement and associated documentation has been written in the English language, and the Parties agree that the English
version will govern. (For Canada: Les parties aux présentés confirment leur volonté que cette convention de même que tous les documents y compris tout
avis qui s'y rattaché, soient redigés en langue anglaise. (Translation: The parties confirm that this Agreement and all related documentation is and will be
in the English language)).




iv    ■
Table of Contents
            About This Guide                                                                                               xxi

            Objectives .....................................................................................................xxi
            Audience ......................................................................................................xxi
            Documentation Conventions .......................................................................xxii
            List of Technical Publications ......................................................................xxiii
            Documentation Feedback .........................................................................xxviii
            Requesting Support ....................................................................................xxix



Part 1      Product Overview

Chapter 1   TX Matrix Platform Overview                                                                                     3

            TX Matrix Platform Description .......................................................................3
            Routing Matrix Hardware Overview ................................................................4
            Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) ........................................................................4
            Component Redundancy .................................................................................5
            Safety Requirements, Warnings, and Guidelines .............................................6


Chapter 2   Hardware Component Overview                                                                                     9

            TX Matrix Chassis ............................................................................................9
            Midplane .......................................................................................................12
            TX Matrix Switch Interface Boards (TX-SIBs) .................................................13
                TX-SIB Components ................................................................................14
            Host Subsystem .............................................................................................15
                Routing Engine .......................................................................................16
                     Routing Engine 600 ..........................................................................16
                     Routing Engine 1600 (RE-1600) .......................................................18
                     Routing Engine 2000 (RE-2000) .......................................................20
                TX Matrix Control Board (TX-CB) ............................................................21
                     TX-CB Components ..........................................................................22
            Craft Interface ...............................................................................................23
                Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button ....................................23
                LED Display and Navigation Buttons .......................................................24
                     LED Display Idle Mode .....................................................................24
                     LED Display Alarm Mode ..................................................................25
                Host Subsystem LEDs .............................................................................25




                                                                                              Table of Contents        ■     v
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                                       TX-SIB LEDs ............................................................................................26
                                       TX-SIB Online/Offline Buttons .................................................................26
                                    TX Matrix Connector Interface Panel (TX-CIP) ...............................................26
                                       Routing Matrix Control Plane Ports .........................................................28
                                       Routing Engine Ports ..............................................................................28
                                       Alarm Relay Contacts ..............................................................................28
                                    Power Supplies ..............................................................................................29
                                       2-Input 160-A Power Supply ...................................................................29
                                            Two-Input 160-A Power Supply Inputs .............................................29
                                            Two-Input 160-A Power Supply Load Sharing and Fault
                                                Tolerance ...................................................................................30
                                            Two-Input 160-A Power Supply LEDs ...............................................30
                                    Cooling System .............................................................................................30
                                    TX Matrix Cable System ................................................................................31
                                    T640 Routing Node Overview .......................................................................33


Chapter 3                           JUNOS Software Overview                                                                                       37

                                    Routing Engine Software Components ..........................................................38
                                        Routing Protocol Process ........................................................................38
                                            IPv4 Routing Protocols .....................................................................38
                                            IPv6 Routing Protocols .....................................................................40
                                            Routing and Forwarding Tables ........................................................40
                                            Routing Policy ..................................................................................42
                                        VPNs .......................................................................................................43
                                        Interface Process ....................................................................................43
                                        Chassis Process .......................................................................................43
                                        SNMP and MIB II Processes ....................................................................44
                                        Management Process ..............................................................................44
                                        Kernel Synchronization Process ..............................................................44
                                        Routing Engine Kernel ............................................................................44
                                    Tools for Accessing and Configuring the Software .........................................44
                                    Tools for Monitoring the Software .................................................................45
                                    Software Upgrades ........................................................................................45
                                    TX Matrix Software and CLI Overview ...........................................................45
                                        Chassis and Interface Names ..................................................................46
                                        Configuring Specific Chassis Features .....................................................47
                                        Configuration Groups ..............................................................................49
                                        PIC MAC Addresses .................................................................................49
                                        Running Different JUNOS Software Releases on the Routing Engines .....50


Chapter 4                           System Architecture Overview                                                                                  53

                                    Routing Engine Functions ..............................................................................54
                                    Routing Matrix Control Plane Architecture ....................................................55
                                    Routing Matrix Switch Fabric Architecture ....................................................57
                                    T640 Routing Node Architecture ...................................................................58
                                       Packet Forwarding Engine Architecture ..................................................59
                                       Data Flow Through the T640 Routing Node ............................................59




vi   ■   Table of Contents
                                                                                                      Table of Contents




Part 2      Initial Installation

Chapter 5   Preparing for TX Matrix Platform Installation                                                              65

            Site Preparation Checklist ..............................................................................65
            Routing Matrix Configurations .......................................................................66
                 Centralized Configuration .......................................................................66
                 Distributed Configuration ........................................................................68
            Rack Requirements .......................................................................................69
                 Rack Size and Strength ...........................................................................69
                 Spacing of Mounting Bracket and Flange Holes .......................................70
                 Connection to Building Structure ............................................................70
                 Rack Mounting Considerations ...............................................................71
            Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance ..................71


Chapter 6   Unpacking the TX Matrix Platform                                                                           73

            Tools and Parts Required ..............................................................................73
            Unpacking the TX Matrix Platform ................................................................74
            Verifying Parts Received ................................................................................75


Chapter 7   Installing the Mounting Hardware                                                                           79

            Rack-Mounting Hardware ..............................................................................79
            Installing the Mounting Hardware for a Four-Post Rack or Cabinet ................79
            Installing the Mounting Hardware for an Open-Frame Rack ..........................83


Chapter 8   Installing the TX Matrix Platform Using a Mechanical Lift                                                  87

            Tools Required ..............................................................................................87
            Attaching the Installation Handle ...................................................................87
            Installing the TX Matrix Platform Using a Lift ................................................89
            Removing the Installation Handle and Reinstalling the Power Supplies .........91
            Installing the Cable Management System ......................................................92


Chapter 9   Installing the TX Matrix Platform Without a Mechanical Lift                                                95

            Tools and Parts Required ..............................................................................95
            Removing Components from the Chassis ......................................................95
                Removing the Power Supplies .................................................................96
                Removing a TX-CB ..................................................................................97
                Removing the Rear Fan Tray ..................................................................98
                Removing the TX-SIBs ............................................................................99
                Removing the Front Fan Trays ..............................................................101
            Installing the Chassis in the Rack Manually .................................................102




                                                                                          Table of Contents       ■    vii
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                                    Reinstalling Components in the Chassis ......................................................105
                                        Reinstalling the Rear Fan Tray ..............................................................105
                                        Reinstalling TX-CBs ...............................................................................106
                                        Reinstalling the Power Supplies ............................................................107
                                        Reinstalling the TX-SIBs ........................................................................108
                                        Reinstalling Front Fan Trays .................................................................109
                                    Installing the Cable Management System ....................................................110


Chapter 10                          Connecting the TX Matrix Platform                                                                   111

                                    Tools and Parts Required ............................................................................111
                                    Grounding the TX Matrix Platform ..............................................................112
                                    Connecting Power to the TX Matrix Platform ..............................................112
                                    Routing the Fiber-Optic Array Cables ..........................................................114
                                    Connecting the TX Matrix Platform to Management and Alarm Devices .....119
                                        Connecting to a Network for Out-of-Band Management ........................121
                                        Connecting to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device ...................121
                                        Connecting to External Alarm-Reporting Devices ..................................122
                                    Powering On the TX Matrix Platform ..........................................................123
                                    Powering Off the TX Matrix Platform ..........................................................124
                                    Testing and Connecting the TX Matrix Platform Fiber-Optic Connections ....125
                                        Disabling and Enabling TX-SIB Fiber-Optic Array Adapter Receivers .....125
                                        Testing the TX-SIB Fiber-Optic Array Adapters ......................................125
                                        Connecting the Fiber-Optic Array Cables to a TX Matrix Platform .........127
                                        Testing the Fiber-Optic Array Cables .....................................................128


Chapter 11                          Configuring the TX Matrix                                                                           131

                                    Configuring the TX Matrix Platform .............................................................131


Chapter 12                          Converting the T640 Routing Node                                                                    135

                                    Tools and Parts Required ............................................................................135
                                    T640 Routing Node Conversion Overview ...................................................135
                                    Control and Switching Planes Connections ..................................................136
                                        Control Plane Connections ....................................................................136
                                        Switching Plane Connections ................................................................137
                                    Converting an Offline or Operational T640 Routing Node ...........................139
                                        Upgrading the JUNOS Software .............................................................140
                                        Preparing the T640 Routing Node for Graceful Switchover ...................140
                                        Upgrading the FPC Firmware ................................................................142
                                        Merging the T640 Routing Node Configuration into the TX Matrix
                                            Platform Configuration ...................................................................143




viii   ■   Table of Contents
                                                                                                         Table of Contents




Chapter 13   Integrating an Offline T640 Routing Node with the TX Matrix
             Platform                                                                                                    145

             Tools and Parts Required ............................................................................145
             Replacing the Rear Fan Tray .......................................................................145
             Replacing the Standard CBs and SIBs in the T640 Routing Node .................146
             Connecting an Offline T640 Routing Node to the TX Matrix Platform .........147
             Powering On the T640 Routing Node ..........................................................149
             Verifying the State of the Routing Matrix .....................................................150


Chapter 14   Integrating an Operational T640 Routing Node with the TX Matrix
             Platform                                                                                                    155

             Tools and Parts Required ............................................................................155
             Replacing the Rear Fan Tray .......................................................................156
             Converting and Connecting the Control Planes ...........................................157
             Converting and Connecting the Switching Planes ........................................158
                  Converting a Switching Plane ...............................................................159
                  Connecting and Testing a Switching Plane ............................................161
             Transferring Control from the T640 Routing Node to the TX Matrix
                  Platform ................................................................................................163
             Rolling Back the Integration ........................................................................164



Part 3       Hardware Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Replacement
             Procedures

Chapter 15   Hardware Maintenance Overview                                                                               171

             Tools and Parts Required ............................................................................171
             Routine Maintenance Procedures ................................................................171
             Maintaining Cooling System Components ...................................................172
                 Maintaining the Air Filters .....................................................................172
                 Maintaining the Fan Trays ....................................................................172
             Maintaining the Host Subsystem .................................................................174
             Maintaining the TX-SIBs ..............................................................................175
                 Cleaning the Fiber-Optic Components ..................................................177
                     Cleaning with Alcohol and Swabs ...................................................179
                     Cleaning with the Dry Cloth Cleaning Tool .....................................179
             Maintaining the Power Supplies ..................................................................182


Chapter 16   Troubleshooting Hardware Components                                                                         185

             Overview of Troubleshooting Resources ......................................................185
                Command-Line Interface ......................................................................185
                LEDs .....................................................................................................186
                    Craft Interface LEDs .......................................................................186
                    Component LEDs ...........................................................................186




                                                                                             Table of Contents       ■     ix
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                                        Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages ..................................................187
                                        Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center ......................................190
                                    Troubleshooting the Cooling System ...........................................................190
                                    Troubleshooting the Power System .............................................................191
                                    Troubleshooting the TX-SIBs and the Switching Planes ...............................193
                                        Cleaning the Fiber-Optic Array Adapters and Connectors .....................195


Chapter 17                          Replacing Hardware Components                                                                         197

                                    Tools and Parts Required ............................................................................197
                                    Replacing a TX-CIP and Its Cables ...............................................................198
                                        Removing a TX-CIP ...............................................................................199
                                        Installing a TX-CIP ................................................................................200
                                        Replacing Connections to TX-CIP Ports .................................................202
                                            Replacing Control Plane Connections .............................................203
                                            Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable ....................................203
                                            Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable .......................................204
                                    Replacing Cooling System Components ......................................................205
                                        Replacing a Fan Tray ............................................................................205
                                            Removing a Front Fan Tray ............................................................205
                                            Installing a Front Fan Tray .............................................................206
                                            Removing the Rear Fan Tray ..........................................................207
                                            Installing a Rear Fan Tray ...............................................................209
                                        Replacing an Air Filter ..........................................................................210
                                            Removing the Front Air Filter .........................................................210
                                            Installing the Front Air Filter ...........................................................211
                                            Removing the Rear Air Filter ..........................................................212
                                            Installing the Rear Air Filter ............................................................213
                                    Replacing the Craft Interface .......................................................................214
                                        Removing the Craft Interface ................................................................214
                                        Installing the Craft Interface ..................................................................215
                                    Replacing Host Subsystem Components .....................................................216
                                        Taking the Host Subsystem Offline .......................................................216
                                        Replacing a TX-CB ................................................................................219
                                            Removing a TX-CB .........................................................................219
                                            Installing a TX-CB ...........................................................................220
                                        Replacing a PC Card .............................................................................221
                                            Removing a PC Card ......................................................................221
                                            Installing a PC Card ........................................................................222
                                        Replacing a Routing Engine ..................................................................223
                                            Removing a Routing Engine ...........................................................223
                                            Installing a Routing Engine .............................................................224
                                    Replacing a TX-SIB and Its Cables ...............................................................226
                                        Removing a TX-SIB ...............................................................................226
                                        Installing a TX-SIB .................................................................................228




x   ■    Table of Contents
                                                                                                   Table of Contents




                Replacing a Fiber-Optic Array Cable .....................................................231
                Verifying the Connections Between the TX-SIBs and T640-SIBs ............236
             Replacing Power System Components ........................................................238
                Replacing a Two-Input 160-A Power Supply ..........................................238
                     Removing a Two-Input 160-A Power Supply ..................................238
                     Installing a Two-Input 160-A Power Supply ....................................241
                Replacing a Power Supply Cable ...........................................................243



Part 4       Appendixes

Appendix A   Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information                                                          249

             Definition of Safety Warning Levels ............................................................249
             Safety Guidelines and Warnings ..................................................................250
                 General Safety Guidelines and Warnings ...............................................251
                      Qualified Personnel Warning ..........................................................252
                      Restricted Access Area Warning .....................................................252
                      Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage ...................................254
                 Fire Safety Requirements ......................................................................254
                      Fire Suppression .............................................................................255
                      Fire Suppression Equipment ...........................................................255
                 Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings .........................................255
                      Chassis Lifting Guidelines ...............................................................256
                      Installation Instructions Warning ....................................................256
                      Rack-Mounting Requirements and Warnings ..................................257
                      Ramp Warning ...............................................................................260
                 Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings ....................................261
                      General Laser Safety Guidelines ......................................................261
                      Laser Safety Standards ...................................................................261
                      Class 1 and Class 1M Laser Product Warning .................................262
                      Class 1 LED Product Warning .........................................................262
                      Laser Beam Warning ......................................................................263
                      Radiation From Open Port Apertures Warning ...............................263
                      Unterminated Fiber-Optic Array Cable Warning .............................264
                 Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings ............265
                      Battery Handling Warning ..............................................................266
                      Jewelry Removal Warning ..............................................................266
                      Lightning Activity Warning .............................................................268
                      Operating Temperature Warning ....................................................268
                      Product Disposal Warning ..............................................................269
                 Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings ............................................270
                      In Case of Electrical Accident .........................................................270
                      General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings .........................270
                      DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings .....................275
                      Hazardous Radiation Exposure Warning ........................................280
                 Agency Approvals .................................................................................281




                                                                                        Table of Contents      ■    xi
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                                         Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements ....................................282
                                            Canada ...........................................................................................282
                                            European Community ....................................................................282
                                            Japan ..............................................................................................283
                                            United States ..................................................................................283
                                         Compliance Statements for Environmental Requirements ....................284
                                            Lithium Battery ..............................................................................284
                                         Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise ...........................................284


Appendix B                          Environmental Specifications                                                                             285

                                    TX Matrix Platform Environmental Specifications .......................................285


Appendix C                          Power Requirements, Guidelines, and Specifications                                                       287

                                    Power System Specifications .......................................................................287
                                    Power Supply Electrical Specifications .........................................................288
                                    TX Matrix Platform Power Requirements ....................................................288
                                    Calculating Power Consumption ..................................................................289
                                    DC Power Cable Specifications ....................................................................290
                                    Chassis Grounding .......................................................................................291
                                    Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines ..................................................................292
                                         Distance Limitations for Signaling .........................................................292
                                         Radio Frequency Interference ...............................................................292
                                         Electromagnetic Compatibility ..............................................................293


Appendix D                          Cable Specifications                                                                                     295

                                    Cabling Preparations and Considerations ....................................................295
                                        Control Plane Connections and Considerations .....................................295
                                        Fiber-Optic Array Cable Connections and Considerations .....................295
                                        Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications .......................297


Appendix E                          Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware                                                       299

                                    Locating Component Serial Numbers ..........................................................299
                                        TX Matrix Chassis Serial Number Label .................................................300
                                        TX-CB Serial Number Label ...................................................................301
                                        TX-CIP Serial Number Label ..................................................................301
                                        Craft Interface Serial Number Label ......................................................302
                                        Power Supply Serial Number Label .......................................................303
                                        Routing Engine Serial Number Label .....................................................303
                                        TX-SIB Serial Number Label ..................................................................304
                                    Contacting Customer Support ......................................................................305
                                        Information You Might Need to Supply to JTAC ....................................305
                                    Return Procedure ........................................................................................305
                                    Tools and Parts Required ............................................................................306




xii   ■   Table of Contents
                                                                                                           Table of Contents




             Packing the TX Matrix Platform for Shipment .............................................307
             Packing Components for Shipment .............................................................308


Appendix F   Cable Connector Pinouts                                                                                      309

             RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine ETHERNET Port ...............309
             DB-9 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine AUXILIARY and CONSOLE
                 Ports .....................................................................................................309



Part 5       Index

             Index ...........................................................................................................313




                                                                                             Table of Contents        ■     xiii
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




xiv   ■    Table of Contents
List of Figures
           Figure 1: Routing Matrix ..................................................................................4
           Figure 2: Front View of the TX Matrix Platform .............................................10
           Figure 3: Rear View of the TX Matrix Platform ..............................................11
           Figure 4: TX Matrix Platform Midplane ..........................................................13
           Figure 5: TX-SIB ............................................................................................14
           Figure 6: Routing Engine 600 ........................................................................17
           Figure 7: Routing Engine 1600 (RE-1600) ......................................................18
           Figure 8: Routing Engine 2000 (RE-2000) ......................................................20
           Figure 9: TX-CB .............................................................................................22
           Figure 10: Front Panel of the Craft Interface .................................................23
           Figure 11: LED Display in Idle Mode .............................................................24
           Figure 12: LED Display in Alarm Mode ..........................................................25
           Figure 13: TX-CIP ..........................................................................................27
           Figure 14: Power Supply ...............................................................................29
           Figure 15: Airflow Through the Chassis .........................................................31
           Figure 16: Cable Management System ..........................................................33
           Figure 17: Front View of the T640 Routing Node ...........................................34
           Figure 18: Rear View of the T640 Routing Node ............................................35
           Figure 19: T640-SIB .......................................................................................35
           Figure 20: T-CB .............................................................................................36
           Figure 21: Control Packet Handling for Routing and Forwarding Table
               Updates ..................................................................................................41
           Figure 22: Routing Matrix Architecture ..........................................................54
           Figure 23: Routing Matrix Routing Engine Connections .................................56
           Figure 24: Routing Matrix Control Plane Architecture ....................................57
           Figure 25: Routing Matrix Switch Fabric Architecture ....................................58
           Figure 26: Data Flow through the T640 Routing Node ...................................60
           Figure 27: Centralized Configuration—Rack View .........................................67
           Figure 28: Centralized Configuration .............................................................67
           Figure 29: Distributed Configuration .............................................................68
           Figure 30: Typical Open-Frame Rack ............................................................70
           Figure 31: Chassis Dimensions and Clearance Requirements ........................72
           Figure 32: Contents of the Shipping Crate .....................................................75
           Figure 33: Install the Mounting Hardware for a Four-Post Rack or
               Cabinet ...................................................................................................81
           Figure 34: Position the Spacer Bar on the Rack .............................................82
           Figure 35: Center-Mounting Bracket Removal ...............................................83
           Figure 36: Install the Mounting Hardware for an Open-Frame Rack ..............85
           Figure 37: Remove a Power Supply Before Installing the Installation
               Handle ....................................................................................................88
           Figure 38: Attach the Installation Handle .......................................................89
           Figure 39: Installing the TX Matrix Platform in the Rack ...............................91




                                                                                              List of Figures     ■     xv
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                                    Figure 40: Reinstalling a Power Supply ..........................................................92
                                    Figure 41: Installing the Comb Panel Assembly .............................................93
                                    Figure 42: Cable Shelf Assembly ...................................................................93
                                    Figure 43: Removing a Power Supply Before Installing the TX Matrix
                                        Platform ..................................................................................................97
                                    Figure 44: Removing a TX-CB ........................................................................98
                                    Figure 45: Removing the Rear Fan Tray ........................................................99
                                    Figure 46: Removing a TX-SIB .....................................................................101
                                    Figure 47: Removing a Front Fan Tray ........................................................102
                                    Figure 48: Attaching the Installation Handle ................................................103
                                    Figure 49: Installing the TX Matrix Platform in the Rack .............................104
                                    Figure 50: Reinstalling the Rear Fan Tray ....................................................106
                                    Figure 51: Reinstalling a TX-CB ...................................................................107
                                    Figure 52: Reinstalling a Power Supply ........................................................108
                                    Figure 53: Reinstalling a TX-SIB ...................................................................109
                                    Figure 54: Reinstalling a Front Fan Tray ......................................................110
                                    Figure 55: Connect DC Power to the TX Matrix Platform .............................114
                                    Figure 56: Using Soft Band Straps to Secure Fiber-Optic Array Cables .........116
                                    Figure 57: Maintaining a Minimum Bend Radius of 10 in. (25.4 cm) ...........117
                                    Figure 58: Removing a Comb Cover on the Comb Panel Assembly .............118
                                    Figure 59: Fiber-Optic Array Cable Routing Through Cable Management
                                        System ..................................................................................................119
                                    Figure 60: Routing Engine Management Ports and Alarm Relay Contacts ....120
                                    Figure 61: Routing Engine Ethernet Cable Connector ..................................121
                                    Figure 62: Console and Auxiliary Serial Port Connector ...............................122
                                    Figure 63: Fiber-Optic Array Loopback Connector and Loopback Adapter ....126
                                    Figure 64: T640 Routing Node CB ...............................................................136
                                    Figure 65: T640 Routing Node SIB ..............................................................136
                                    Figure 66: Control and Switching Planes Connections .................................139
                                    Figure 67: Cleaning Tool and Adapter .........................................................178
                                    Figure 68: Inserting the Cleaning Adapter into the Connector Slot ..............180
                                    Figure 69: Inserting the Cleaning Tip into the Keyed Slot of the Cleaning
                                        Adapter .................................................................................................180
                                    Figure 70: Rotating the Thumb Wheel .........................................................181
                                    Figure 71: Rotating the Cleaning Tool and Cleaning Adapter .......................181
                                    Figure 72: Replacing the Power Supply Filter Cover ....................................184
                                    Figure 73: Airflow Through the Chassis .......................................................190
                                    Figure 74: Removing a TX-CIP .....................................................................200
                                    Figure 75: Installing a TX-CIP ......................................................................201
                                    Figure 76: Control Plane and Routing Engine Interface Ports ......................202
                                    Figure 77: Ethernet Cable Connector ...........................................................204
                                    Figure 78: Serial Port Connector ..................................................................205
                                    Figure 79: Removing a Front Fan Tray ........................................................206
                                    Figure 80: Installing a Front Fan Tray ..........................................................207
                                    Figure 81: Removing the Rear Fan Tray ......................................................208
                                    Figure 82: Installing a Rear Fan Tray ...........................................................209
                                    Figure 83: Removing the Front Air Filter .....................................................210
                                    Figure 84: Replacing the Front Filter Element .............................................211
                                    Figure 85: Installing the Front Air Filter .......................................................211
                                    Figure 86: Removing the Rear Air Filter ......................................................212
                                    Figure 87: Removing the Rear Air Filter Element ........................................213




xvi   ■    List of Figures
                                                                                                List of Figures




Figure 88: Installing the Rear Air Filter ........................................................214
Figure 89: Removing the Craft Interface ......................................................215
Figure 90: Installing a Replacement Craft Interface .....................................216
Figure 91: Removing a TX-CB ......................................................................220
Figure 92: Installing a TX-CB .......................................................................221
Figure 93: Removing a PC Card ...................................................................222
Figure 94: Installing a PC Card ....................................................................223
Figure 95: Removing the Routing Engine Cover ..........................................224
Figure 96: Removing a Routing Engine .......................................................224
Figure 97: Installing a Routing Engine .........................................................225
Figure 98: Reinstalling the Routing Engine Cover ........................................226
Figure 99: Removing a TX-SIB .....................................................................228
Figure 100: Installing a TX-SIB ....................................................................231
Figure 101: Using Soft Band Straps to Secure Fiber-Optic Array Cables .......233
Figure 102: Maintaining a Minimum Bend Radius of 10 in. (25.4 cm) .........234
Figure 103: Disconnecting Power Cables from a Two-Input 160-A DC Power
    Supply ...................................................................................................239
Figure 104: Removing a Two-Input 160-A Power Supply .............................240
Figure 105: Rear of the Power Supply Showing Midplane Connectors .........240
Figure 106: Installing a Power Supply .........................................................242
Figure 107: Connecting Power Cables to the Power Supply .........................243
Figure 108: Placing a Component into an Electrostatic Bag .........................254
Figure 109: Typical DC Source Cabling to the TX Matrix Platform ...............291
Figure 110: Grounding Cable Lug ................................................................292
Figure 111: Using Soft Band Straps to Secure Fiber-Optic Array Cables .......296
Figure 112: Fiber-Optic Array Cable ............................................................297
Figure 113: Serial Number ID Label ............................................................300
Figure 114: TX Matrix Chassis Serial Number Label ....................................301
Figure 115: TX-CB Serial Number Label .......................................................301
Figure 116: TX-CIP Serial Number Label ......................................................302
Figure 117: Craft Interface Serial Number Label ..........................................302
Figure 118: Power Supply Serial Number Label ...........................................303
Figure 119: Routing Engine Serial Number Label ........................................304
Figure 120: TX-SIB Serial Number Label ......................................................304




                                                                                  List of Figures     ■     xvii
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




xviii   ■   List of Figures
List of Tables
           Table 1: Notice Icons ...................................................................................xxii
           Table 2: Text and Syntax Conventions ........................................................xxii
           Table 3: Technical Documentation for Supported Routing Platforms ..........xxiv
           Table 4: JUNOS Software Network Operations Guides ...............................xxvii
           Table 5: Additional Books Available Through
               http://www.juniper.net/books .............................................................xxviii
           Table 6: Field-Replaceable Units ......................................................................5
           Table 7: Physical Specifications .....................................................................12
           Table 8: TX-SIB LEDs .....................................................................................15
           Table 9: Routing Engine 600 LEDs ................................................................18
           Table 10: Routing Engine 1600 LEDs ............................................................19
           Table 11: Routing Engine 2000 LEDs ............................................................21
           Table 12: TX-CB LEDs ...................................................................................22
           Table 13: Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button ...........................24
           Table 14: Host Subsystem LEDs ....................................................................26
           Table 15: TX-SIB LEDs on the Craft Interface ................................................26
           Table 16: Power Supply LEDs ........................................................................30
           Table 17: FPC Slot Number Correspondence .................................................47
           Table 18: Site Preparation Checklist ..............................................................65
           Table 19: TX Matrix Platform Parts List .........................................................75
           Table 20: Accessory Box Parts List ................................................................76
           Table 21: Four-Post or Cabinet Rack Mounting Hole Locations ......................80
           Table 22: Open-Frame Rack Mounting Hole Locations ..................................84
           Table 23: Fiber-Optic Array Cable Connections between TX-SIBs and
               T640-SIBs .............................................................................................115
           Table 24: Cable Connections between TX-CIPs and T-CBs ...........................137
           Table 25: Fiber-Optic Array Cable Connections between TX-SIBs and
               T640-SIBs .............................................................................................138
           Table 26: TX Matrix Chassis Alarm Messages ..............................................187
           Table 27: T640 Routing Node Alarm Messages ............................................188
           Table 28: SONET/SDH Interface Alarm Messages ........................................189
           Table 29: Tools and Parts Required for Component Replacement ...............197
           Table 30: Effect of Taking the Host Subsystem Offline ................................216
           Table 31: TX Matrix Platform Environmental Specifications ........................285
           Table 32: Power System Electrical Specifications ........................................287
           Table 33: Power Supply Electrical Specifications .........................................288
           Table 34: Component Power Requirements ................................................288
           Table 35: Power and Grounding Cable Specifications ..................................290
           Table 36: Grounding Cable Specifications ....................................................292
           Table 37: Cable and Wire Specifications for Routing Engine Management
               and Alarm Interfaces ............................................................................298
           Table 38: RJ-45 Connector Pinout ................................................................309




                                                                                            List of Tables     ■    xix
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                                    Table 39: DB-9 Connector Pinout ................................................................310




xx    ■   List of Tables
About This Guide

             This preface provides the following guidelines for using the TX Matrix Platform
             Hardware Guide.
             ■   Objectives on page xxi
             ■   Audience on page xxi
             ■   Documentation Conventions on page xxii
             ■   List of Technical Publications on page xxiii
             ■   Documentation Feedback on page xxviii
             ■   Requesting Support on page xxix


Objectives
             This manual describes hardware installation and basic troubleshooting procedures
             for the Juniper Networks TX Matrix Platform. It explains how to prepare your site
             for system installation, unpack and install the hardware, power on the TX Matrix
             platform, perform initial software configuration, and perform routine maintenance.
             After completing the installation and basic configuration procedures covered in this
             manual, see the JUNOS software configuration guides for information about further
             JUNOS software configuration.


             NOTE: For additional information about Juniper Networks Internet routers and the
             Physical Interface Cards (PICs) they support—either corrections to or information
             that might have been omitted from this guide—see the hardware release notes at
             http://www.juniper.net/.




Audience
             This guide is designed for network administrators who are installing and maintaining
             a Juniper Networks router or preparing a site for router installation. To use this guide,
             you need a broad understanding of networks in general, the Internet in particular,
             networking principles, and network configuration. Any detailed discussion of these
             concepts is beyond the scope of this guide.




                                                                                  Objectives   ■   xxi
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




Documentation Conventions
                               Table 1 on page xxii defines the notice icons used in this guide.

Table 1: Notice Icons

 Icon             Meaning                            Description

                  Informational note                 Indicates important features or instructions.


                  Caution                            Indicates a situation that might result in loss of data or hardware damage.



                  Warning                            Alerts you to the risk of personal injury or death.



                  Laser warning                      Alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser.




                               Table 2 on page xxii defines the text and syntax conventions used in this guide.

Table 2: Text and Syntax Conventions

 Convention                                 Description                                Examples

 Bold text like this                        Represents text that you type.             To enter configuration mode, type the
                                                                                       configure command:

                                                                                           user@host> configure

 Fixed-width text like this                 Represents output that appears on the      user@host> show chassis alarms
                                            terminal screen.                           No alarms currently active

 Italic text like this                      ■   Introduces important new terms.        ■     A policy term is a named structure
                                            ■   Identifies book names.                       that defines match conditions and
                                                                                             actions.
                                            ■   Identifies RFC and Internet draft
                                                titles.                                ■     JUNOS System Basics Configuration
                                                                                             Guide
                                                                                       ■     RFC 1997, BGP Communities
                                                                                             Attribute

 Italic text like this                      Represents variables (options for which    Configure the machine’s domain name:
                                            you substitute a value) in commands or
                                            configuration statements.                      [edit]
                                                                                           root@# set system domain-name
                                                                                             domain-name




xxii    ■     Documentation Conventions
                                                                                                                  About This Guide




Table 2: Text and Syntax Conventions (continued)

 Convention                              Description                                  Examples

 Plain text like this                    Represents names of configuration            ■     To configure a stub area, include
                                         statements, commands, files, and                   the stub statement at the [edit
                                         directories; IP addresses; configuration           protocols ospf area area-id]
                                         hierarchy levels; or labels on routing             hierarchy level.
                                         platform components.                         ■     The console port is labeled
                                                                                            CONSOLE.

 < > (angle brackets)                    Enclose optional keywords or variables.      stub <default-metric metric>;

 | (pipe symbol)                         Indicates a choice between the mutually      broadcast | multicast
                                         exclusive keywords or variables on either
                                         side of the symbol. The set of choices is    (string1 | string2 | string3)
                                         often enclosed in parentheses for clarity.

 # (pound sign)                          Indicates a comment specified on the         rsvp { # Required for dynamic MPLS only
                                         same line as the configuration statement
                                         to which it applies.

 [ ] (square brackets)                   Enclose a variable for which you can         community name members [
                                         substitute one or more values.               community-ids ]

 Indention and braces ( { } )            Identify a level in the configuration            [edit]
                                         hierarchy.                                       routing-options {
                                                                                            static {
 ; (semicolon)                           Identifies a leaf statement at a                      route default {
                                         configuration hierarchy level.                          nexthop address;
                                                                                                 retain;
                                                                                               }
                                                                                            }
                                                                                          }

 J-Web GUI Conventions
 Bold text like this                     Represents J-Web graphical user              ■     In the Logical Interfaces box, select
                                         interface (GUI) items you click or select.         All Interfaces.
                                                                                      ■     To cancel the configuration, click
                                                                                            Cancel.

 > (bold right angle bracket)            Separates levels in a hierarchy of J-Web     In the configuration editor hierarchy,
                                         selections.                                  select Protocols>Ospf.



List of Technical Publications
                            Table 3 on page xxiv lists the software and hardware guides and release notes for
                            Juniper Networks J-series, M-series, MX-series, and T-series routing platforms and
                            describes the contents of each document. Table 4 on page xxvii lists the books included
                            in the Network Operations Guide series.

                            Table 5 on page xxviii lists additional books on Juniper Networks solutions that you can
                            order through your bookstore. A complete list of such books is available at
                            http://www.juniper.net/books.




                                                                                      List of Technical Publications    ■    xxiii
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




    Table 3: Technical Documentation for Supported Routing Platforms

       Book                                             Description

       JUNOS Software for Supported Routing Platforms
       Access Privilege                                 Explains how to configure access privileges in user classes by using
                                                        permission flags and regular expressions. Lists the permission flags
                                                        along with their associated command-line interface (CLI) operational
                                                        mode commands and configuration statements.

       Class of Service                                 Provides an overview of the class-of-service (CoS) functions of the
                                                        JUNOS software and describes how to configure CoS features,
                                                        including configuring multiple forwarding classes for transmitting
                                                        packets, defining which packets are placed into each output queue,
                                                        scheduling the transmission service level for each queue, and
                                                        managing congestion through the random early detection (RED)
                                                        algorithm.

       CLI User Guide                                   Describes how to use the JUNOS command-line interface (CLI) to
                                                        configure, monitor, and manage Juniper Networks routing
                                                        platforms. This material was formerly covered in the JUNOS System
                                                        Basics Configuration Guide.

       Feature Guide                                    Provides a detailed explanation and configuration examples for
                                                        several of the most complex features in the JUNOS software.

       High Availability                                Provides an overview of hardware and software resources that
                                                        ensure a high level of continuous routing platform operation and
                                                        describes how to configure high availability (HA) features such as
                                                        nonstop routing (NSR) and graceful Routing Engine switchover
                                                        (GRES).

       MPLS Applications                                Provides an overview of traffic engineering concepts and describes
                                                        how to configure traffic engineering protocols.

       Multicast Protocols                              Provides an overview of multicast concepts and describes how to
                                                        configure multicast routing protocols.

       Multiplay Solutions                              Describes how you can deploy IPTV and voice over IP (VoIP)
                                                        services in your network.

       Network Interfaces                               Provides an overview of the network interface functions of the
                                                        JUNOS software and describes how to configure the network
                                                        interfaces on the routing platform.

       Network Management                               Provides an overview of network management concepts and
                                                        describes how to configure various network management features,
                                                        such as SNMP and accounting options.

       Policy Framework                                 Provides an overview of policy concepts and describes how to
                                                        configure routing policy, firewall filters, and forwarding options.

       Routing Protocols                                Provides an overview of routing concepts and describes how to
                                                        configure routing, routing instances, and unicast routing protocols.

       Secure Configuration Guide for Common Criteria   Provides an overview of secure Common Criteria and JUNOS-FIPS
       and JUNOS-FIPS                                   protocols for the JUNOS software and describes how to install and
                                                        configure secure Common Criteria and JUNOS-FIPS on a routing
                                                        platform.




xxiv    ■     List of Technical Publications
                                                                                                            About This Guide




Table 3: Technical Documentation for Supported Routing Platforms (continued)

 Book                                           Description

 Services Interfaces                            Provides an overview of the services interfaces functions of the
                                                JUNOS software and describes how to configure the services
                                                interfaces on the router.

 Software Installation and Upgrade Guide        Describes the JUNOS software components and packaging and
                                                explains how to initially configure, reinstall, and upgrade the JUNOS
                                                system software. This material was formerly covered in the JUNOS
                                                System Basics Configuration Guide.

 System Basics                                  Describes Juniper Networks routing platforms and explains how
                                                to configure basic system parameters, supported protocols and
                                                software processes, authentication, and a variety of utilities for
                                                managing your router on the network.

 VPNs                                           Provides an overview and describes how to configure Layer 2 and
                                                Layer 3 virtual private networks (VPNs), virtual private LAN service
                                                (VPLS), and Layer 2 circuits. Provides configuration examples.

 JUNOS References
 Hierarchy and RFC Reference                    Describes the JUNOS configuration mode commands. Provides a
                                                hierarchy reference that displays each level of a configuration
                                                hierarchy, and includes all possible configuration statements that
                                                can be used at that level. This material was formerly covered in
                                                the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide.

 Interfaces Command Reference                   Describes the JUNOS software operational mode commands you
                                                use to monitor and troubleshoot interfaces.

 Routing Protocols and Policies Command         Describes the JUNOS software operational mode commands you
 Reference                                      use to monitor and troubleshoot routing policies and protocols,
                                                including firewall filters.

 System Basics and Services Command Reference   Describes the JUNOS software operational mode commands you
                                                use to monitor and troubleshoot system basics, including
                                                commands for real-time monitoring and route (or path) tracing,
                                                system software management, and chassis management. Also
                                                describes commands for monitoring and troubleshooting services
                                                such as class of service (CoS), IP Security (IPSec), stateful firewalls,
                                                flow collection, and flow monitoring.

 System Log Messages Reference                  Describes how to access and interpret system log messages
                                                generated by JUNOS software modules and provides a reference
                                                page for each message.

 J-Web User Guide
 J-Web Interface User Guide                     Describes how to use the J-Web graphical user interface (GUI) to
                                                configure, monitor, and manage Juniper Networks routing
                                                platforms.

 JUNOS API and Scripting Documentation
 JUNOScript API Guide                           Describes how to use the JUNOScript application programming
                                                interface (API) to monitor and configure Juniper Networks routing
                                                platforms.




                                                                                  List of Technical Publications    ■      xxv
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




    Table 3: Technical Documentation for Supported Routing Platforms (continued)

       Book                                            Description

       JUNOS XML API Configuration Reference           Provides reference pages for the configuration tag elements in the
                                                       JUNOS XML API.

       JUNOS XML API Operational Reference             Provides reference pages for the operational tag elements in the
                                                       JUNOS XML API.

       NETCONF API Guide                               Describes how to use the NETCONF API to monitor and configure
                                                       Juniper Networks routing platforms.

       JUNOS Configuration and Diagnostic Automation   Describes how to use the commit script and self-diagnosis features
       Guide                                           of the JUNOS software. This guide explains how to enforce custom
                                                       configuration rules defined in scripts, how to use commit script
                                                       macros to provide simplified aliases for frequently used
                                                       configuration statements, and how to configure diagnostic event
                                                       policies.

       Hardware Documentation
       Hardware Guide                                  Describes how to install, maintain, and troubleshoot routing
                                                       platforms and components. Each platform has its own hardware
                                                       guide.

       PIC Guide                                       Describes the routing platform's Physical Interface Cards (PICs).
                                                       Each platform has its own PIC guide.

       DPC Guide                                       Describes the Dense Port Concentrators (DPCs) for all MX-series
                                                       routers.

       JUNOScope Documentation
       JUNOScope Software User Guide                   Describes the JUNOScope software graphical user interface (GUI),
                                                       how to install and administer the software, and how to use the
                                                       software to manage routing platform configuration files and monitor
                                                       routing platform operations.

       J-series Routing Platform Documentation
       Getting Started Guide                           Provides an overview, basic instructions, and specifications for
                                                       J-series routing platforms. The guide explains how to prepare your
                                                       site for installation, unpack and install the router and its
                                                       components, install licenses, and establish basic connectivity. Use
                                                       the Getting Started Guide for your router model.

       Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide    Explains how to configure the interfaces on J-series Services Routers
                                                       for basic IP routing with standard routing protocols, ISDN backup,
                                                       and digital subscriber line (DSL) connections.

       Advanced WAN Access Configuration Guide         Explains how to configure J-series Services Routers in virtual private
                                                       networks (VPNs) and multicast networks, configure data link
                                                       switching (DLSw) services, and apply routing techniques such as
                                                       policies, stateless and stateful firewall filters, IP Security (IPSec)
                                                       tunnels, and class-of-service (CoS) classification for safer, more
                                                       efficient routing.

       Administration Guide                            Shows how to manage users and operations, monitor network
                                                       performance, upgrade software, and diagnose common problems
                                                       on J-series Services Routers.




xxvi    ■     List of Technical Publications
                                                                                                    About This Guide




Table 3: Technical Documentation for Supported Routing Platforms (continued)

 Book                                     Description

 Release Notes
 JUNOS Release Notes                      Summarize new features and known problems for a particular
                                          software release, provide corrections and updates to published
                                          JUNOS, JUNOScript, and NETCONF manuals, provide information
                                          that might have been omitted from the manuals, and describe
                                          upgrade and downgrade procedures.

 Hardware Release Notes                   Describe the available documentation for the routing platform and
                                          summarize known problems with the hardware and accompanying
                                          software. Each platform has its own release notes.

 JUNOScope Release Notes                  Contain corrections and updates to the published JUNOScope
                                          manual, provide information that might have been omitted from
                                          the manual, and describe upgrade and downgrade procedures.

 J-series Services Router Release Notes   Briefly describe Services Router features, identify known hardware
                                          problems, and provide upgrade and downgrade instructions.



Table 4: JUNOS Software Network Operations Guides

 Book                                     Description

 Baseline                                 Describes the most basic tasks for running a network using Juniper
                                          Networks products. Tasks include upgrading and reinstalling JUNOS
                                          software, gathering basic system management information,
                                          verifying your network topology, and searching log messages.

 Interfaces                               Describes tasks for monitoring interfaces. Tasks include using
                                          loopback testing and locating alarms.

 MPLS                                     Describes tasks for configuring, monitoring, and troubleshooting
                                          an example MPLS network. Tasks include verifying the correct
                                          configuration of the MPLS and RSVP protocols, displaying the status
                                          and statistics of MPLS running on all routing platforms in the
                                          network, and using the layered MPLS troubleshooting model to
                                          investigate problems with an MPLS network.

 MPLS Log Reference                       Describes MPLS status and error messages that appear in the output
                                          of the show mpls lsp extensive command. The guide also describes
                                          how and when to configure Constrained Shortest Path First (CSPF)
                                          and RSVP trace options, and how to examine a CSPF or RSVP
                                          failure in a sample network.

 MPLS Fast Reroute                        Describes operational information helpful in monitoring and
                                          troubleshooting an MPLS network configured with fast reroute
                                          (FRR) and load balancing.

 Hardware                                 Describes tasks for monitoring M-series and T-series routing
                                          platforms.




                                                                         List of Technical Publications   ■     xxvii
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




Table 5: Additional Books Available Through http://www.juniper.net/books

 Book                               Description

 Interdomain Multicast              Provides background and in-depth analysis of multicast routing using Protocol Independent
 Routing                            Multicast sparse mode (PIM SM) and Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP); details
                                    any-source and source-specific multicast delivery models; explores multiprotocol BGP (MBGP)
                                    and multicast IS-IS; explains Internet Gateway Management Protocol (IGMP) versions 1, 2, and
                                    3; lists packet formats for IGMP, PIM, and MSDP; and provides a complete glossary of multicast
                                    terms.

 JUNOS Cookbook                     Provides detailed examples of common JUNOS software configuration tasks, such as basic
                                    router configuration and file management, security and access control, logging, routing policy,
                                    firewalls, routing protocols, MPLS, and VPNs.

 MPLS-Enabled Applications          Provides an overview of Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) applications (such as Layer 3
                                    virtual private networks [VPNs], Layer 2 VPNs, virtual private LAN service [VPLS], and
                                    pseudowires), explains how to apply MPLS, examines the scaling requirements of equipment
                                    at different points in the network, and covers the following topics: point-to-multipoint label
                                    switched paths (LSPs), DiffServ-aware traffic engineering, class of service, interdomain traffic
                                    engineering, path computation, route target filtering, multicast support for Layer 3 VPNs, and
                                    management and troubleshooting of MPLS networks.

 OSPF and IS-IS: Choosing an        Explores the full range of characteristics and capabilities for the two major link-state routing
 IGP for Large-Scale Networks       protocols: Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) and IS-IS. Explains architecture, packet types, and
                                    addressing; demonstrates how to improve scalability; shows how to design large-scale networks
                                    for maximum security and reliability; details protocol extensions for MPLS-based traffic
                                    engineering, IPv6, and multitopology routing; and covers troubleshooting for OSPF and IS-IS
                                    networks.

 Routing Policy and Protocols       Provides a brief history of the Internet, explains IP addressing and routing (Routing Information
 for Multivendor IP Networks        Protocol [RIP], OSPF, IS-IS, and Border Gateway Protocol [BGP]), explores ISP peering and
                                    routing policies, and displays configurations for both Juniper Networks and other vendors'
                                    routers.

 The Complete IS-IS Protocol        Provides the insight and practical solutions necessary to understand the IS-IS protocol and how
                                    it works by using a multivendor, real-world approach.



Documentation Feedback
                                We encourage you to provide feedback, comments, and suggestions so that we can
                                improve the documentation. You can send your comments to
                                techpubs-comments@juniper.net, or fill out the documentation feedback form at
                                http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/docbug/docbugreport.html. If you are using e-mail, be sure
                                to include the following information with your comments:
                                ■     Document name
                                ■     Document part number
                                ■     Page number
                                ■     Software release version




xxviii   ■    Documentation Feedback
                                                                                        About This Guide




Requesting Support
                For technical support, open a support case with the Case Manager link at
                http://www.juniper.net/support/ or call 1-888-314-JTAC (from the United States, Canada,
                or Mexico) or 1-408-745-9500 (from elsewhere).




                                                                          Requesting Support   ■   xxix
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




xxx    ■    Requesting Support
Part 1
Product Overview
         ■   TX Matrix Platform Overview on page 3
         ■   Hardware Component Overview on page 9
         ■   JUNOS Software Overview on page 37
         ■   System Architecture Overview on page 53




                                                       Product Overview   ■   1
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




2   ■    Product Overview
Chapter 1
TX Matrix Platform Overview

                  This chapter provides an overview of the TX Matrix platform, discussing the following
                  topics:
                  ■   TX Matrix Platform Description on page 3
                  ■   Routing Matrix Hardware Overview on page 4
                  ■   Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) on page 4
                  ■   Component Redundancy on page 5
                  ■   Safety Requirements, Warnings, and Guidelines on page 6


TX Matrix Platform Description
                  The TX Matrix platform is the centralized switch fabric of the routing matrix, which
                  is a terabit routing system interconnecting up to four T640 routing nodes to deliver
                  up to 2.56 terabits per second (Tbps) of subscriber switching capacity. The routing
                  matrix multichassis architecture provides scalable growth for aggregation and core
                  services for voice, video, and data networks. It provides a flexible and cost-effective
                  means to simplify large point-of-presence (POP) and central office environments.
                  The routing matrix delivers high-availability services from tunnel services, ATM, DS3,
                  OC3/STM1, OC12/STM4, Gigabit Ethernet, 10-Gigabit Ethernet, OC48/STM16,
                  OC192/STM64, and other high-speed interfaces.

                  The routing matrix leverages the intelligent virtual services capabilities of JUNOS
                  software, which enable you to create multiple application-specific logical networks
                  over a single physical topology. This gives you the ability to virtually separate traffic
                  types that require unique network attributes—such as ATM or high-priority voice
                  over IP (VoIP) and third-generation (3G) mobile traffic—from bulk transit IP traffic.

                  The TX Matrix platform architecture cleanly separates control operations from packet
                  forwarding operations. This design eliminates processing and traffic bottlenecks,
                  permitting the TX Matrix platform to achieve terabit performance levels. Control
                  operations in the TX Matrix platform are performed by the host subsystem, which
                  runs JUNOS software to handle traffic engineering and configuration management.
                  High-availability, interchassis communications are provided by an out-of-band Ethernet
                  LAN that interconnects the host subsystems in the TX Matrix platform and the T640
                  routing nodes.

                  The TX Matrix platform is a modular, rack-mountable system. One TX Matrix platform
                  can be installed in one standard 19-in. wide, 78-in. high, EIA telco rack.




                                                                        TX Matrix Platform Description   ■   3
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




Routing Matrix Hardware Overview
                             The routing matrix consists of the following components:
                             ■      One TX Matrix platform
                             ■      Up to four T640 routing nodes
                             ■      Interchassis fiber-optic array cables that connect the TX Matrix platform and
                                    T640 routing node data switching planes (switch fabric).
                             ■      Interchassis UTP Category 5 Ethernet cables that connect the TX Matrix platform
                                    and T640 routing node control planes
                             ■      Cable management system for the fiber-optic array cables
                             ■      Equipment racks or cabinets for the TX Matrix platform and T640 routing nodes

                             The Switch Interface Boards (SIBs) in the TX Matrix platform (TX-SIBs) connect with
                             the SIBs in the T640 routing nodes (T640-SIBs) to create a high-speed switch fabric.
                             You manage the routing matrix by connecting the Connector Interface Panels (CIPs)
                             in the TX Matrix platform (TX-CIPs) to external management devices.

                             Figure 1 on page 4 shows a routing matrix that uses four T640 routing nodes.

                             Figure 1: Routing Matrix




                             NOTE: A TX Matrix platform is also referred to as a switch-card chassis (SCC). The
                             command-line interface (CLI) uses scc as a prefix to refer to the TX Matrix platform.
                             A T640 routing node in a routing matrix is also referred to as a line-card chassis (LCC).
                             Some TX Matrix platform hardware component labels and the CLI use LCC and lcc
                             prefixes to refer to a specific T640 routing node.



Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)
                             Field-replaceable units (FRUs) are TX Matrix platform components that can be replaced
                             at the customer site. Replacing most FRUs requires minimal TX Matrix platform
                             downtime. The TX Matrix platform uses the following types of FRUs:




4   ■    Routing Matrix Hardware Overview
                                                                             Chapter 1: TX Matrix Platform Overview




               ■      Hot-removable and hot-insertable FRUs—You can remove and replace these
                      components without powering down the TX Matrix platform or disrupting the
                      routing functions.
               ■      Hot-pluggable FRUs—You can remove and replace these components without
                      powering down the TX Matrix platform, but the routing functions of the system
                      are interrupted when the component is removed.

               Table 6 on page 5 lists the FRUs for the TX Matrix platform. If the TX Matrix platform
               contains a redundant host subsystem, the TX Matrix platform Control Board (TX-CB),
               and the Routing Engine are hot-removable and hot-insertable. Before you replace a
               TX-CB or a Routing Engine, you must take the host subsystem offline (see “Taking
               the Host Subsystem Offline” on page 216).

               Table 6: Field-Replaceable Units

                   Hot-removable and hot-insertable FRUs           Hot-pluggable FRUs

                   Air filters                                     MasterControl Boards (TX-CBs) (if nonstop
                                                                   routing is not configured)
                   Connector Interface Panels (TX-CIPs)
                                                                   Master Routing Engines (if nonstop routing is
                   Craft interface                                 not configured)

                   Front and rear fan trays

                   Power supplies

                   Switch Interface Boards (TX-SIBs)

                   Backup Control Boards (TX-CBs)

                   Master Control Boards (TX-CBs) (if nonstop
                   routing is configured)

                   Backup Routing Engines

                   Master Routing Engines (if nonstop routing is
                   configured)



               For FRU replacement instructions, see “Hardware Maintenance, Troubleshooting,
               and Replacement Procedures” on page 169.


Component Redundancy
               The TX Matrix platform is designed so that no single point of failure can cause the
               entire system to fail. The following major hardware components are redundant:




                                                                                 Component Redundancy       ■      5
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             ■      TX-SIBs—The TX Matrix platform has five TX-SIBs. Each TX-SIB and the T640-SIBs
                                    connected to it represent a data switching plane that spans the TX Matrix platform
                                    and all T640 routing nodes in the routing matrix. One of the five TX-SIBs—usually
                                    TX-SIB-0—acts as a backup to the remaining four TX-SIBs. If a TX-SIB or T640-SIB
                                    fails, the backup data switching plane becomes active and traffic forwarding
                                    continues without any degradation. When the failed component is replaced, the
                                    data switching plane in which it resides becomes the new backup. If the failed
                                    component is not replaced, and a TX-SIB or T640-SIB in an active data switching
                                    plane fails, only that component is taken offline.
                             ■      Host subsystem—The host subsystem consists of a Routing Engine functioning
                                    together with a TX-CB. The TX Matrix platform can have one or two host
                                    subsystems. If two host subsystems are installed, one functions as the master
                                    and the other functions as the backup. If the master host subsystem (or either
                                    of its components) fails, the backup can take over as the master. To operate,
                                    each host subsystem requires a Routing Engine installed in an adjacent slot to
                                    a TX-CB.

                                    If the Routing Engines are configured for graceful switchover, the backup Routing
                                    Engine automatically synchronizes its configuration and state with the master
                                    Routing Engine. Any update to the master Routing Engine state is replicated on
                                    the backup Routing Engine. If the backup Routing Engine assumes mastership,
                                    packet forwarding continues through the TX Matrix platform without interruption.
                                    For more information about graceful switchover, see the JUNOS System Basics
                                    Configuration Guide.


                             NOTE: We recommend you run JUNOS Release 7.3 or later on the TX Matrix platform
                             to support graceful switchover.


                             ■      TX-CIPs—The TX Matrix platform has two TX-CIPs. Each TX-CIP provides the
                                    ports for its corresponding host subsystem (Routing Engine and TX-CB) in the
                                    TX Matrix platform and the control plane connections to the Control Boards
                                    (T-CBs) in up to four T640 routing nodes.

                                    If the master TX-CIP fails, the backup TX-CIP provides redundant connections
                                    to the active host subsystem in the TX Matrix platform and the active T-CBs in
                                    the T640 routing nodes. In this case, the Routing Engines in the TX Matrix
                                    platform and T640 routing nodes do not perform a switchover to their backups.
                             ■      Power supplies—The TX Matrix platform has two power supplies, which share
                                    the load evenly. If one power supply fails, the other power supply can provide
                                    full power to the TX Matrix platform indefinitely.
                             ■      Cooling system—The cooling system has redundant components, which are
                                    controlled by the host subsystem. If one of the fans fails, the host subsystem
                                    increases the speed of the remaining fans to provide sufficient cooling for the
                                    TX Matrix platform indefinitely.


Safety Requirements, Warnings, and Guidelines
                             To avoid harm to yourself or the TX Matrix platform as you install and maintain it,
                             you need to follow the guidelines for working with and near electrical equipment,



6   ■    Safety Requirements, Warnings, and Guidelines
                                                      Chapter 1: TX Matrix Platform Overview




as well as the safety procedures for working with Internet routers. For a discussion
of how to make the installation site a safe environment, see “Preparing for TX Matrix
Platform Installation” on page 65. For a list of safety warnings, see “Safety and
Regulatory Compliance Information” on page 249 and particularly “Electrical Safety
Guidelines and Warnings” on page 270. However, providing an exhaustive set of
guidelines for working with electrical equipment is beyond the scope of this manual.




                                     Safety Requirements, Warnings, and Guidelines   ■    7
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




8   ■    Safety Requirements, Warnings, and Guidelines
Chapter 2
Hardware Component Overview

                    This chapter provides an overview of the TX Matrix platform hardware components:
                    ■   TX Matrix Chassis on page 9
                    ■   Midplane on page 12
                    ■   TX Matrix Switch Interface Boards (TX-SIBs) on page 13
                    ■   Host Subsystem on page 15
                    ■   Craft Interface on page 23
                    ■   TX Matrix Connector Interface Panel (TX-CIP) on page 26
                    ■   Power Supplies on page 29
                    ■   Cooling System on page 30
                    ■   TX Matrix Cable System on page 31
                    ■   T640 Routing Node Overview on page 33


TX Matrix Chassis
                    The TX Matrix chassis is a rigid sheet metal structure that houses all the other system
                    components (see Figure 2 on page 10 and Figure 3 on page 11). The chassis measures
                    44.5 in. (113.0 cm) high, 17.4 in. (44.2 cm) wide, and 31.4 in. (79.8 cm) deep. The
                    chassis installs into standard 19-in. equipment racks or telco center-mount racks.
                    One TX Matrix platform can be installed into a standard (44-U) rack, if the rack can
                    handle the maximum configuration weight of 495 lb (225 kg).

                    The chassis includes the following features (see Figure 2 on page 10 and
                    Figure 3 on page 11):
                    ■   A pair of metal flanges and a pair of metal brackets used for mounting the chassis
                        in a four-post rack or cabinet or open-frame rack.
                    ■   Upper and lower handles on each side to facilitate positioning the TX Matrix
                        platform in the rack. Do not use the handles to lift the TX Matrix platform.
                    ■   Two electrostatic discharge points (banana plug receptacles), one on each TX-CIP
                        and one in the rear.




                                                                                   TX Matrix Chassis   ■   9
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                               WARNING: Before removing or installing components of a TX Matrix platform, attach
                               an ESD strap to an ESD point and place the other end of the strap around your bare
                               wrist. Failure to use an ESD strap could result in damage to the TX Matrix platform.

                               The TX Matrix platform must be connected to earth ground during normal operation.

                               For further safety information, see “Safety and Regulatory Compliance
                               Information” on page 249.



                               Figure 2: Front View of the TX Matrix Platform




10    ■    TX Matrix Chassis
                                                 Chapter 2: Hardware Component Overview




Figure 3: Rear View of the TX Matrix Platform




Table 7 on page 12 summarizes the physical specifications for the TX Matrix platform
chassis.




                                                            TX Matrix Chassis   ■   11
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Table 7: Physical Specifications

                                 Description                 Value

                                 Chassis dimensions          44.5 in. (113.0 cm) high

                                                             17.4 in. (44.2 cm) wide

                                                             31.4 in. (79.8 cm) deep

                                                             Total depth (including comb panel assembly) 36.4 in. (92.5 cm)

                                                             11.5 in. (29.2 cm) from front of chassis to center rack-mounting
                                                             brackets

                                 TX Matrix platform weight   Chassis with midplane: 240 lb (109 kg)

                                                             Minimum configuration: 488 lb (222 kg)

                                                             Maximum configuration: 495 lb (225 kg)



Midplane
                             The midplane is located in the center of the chassis and forms the rear of the TX-SIB
                             card cage (see Figure 4 on page 13). The TX-SIBs install into the midplane from the
                             front of the chassis, and the Routing Engines and TX-CBs install into the midplane
                             from the rear of the chassis. The power supplies and cooling system components
                             also connect to the midplane.

                             The midplane performs the following major functions:
                             ■      Power distribution—The TX Matrix power supplies are connected to the midplane,
                                    which distributes power to all the TX Matrix components.
                             ■      Signal connectivity—The midplane provides signal connectivity between all
                                    TX Matrix components for monitoring and controlling the system.
                             ■      Redundancy connectivity—The midplane provides redundant paths for all critical
                                    connections.




12    ■    Midplane
                                                                       Chapter 2: Hardware Component Overview




                  Figure 4: TX Matrix Platform Midplane




TX Matrix Switch Interface Boards (TX-SIBs)
                  The TX-SIBs create the switch fabric for the TX Matrix platform, providing up to a
                  total of 3 billion packets per second (Gpps) of forwarding (see Figure 5 on page 14).
                  Five TX-SIBs are installed vertically in the front of the TX Matrix platform. The TX-SIBs
                  are referred to as TX-SIB-0 through TX-SIB-4 (left to right).

                  One of the five TX-SIBs—usually TX-SIB-0—acts as a backup to the remaining four
                  TX-SIBs. If a TX-SIB or T640-SIB fails, the backup data switching plane becomes
                  active and traffic forwarding continues without any degradation. When the failed
                  component is replaced, the data switching plane in which it resides becomes the
                  new backup. If the failed component is not replaced, and a TX-SIB or T640-SIB in an
                  active data switching plane fails, only that component is taken offline.

                  TX-SIBs are hot-removable and hot-insertable.




                                                           TX Matrix Switch Interface Boards (TX-SIBs)   ■   13
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                              Figure 5: TX-SIB




TX-SIB Components
                              Each TX-SIB consists of the following components:
                              ■     Switch Fabric ASICs.
                              ■     A high-speed fiber-optic link to each T640 routing node in the routing matrix (a
                                    total of four links labeled LCC0 through LCC3). The four links represent one data
                                    switching plane across four T640 routing nodes.
                              ■     Two status LEDs located to the right of each fiber-optic array adapter on the
                                    TX-SIB faceplate. Table 8 on page 15 describes the functions of these LEDs.
                              ■     An ONLINE/OFFLINE button next to each fiber-optic array adapter that brings the
                                    corresponding interface and T640-SIB online and offline.




14    ■    TX Matrix Switch Interface Boards (TX-SIBs)
                                                                         Chapter 2: Hardware Component Overview




Table 8: TX-SIB LEDs

 Label                             Color            State                  Description

 RX                                —                Off                    Receive link is offline.

                                   Green            Blinking               Receive link is powering on.

                                   Green            On steadily            Receive link is online and functioning
                                                                           normally.

                                   Amber            On steadily            Fiber-optic array cable might be
                                                                           connected to the wrong T640-SIB.

                                   Red              On steadily            Errors have been detected, or the
                                                                           receive link is not functioning
                                                                           normally.

 TX                                —                Off                    Transmit link is being reset.

                                   Green            On steadily            Transmit link is online and functioning
                                                                           normally.

                                   Red              On steadily            Transmit link is not functioning
                                                                           normally.



                       Each TX-SIB has three additional LEDs on the craft interface that show its status. For
                       more information, see “TX-SIB LEDs” on page 26.


Host Subsystem
                       The host subsystem provides the routing and system management functions of the
                       TX Matrix platform. You can install one or two host subsystems on the TX Matrix
                       platform. To operate, each host subsystem functions as a unit; the Routing Engine
                       requires the corresponding TX-CB, and vice versa.


                       NOTE: We recommend you install two host subsystems for redundant protection. If
                       you install only one host subsystem, we recommend you install it in slot RE0.


                       Each host subsystem has three LEDs that display its status. The host subsystem LEDs
                       are located on the right of the craft interface. For more information about the host
                       subsystem LEDs, see “Host Subsystem LEDs” on page 25.

                       The host subsystem consists of the following components:
                       ■   Routing Engine on page 16
                       ■   TX Matrix Control Board (TX-CB) on page 21




                                                                                         Host Subsystem    ■    15
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




Routing Engine
                             The Routing Engine in the TX Matrix platform maintains the routing tables used by
                             the routing matrix and controls the routing protocols that run on the routing matrix.
                             The TX Matrix platform provides all routing tables, along with updates, to each T640
                             routing node in the routing matrix. For more information about the Routing Engine
                             software, see “Routing Engine Software Components” on page 38.

                             Each Routing Engine consists of an Intel platform running JUNOS software. For a
                             more detailed description of the Routing Engine, see “Routing Engine
                             Functions” on page 54.

                             You can install one or two Routing Engines in the TX Matrix platform. The Routing
                             Engines install into the upper rear of the chassis in the slots labeled RE0 and RE1. If
                             two Routing Engines are installed, one functions as the master and the other acts as
                             the backup. If the master Routing Engine fails or is removed, and the backup is
                             configured appropriately, the backup restarts and becomes the master.


                             NOTE: We recommend you run the same JUNOS software release on the master
                             and backup Routing Engines. If you elect to run different JUNOS software releases
                             on the Routing Engines, a change in Routing Engine mastership can cause one or all
                             T640 routing nodes to be logically disconnected from the TX Matrix platform. For
                             more information, see “Running Different JUNOS Software Releases on the Routing
                             Engines” on page 50.


                             Each Routing Engine requires a TX-CB to be installed in the adjacent slot. RE0 installs
                             below CB0, and RE1 installs above CB1. A Routing Engine does not power on if no
                             TX-CB is present in the adjacent slot.

                             For a list of Routing Engines supported in the TX Matrix platform, see the M-series
                             and T-series Routing Engine and MCS Installation Instructions.


                             NOTE: For specific information about Routing Engine components (for example, the
                             amount of DRAM), issue the show chassis routing-engine command.


                             The ports for connecting the Routing Engine to external management devices are
                             located on the corresponding TX-CIP. The TX-CIP has three ports for each host
                             subsystem:
                             ■      10/100-Mbps Ethernet port for connecting to a management network
                             ■      One asynchronous serial port for connecting to a console
                             ■      One asynchronous serial port for connecting to a modem or other auxiliary
                                    device


                             Routing Engine 600

                             The RE-600 Routing Engine boots from the storage media in this order: the PC Card
                             (if present), then the internal compact flash disk (if present), then the hard disk.




16    ■    Host Subsystem
                                                 Chapter 2: Hardware Component Overview




Figure 6: Routing Engine 600




Each Routing Engine 600 (shown in Figure 6 on page 17) consists of the following
components:
■   CPU—Runs JUNOS Internet software to maintain the TX Matrix platform's routing
    tables and routing protocols. It has a Pentium-class processor.
■   SDRAM—Provides storage for the routing and forwarding tables and for other
    Routing Engine processes.
■   Compact flash disk—Provides primary storage for software images, configuration
    files, and microcode. The fixed compact flash disk is inaccessible from outside
    the TX Matrix platform.
■   Hard disk—Provides secondary storage for log files, memory dumps, and
    rebooting the system if the compact flash disk fails.
■   EEPROM—Stores the serial number of the Routing Engine.
■   Interfaces for out-of-band management access—Provide information about
    Routing Engine status to devices (console, laptop, or terminal server) connected
    to ports located on the corresponding TX-CIP.

The faceplate of the Routing Engine 600 contains the following:
■   One PC Card slot—Accepts a removable PC Card, which stores software images
    for system upgrades.
■   Reset button—Reboots the Routing Engine when pressed.
■   HD LED—Indicates activity on the hard drive. It does not necessarily indicate
    routing-related activity.


NOTE: The LEDs that report host module status (including Routing Engine status)
are on the craft interface rather than the Routing Engine faceplate.


■   HD LED—Table 9 on page 18 describes the functions of the LED.




                                                             Host Subsystem    ■    17
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Table 9: Routing Engine 600 LEDs

                              Label        Color       State            Description

                              HD           Yellow      On steadily or   Indicates activity on the hard drive. The hard
                                                       blinking         drive is functioning normally.




                             NOTE: The LEDs on the Routing Engine do not necessarily indicate routing-related
                             activity.



                             NOTE: The LEDs that report host module status (including Routing Engine status)
                             are on the craft interface rather than the Routing Engine faceplate.




                             Routing Engine 1600 (RE-1600)

                             The RE-1600 Routing Engine boots from the storage media in this order: the PC Card
                             in SLOT 0 (if present), then the PC Card in SLOT 1 (if present), then the internal
                             compact flash disk (if present), then the hard disk.

                             Figure 7: Routing Engine 1600 (RE-1600)




                             Each Routing Engine 1600 (shown in Figure 7 on page 18) consists of the following
                             components:




18    ■    Host Subsystem
                                                        Chapter 2: Hardware Component Overview




■        CPU—Runs JUNOS Internet software to maintain the TX Matrix platform's routing
         tables and routing protocols. It has a Pentium-class processor.
■        SDRAM—Provides storage for the routing and forwarding tables and for other
         Routing Engine processes.
■        Compact flash disk—Provides primary storage for software images, configuration
         files, and microcode. The fixed compact flash disk is inaccessible from outside
         the TX Matrix platform.
■        Hard disk—Provides secondary storage for log files, memory dumps, and
         rebooting the system if the compact flash disk fails.
■        EEPROM—Stores the serial number of the Routing Engine.
■        Interfaces for out-of-band management—Provide information about
         Routing Engine status to devices (console, laptop, or terminal server) connected
         to the Routing Engine ports located on the CIP.

The faceplate of the Routing Engine 1600 contains the following:
■        Two PC Card slots—Accept removable PC Cards, which store software images
         for system upgrades.
■        Reset button—Reboots the Routing Engine when pressed.
■        LEDs—Table 10 on page 19 describes the functions of these LEDs.

Table 10: Routing Engine 1600 LEDs

    Label          Color         State            Description

    Slot LEDs 0    Red and       Blinking         Indicates that the Routing Engine is booting
    and 1          Green                          and the firmware is checking if a PC card is
                   alternately                    installed.

                   Green         On steadily      Indicates that the Routing Engine booted from
                                                  the PC Card.

    HD             Yellow        On steadily or   Indicates activity on the hard drive. The hard
                                 blinking         drive is functioning normally.




NOTE: The LEDs on the Routing Engine do not necessarily indicate routing-related
activity.



NOTE: The LEDs that report host module status (including Routing Engine status)
are on the craft interface rather than the Routing Engine faceplate.




                                                                      Host Subsystem     ■    19
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Routing Engine 2000 (RE-2000)

                             The RE-2000 Routing Engine boots from the storage media in this order: the USB
                             device, then the internal compact flash disk (if present), then the hard disk, then the
                             LAN.

                             Figure 8: Routing Engine 2000 (RE-2000)




                             Each Routing Engine 2000 (shown in Figure 8 on page 20) consists of the following
                             components:
                             ■      CPU—Runs JUNOS Internet software to maintain the TX Matrix platform's routing
                                    tables and routing protocols. It has a Pentium-class processor.
                             ■      DRAM—Provides storage for the routing and forwarding tables and for other
                                    Routing Engine processes.
                             ■      Compact flash disk—Provides primary storage for software images, configuration
                                    files, and microcode. The fixed compact flash disk is inaccessible from outside
                                    the TX Matrix platform.
                             ■      Hard disk—Provides secondary storage for log files, memory dumps, and
                                    rebooting the system if the compact flash disk fails.
                             ■      EEPROM—Stores the serial number of the Routing Engine.
                             ■      Interfaces for out-of-band management access—Provide information about
                                    Routing Engine status to devices (console, laptop, or terminal server) connected
                                    to the Routing Engine ports located on the CIP.

                             The faceplate of the Routing Engine 2000 contains the following:
                             ■      USB port—Provides a removable media interface through which you can install
                                    the JUNOS Internet software manually. JUNOS supports USB version 1.0.
                             ■      Reset button—Reboots the Routing Engine when pressed.
                             ■      Offline button—Takes the Routing Engine offline when pressed.
                             ■      Extractor clips—Control the locking system that secures the Routing Engine.
                             ■      LED—Table 11 on page 21 describes the functions of these LEDs.




20    ■    Host Subsystem
                                                                     Chapter 2: Hardware Component Overview




                   Table 11: Routing Engine 2000 LEDs

                    Label        Color        State            Description

                    HDD          Blue         On steadily      Indicates disk activity for the hard disk drive.
                                                               Hard disk is functioning normally.

                    ONLINE       Green        On steadily      Routing Engine is functioning normally.

                                              Blinking         Routing Engine is transitioning online.

                                 Red          On steadily      Routing Engine has failed.




                   NOTE: The LEDs on the Routing Engine do not necessarily indicate routing-related
                   activity.



TX Matrix Control Board (TX-CB)
                   Each TX-CB works with an adjacent Routing Engine to provide control and monitoring
                   functions for the TX Matrix platform (see Figure 9 on page 22). These functions
                   include determining Routing Engine mastership; controlling power and reset for the
                   other TX Matrix platform components; monitoring and controlling fan speed; and
                   monitoring system status.

                   You can install up to two TX-CBs in the TX Matrix platform. TX-CBs install into the
                   upper rear of the chassis in the slots labeled CB0 and CB1 (referred to as TX-CB-0 and
                   TX-CB-1). Each TX-CB requires a Routing Engine to be installed in the adjacent slot.
                   TX-CB-0 installs above RE0, and TX-CB-1 installs below RE1. TX-CBs can not function
                   if a Routing Engine is not present in the adjacent slot.

                   The TX-CB is hot-pluggable if the TX Matrix platform contains only one host
                   subsystem. If the TX Matrix platform contains a redundant host subsystem, the
                   TX-CBs are hot-insertable and hot-removable. One TX-CB functions as the master
                   and the other as its backup. If the master fails or is removed, the backup restarts
                   and becomes the master.




                                                                                    Host Subsystem       ■   21
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 9: TX-CB




                             TX-CB Components

                             Each TX-CB consists of the following components:
                             ■      100-MB Ethernet switch. This switch is used for intermodule communication.
                             ■      PCI bus to the Routing Engines.
                             ■      Processor subsystem (SPMB).
                             ■      Three LEDs, located on the TX-CB faceplate. These indicate the status of the
                                    TX-CB. Table 12 on page 22 describes the functions of the TX-CB LEDs.
                             ■      Online/offline button, located on the TX-CB faceplate. This button is nonfunctional.
                             ■      Two configuration switches, located on the TX-CB faceplate.


                             NOTE: The M/S and CHASSIS ID switches on the TX-CB faceplate must always be
                             set to S and 0.


                             ■      Two RJ-45 ports labeled AUX and CIP on the TX-CB faceplate. These ports are not
                                    used.



                             NOTE: A TX-CB and a T-CB are not interchangeable.



                             Table 12: TX-CB LEDs

                                 Label        Color        State         Description

                                 MASTER       Blue         On steadily   Control board is functioning as the master.

                                 FAIL         Amber        On steadily   Control board has failed.




22    ■    Host Subsystem
                                                                            Chapter 2: Hardware Component Overview




                  Table 12: TX-CB LEDs (continued)

                      Label         Color       State         Description

                      OK            Green       On steadily   Control board is online and is functioning normally.

                                                Blinking      Control board is powering up, but not online.



Craft Interface
                  The craft interface allows you to view status and troubleshooting information at a
                  glance and to perform many system control functions. It is hot-insertable and
                  hot-removable. The craft interface is located on the lower front of the TX Matrix
                  platform below the air filter and contains the following:
                  ■        Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button on page 23
                  ■        LED Display and Navigation Buttons on page 24
                  ■        Host Subsystem LEDs on page 25
                  ■        TX-SIB LEDs on page 26
                  ■        TX-SIB Online/Offline Buttons on page 26

                  Figure 10: Front Panel of the Craft Interface




Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button
                  Two large alarm LEDs are located at the left of the craft interface (see
                  Figure 10 on page 23). The circular red LED lights to indicate a critical condition that
                  can result in a system shutdown. The triangular yellow LED lights to indicate a less
                  severe condition that requires monitoring or maintenance. Both LEDs can be lit
                  simultaneously.

                  A condition that causes an LED to light also activates the corresponding alarm relay
                  contact on the connector interface panel (TX-CIP), as described in “Alarm Relay
                  Contacts” on page 28. The LED display on the craft interface reports the cause of
                  the alarm, as described in “LED Display Alarm Mode” on page 25.

                  To deactivate red and yellow alarms, press the button labeled ACO/LT (for “alarm
                  cutoff/lamp test”), which is located to the right of the alarm LEDs. Deactivating an




                                                                                          Craft Interface   ■   23
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             alarm turns off both LEDs and deactivates the device attached to the corresponding
                             alarm relay contact on the TX-CIP. However, the LED display continues to report the
                             alarm message until you clear the condition that caused the alarm.

                             Table 13 on page 24 describes the alarm LEDs and alarm cutoff button in more
                             detail.

                             Table 13: Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff/Lamp Test Button

                                 Shape       Color      State          Description

                                             Red        On steadily    Critical alarm LED—Indicates a critical condition
                                                                       that can cause the TX Matrix platform to stop
                                                                       functioning. Possible causes include component
                                                                       removal, failure, or overheating.

                                             Yellow     On steadily    Warning alarm LED—Indicates a serious but nonfatal
                                                                       error condition, such as a maintenance alert or a
                                                                       significant increase in component temperature.

                                             —          —              Alarm cutoff/lamp test button—Deactivates red and
                                                                       yellow alarms. Causes all LEDs on the craft interface
                                                                       to light (for testing) when pressed and held.



LED Display and Navigation Buttons
                             A four-line LED display is located in the craft interface, along with six navigation
                             buttons. The LED display operates in two modes, as described in the following
                             sections:
                             ■      LED Display Idle Mode on page 24
                             ■      LED Display Alarm Mode on page 25

                             LED Display Idle Mode

                             During normal operation, the LED display operates in idle mode and reports current
                             status information, as shown in Figure 11 on page 24.

                             Figure 11: LED Display in Idle Mode




                             The lines in the display report the following information:
                             ■      First line—TX Matrix platform name.




24    ■    Craft Interface
                                                                    Chapter 2: Hardware Component Overview




                  ■   Second line—Length of time the TX Matrix platform has been running, reported
                      in the following form:

                        Up days + hours:minutes

                  ■   Third and fourth lines—Status messages, which rotate at two-second intervals.
                      Some conditions, such as removal or insertion of a system component, can
                      interrupt the messages.

                  To add a message that alternates every 2 seconds with the default status messages,
                  use the set chassis display message command. For more information, see the JUNOS
                  System Basics and Services Command Reference.

                  LED Display Alarm Mode

                  When a red or yellow alarm occurs, the LED display switches to alarm mode and
                  reports about the alarm condition, as shown in Figure 12 on page 25.

                  Figure 12: LED Display in Alarm Mode




                  The lines in the display report the following information:
                  ■   First line—TX Matrix platform name.
                  ■   Second line—Number of active alarms.
                  ■   Third and fourth lines—Individual alarm messages, with the most severe condition
                      shown first. The prefix on each line indicates whether the alarm is a red (R) or
                      yellow (Y) alarm.

                  For a list of alarm messages that can appear on the LED display, see “Chassis and
                  Interface Alarm Messages” on page 187.

Host Subsystem LEDs
                  Each host subsystem has three LEDs, located on the right of the craft interface, that
                  indicate its status. The LEDs labeled HOST 0 show the status of the Routing Engine
                  in slot RE0 and the TX-CB in slot CB0. The LEDs labeled HOST 1 show the status of
                  the Routing Engine in slot RE1 and the TX-CB in slot CB1. Table 14 on page 26
                  describes the functions of the host subsystem LEDs.




                                                                                  Craft Interface   ■   25
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                              Table 14: Host Subsystem LEDs

                               Label           Color      State         Description

                               MASTER          Green      On steadily   Host is functioning as the master.

                               ONLINE          Green      On steadily   Host is online and is functioning normally.

                               OFFLINE         Green      On steadily   Host is offline.



TX-SIB LEDs
                              Each TX-SIB has three LEDs located along the top of the craft interface that indicate
                              its status. The corresponding TX-SIB slots are identified by the labels on the TX-SIB
                              online/offline buttons (SIB0 through SIB4). Table 15 on page 26 describes the functions
                              of the TX-SIB LEDs.

                              For more information about the TX-SIB online/offline buttons, see “TX-SIB
                              Online/Offline Buttons” on page 26.

                              Table 15: TX-SIB LEDs on the Craft Interface

                               Label           Color      State         Description

                               ACTIVE          Green      On steadily   TX-SIB is passing traffic.

                                                          Off           TX-SIB is not passing traffic.

                               OK              Green      On steadily   TX-SIB is functioning normally.

                                                          Blinking      TX-SIB is coming online.

                               FAIL            Red        On steadily   TX-SIB has failed.



TX-SIB Online/Offline Buttons
                              Each TX-SIB also has a button that you use to take the TX-SIB offline and bring it
                              online. The button is located next to the TX-SIB LEDs on the top of the craft interface.


TX Matrix Connector Interface Panel (TX-CIP)
                              The TX Matrix platform contains one or two TX-CIPs—one for each Routing
                              Engine—that install vertically into the front left of the chassis in the slots labeled
                              CIP0 and CIP1 (see Figure 13 on page 27). The TX-CIPs are referred to as TX-CIP-0
                              and TX-CIP-1. The front electrostatic discharge point is located near the bottom of the
                              TX-CIP.

                              The TX-CIP is hot-removable and hot-insertable.




26    ■    TX Matrix Connector Interface Panel (TX-CIP)
                                                   Chapter 2: Hardware Component Overview




This section describes the following TX-CIP ports:
■   Routing Matrix Control Plane Ports on page 28
■   Routing Engine Ports on page 28
■   Alarm Relay Contacts on page 28

Figure 13: TX-CIP




                                      TX Matrix Connector Interface Panel (TX-CIP)   ■   27
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




Routing Matrix Control Plane Ports
                              Each TX-CIP contains four RJ-45 ports labeled LCC0 through LCC3. These ports provide
                              T640 routing node control by connecting to T-CBs in up to four T640 routing nodes
                              through UTP Category 5 Ethernet cables. TX-CIP-0 and TX-CIP-1 are used to connect
                              to T-CB-0 and T-CB-1 in each T640 routing node. For more information about
                              connecting TX-CIPs to T-CBs, see “Control Plane Connections” on page 136.


                              NOTE: The RJ-45 ports labeled LCC4 through LCC7 on a TX-CIP are reserved for future
                              use.



Routing Engine Ports
                              Each TX-CIP has a set of ports you use to connect the Routing Engines to external
                              management devices (see Figure 13 on page 27). From these management devices,
                              you can use the CLI to configure the TX Matrix platform.

                              The ports on TX-CIP-0 connect to the Routing Engine in slot RE0, and the ports on
                              TX-CIP-1 connect to the Routing Engine in slot RE1. Each set includes the following
                              ports:
                              ■     ETHERNET—Connects the Routing Engine through an Ethernet connection to a
                                    management LAN (or any other device that plugs into an Ethernet connection)
                                    for out-of-band management. The port uses an autosensing RJ-45 connector to
                                    support both 10- and 100-Mbps connections. Two small LEDs on the left edge
                                    of the port indicate the connection in use: the LED labeled ETHERNET lights yellow
                                    or green for a 10-Mbps or 100-Mbps connection, and the LED labeled ACT lights
                                    green when traffic is passing through the port.
                              ■     CONSOLE—Connects the Routing Engine to a system console through an RS-232
                                    (EIA-232) serial cable.
                              ■     AUXILIARY— Connects the Routing Engine to a laptop, modem, or other auxiliary
                                    device through an RS-232 (EIA-232) serial cable.

                              For a description of the pinouts of the Routing Engine ports, see “Cable Connector
                              Pinouts” on page 309.


                              NOTE: If a TX Matrix platform contains two host subsystems, connect both TX-CIPs
                              to your external management network.



Alarm Relay Contacts
                              Each TX-CIP has two alarm relay contacts—labeled RED ALARM and
                              YELLOW ALARM—for connecting the TX Matrix platform to external alarm devices
                              (see Figure 13 on page 27). Whenever a system condition triggers either the red or
                              yellow alarm on the craft interface, the alarm relay contacts are also activated. The
                              alarm relay contacts are located below the Routing Engine ports.




28    ■    TX Matrix Connector Interface Panel (TX-CIP)
                                                                    Chapter 2: Hardware Component Overview




Power Supplies
                   The TX Matrix platform supports DC power only. The TX Matrix platform has two
                   load-sharing DC power supplies (see Figure 14 on page 29), located at the lower rear
                   of the chassis in slots PEM0 and PEM1 (top to bottom). The power supplies connect
                   to the midplane, which distributes the different output voltages produced by the
                   power supplies to the TX Matrix platform components, depending on their voltage
                   requirements.

                   Each power supply has either an active circuit breaker or an active current limiter
                   for each output voltage it provides. There are no passive fuses in the TX Matrix
                   platform that must be replaced.

                   Power supplies are hot-removable and hot-insertable. Each power supply is cooled
                   by its own internal cooling system.

                   For power system electrical specifications, see “TX Matrix Platform Power
                   Requirements” on page 288.

2-Input 160-A Power Supply
                   The two-input 160-A power supply consists of two inputs, two 80-A circuit breakers,
                   a fan, and LEDs that display the status of the power supply.

                   Figure 14: Power Supply




                   Two-Input 160-A Power Supply Inputs

                   Each two-input 160-A DC power supply has two inputs, each of which consists of
                   –48 VDC and return. Each input requires a dedicated 100 A (–48 VDC) circuit breaker.
                   The DC power supply in slot PEM0 must be powered by a dedicated power feed
                   derived from feed A, and the DC power supply in slot PEM1 must be powered by a
                   dedicated power feed derived from feed B. This configuration provides the commonly
                   deployed A/B feed redundancy for the system.




                                                                                 Power Supplies   ■    29
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Two-Input 160-A Power Supply Load Sharing and Fault Tolerance

                             When the TX Matrix platform is operating normally and both power supplies are
                             switched on, load-sharing between them occurs automatically. When one power
                             supply fails or is turned off, the other power supply immediately assumes the entire
                             electrical load for the system (up to 4560 W). A single power supply can provide full
                             power for as long as the TX Matrix platform is operational.

                             Two-Input 160-A Power Supply LEDs

                             Four LEDs on each two-input 160-A power supply faceplate indicate the status of the
                             power supply. In addition, a power supply failure triggers the red alarm LED on the
                             craft interface. Table 16 on page 30 describes the functions of the power supply
                             LEDs.

Table 16: Power Supply LEDs

 LED                 Color       State         Description

 CB ON               Green       On steadily   Power supply is installed correctly, is functioning normally, and is receiving power,
                                               and circuit breaker is on.

 CB TRIP             Amber       On steadily   Circuit breaker is not turned on, or host subsystem has detected a failure and has
                                               turned circuit breaker off.

 OVER TEMP           Amber       On steadily   Power supply has exceeded recommended temperature.

 DC OK               Blue        On steadily   Power supply is installed correctly and is functioning normally.

                                 Blinking      Power supply is starting up, is not functioning, or is not properly installed.



Cooling System
                             The cooling system consists of the following components:
                             ■      Two front fan trays
                             ■      Front air filter
                             ■      Rear fan tray
                             ■      Rear air filter

                             The cooling system components work together to keep all TX Matrix platform
                             components within the acceptable temperature range (see Figure 15 on page 31).
                             All fan trays and filters are hot-insertable and hot-removable. The two front fan trays
                             are interchangeable. The front and rear fan trays are not interchangeable.




30     ■   Cooling System
                                                                    Chapter 2: Hardware Component Overview




                 Figure 15: Airflow Through the Chassis



                                                       xhaust
                                                   Air e




                 The host subsystem monitors the temperature of the TX Matrix platform components.
                 When the TX Matrix platform is operating normally, the fans function at lower than
                 full speed. If a fan fails or the ambient temperature rises above a threshold, the speed
                 of the remaining fans is automatically adjusted to keep the temperature within the
                 acceptable range. If the ambient maximum temperature specification is exceeded
                 and the system cannot be adequately cooled, the Routing Engine shuts down some
                 or all of the hardware components.


TX Matrix Cable System
                 The TX Matrix cable system provides the connections between the switching and
                 control planes within the routing matrix and the connections required for out-of-band
                 and local management of the system. The cable system consists of the following
                 components:




                                                                          TX Matrix Cable System   ■   31
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             ■      Fiber-optic array cables—The fiber-optic array cables connect the switching
                                    planes of the T640 routing nodes to the TX Matrix platform byconnecting the
                                    T640-SIBs to the TX-SIBs (for more information, see “Connecting an Offline T640
                                    Routing Node to the TX Matrix Platform” on page 147 or “Converting and
                                    Connecting the Switching Planes” on page 158). Cable lengths from 3 m to 100 m
                                    are supported to accommodate both centralized and distributed TX Matrix
                                    configurations (for information about routing matrix configurations, see “Routing
                                    Matrix Configurations” on page 66). The fiber-optic array connector is shown in
                                    Figure 112 on page 297.

                                    You can order cable lengths of 4 m, 5 m, 6 m, and 12 m from Juniper Networks.
                                    If you require cables longer than 12 m, you must order them directly from the
                                    manufacturer. Contact your Juniper Networks representative for more
                                    information.


                             NOTE: A fiber-optic array connector is attached to each end of a fiber-optic array cable
                             and plugs into a fiber-optic array adapter on a TX-SIB and a T640-SIB.


                             ■      UTP Category 5 Ethernet cables—The UTP Category 5 cables, which use “straight
                                    through” wiring and RJ-45 connectors on each end, are used for controlling the
                                    T640 routing nodes and for out-of-band management of the routing matrix.
                                    Controlling the T640 routing nodes requires connections from the two TX-CIPs
                                    in the TX Matrix platform to the T-CBs in the T640 routing nodes. Out-of-band
                                    management requires connections from the TX-CIPs to external management
                                    devices.

                                    These cables can be up to 100 m long.
                             ■      DB-9 serial cables—The DB-9 serial cables are used to connect a system console
                                    or laptop computer to the TX-CIPs for local management of the routing matrix.
                             ■      Cable management system—The comb panel assembly, which installs
                                    immediately above the TX-SIBs,consists of five combs—one comb above each
                                    TX-SIB. Each comb containsfour teeth to organize and provide strain relief to
                                    the four fiber-optic array cablesconnected to the TX-SIB immediately below it.
                                    The fiber-optic array cables extend throughthe top of the cable comb so that you
                                    can route the cables to the T640 routing nodes.

                                    You can use the cable shelf assembly to route and support the fiber-optic array
                                    cablesover the top of the TX Matrix platform (see Figure 42 on page 93). The
                                    assembly consists of four parallel shelves.Each shelf is used to route five
                                    fiber-optic array cables—and potentially a sixthspare cable—destined for a T640
                                    routing node.


                             NOTE: We recommend you use the cable shelf assembly to maintain the fiber-optic
                             array cable bend radius. For more information, see “Fiber-Optic Array Cable
                             Connections and Considerations” on page 295.


                                    Figure 16 on page 33 shows the TX Matrix cable management system.




32    ■    TX Matrix Cable System
                                                                   Chapter 2: Hardware Component Overview




                Figure 16: Cable Management System




                For cabling requirements and information about connecting the TX Matrix platform
                to the T640 routing nodes, see “Cabling Preparations and Considerations” on page
                295 and “Control and Switching Planes Connections” on page 136.


T640 Routing Node Overview
                The routing matrix can be configured with one to four converted T640 routing nodes.
                Figure 17 on page 34 and Figure 18 on page 35 illustrate the front and rear of a
                T640 routing node. To connect a T640 routing node to the routing matrix, the T640
                routing node must contain T640-SIBs and T-CBs

                The T640-SIBs connect to the switch fabric of the TX Matrix platform and provide
                up to a total of 640 gigabits per second (Gbps) of any-to-any, non-blocking, half-duplex
                switching. Each T640 routing node contains five T640-SIBs located at the center rear
                of the chassis. Each T640-SIB contains a single fiber-optic array adapter that is used
                to connect it to the TX Matrix platform (see Figure 19 on page 35).

                A T-CB works with an adjacent Routing Engine to provide control and monitoring
                functions for the T640 routing node (see Figure 20 on page 36). These functions
                include determining Routing Engine mastership; controlling power and reset for the




                                                                     T640 Routing Node Overview   ■   33
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             other T640 routing node components; monitoring and controlling fan speed; and
                             monitoring system status. Each T640 routing node contains up to two T-CBs at the
                             upper rear of the chassis.


                             NOTE: We recommend you install two host subsystems for redundant protection.


                             For more information about the T640 routing node, see the T640 Internet Routing
                             Node Hardware Guide.

                             Figure 17: Front View of the T640 Routing Node




34    ■    T640 Routing Node Overview
                                                Chapter 2: Hardware Component Overview




Figure 18: Rear View of the T640 Routing Node




Figure 19: T640-SIB




                                                 T640 Routing Node Overview   ■    35
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 20: T-CB




36    ■    T640 Routing Node Overview
Chapter 3
JUNOS Software Overview

            The JUNOS software is especially designed for the large production networks typically
            supported by Internet Service Providers (ISPs). It incorporates Internet Protocol (IP)
            routing software and software for management of interfaces, networks, and the
            router chassis.

            The JUNOS software runs on all Routing Engines in the routing matrix. The software
            consists of processes that support Internet routing protocols, control the routing
            matrix's interfaces and chassis, and provide an interface for system management.
            The processes run on top of a kernel that coordinates the communication among
            processes and has a direct link to the Packet Forwarding Engine software.

            Use the JUNOS software to configure the routing protocols that run on the TX Matrix
            platform and the properties of routing matrix interfaces. After you have activated a
            software configuration, use the JUNOS software to monitor the protocol traffic passing
            through the TX Matrix platform and to troubleshoot protocol and network connectivity
            problems.

            For additional information about the JUNOS software, including its security features
            and a list of the industry standards it supports, see the JUNOS System Basics
            Configuration Guide. For complete information about configuring the software,
            including examples, see the JUNOS software configuration guides.


            NOTE: The TX Matrix platform supports Release 7.0 and later versions of the JUNOS
            software.


            This chapter discusses the following topics:
            ■   Routing Engine Software Components on page 38
            ■   Tools for Accessing and Configuring the Software on page 44
            ■   Tools for Monitoring the Software on page 45
            ■   Software Upgrades on page 45
            ■   TX Matrix Software and CLI Overview on page 45




                                                                                           ■   37
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




Routing Engine Software Components
                             The Routing Engine software consists of several software processes that control
                             routing matrix functions and a kernel that coordinates communication among the
                             processes, as described in the following sections:
                             ■      Routing Protocol Process on page 38
                             ■      VPNs on page 43
                             ■      Interface Process on page 43
                             ■      Chassis Process on page 43
                             ■      SNMP and MIB II Processes on page 44
                             ■      Management Process on page 44
                             ■      Kernel Synchronization Process on page 44
                             ■      Routing Engine Kernel on page 44

Routing Protocol Process
                             The JUNOS software routing protocol process controls the routing protocols that run
                             on the TX Matrix platform. The routing protocol process starts all configured routing
                             protocols and handles all routing messages. It consolidates the routing information
                             learned from all routing protocols into common routing tables. From this routing
                             information, the routing protocol process determines the active routes to network
                             destinations and installs these routes into the TX Matrix Routing Engine's forwarding
                             table. Finally, the routing protocol process implements the routing policies you specify,
                             which determine how routing information is transferred between the routing protocols
                             and the routing table.

                             This section discusses the following topics:
                             ■      IPv4 Routing Protocols on page 38
                             ■      IPv6 Routing Protocols on page 40
                             ■      Routing and Forwarding Tables on page 40
                             ■      Routing Policy on page 42

                             For complete information about routing concepts, see the JUNOS software
                             configuration guides.

                             IPv4 Routing Protocols

                             The JUNOS software implements full IP routing functionality, providing support for
                             IP version 4 (IPv4). The routing protocols are fully interoperable with existing IP
                             routing protocols and provide the scale and control necessary for the Internet core.
                             The software provides support for the following routing and traffic engineering
                             protocols:
                             ■      Unicast routing protocols




38    ■    Routing Engine Software Components
                                                       Chapter 3: JUNOS Software Overview




    ■   BGP—Border Gateway Protocol, version 4, is an Exterior Gateway Protocol
        (EGP) that guarantees loop-free exchange of routing information between
        routing domains (also called autonomous systems). BGP, in conjunction with
        JUNOS routing policy, provides a system of administrative checks and
        balances that can be used to implement peering and transit agreements.
    ■   ICMP—Internet Control Message Protocol router discovery is a method that
        hosts can use to discover the addresses of operational routers on a subnet.

    ■   IS-IS—Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System is a link-state interior
        gateway protocol (IGP) for IP networks that uses the shortest-path-first
        algorithm (SPF algorithm, also called the Dijkstra algorithm) to determine
        routes.

    ■   OSPF—Open Shortest Path First, version 2, is an IGP developed for IP
        networks by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). OSPF is a link-state
        protocol that makes routing decisions based on the SPF algorithm.

    ■   RIP—Routing Information Protocol, version 2, is an IGP for IP networks
        based on the Bellman-Ford algorithm. RIP is a distance-vector protocol. RIP
        dynamically routes packets between a subscriber and a service provider
        without the subscriber having to configure BGP or to participate in the service
        provider’s IGP discovery process.

■   Multicast routing protocols
    ■   DVMRP—Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol is a dense-mode
        (flood-and-prune) multicast routing protocol.
    ■   IGMP—Internet Group Management Protocol, versions 1 and 2, is used to
        manage membership in multicast groups.

    ■   MSDP—Multicast Source Discovery Protocol enables multiple PIM sparse
        mode domains to be joined. A rendezvous point (RP) in a PIM sparse mode
        domain has a peering relationship with an RP in another domain, thereby
        discovering multicast sources from other domains.

    ■   PIM sparse mode and dense mode—Protocol-Independent Multicast is a
        multicast routing protocol used to route traffic to multicast groups that might
        span wide-area and interdomain internetworks. In PIM sparse mode, routers
        explicitly join and leave multicast groups. PIM dense mode is a
        flood-and-prune protocol.

    ■   SAP/SDP—Session Announcement Protocol and Session Description Protocol
        handle conference session announcements.

■   MPLS application protocols
    ■   LDP—Label Distribution Protocol provides a mechanism for distributing
        labels in nontraffic-engineered applications. LDP allows routers to establish
        label-switched paths (LSPs) through a network by mapping network-layer
        routing information directly to data-link layer switched paths. LSPs created
        by LDP can also traverse LSPs created by Resource Reservation Protocol
        (RSVP).
    ■   MPLS—Multiprotocol Label Switching enables you to configure LSPs through
        a network either manually or dynamically. You can control how traffic




                                            Routing Engine Software Components   ■    39
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                                        traverses the network by directing it through particular paths, rather than
                                        relying on an IGP's least-cost algorithm to choose a path.

                                    ■   RSVP—Resource Reservation Protocol, version 1, provides a mechanism for
                                        engineering network traffic patterns that is independent of the shortest path
                                        determined by a routing protocol. RSVP itself is not a routing protocol, but
                                        is designed to operate with current and future unicast and multicast routing
                                        protocols. JUNOS RSVP software supports dynamic signaling for MPLS LSPs.


                             IPv6 Routing Protocols

                             The JUNOS software implements full IP routing functionality, providing support for
                             IP version 6 (IPv6). The routing protocols are fully interoperable with existing IP
                             routing protocols and provide the scale and control necessary for the Internet core.
                             The software provides support for the following unicast routing protocols:
                             ■      BGP—Border Gateway Protocol, version 4, is an EGP that guarantees loop-free
                                    exchange of routing information between routing domains (also called
                                    autonomous systems). BGP, in conjunction with JUNOS routing policy, provides
                                    a system of administrative checks and balances that can be used to implement
                                    peering and transit agreements.
                             ■      ICMP—Internet Control Message Protocol router discovery is a method that hosts
                                    can use to discover the addresses of operational routers on a subnet.
                             ■      IS-IS—Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System is a link-state interior gateway
                                    protocol (IGP) for IP networks that uses the shortest-path-first algorithm (SPF
                                    algorithm, also called the Dijkstra algorithm) to determine routes.
                             ■      OSPF—Open Shortest Path First, version 3 (OSPFv3), supports version 6 of the
                                    Internet Protocol (IPv6). The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF such as flooding,
                                    Designated Router (DR) election, area based topologies and the Shortest Path
                                    First (SPF) calculations remain unchanged. Some differences exist either due to
                                    changes in protocol semantics between IPv4 and IPv6, or to handle the increased
                                    address size of IPv6.
                             ■      RIP—Routing Information Protocol, version 2, is an IGP for IP networks based
                                    on the Bellman-Ford algorithm. RIP is a distance-vector protocol. RIP dynamically
                                    routes packets between a subscriber and a service provider without the subscriber
                                    having to configure BGP or to participate in the service provider’s IGP discovery
                                    process.


                             Routing and Forwarding Tables

                             The primary function of the JUNOS routing protocol process is maintaining routing
                             tables and using the information in them to determine active routes to network
                             destinations. The process copies information about the active routes into the TX Matrix
                             Routing Engine's forwarding table, which is synchronized with each T640 routing
                             node by the kernel synchronization process that runs on each T640 routing node's
                             Routing Engine (see Figure 21 on page 41). The JUNOS kernel running on each T640
                             routing node's Routing Engine copies itsforwarding table to all Packet Forwarding
                             Engines in the routing node. The JUNOS kernel running on each T640 routing node's
                             Routing Engine copies its forwarding table to all Packet Forwarding Engines in the
                             routing node.




40    ■    Routing Engine Software Components
                                                       Chapter 3: JUNOS Software Overview




Figure 21: Control Packet Handling for Routing and Forwarding Table Updates




By default, the routing protocol process maintains the following routing tables and
uses the information in each table to determine active routes to network destinations:
■   Unicast routing table—Stores routing information for all unicast protocols running
    on the router, including BGP, IS-IS, OSPF, and RIP. You can also configure
    additional routes, such as static routes, for inclusion in the routing table. The
    unicast routing protocols use the routes in this table when advertising routing
    information to their neighbors.

    In the unicast routing table, the routing protocol process designates routes with
    the lowest preference values as active. By default, a route's preference value is
    simply a function of how the routing protocol process learned about the route.
    You can modify the default preference value by setting routing policies and
    configuring other software parameters. See “Routing Policy” on page 42.
■   Multicast routing table (cache)—Stores routing information for all multicast
    protocols running on the router, including DVMRP and PIM. You can configure
    additional routes for inclusion in the routing table.

    In the multicast routing table, the routing protocol process uses traffic flow and
    other parameters specified by the multicast routing protocol algorithms to select
    active routes.
■   MPLS routing table—Stores MPLS label information.




                                            Routing Engine Software Components   ■    41
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             For unicast routes, the routing protocol process determines active routes by choosing
                             the most preferred route, which is the route with the lowest preference value. By
                             default, the route’s preference value is simply a function of how the routing protocol
                             process learned about the route. You can modify the default preference value using
                             routing policy and with software configuration parameters.

                             For multicast traffic, the routing protocol process determines active routes based on
                             traffic flow and other parameters specified by the multicast routing protocol
                             algorithms. The routing protocol process then installs one or more active routes to
                             each network destination into the TX Matrix Routing Engine’s forwarding table.

                             You can configure additional routing tables to meet your requirements, as described
                             in the JUNOS Routing Protocols Configuration Guide.

                             Routing Policy

                             By default, all routing protocols place their routes into the routing table. When
                             advertising routes, the routing protocols, by default, advertise only a limited set of
                             routes from the routing table. Specifically, each routing protocol exports only the
                             active routes that were learned by that protocol. In addition, IGPs (IS-IS, OSPF, and
                             RIP) export the direct (interface) routes for the interfaces on which the protocol is
                             explicitly configured.

                             For each routing table, you can affect the routes that a protocol places into the table
                             and the routes from the table that the protocol advertises by defining one or more
                             routing policies and then applying them to the specific routing protocol.

                             Routing policies applied when the routing protocol places routes into the routing
                             table are called import policies because the routes are being imported into the routing
                             table. Policies applied when the routing protocol is advertising routes that are in the
                             routing table are called export policies because the routes are being exported from
                             the routing table. In other words, the terms import and export are used with respect
                             to the routing table.

                             Routing policy enables you to control (filter) which routes are imported into the
                             routing table and which routes are exported from the routing table. Routing policy
                             also allows you to set the information associated with a route as it is being imported
                             into or exported from the routing table. Routing policies applied to imported routes
                             control the routes used to determine active routes, whereas policies applied to
                             exported routes control which routes a protocol advertises to its neighbors.

                             You implement routing policy by defining policies. A policy specifies the conditions
                             to use to match a route and the action to perform on the route when a match occurs.
                             For example, when a routing table imports routing information from a routing
                             protocol, a routing policy might modify the route's preference, mark the route with
                             a color to identify it for later manipulation, or prevent the route from even being
                             installed in a routing table. When a routing table exports routes to a routing protocol,
                             a policy might assign metric values, modify the BGP community information, tag
                             the route with additional information, or prevent the route from being exported
                             altogether. You also can define policies for redistributing the routes learned from
                             one protocol into another protocol.




42    ■    Routing Engine Software Components
                                                                            Chapter 3: JUNOS Software Overview




VPNs
                    The JUNOS software supports several types of VPNs:
                    ■   Layer 2 VPNs—A Layer 2 VPN links a set of sites sharing common routing
                        information, and whose connectivity is controlled by a collection of policies. A
                        Layer 2 VPN is not aware of routes within a customer’s network. It simply
                        provides private links between a customer’s sites over the service provider’s
                        existing public Internet backbone.
                    ■   Layer 3 VPNs—A Layer 3 VPN links a set of sites that share common routing
                        information, and whose connectivity is controlled by a collection of policies. A
                        Layer 3 VPN is aware of routes within a customer’s network, requiring more
                        configuration on the part of the service provider than a Layer 2 VPN. The sites
                        that make up a Layer 3 VPN are connected over a service provider’s existing
                        public Internet backbone.
                    ■   Interprovider VPNs—An interprovider VPN supplies connectivity between two
                        VPNs in separate autonomous systems (ASs). This functionality could be used
                        by a VPN customer with connections to several various ISPs, or different
                        connections to the same ISP in various geographic regions.
                    ■   Carrier-of-Carrier VPNs—Carrier-of-carrier VPNs allow a VPN service provider to
                        supply VPN service to a customer who is also a service provider. The latter service
                        provider supplies Internet or VPN service to an end customer.


Interface Process
                    The JUNOS interface process manages the physical interface devices and logical
                    interfaces in the routing matrix. It implements the JUNOS command-line interface
                    (CLI) commands and configuration statements that you use to specify interface
                    properties such as location (FPC location in the routing matrix and PIC location on
                    an FPC), the interface type (such as SONET/SDH or ATM), encapsulation, and
                    interface-specific properties. You can configure both interfaces that are currently
                    active and interfaces that might be installed later.

                    The JUNOS interface process communicates with the Packet Forwarding Engine
                    through the JUNOS kernel, enabling the JUNOS software to track the status and
                    condition of routing matrix interfaces.

Chassis Process
                    The JUNOS chassis process, which runs on all Routing Engines in the routing matrix,
                    allows you to configure and control the properties of the routing matrix, including
                    conditions that trigger alarms and clock sources. The chassis process running on the
                    TX Matrix Routing Engine manages the FRUs in the TX Matrix chassis, and the chassis
                    process running on each T640 routing node Routing Engine manages the FRUs in
                    that routing node's chassis. All chassis processes running in the routing matrix
                    collectively coordinate the control of the routing matrix switch fabric.




                                                                 Routing Engine Software Components   ■    43
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




SNMP and MIB II Processes
                             The JUNOS software supports the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP),
                             versions 1, 2, and 3, which provides a mechanism for monitoring the state of the
                             routing matrix. This software is controlled by the JUNOS SNMP and Management
                             Information Base (MIB) II processes, which consist of an SNMP master agent and a
                             MIB II agent, and run on the TX Matrix Routing Engine.

Management Process
                             The management process starts all the other JUNOS software processes and the CLI
                             when the router boots. It monitors the running JUNOS processes and makes all
                             reasonable attempts to restart any process that terminates.

Kernel Synchronization Process
                             The kernel synchronization process runs on each T640 routing node's Routing Engine
                             (see Figure 21 on page 41). This process synchronizes the TX Matrix Routing Engine's
                             forwarding table with the forwarding table on a T640 routing node. The JUNOS kernel
                             running on each T640 routing node's Routing Engine copies its forwarding table to
                             all Packet Forwarding Engines in the routing node.

Routing Engine Kernel
                             The Routing Engine kernel provides the underlying infrastructure for all JUNOS
                             software processes. The Routing Engines in the T640 routing nodes run their own
                             kernel, which is synchronized with the kernel running on the TX Matrix Routing
                             Engine (see “Kernel Synchronization Process” on page 44).

                             The kernel running on the TX Matrix Routing Engine maintains the master forwarding
                             table for the routing matrix. The kernel running on each T640 routing node's Routing
                             Engine copies its local forwarding table—which is synchronized with the master
                             forwarding table by the kernel synchronization process—to all Packet Forwarding
                             Engines in the routing node.


Tools for Accessing and Configuring the Software
                             The JUNOS CLI is the primary tool for accessing and controlling the JUNOS software.
                             You use it when accessing the router through the console or a connection to an
                             out-of-band management network. The CLI includes commands for configuring router
                             hardware, the JUNOS software, and network connectivity.

                             The JUNOS CLI is a straightforward command interface. You type commands on a
                             single line and enter the commands by pressing the Enter key. The CLI provides
                             command help and command completion, as well as Emacs-style keyboard sequences
                             for moving around on a command line and scrolling through a buffer that contains
                             recently executed commands. For more information about the CLI, see the JUNOS
                             System Basics Configuration Guide.




44    ■    Tools for Accessing and Configuring the Software
                                                                         Chapter 3: JUNOS Software Overview




Tools for Monitoring the Software
                  In addition to commands for configuring router hardware and software, the CLI
                  includes commands for monitoring and troubleshooting hardware, software, routing
                  protocols, and network connectivity. CLI commands display information from routing
                  tables, information specific to routing protocols, and information about network
                  connectivity derived from the ping and traceroute utilities.

                  You can also use the JUNOS software implementation of SNMP to monitor routers.
                  The SNMP software consists of an SNMP master agent and a MIB II agent. It provides
                  full support for MIB II SNMP version 1 traps and version 2 notifications, SNMP version
                  1 Get and GetNext requests, and version 2 GetBulk requests. For more information
                  about SNMP, see the JUNOS Network Management Configuration Guide.

                  The software also supports tracing and logging operations, which you can use to
                  track normal router operations, error conditions, and the packets that the router
                  generates or forwards. Logging operations use a syslog-like mechanism to record
                  systemwide, high-level events such as interfaces going up or down and user logins
                  on the router. Tracing operations record more detailed information about the
                  operation of routing protocols, such as the various types of routing protocol packets
                  sent and received, and routing policy actions.


Software Upgrades
                  The TX Matrix platform is delivered with the JUNOS software preinstalled. To upgrade
                  the software, you use CLI commands to copy a set of software images over the
                  network to memory storage on the Routing Engine. The JUNOS software set consists
                  of several images provided in individual packages or as a bundle. You normally
                  upgrade all packages simultaneously. For information about installing and upgrading
                  JUNOS software, see the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide.


TX Matrix Software and CLI Overview
                  The TX Matrix platform runs the same JUNOS software that runs on all Juniper
                  Networks J-series, M-series, MX-series, and T-series routing platforms. Familiarity
                  with the JUNOS software and its CLI allow you to quickly and easily configure and
                  operate the routing matrix.

                  From the perspective of the user interface, the routing matrix appears as a single
                  routing platform. This means that the configuration file on the TX Matrix platform
                  is used for the entire routing matrix. When you commit the configuration on the
                  TX Matrix master Routing Engine, the changes are automatically propagated to all
                  master Routing Engines in all T640 routing nodes. If you issue the commit synchronize
                  command, you commit the configuration to all master and backup Routing Engines
                  in the routing matrix.

                  For more information about software installation, see the JUNOS System Basics
                  Configuration Guide. For more information about routing matrix configuration, see
                  the JUNOS Feature Guide.




                                                                  Tools for Monitoring the Software   ■   45
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             This section covers the following topics:
                             ■      Chassis and Interface Names on page 46
                             ■      Configuring Specific Chassis Features on page 47
                             ■      Configuration Groups on page 49
                             ■      PIC MAC Addresses on page 49
                             ■      Running Different JUNOS Software Releases on the Routing Engines on page 50

Chassis and Interface Names
                             In certain statements and commands in the CLI, you refer to the TX Matrix chassis
                             as scc and to a T640 routing node chassis as lcc. You can configure the TX Matrix
                             chassis and T640 routing node chassis by including statements at the [edit chassis]
                             and [edit chassis lcc lcc-number] hierarchy levels, where lcc-number is the chassis
                             identifier (ID) of the T640 routing node.

                             Operational commands that reference chassis hardware components—such as SIBs,
                             Flexible PIC controllers (FPCs), and PICs—require you to specify either scc or lcc,
                             followed by the chassis ID. For example, to display a list of all hardware components
                             in T640 routing node 2 (lcc 2), issue the show chassis hardware command as follows:

                             user@host> show chassis hardware lcc 2
                             lcc2-re0:
                             --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                             Hardware inventory:
                             Item             Version Part number Serial number       Description
                             Chassis                                65745             T640
                             Midplane         REV 03   710-005608   RA1400            T640 Backplane
                             FPM GBUS         REV 09   710-002901   RA3317            T640 FPM Board
                             FPM Display      REV 05   710-002897   RA3249            FPM Display
                             CIP              REV 06   710-002895   HS0716            T-series CIP
                             PEM 0            Rev 11   740-002595   PM18581           Power Entry Module
                             PEM 1            Rev 11   740-002595   PM18582           Power Entry Module
                             SCG 0            REV 11   710-003423   HR9871            T640 Sonet Clock Gen.
                             Routing Engine 0 REV 03   740-008883   211123900250      RE-4.0 (RE-1600)
                             Routing Engine 1 REV 03   740-008883   211123900201      RE-4.0 (RE-1600)
                             ...

                             For more information about the TX Matrix platform CLI, see the JUNOS Feature Guide.
                             For more information about operational mode commands, see the JUNOS software
                             command references.

                             You configure a T640 routing node's chassis ID by setting a physical switch on each
                             T-CB faceplate in the T640 routing node (see Figure 20 on page 36). A chassis ID
                             must be from 0 through 3. You must follow these requirements when setting the
                             T-CB ID switches:




46    ■    TX Matrix Software and CLI Overview
                                                                              Chapter 3: JUNOS Software Overview




                    ■     Both T-CBs in a T640 routing node must have the same switch setting.
                    ■     The switch settings within a T640 routing node must be unique within the routing
                          matrix.
                    ■     When you integrate an operational T640 routing node with the TX Matrix
                          platform, you must assign a chassis ID of 0 to the routing node. For more
                          information, see “Integrating an Operational T640 Routing Node with the
                          TX Matrix Platform” on page 155.
                    ■     Do not assign a chassis ID greater than 3.



                    NOTE: The T640 routing node chassis IDs in a routing matrix do not need to be
                    contiguous.


                    When you specify an FPC in an interface name and within certain commands, the
                    T640 routing node that contains that FPC is implicit. Table 17 on page 47 shows the
                    correspondence between the FPC hardware slot numbers in T640 routing nodes and
                    the FPC assignments recognized by a routing matrix.

                    Table 17: FPC Slot Number Correspondence

                        T640 Routing Node          T640 FPC Range                  Routing Matrix FPC Range

                        LCC0                       0–7                             0–7

                        LCC1                       0–7                             8–15

                        LCC2                       0–7                             16–23

                        LCC3                       0–7                             24–31



                    For example, in a routing matrix that contains LCC0 through LCC2, so-20/0/1 refers
                    to FPC slot 4 of LCC2.


                    NOTE: If the LCC chassis ID is specified in a command, the FPC slot range is always
                    0 through 7.



Configuring Specific Chassis Features
                    You can configure PIC-specific features, such as SONET/SDH framing, for specific
                    T640 routing nodes within the routing matrix. To do so, include the lcc lcc-number
                    statement at the [edit chassis] hierarchy level and specify the chassis-specific feature
                    to configure.

                        [edit]
                        chassis {
                          lcc lcc-number {
                             fpc slot-number { # Use the T640 routing node FPC hardware slot number




                                                                    TX Matrix Software and CLI Overview   ■   47
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                                             pic pic-number {
                                               ...
                                             }
                                         }
                                     }
                                 }

                             Following is a list of PIC-specific configuration statements that must be configured
                             for specific T640 routing nodes within the routing matrix:
                             ■       atm-cell-relay-accumulation
                             ■       atm-l2ciruit-mode
                             ■       framing
                             ■       idle-cell-format
                             ■       max-queues-per-interface
                             ■       no-concatenate



                             NOTE: When you include statements at the [edit chassis lcc lcc-number] hierarchy
                             level, specify the actual FPC hardware slot number as labeled on the T640 routing
                             node chassis. Do not use the routing matrix-based FPC number shown in
                             Table 17 on page 47.


                             If you include configuration statements at the [edit chassis] hierarchy level, these
                             statements are applied to the TX Matrix chassis and all T640 routing node chassis
                             in the routing matrix.

                                 [edit]
                                 chassis {
                                   redundancy {
                                      graceful-switchover {
                                        enable;
                                      }
                                   }
                                 }

                             By default, the JUNOS software allows all T640 routing nodes in the routing matrix
                             to come online. Optionally, you can configure the TX Matrix platform to generate
                             an alarm if the T640 routing nodes in the routing matrix do not come online. To
                             configure, include the online-expected statement at the [edit chassis lcc lcc-number]
                             hierarchy level on the TX Matrix platform.

                                 [edit chassis lcc lcc-number]
                                 online-expected;

                             If you do not want a T640 routing node to be part of the routing matrix, you can
                             configure it to be offline. This is useful when you are performing maintenance on a
                             T640 routing node. To configure a T640 routing node so that it is offline, include the
                             offline statement at the [edit chassis lcc lcc-number] hierarchy level.

                                 [edit chassis lcc lcc-number]




48    ■    TX Matrix Software and CLI Overview
                                                                            Chapter 3: JUNOS Software Overview




                       offline;

                    When you are ready to bring the T640 routing node back online, delete the offline
                    configuration statement at the [edit chassis lcc lcc-number] hierarchy level.


                    NOTE: If you do not configure the online-expected or offline statement, any T640
                    routing node that is part of the routing matrix is allowed to come online. However,
                    if a T640 routing node does not come online, the TX Matrix platform does not
                    generate an alarm.


                    For more information about chassis-specific statements, see the JUNOS System Basics
                    Configuration Guide.

Configuration Groups
                    Configuration groups allow you to create a group containing configuration statements
                    (by including the groups statement) and to direct the inheritance of that group's
                    statements in the rest of the configuration. The configuration groups offer a simple
                    way to establish hostnames, management interfaces, and default routes. You can
                    also specify two special group names—re0 and re1. These two special group names
                    apply to the Routing Engines in slots 0 and 1 of the TX Matrix platform. In addition,
                    the TX Matrix platform supports group names for the Routing Engines in each T640
                    routing node in the following formats:

                       lcclcc-number-re0

                       lcclcc-number-re1

                    lcc-number identifies the T640 routing node and can be from 0 through 3. For example,
                    to configure Routing Engine 1 properties for lcc3, you include statements at the [edit
                    groups lcc3-re1] hierarchy level.

                    You must include the apply-groups statement in the configuration for all special groups,
                    including re0 and re1.

                    Providing special group names for all Routing Engines in the routing matrix allows
                    you to configure the individual Routing Engines in each T640 routing node differently.
                    Parameters that are not configured at the groups hierarchy level apply to all Routing
                    Engines in the routing matrix.

                    For more information about configuring the TX Matrix platform, see “Configuring
                    the TX Matrix Platform” on page 131 and the JUNOS software configuration guides.

PIC MAC Addresses
                    When you integrate a T640 routing node into a routing matrix, the PIC media access
                    control (MAC) addresses for the T640 routing node are derived from a pool of MAC
                    addresses maintained by the TX Matrix platform. This means the PIC MAC addresses
                    used in the formerly standalone T640 routing node are changed after the T640 routing
                    node is integrated into a routing matrix. To determine the newly assigned MAC




                                                                  TX Matrix Software and CLI Overview   ■   49
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             address for an interface on a PIC in an integrated T640 routing node, issue the show
                             interfaces interface-name command.


Running Different JUNOS Software Releases on the Routing Engines
                             We recommend you run the same JUNOS software release on the master and backup
                             Routing Engines. However, if you elect to run different JUNOS software releases on
                             the Routing Engines, all Routing Engines on the same control plane must run the
                             same JUNOS software release (all master Routing Engines in the TX Matrix platform
                             and T640 routing nodes are on one control plane; all backup Routing Engines are
                             on another control plane [see Figure 23 on page 56]). If you or a host subsystem
                             initiates a change in mastership to any backup Routing Engine in the routing matrix,
                             be aware of the following:
                             ■      If the on-loss-of-keepalives statement is included at the [edit chassis redundancy
                                    failure] hierarchy level, consider the following:
                                    ■   If you or a host subsystem initiates a change in mastership to the backup
                                        Routing Engine in the TX Matrix platform, the master Routing Engines in
                                        the T640 routing nodes detect a software release mismatch with the new
                                        master Routing Engine in the TX Matrix platform and switch mastership to
                                        their backup Routing Engines.
                                    ■   If you attempt to initiate a change in mastership to a backup Routing Engine
                                        in a T640 routing node, the new master Routing Engine in the T640 routing
                                        node detects a software release mismatch with the master Routing Engine
                                        in the TX Matrix platform and relinquishes mastership to the original master
                                        Routing Engine. (Routing Engine mastership in the TX Matrix platform does
                                        not switch in this case.)

                                    ■   If a host subsystem initiates a change in mastership to a backup Routing
                                        Engine in a T640 routing node because the master Routing Engine has failed,
                                        the T640 routing node is logically disconnected from the TX Matrix platform.
                                        To reconnect the T640 routing node, initiate a change in mastership to the
                                        backup Routing Engine in the TX Matrix platform, or replace the failed
                                        Routing Engine in the T640 routing node and switch mastership to it (the
                                        replacement Routing Engine must be running the same software release as
                                        the master Routing Engine in the TX Matrix platform).

                             ■      If the on-loss-of-keepalives statement is not included at the [edit chassis redundancy
                                    failure] hierarchy level, consider the following:
                                    ■   If you initiate a change in mastership to the backup Routing Engine in the
                                        TX Matrix platform, all T640 routing nodes are logically disconnected from
                                        the TX Matrix platform. To reconnect the T640 routing nodes, switch
                                        mastership of all master Routing Engines in the T640 routing nodes to their
                                        backup Routing Engines.
                                    ■   If you initiate a change in mastership to a backup Routing Engine in a T640
                                        routing node, the T640 routing node is logically disconnected from the
                                        TX Matrix platform. To reconnect the T640 routing node, switch mastership
                                        of the new master Routing Engine in the T640 routing node back to the
                                        original master Routing Engine.




50    ■    TX Matrix Software and CLI Overview
                                                      Chapter 3: JUNOS Software Overview




If you run the same JUNOS software release on all master and backup Routing Engines
in the routing matrix, a change in mastership to any backup Routing Engine in the
routing matrix does not cause a change in mastership in any other chassis in the
routing matrix.




                                            TX Matrix Software and CLI Overview   ■   51
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




52    ■    TX Matrix Software and CLI Overview
Chapter 4
System Architecture Overview

            The routing matrix has two main architectural components, the control plane and
            the forwarding plane:
            ■   The control plane in the routing matrix is formed by the connection of the host
                subsystems—TX-CBs in the TX Matrix platform and T-CBs in the T640 routing
                nodes —and the Routing Engines.
            ■   The forwarding plane in the routing matrix is formed by the switch
                fabric—TX-SIBs in the TX Matrix platform and T640-SIBs in the T640 routing
                nodes—and the Packet Forwarding Engines.

            The Routing Engines and the Packet Forwarding Engines perform their primary tasks
            independently. This arrangement streamlines routing control and forwarding and
            runs Internet-scale backbone networks at high speeds. Figure 22 on page 54 shows
            the relationship between the Routing Engines and the Packet Forwarding Engines.




                                                                                        ■   53
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 22: Routing Matrix Architecture




                             This chapter has the following sections:
                             ■      Routing Engine Functions on page 54
                             ■      Routing Matrix Control Plane Architecture on page 55
                             ■      Routing Matrix Switch Fabric Architecture on page 57
                             ■      T640 Routing Node Architecture on page 58


Routing Engine Functions
                             The TX Matrix Routing Engine handles all routing protocols, as well as the software
                             processes that control the TX Matrix platform's interfaces and user access to the
                             TX Matrix platform. All Routing Engines in the routing matrix run software processes
                             that control chassis components and system management. For more information
                             about the processes, see “Routing Engine Software Components” on page 38.

                             The Routing Engines include the following functions and features:




54    ■    Routing Engine Functions
                                                                       Chapter 4: System Architecture Overview




                  ■   Processing of routing protocol packets—The Routing Engine handles all packets
                      that concern routing protocols, freeing the Packet Forwarding Engine to handle
                      only packets that represent Internet traffic.
                  ■   Software modularity—Because each software process is devoted to a different
                      function and uses a separate process space, the failure of one process has little
                      or no effect on the others.
                  ■   In-depth Internet functionality—Each routing protocol is implemented with a
                      complete set of Internet features and provides full flexibility for advertising,
                      filtering, and modifying routes. Routing policies are set according to route
                      parameters (for example, prefix, prefix lengths, and Border Gateway Protocol
                      [BGP] attributes).
                  ■   Scalability—The JUNOS routing tables have been designed to hold all the routes
                      in current networks with ample capacity for expansion. Additionally, the JUNOS
                      software can efficiently support large numbers of interfaces and virtual circuits.
                  ■   Management interface—Different levels of system management tools are
                      provided, including the JUNOS command-line interface (CLI), the JUNOScript
                      application programming interface, the craft interface, and SNMP.
                  ■   Storage and change management—Configuration files, system images, and
                      microcode can be held and maintained in primary and secondary storage
                      systems, permitting local or remote upgrades.
                  ■   Monitoring efficiency and flexibility—The TX Matrix platform supports functions
                      such as alarm handling and packet counting on every port, without degrading
                      packet-forwarding performance.

                  The TX Matrix Routing Engine constructs and maintains one or more routing tables.
                  From the routing tables, the Routing Engine derives a table of active routes, called
                  the forwarding table, which is then copied to the T640 routing nodes (see
                  Figure 21 on page 41). The JUNOS kernel running on each T640 routing node's
                  Routing Engine copies its forwarding table to all Packet Forwarding Engines in the
                  routing node. The design of the ASICs allow the forwarding table in the Packet
                  Forwarding Engine to be updated without interrupting forwarding performance.


Routing Matrix Control Plane Architecture
                  The routing matrix contains two control planes. All master Routing Engines in the
                  TX Matrix platform and T640 routing nodes are on one control plane; all backup
                  Routing Engines are on another control plane (see Figure 23 on page 56). To manage
                  the Routing Engines on a control plane, you must be logged into the Routing Engine
                  in the TX Matrix platform on that control plane. For example, you must be logged
                  into the backup Routing Engine in the TX Matrix platform to upgrade the software
                  of all backup Routing Engines in the routing matrix.




                                                           Routing Matrix Control Plane Architecture   ■   55
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                              Figure 23: Routing Matrix Routing Engine Connections




                              The TX Matrix Routing Engine connects to a high-speed switch through a 1-Gbps link
                              within the host subsystem. The switch provides a 100-Mbps link to each T640 routing
                              node Routing Engine. The 100-Mbps links are provided through the UTP Category 5
                              Ethernet cable connections between the TX-CIPs and the T-CBs in the T640 routing
                              nodes. (For more information about connecting TX-CIPs to T-CBs, see “Control Plane
                              Connections” on page 136.)

                              The kernel synchronization process running on each T640 routing node Routing
                              Engine synchronizes the TX Matrix Routing Engine's forwarding table with the
                              forwarding table on a T640 routing node. The JUNOS kernel running on each T640
                              routing node Routing Engine copies its forwarding table to all Packet Forwarding
                              Engines in each T640 routing node.

                              Figure 24 on page 57 illustrates the control plane architecture.




56    ■    Routing Matrix Control Plane Architecture
                                                                      Chapter 4: System Architecture Overview




                  Figure 24: Routing Matrix Control Plane Architecture




Routing Matrix Switch Fabric Architecture
                  The routing matrix switch fabric consists of five data switching planes. The switch
                  fabric uses ASICs to perform high-speed packet forwarding between the T640 routing
                  nodes. Each TX-SIB and the T640-SIBs connected to it represent a data switching
                  plane that spans the TX Matrix platform and all T640 routing nodes in the routing
                  matrix. The switching planes are connected by high-speed optical links within
                  fiber-optic array cables. (For information about connecting TX-SIBs to T640-SIBs, see
                  “Connecting an Offline T640 Routing Node to the TX Matrix Platform” on page 147
                  or “Converting and Connecting the Switching Planes” on page 158.)

                  Consider a packet that enters a T640 routing node and is destined for another T640
                  routing node in the routing matrix. When the packet enters an interface on a PIC in
                  a T640 routing node, it is forwarded to the switch fabric by a Packet Forwarding
                  Engine on that routing node (see “Data Flow Through the T640 Routing
                  Node” on page 59 for more details). The packet is forwarded through the switch
                  fabric from the source T640 routing node, through the TX Matrix platform, to the
                  target T640 routing node. The switch fabric allows high-priority traffic from any
                  Packet Forwarding Engine to an egress Packet Forwarding Engine to be given
                  preferential treatment over low-priority traffic from any other Packet Forwarding
                  Engine. The Packet Forwarding Engine on the target T640 routing node forwards
                  the packet to the destination PIC and interface.




                                                           Routing Matrix Switch Fabric Architecture   ■   57
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             The switch fabric can forward up to 3 Gpps. The maximum aggregate throughput
                             rate for the TX Matrix platform is 2.56 Tbps (full duplex). Figure 25 on page 58
                             illustrates the switch fabric architecture.

Figure 25: Routing Matrix Switch Fabric Architecture




T640 Routing Node Architecture
                             This section describes the T640 routing node architecture, including the following
                             topics:
                             ■      Packet Forwarding Engine Architecture on page 59
                             ■      Data Flow Through the T640 Routing Node on page 59




58    ■    T640 Routing Node Architecture
                                                                     Chapter 4: System Architecture Overview




Packet Forwarding Engine Architecture
                   The Packet Forwarding Engines provide the Layer 2 and Layer 3 packet switching,
                   forwarding, and route lookup functions. In a maximum configuration with eight
                   FPC3s installed, the Packet Forwarding Engines can forward up to 640 million packets
                   per second (Mpps) for all packet sizes. The maximum aggregate throughput rate for
                   the T640 routing node is 320 Gbps (full duplex). The Packet Forwarding Engines are
                   implemented in ASICs that are physically located on the FPCs and the PICs.

                   Each Packet Forwarding Engine consists of the following components (see
                   Figure 26 on page 60):
                   ■   Layer 2/Layer 3 Packet Processing ASIC, which performs Layer 2 and Layer 3
                       encapsulation and decapsulation, and manages the division and reassembly of
                       packets within the T640 routing node.
                   ■   Queuing and Memory Interface ASICs, which manage the buffering of data cells
                       in memory and the queueing of notifications.
                   ■   T-series Internet Processor, which provides the route lookup function.
                   ■   Switch Interface ASICs, which extract the route lookup key and manage the flow
                       of data cells across the switch fabric.
                   ■   Media-specific ASICs on the PICs that perform control functions tailored to the
                       PIC media types.


Data Flow Through the T640 Routing Node
                   To ensure the efficient movement of data through the T640 routing node, the routing
                   node is designed so that ASICs on the hardware components handle the forwarding
                   of data. Data flows through the T640 routing node in the following sequence (see
                   Figure 26 on page 60):




                                                                   T640 Routing Node Architecture   ■   59
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




Figure 26: Data Flow through the T640 Routing Node




                             1.     Packets arrive at an incoming PIC interface.
                             2.     The PIC passes the packets to the FPC, where the Layer 2/Layer 3 Packet
                                    Processing ASIC performs Layer 2 and Layer 3 parsing and divides the packets
                                    into 64-byte cells.
                             3.     The Switch Interface ASIC extracts the route lookup key, places it in a notification
                                    and passes the notification to the T-series Internet Processor. The Switch Interface
                                    ASIC also passes the data cells to the Queuing and Memory Interface ASICs for
                                    buffering.
                             4.     The Queuing and Memory Interface ASICs pass the data cells to memory for
                                    buffering.
                             5.     The T-series Internet Processor performs the route lookup and forwards the
                                    notification to the Queuing and Memory Interface ASIC.
                             6.     The Queuing and Memory Interface ASIC sends the notification to the Switch
                                    Interface ASIC facing the switch fabric, unless the destination is on the same
                                    Packet Forwarding Engine. In this case, the notification is sent back to the Switch
                                    Interface ASIC facing the outgoing ports, and the packets are sent to the outgoing
                                    port without passing through the switch fabric (see Step 13).




60    ■    T640 Routing Node Architecture
                                                     Chapter 4: System Architecture Overview




7.   The Switch Interface ASIC sends bandwidth requests through the switch fabric
     to the destination port. The Switch Interface ASIC also issues read requests to
     the Queuing and Memory Interface ASIC to begin reading data cells out of
     memory.
8.   The destination Switch Interface ASIC sends bandwidth grants through the switch
     fabric to the originating Switch Interface ASIC.
9.   Upon receipt of each bandwidth grant, the originating Switch Interface ASIC
     sends a cell through the switch fabric to the destination Packet Forwarding
     Engine.
10. The destination Switch Interface ASIC receives cells from the switch fabric. It
     extracts the route lookup key from each cell, places it in a notification, and
     forwards the notification to the T-series Internet Processor.
11. The T-series Internet Processor performs the route lookup, and forwards the
     notification to the Queuing and Memory Interface ASIC.
12. The Queuing and Memory Interface ASIC forwards the notification, including
     next-hop information, to the Switch Interface ASIC.
13. The Switch Interface ASIC sends read requests to the Queuing and Memory
     Interface ASIC to read the data cells out of memory, and passes the cells to the
     Layer 2/Layer 3 Packet Processing ASIC.
14. The Layer 2/Layer 3 Packet Processing ASIC reassembles the data cells into
     packets, adds Layer 2 encapsulation, and sends the packets to the outgoing PIC
     interface.
15. The outgoing PIC sends the packets out into the network.




                                                  T640 Routing Node Architecture    ■   61
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




62    ■    T640 Routing Node Architecture
Part 2
Initial Installation
          ■   Preparing for TX Matrix Platform Installation on page 65
          ■   Unpacking the TX Matrix Platform on page 73
          ■   Installing the Mounting Hardware on page 79
          ■   Installing the TX Matrix Platform Using a Mechanical Lift on page 87
          ■   Installing the TX Matrix Platform Without a Mechanical Lift on page 95
          ■   Connecting the TX Matrix Platform on page 111
          ■   Configuring the TX Matrix on page 131
          ■   Converting the T640 Routing Node on page 135
          ■   Integrating an Offline T640 Routing Node with the TX Matrix Platform on page 145
          ■   Integrating an Operational T640 Routing Node with the TX Matrix
              Platform on page 155




                                                                      Initial Installation   ■   63
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




64    ■    Initial Installation
Chapter 5
Preparing for TX Matrix Platform
Installation

                             This chapter describes how to prepare your site so that you can install a TX Matrix
                             platform, discussing the following topics:
                             ■    Site Preparation Checklist on page 65
                             ■    Routing Matrix Configurations on page 66
                             ■    Rack Requirements on page 69
                             ■    Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance on page 71


Site Preparation Checklist
                             The checklist in Table 18 on page 65 summarizes the tasks you need to perform
                             when preparing a site for TX Matrix platform installation.

Table 18: Site Preparation Checklist

 Item or Task                                  For More Information                Performed By       Date

 Environment
 Verify that environmental factors such as     “TX Matrix Platform Environmental
 temperature and humidity do not exceed        Specifications” on page 285
 TX Matrix platform tolerances.

 Power
 Measure distance between external power       “DC Power Cable
 sources and TX Matrix platform installation   Specifications” on page 290
 site.

 Locate sites for connection of system         “Chassis Grounding” on page 291
 grounding.

 Calculate the power consumption and           “TX Matrix Platform Power
 requirements.                                 Requirements” on page 288

 Hardware Configuration
 Choose the routing matrix                     “Hardware Component
 configuration(centralized or distributed).    Overview” on page 9




                                                                                    Site Preparation Checklist   ■   65
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




Table 18: Site Preparation Checklist (continued)

 Item or Task                                      For More Information                   Performed By   Date

 Rack
 Verify that your rack meets the minimum           “Rack Requirements” on page 69
 requirements for the installation of the
 TX Matrix platform.

 Plan rack location, including required space      “Clearance Requirements for Airflow
 clearances.                                       and Hardware
                                                   Maintenance” on page 71

                                                   “Rack Size and Strength” on page 69

 If a rack is used, secure rack to floor and       “Connection to Building
 building structure.                               Structure” on page 70

 Cables
 Acquire cables and connectors:                    “Fiber-Optic Array Cable Connections
                                                   and Considerations” on page 295
 ■    Determine the number of cables needed
      based on your planned configuration.
 ■    Review the maximum distance allowed
      for each cable. Choose the length of cable
      based on the distance between the
      hardware components being connected.

 Plan the cable routing and management.            “Fiber-Optic Array Cable Connections
                                                   and Considerations” on page 295



Routing Matrix Configurations
                              A fully loaded routing matrix configuration consists of one TX Matrix platform, four
                              T640 routing nodes, three to five 44-U, seismic-rated racks, 20 fiber-optic array
                              cables, 10 Ethernet cables, and a cable management system. There are two types
                              of configurations to consider when planning and preparing for the installation of the
                              routing matrix—centralized and distributed.

Centralized Configuration
                              In the centralized configuration, three racks are placed next to each other in a row.
                              Figure 27 on page 67 and Figure 28 on page 67 show a rack view and a top view of
                              a centralized configuration in which the left and center racks each hold two T640
                              routing nodes, and the right rack holds the TX Matrix platform. In
                              Figure 28 on page 67, each connection to a T640 routing node represents five
                              fiber-optic array cables.


                              NOTE: In the configuration shown in Figure 27 on page 67, if the raceway is less
                              than 1 m above the racks, 5-m fiber-optic array cables are usually long enough to
                              connect the system.




66    ■    Routing Matrix Configurations
                                        Chapter 5: Preparing for TX Matrix Platform Installation




In the centralized configuration, the total weight of the routing matrix and the heat
it generates are concentrated in a relatively small area. You must ensure that your
site can support the weight and your site cooling can adequately dissipate the heat.
For physical and environmental specifications, see Table 7 on page 12 and
Table 31 on page 285.

You can order the centralized configuration as a turnkey solution, or you can configure
it from existing T640 routing nodes.

Figure 27: Centralized Configuration—Rack View




Figure 28: Centralized Configuration




                                                     Routing Matrix Configurations     ■    67
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




Distributed Configuration
                             In the distributed configuration, the placement of the racks is more flexible. Ensure
                             the rack placement allows you to connect the T640 routing nodes to the TX Matrix
                             platform using the fiber-optic array cables. The maximum cable length is 100 m.
                             The total weight and heat dissipation of the routing matrix are important in the
                             distributed configuration, but not as critical as in the centralized configuration. For
                             physical and environmental specifications, see Table 7 on page 12 and
                             Table 31 on page 285.

                             Figure 29 on page 68 shows a top view of the distributed configuration. Each
                             connection to a T640 routing node represents five fiber-optic array cables.


                             NOTE: If you plan to use 100-m fiber-optic array cables, contact your customer
                             support representative before you connect the T640 routing node and TX Matrix
                             platform.



                             Figure 29: Distributed Configuration




68    ■    Routing Matrix Configurations
                                                             Chapter 5: Preparing for TX Matrix Platform Installation




Rack Requirements
                   The TX Matrix platform can be installed in a rack. Many types of racks are acceptable,
                   including four-post (telco) racks and open-frame racks. An example of an open-frame
                   rack appears in Figure 30 on page 70.

                   The following sections describe rack requirements:
                   ■     Rack Size and Strength on page 69
                   ■     Spacing of Mounting Bracket and Flange Holes on page 70
                   ■     Connection to Building Structure on page 70
                   ■     Rack Mounting Considerations on page 71

Rack Size and Strength
                   The TX Matrix platform is designed for installation in a rack that complies with either
                   of the following standards:
                   ■     A 19-in. rack as defined in Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment
                         (document number EIA-310-D) published by the Electronics Industry Association
                         (http://www.eia.org).
                   ■     A 600-mm rack as defined in the four-part Equipment Engineering (EE); European
                         telecommunications standard for equipment practice (document numbers ETS 300
                         119-1 through 119-4) published by the European Telecommunications Standards
                         Institute (http://www.etsi.org).

                         The horizontal spacing between the rails in a rack that complies with this standard
                         is usually wider than the TX Matrix platform's mounting brackets, which measure
                         19 in. (48.3 cm) from outer edge to outer edge. Use approved wing devices to
                         narrow the opening between the rails as required.

                   The rack rails must be spaced widely enough to accommodate the TX Matrix platform
                   chassis's external dimensions: 44.5 in. (113.0 cm) high, 31.4 in. (79.8 cm) deep, and
                   17.4 in. (44.2 cm) wide. The outer edges of the mounting brackets extend the width
                   to 19 in. (48.3 cm). The spacing of rails and adjacent racks must also allow for the
                   clearances around the TX Matrix platform and rack that are specified in “Clearance
                   Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance” on page 71.

                   In general, a center-mount rack is preferable to a front-mount rack because the more
                   even distribution of weight in the center-mount rack provides greater stability. If a
                   center-mount rack is used, you use the mounting brackets attached to the center of
                   the chassis for rack mounting; if a front-mount rack is used, you use the
                   front-mounting flanges.

                   If you are mounting the TX Matrix platform in a four-post rack or cabinet, you must
                   install the spacer bars on the rack before you mount the chassis. For instructions on
                   installing the mounting hardware, see “Installing the Mounting Hardware” on page 79.

                   The chassis height of 44.5 in. (113.0 cm) is approximately 25.4 U. A U is the standard
                   rack unit defined in Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment (document




                                                                                    Rack Requirements       ■    69
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             number EIA-310-D) published by the Electronics Industry Association. You can stack
                             one TX Matrix platform in a rack that has at least 25.4 U (44.5 in. or 113 cm) of
                             usable vertical space.

                             The rack must be strong enough to support the weight of the fully configured
                             TX Matrix platform, up to about 495 lb (225 kg).

                             Figure 30: Typical Open-Frame Rack




Spacing of Mounting Bracket and Flange Holes
                             There are two sets of holes in the mounting brackets and front-mount flanges used
                             to attach the chassis to a rack. The holes within each set are spaced at 3 U (5.25 in. or
                             13.3 cm). The TX Matrix platform can be mounted in any rack that provides holes
                             spaced at those distances.

Connection to Building Structure
                             Always secure the rack to the structure of the building. If your geographical area is
                             subject to earthquakes, bolt the rack to the floor. For maximum stability, also secure
                             the rack to ceiling brackets. For more information, see “Rack-Mounting Requirements
                             and Warnings” on page 257.




70    ■    Rack Requirements
                                                            Chapter 5: Preparing for TX Matrix Platform Installation




Rack Mounting Considerations
                  If you are installing a TX Matrix platform, or a T640 routing node that you intend to
                  integrate into a routing matrix, consider these guidelines to facilitate the integration:
                  ■   If you will be installing a fully configured centralized configuration, as described
                      in “Centralized Configuration” on page 66 (one TX Matrix platform and four
                      T640 routing nodes), plan to use a minimum of three racks side by side.
                  ■   If you will be installing a fully configured distributed configuration, as described
                      in “Distributed Configuration” on page 68 (one TX Matrix platform and four
                      T640 routing nodes), plan to use one rack for the TX Matrix platform, and two
                      through four racks for the T640 routing nodes (depending on whether you plan
                      to install one or two T640 routing nodes in a single rack).
                  ■   Account for the total weight of the routing matrix. One TX Matrix platform and
                      four maximally configured T640 routing nodes weigh approximately
                      2755 lb (1250 kg).
                  ■   If you are installing the T640 routing node in the bottom of an empty rack,
                      reserve the top of the rack for the future installation of another T640 routing
                      node.
                  ■   We recommend you install the TX Matrix platform in its own dedicated rack. If
                      you must install another device in the rack, consider the height and weight of
                      the TX Matrix platform and the fiber-optic array cable management above the
                      chassis, including the optional cable shelf assembly.


Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance
                  When planning the installation site, you need to allow sufficient clearance around
                  the rack (see Figure 31 on page 72):
                  ■   For the cooling system to function properly, the airflow around the chassis must
                      be unrestricted. Figure 15 on page 31 depicts the airflow in the TX Matrix
                      platform.
                  ■   For service personnel to remove and install hardware components, there must
                      be adequate space at the front and back of the rack. Allow at least 30 in. (72.6 cm)
                      in front of the rack and 24 in. (61.0 cm) behind the rack.




                                          Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance      ■    71
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 31: Chassis Dimensions and Clearance Requirements




72    ■    Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance
Chapter 6
Unpacking the TX Matrix Platform

                 After you have prepared your installation site as described in “Preparing for TX Matrix
                 Platform Installation” on page 65, you are ready to unpack and install the TX Matrix
                 platform. It is important to proceed through the installation process in the following
                 order:
                 1.   Review the safety guidelines explained in “Safety and Regulatory Compliance
                      Information” on page 249.
                 2.   Follow the instructions in this chapter to unpack the TX Matrix platform and
                      verify the parts received.
                 3.   Install the mounting hardware as described in “Installing the Mounting
                      Hardware” on page 79.
                 4.   Install the TX Matrix platform as described in “Installing the TX Matrix Platform
                      Using a Mechanical Lift” on page 87 or “Installing the TX Matrix Platform Without
                      a Mechanical Lift” on page 95.
                 5.   Perform the initial system startup as described in “Connecting the TX Matrix
                      Platform” on page 111.

                 This chapter describes how to prepare to install the TX Matrix platform. It discusses
                 the following topics:
                 ■    Tools and Parts Required on page 73
                 ■    Unpacking the TX Matrix Platform on page 74
                 ■    Verifying Parts Received on page 75


Tools and Parts Required
                 To unpack the TX Matrix platform and prepare for installation, you need the following
                 tools:
                 ■    Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
                 ■    1/2-in. or 13-mm open-end or socket wrench to remove bracket bolts from the
                      shipping pallet
                 ■    Blank panels to cover any slots not occupied by a component




                                                                        Tools and Parts Required   ■   73
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




Unpacking the TX Matrix Platform
                             The TX Matrix platform is shipped in a wooden crate. A wooden pallet forms the
                             base of the crate. The TX Matrix platform chassis is bolted to this pallet. Quick Start
                             installation instructions and a cardboard accessory box are also included in the
                             shipping crate.

                             The shipping crate measures 59 in. (150 cm) high, 30 in. (76.2 cm) wide, and
                             41 in. (104 cm) deep. The total weight of the crate containing the TX Matrix platform
                             and accessories can range from 650 lb (295 kg) to 700 lb (318 kg).


                             NOTE: The TX Matrix platform is maximally protected inside the shipping crate. Do
                             not unpack it until you are ready to begin installation.


                             To unpack the TX Matrix platform, follow these steps (see Figure 32 on page 75):
                             1.     Move the shipping crate to a staging area as close to the installation site as
                                    possible, where you have enough room to remove the components from the
                                    chassis. While the chassis is bolted to the pallet, you can use a forklift or pallet
                                    jack to move it.
                             2.     Position the shipping crate with the arrows pointing up.
                             3.     Open all the latches on the shipping crate.
                             4.     Remove the front door of the shipping crate cover and set it aside.
                             5.     Slide the remainder of the shipping crate cover off the pallet.
                             6.     Remove the foam covering the top of the TX Matrix platform.
                             7.     Remove the accessory box and the Quick Start documentation.
                             8.     Verify the parts received against the lists in Table 19 on page 75 and
                                    Table 20 on page 76.
                             9.     Remove the vapor corrosion inhibitor (VCI) packs attached to the pallet, being
                                    careful not to break the VCI packs open.
                             10. To remove the brackets holding the chassis on the pallet, use a 1/2-in. socket
                                    wrench and a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to remove the bolts and screws
                                    from the brackets.
                             11. Store the brackets and bolts inside the accessory box.
                             12. Save the shipping crate cover, pallet, and packing materials in case you need to
                                    move or ship the TX Matrix platform at a later time.
                             13. To proceed with the installation, see “Installing the TX Matrix Platform Using a
                                    Lift” on page 89 or “Installing the TX Matrix Platform Without a Mechanical
                                    Lift” on page 95.




74    ■    Unpacking the TX Matrix Platform
                                                                        Chapter 6: Unpacking the TX Matrix Platform




                  Figure 32: Contents of the Shipping Crate




Verifying Parts Received
                  A packing list is included in each shipment. Check the parts in the shipment against
                  the items on the packing list. The packing list specifies the part numbers and
                  descriptions of each part in your order.

                  If any part is missing, contact a customer service representative.

                  The main shipment contains the TX Matrix platform chassis with installed
                  components, listed in Table 19 on page 75, and an accessory box, which contains
                  the parts listed in Table 20 on page 76.

                  Table 19: TX Matrix Platform Parts List

                   Component                                       Quantity

                   Chassis, including midplane, craft interface,   1
                   and center-mounting brackets

                   Comb panel assembly                             1

                   TX-SIBs                                         5

                   Routing Engines                                 1 or 2

                   TX-CBs                                          1 or 2

                   Power supplies                                  2

                   TX-CIP                                          2

                   Front fan trays                                 2




                                                                                Verifying Parts Received   ■   75
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                              Table 19: TX Matrix Platform Parts List (continued)

                               Component                                           Quantity

                               Rear fan tray                                       1

                               Quick Start installation guide                      1

                               Front mounting shelf                                1

                               Rear mounting shelf                                 1

                               Spacer bars                                         2

                               Blank panels for slots without components           One blank panel for each slot not occupied by
                               installed                                           a component



                              Table 20: Accessory Box Parts List

                               Part                                                Quantity

                               2.5-mm ball hex driver for the fiber-optic array    1
                               loopback adapter and loopback connector

                               7/16-in. nut driver                                 1

                               Affidavit for T1 connection                         1

                               Connectors for alarm relay cables                   2

                               DB-9 (male) to DB-25 (female) adapter               1

                               DC power and grounding cable lugs                   9 (8 for power, 1 for grounding)

                               ESD wrist strap with cable                          1

                               Fiber-optic array loopback connector                1

                               Fiber-optic array loopback adapter                  1

                               Flat-blade (–) screwdriver, number 1, for the       1
                               fiber-optic array cable connectors

                               Labels for the fiber-optic array cable connectors   1

                               PCMCIA card holder and hook-and-loop                1 of each
                               fasteners (male and female)

                               Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2                  1

                               Read me first document                              1

                               Screws to fasten grounding cable to chassis         2

                               Screws to mount chassis                             Bag of 14




76    ■    Verifying Parts Received
                                                        Chapter 6: Unpacking the TX Matrix Platform




Table 20: Accessory Box Parts List (continued)

 Part                                               Quantity

 Serial cable, 6-ft length, to connect Routing      1
 Engine to management console

 Software license agreement                         1

 Ethernet cable, 15-ft length, to connect Routing   1
 Engine to management device

 Washers for grounding cable lug                    2




                                                                Verifying Parts Received   ■   77
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




78    ■    Verifying Parts Received
Chapter 7
Installing the Mounting Hardware

                  The TX Matrix platform can be installed in a four-post rack or cabinet or an
                  open-frame rack. Before you install the TX Matrix platform, you install the mounting
                  hardware on the rack. The procedure for installing the mounting hardware depends
                  on the type of rack.

                  After the mounting hardware is installed, proceed to “Installing the TX Matrix Platform
                  Using a Mechanical Lift” on page 87 or “Installing the TX Matrix Platform Without a
                  Mechanical Lift” on page 95, depending on your type of installation.

                  This chapter describes the procedures for installing the mounting hardware:
                  ■   Rack-Mounting Hardware on page 79
                  ■   Installing the Mounting Hardware for a Four-Post Rack or Cabinet on page 79
                  ■   Installing the Mounting Hardware for an Open-Frame Rack on page 83


Rack-Mounting Hardware
                  For a center-mount rack, you use the two mounting brackets that are attached to the
                  center of the chassis. For a front-mount rack, you use the front-mounting flanges on
                  the front of the chassis instead of the mounting brackets. The mounting brackets
                  and flanges have two sets of holes for rack-mounting screws. The holes within each
                  set are spaced at 3 U (5.25 in. or 13.3 cm).

                  If you are mounting the TX Matrix platform in a four-post rack or cabinet, you must
                  install the spacer bars on the rack before you mount the chassis.

                  All mounting options require you to install the supplied front mounting shelf. The
                  supplied rear mounting shelf is needed only for a four-post rack or cabinet.

                  Figure 2 on page 10 shows the mounting brackets and the front-mounting flanges.


Installing the Mounting Hardware for a Four-Post Rack or Cabinet
                  If you are installing the TX Matrix platform into a four-post rack or cabinet, you must
                  first install the front and rear mounting shelves and the spacer bars on the rack. If
                  you are front-mounting the TX Matrix platform, you must also remove the mounting
                  brackets from the chassis.




                                                                          Rack-Mounting Hardware   ■   79
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Table 21 on page 80 specifies the holes in which you insert cage nuts and screws to
                             install the mounting hardware required in a four-post or cabinet rack (an X indicates
                             a mounting hole location). The hole distances are relative to one of the standard “U”
                             divisions on the rack. The bottom of all mounting shelves is at 0.04 in. (0.02 U) above
                             a “U” division.

                             Table 21: Four-Post or Cabinet Rack Mounting Hole Locations

                                                                                                Front    Spacer   Rear
                               Hole       Distance Above “U” Division                           Shelf    Bars     Shelf

                               60         34.75 in. (88.3 cm)                 19.86 U                    X

                               51         29.51 in. (74.9 cm)                 16.86 U                    X

                               42         24.26 in. (61.6 cm)                 13.86 U                    X

                               33         19.01 in. (48.3 cm)                 10.86 U                    X

                               24         13.76 in. (34.9 cm)                 7.86 U                     X

                               15         8.51 in. (21.6 cm)                  4.86 U                     X        X

                               12         6.76 in. (17.1 cm)                  3.86 U                              X

                               9          5.01 in. (12.7 cm)                  2.86 U                              X

                               6          3.26 in. (8.3 cm)                   1.86 U                     X        X

                               3          1.51 in. (3.8 cm)                   0.86 U                              X

                               2          0.88 in. (2.2 cm)                   0.50 U            X



                             To install the mounting shelves and spacer bars, follow this procedure (see
                             Figure 33 on page 81):
                             1.     On the front rack rails, install cage nuts in the holes specified in Table 21 on page
                                    80 for the front shelf and the spacer bars.
                             2.     On the front of each front rack rail, partially insert a mounting screw into the
                                    hole containing the lowest cage nut.
                             3.     Install the front shelf on the front rack rails. Rest the bottom slot of each flange
                                    on a mounting screw.
                             4.     Tighten all the screws completely.
                             5.     The TX Matrix platform is shipped with each spacer bar attached to the rear of
                                    a front-mounting flange. Remove each spacer bar by removing the screws that
                                    fasten it to the front-mounting flange.
                             6.     Place one of the spacer bars over a flange of the installed front shelf. Position
                                    the notch in the rear of the spacer bar so the upper part of the bar is flush with
                                    the rack rail and the lower part is flush with the flange of the shelf (see
                                    Figure 34 on page 82).




80    ■    Installing the Mounting Hardware for a Four-Post Rack or Cabinet
                                                      Chapter 7: Installing the Mounting Hardware




7.   Insert a mounting screw into each of the nonthreaded holes in the recesses of
     the spacer bar to secure the spacer bar. Each hole should have a cage nut behind
     it.
8.   Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for the other spacer bar.
9.   Tighten all the screws completely.
10. On the rear rack rails, install cage nuts in the holes specified in Table 21 on page
     80 for the rear shelf.
11. On the back of each rear rack rail, partially insert a mounting screw into the hole
     containing the lowest cage nut.
12. Install the rear shelf on the back rack rails. Rest the bottom slot of each flange
     on a mounting screw. The rear shelf installs on the back of the rear rails,
     extending toward the center of the rack. The bottom of the rear shelf should
     align with the bottom of the front shelf.
13. Partially insert screws into the open holes in the ears of the rear shelf.
14. Tighten all the screws completely.
15. To remove the mounting brackets from the chassis for a front-mount rack, loosen
     the screws at the top and bottom of each bracket (see Figure 35 on page 83).


Figure 33: Install the Mounting Hardware for a Four-Post Rack or Cabinet




                       Installing the Mounting Hardware for a Four-Post Rack or Cabinet   ■   81
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 34: Position the Spacer Bar on the Rack




82    ■    Installing the Mounting Hardware for a Four-Post Rack or Cabinet
                                                                    Chapter 7: Installing the Mounting Hardware




                 Figure 35: Center-Mounting Bracket Removal




Installing the Mounting Hardware for an Open-Frame Rack
                 If you are installing the TX Matrix platform into an open-frame rack, you must first
                 install the front mounting shelf on the rack. If you are front-mounting the TX Matrix
                 platform, you must also remove the mounting brackets from the chassis. The rear
                 mounting shelf and the spacer bars are not needed.

                 Table 22 on page 84 specifies the holes in which you insert screws to install the
                 mounting hardware in an open-frame rack (an X indicates a mounting hole location).
                 The hole distances are relative to one of the standard “U” divisions on the rack. For
                 reference, the bottom of all mounting shelves is at 0.04 in. (0.02 U) above a “U”
                 division.




                                            Installing the Mounting Hardware for an Open-Frame Rack   ■    83
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Table 22: Open-Frame Rack Mounting Hole Locations

                                                                                                                  Front
                              Hole       Distance Above “U” Division                                              Shelf

                              59         34.13 in. (86.7 cm)                         19.50 U                      X

                              53         30.63 in. (77.8 cm)                         17.50 U                      X

                              50         28.88 in. (73.3 cm)                         16.50 U                      X

                              44         25.38 in. (64.5 cm)                         14.50 U                      X

                              41         23.63 in. (60.0 cm)                         13.50 U                      X

                              35         20.13 in. (51.1 cm)                         11.50 U                      X

                              32         18.38 in. (46.7 cm)                         10.50 U                      X

                              31         17.75 in. (45.1 cm)                         10.14 U                      X



                             To install the front mounting shelf, follow this procedure (see Figure 36 on page 85):
                             1.     On the rear of each rack rail, partially insert a mounting screw into the lowest
                                    hole specified in Table 22 on page 84 for the front shelf.
                             2.     Install the front shelf on the rack. Rest the bottom slot of each flange on a
                                    mounting screw.
                             3.     Partially insert screws into the open holes in the ears of the front shelf.
                             4.     Tighten all the screws completely.
                             5.     To remove the mounting brackets from the chassis for a front-mount rack, loosen
                                    the screws at the top and bottom of each bracket (see Figure 35 on page 83).

                             The TX Matrix platform is shipped with each spacer bar attached to the rear of a
                             front-mounting flange. Remove each spacer bar by removing the screws that fasten
                             it to the front-mounting flange.




84    ■    Installing the Mounting Hardware for an Open-Frame Rack
                                                 Chapter 7: Installing the Mounting Hardware




Figure 36: Install the Mounting Hardware for an Open-Frame Rack




                         Installing the Mounting Hardware for an Open-Frame Rack   ■    85
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




86    ■    Installing the Mounting Hardware for an Open-Frame Rack
Chapter 8
Installing the TX Matrix Platform Using a
Mechanical Lift

                  Before installing the TX Matrix platform, you should have prepared your site and
                  reviewed the guidelines in “Preparing for TX Matrix Platform Installation” on page 65,
                  and unpacked the TX Matrix platform from the shipping crate as described in
                  “Unpacking the TX Matrix Platform” on page 73.

                  This chapter discusses the following TX Matrix platform installation topics:
                  ■    Tools Required on page 87
                  ■    Attaching the Installation Handle on page 87
                  ■    Installing the TX Matrix Platform Using a Lift on page 89
                  ■    Removing the Installation Handle and Reinstalling the Power Supplies on page 91
                  ■    Installing the Cable Management System on page 92


Tools Required
                  To install the TX Matrix platform, you need the following tools:
                  ■    Mechanical lift
                  ■    Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2


Attaching the Installation Handle
                  The installation handles helps you install the TX Matrix platform. You attach the
                  installation handle over the power supply slots of the chassis. To remove the power
                  supplies and attach the handle, follow this procedure for each power supply:
                  1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                       connect the strap to an approved site ESD grounding point. For more information
                       about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                  2.   Switch both circuit breakers on the power supply faceplate to the off position (O).
                       We recommend this even though the power supplies are not connected to power
                       sources.
                  3.   Loosen the captive screws on the lower corners of the power supply faceplate
                       completely.



                                                                                   Tools Required   ■   87
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                              4.    Twist the ejector handles on the upper corners of the faceplate counterclockwise
                                    to unseat the power supply.
                              5.    Grasp the handle on the power supply faceplate and pull firmly. Slide it halfway
                                    out of the chassis (see Figure 37 on page 88).
                              6.    Place one hand underneath the power supply to support it and slide it completely
                                    out of the chassis.


                              CAUTION: Each power supply weighs approximately 23 lb (10.5 kg). Be prepared to
                              support the full weight of the power supply as you remove it from the TX Matrix
                              platform.


                              7.    Repeat the procedure for the other power supply.
                              8.    Insert the captive screws of the handle into the holes previously occupied by the
                                    captive screws of the power supplies (see Figure 38 on page 89). Tighten the
                                    screws, using a Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2.


                              Figure 37: Remove a Power Supply Before Installing the Installation Handle




88    ■    Attaching the Installation Handle
                                                 Chapter 8: Installing the TX Matrix Platform Using a Mechanical Lift




                   Figure 38: Attach the Installation Handle




Installing the TX Matrix Platform Using a Lift
                   Because of the TX Matrix platform's size and weight—up to 495 lb (225 kg) depending
                   on configuration—we strongly recommend that you install the TX Matrix platform
                   using a lift.

                   Before installing the TX Matrix platform in the rack, read the safety information in
                   “Chassis Lifting Guidelines” on page 256. Remove the TX Matrix platform from the
                   shipping crate as described in “Unpacking the TX Matrix Platform” on page 73. Install
                   the mounting hardware as described in “Installing the Mounting
                   Hardware” on page 79.


                   CAUTION: Before front mounting the router in a rack, have a qualified technician
                   verify that the rack is strong enough to support the TX Matrix platform's weight and
                   is adequately supported at the installation site.


                   To install the TX Matrix platform using a lift, follow this procedure (see
                   Figure 39 on page 91):
                   1.   If you are installing the TX Matrix platform in an open-frame rack, ensure that
                        the rack is in its permanent location and is secured to the building. Ensure that
                        the installation site allows adequate clearance for both airflow and maintenance.
                        For details, see “Preparing for TX Matrix Platform Installation” on page 65.
                   2.   Load the TX Matrix platform onto the lift, making sure it rests securely on the
                        lift platform.


                   CAUTION: Do not lift the TX Matrix platform using the craft interface, installation
                   handle, or the handles on the sides of the chassis. Use these handles only to help
                   position the TX Matrix platform.




                                                            Installing the TX Matrix Platform Using a Lift   ■   89
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                               3.   Using the lift, position the TX Matrix platform in front of the rack or cabinet,
                                    centering it in front of the mounting shelves.
                               4.   Lift the chassis approximately 0.75 in. above the surface of the mounting shelves
                                    and position it as close as possible to the shelves.
                               5.   Carefully slide the TX Matrix platform onto the mounting shelves so that the
                                    bottom of the chassis and the mounting shelves overlap by approximately two
                                    inches.
                               6.   With one person pulling on the installation handle from the rear of the rack or
                                    cabinet while two people push on the front-mounting flanges, slide the TX Matrix
                                    platform onto the mounting shelves until the mounting brackets or front-mounting
                                    flanges contact the rack rails or spacer bars (depending on your type of
                                    installation). The shelves ensure that the holes in the mounting brackets and the
                                    front-mounting flanges of the chassis align with the holes in the rack rails.
                               7.   Move the lift away from the rack.
                               8.   If you are installing the TX Matrix platform in a four-post rack or cabinet, install
                                    a mounting screw and a cage nut into each of the holes aligned with the threaded
                                    holes in the spacer bars. If you are installing the TX Matrix platform in an
                                    open-frame rack, install a mounting screw into each of the open mounting holes
                                    aligned with the rack, starting from the bottom.
                               9.   Visually inspect the alignment of the TX Matrix platform. If the TX Matrix platform
                                    is installed properly in the rack, all the mounting screws on one side of the rack
                                    should be aligned with the mounting screws on the opposite side and the
                                    TX Matrix platform should be level.




90    ■    Installing the TX Matrix Platform Using a Lift
                                                  Chapter 8: Installing the TX Matrix Platform Using a Mechanical Lift




                  Figure 39: Installing the TX Matrix Platform in the Rack




                  NOTE: This illustration depicts the TX Matrix platform being installed in a four-post
                  rack. For an illustration of the mounting hardware required for an open-frame rack,
                  see Figure 36 on page 85.



Removing the Installation Handle and Reinstalling the Power Supplies
                  After you have installed the TX Matrix platform, remove the installation handle and
                  reinstall the two power supplies in the chassis by following this procedure (see
                  Figure 40 on page 92):
                  1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                       connect the strap to an approved site ESD grounding point. For more information
                       about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                  2.   Using a Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2, loosen the captive screws on the
                       installation handle completely, and remove the handle from the chassis.
                  3.   Switch both circuit breakers on the power supply faceplate to the off position (O).
                  4.   Using both hands, slide the power supply into the chassis until you feel resistance.




                                     Removing the Installation Handle and Reinstalling the Power Supplies    ■    91
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             5.     Twist the ejector handles at the upper corners of the power supply faceplate
                                    clockwise until they stop.
                             6.     Tighten the captive screws at the lower corners of the power supply faceplate
                                    to secure the power supply in the chassis.
                             7.     Repeat the procedure for the other power supply.


                             Figure 40: Reinstalling a Power Supply




Installing the Cable Management System
                             The cable management system consists of a comb panel assembly that installs on
                             the TX Matrix chassis and an optional cable shelf assembly that installs above the
                             TX Matrix chassis, directly on the rack.

                             The comb panel assembly, which installs immediately above the TX-SIBs, consists
                             of five combs—one comb above each TX-SIB. Each comb contains four teeth to
                             organize and provide strain relief to the four fiber-optic array cables connected to
                             the TX-SIB immediately below it. The fiber-optic array cables extend through the top
                             of the cable comb so that you can route the cables to the T640 routing nodes. To
                             install the comb panel assembly, follow this procedure (see Figure 41 on page 93):
                             1.     Remove the comb panel assembly from the shipping crate.
                             2.     Align the four captive screws on the comb panel assembly with the mounting
                                    holes at the top of the chassis (immediately above the TX-SIB card cage).
                             3.     Starting with the top two screws, partially tighten each of the four screws.
                             4.     Secure the comb panel assembly to the chassis by tightening each of the four
                                    screws.




92    ■    Installing the Cable Management System
                               Chapter 8: Installing the TX Matrix Platform Using a Mechanical Lift




Figure 41: Installing the Comb Panel Assembly




You can use the cable shelf assembly to route and support the fiber-optic array cables
over the top of the TX Matrix platform (see Figure 42 on page 93). The assembly
consists of four parallel shelves. Each shelf is used to route five fiber-optic array
cables—and potentially a sixth spare cable—destined for a T640 routing node. To
install the cable shelf assembly, follow the installation instructions that ship with the
assembly.

Figure 42: Cable Shelf Assembly




                                             Installing the Cable Management System       ■    93
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




94    ■    Installing the Cable Management System
Chapter 9
Installing the TX Matrix Platform Without
a Mechanical Lift

                 If you cannot use a mechanical lift to install the TX Matrix platform, you can install
                 it manually. Before installing the TX Matrix platform manually, you must first remove
                 components from the chassis, and you must reinstall the components once the
                 TX Matrix platform is installed in the rack. At least four people are needed to safely
                 lift the chassis into the rack or cabinet. With components removed, the chassis weighs
                 approximately 240 lb (109 kg).

                 Before installing the TX Matrix platform in the rack, read the safety information in
                 “Chassis Lifting Guidelines” on page 256. Remove the TX Matrix platform from the
                 shipping crate as described in “Unpacking the TX Matrix Platform” on page 73. Install
                 the mounting hardware as described in “Installing the Mounting
                 Hardware” on page 79.

                 This chapter discusses the following TX Matrix platform installation topics:
                 ■   Tools and Parts Required on page 95
                 ■   Removing Components from the Chassis on page 95
                 ■   Installing the Chassis in the Rack Manually on page 102
                 ■   Reinstalling Components in the Chassis on page 105
                 ■   Installing the Cable Management System on page 110


Tools and Parts Required
                 To install the TX Matrix platform, you need the following tools and parts:
                 ■   Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
                 ■   ESD grounding wrist strap


Removing Components from the Chassis
                 To make the TX Matrix platform light enough to install manually, you first remove
                 most components from the chassis. The procedures in this section for removing
                 components from the chassis are for initial installation only, and assume that you
                 have not connected power cables to the TX Matrix platform. The following procedures




                                                                        Tools and Parts Required   ■   95
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             describe how to remove components from the chassis, first from the rear and then
                             from the front:
                             ■      Removing the Power Supplies on page 96
                             ■      Removing a TX-CB on page 97
                             ■      Removing the Rear Fan Tray on page 98
                             ■      Removing the TX-SIBs on page 99
                             ■      Removing the Front Fan Trays on page 101

Removing the Power Supplies
                             The power supplies are located at the lower rear of the chassis. Each power supply
                             weighs approximately 23 lb (10.5 kg).

                             To remove the power supplies, follow this procedure:
                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to an approved site ESD grounding point. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             2.     Switch both circuit breakers on the power supply faceplate to the off position (O).
                                    We recommend this even though the power supplies are not connected to power
                                    sources.
                             3.     Loosen the captive screws on the lower corners of the power supply faceplate
                                    completely.
                             4.     Twist the ejector handles on the upper corners of the faceplate counterclockwise
                                    to unseat the power supply.
                             5.     Grasp the handle on the power supply faceplate and pull firmly. Slide it halfway
                                    out of the chassis (see Figure 37 on page 88).
                             6.     Place one hand underneath the power supply to support it and slide it completely
                                    out of the chassis.


                             CAUTION: Each power supply weighs approximately 23 lb (10.5 kg). Be prepared to
                             support the full weight of the power supply as you remove it from the TX Matrix
                             platform.


                             7.     Repeat the procedure for the other power supply.




96    ■    Removing Components from the Chassis
                                                Chapter 9: Installing the TX Matrix Platform Without a Mechanical Lift




                   Figure 43: Removing a Power Supply Before Installing the TX Matrix Platform




Removing a TX-CB
                   The TX Matrix platform can have up to two TX-CBs. These are located in the upper
                   rear of the chassis in the slots marked CB0 and CB1. Each one weighs approximately
                   5 lb (2.3 kg).

                   To remove a TX-CB, follow this procedure (see Figure 44 on page 98):
                   1.   Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
                   2.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                        connect the strap to an approved site ESD grounding point. For more information
                        about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                   3.   Loosen the captive screws on the ejector handles on both sides of the TX-CB
                        faceplate.
                   4.   Flip the ejector handles outward to unseat the TX-CB.
                   5.   Grasp the ejector handles and slide the TX-CB about halfway out of the chassis.
                   6.   Place one hand underneath the TX-CB to support it and slide it completely out
                        of the chassis. Place it on the antistatic mat.


                   CAUTION: Do not stack hardware components on one another after you remove
                   them. Place each component on an antistatic mat resting on a stable, flat surface.


                   7.   Repeat the procedure for the second TX-CB.




                                                                Removing Components from the Chassis         ■    97
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 44: Removing a TX-CB




Removing the Rear Fan Tray
                             The rear fan tray is mounted vertically on the right side of the rear of the chassis.
                             The rear fan tray contains eight fans. The fan tray weighs about 10 lb (4.5 kg).


                             CAUTION: To maintain proper cooling, do not operate the TX Matrix platform with
                             the rear fan tray removed for more than one minute.


                             To remove the rear fan tray, follow this procedure (see Figure 45 on page 99):
                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to an approved site ESD grounding point. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             2.     Loosen the captive screws on the top and bottom of the fan tray faceplate.
                             3.     Grasp the handles and pull the fan tray halfway out of the chassis.
                             4.     Place one hand under the fan tray to support it and pull the fan tray completely
                                    out of the chassis.




98    ■    Removing Components from the Chassis
                                               Chapter 9: Installing the TX Matrix Platform Without a Mechanical Lift




                  Figure 45: Removing the Rear Fan Tray




Removing the TX-SIBs
                  Five TX-SIBs are installed in the TX Matrix platform. The TX-SIBs are located in the
                  front of the chassis in slots SIB0 through SIB4. Each TX-SIB weighs approximately
                  35 lb (15.9 kg).

                  To remove the TX-SIBs, follow this procedure (see Figure 46 on page 101):
                  1.   Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
                  2.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                       connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                       about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                  3.   Simultaneously turn both ejector handles on the top and bottom of the faceplate
                       counterclockwise to unseat the TX-SIB.
                  4.   Grasp both ejector handles, pull firmly, and slide the TX-SIB about three-quarters
                       of the way out of the chassis.




                                                               Removing Components from the Chassis         ■    99
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             CAUTION: Be prepared to support the weight of the TX-SIB (approximately
                             35 lb [15.9 kg]) before you slide it completely out of the chassis.

                             When the TX-SIB is out of the chassis, do not hold it by its ejector handles or edge
                             connectors. They cannot support its weight.



                             5.     Place one hand underneath the TX-SIB to support it and slide it completely out
                                    of the chassis. Place it on the antistatic mat.


                             CAUTION: Do not stack hardware components on one another after you remove
                             them. Place each component on an antistatic mat resting on a stable, flat surface.


                             6.     Repeat the procedure for each of the remaining TX-SIBs.




100    ■    Removing Components from the Chassis
                                                Chapter 9: Installing the TX Matrix Platform Without a Mechanical Lift




                   Figure 46: Removing a TX-SIB




Removing the Front Fan Trays
                   The front fan trays are located in the lower front of the chassis below the craft
                   interface. Each front fan tray weighs about 18.6 lb (8.4 kg).

                   To remove the front fan trays, follow this procedure (see Figure 47 on page 102):
                   1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                        connect the strap to an approved site ESD grounding point. For more information
                        about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                   2.   Loosen the captive screws on the corners of the faceplate of one of the fan trays.
                   3.   Grasp the handles and pull the fan tray halfway out of the chassis.
                   4.   Place one hand under the fan tray to support it and pull the fan tray completely
                        out of the chassis.
                   5.   Repeat the procedure to remove the remaining front fan tray.




                                                               Removing Components from the Chassis        ■     101
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 47: Removing a Front Fan Tray




Installing the Chassis in the Rack Manually
                             To install the TX Matrix platform in the rack, follow this procedure (see
                             Figure 49 on page 104):


                             CAUTION: Before installing the TX Matrix platform in a front-mount rack, have a
                             qualified technician verify that the rack is strong enough to support the TX Matrix
                             platform's weight and is adequately supported at the installation site.



                             CAUTION: Lifting the chassis and mounting it in a rack requires four people. The
                             empty chassis weighs approximately 240 lb (109 kg).




102    ■    Installing the Chassis in the Rack Manually
                             Chapter 9: Installing the TX Matrix Platform Without a Mechanical Lift




1.   If you are installing the TX Matrix platform in an open-frame rack, ensure that
     the rack is in its permanent location and is secured to the building. Ensure that
     the installation site allows adequate clearance for both airflow and maintenance.
     For details, see “Preparing for TX Matrix Platform Installation” on page 65.
2.   Insert the captive screws of the handle into the holes previously occupied by the
     captive screws of the power supplies (see Figure 48 on page 103). Tighten the
     screws, using a Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2.

Figure 48: Attaching the Installation Handle




3.   Position the TX Matrix platform in front of the rack or cabinet, centering it in
     front of the mounting shelves. Use a pallet jack if one is available.


CAUTION: Do not lift the TX Matrix platform using the craft interface, installation
handle, or the handles on the sides of the chassis. Use these handles only to help
position the TX Matrix platform.


4.   With two people in the front and two people in the back, hold the bottom of the
     chassis and carefully lift it onto the mounting shelves.


WARNING: To prevent injury, keep your back straight and lift with your legs, not
your back. Avoid twisting your body as you lift. Balance the load evenly and be sure
that your footing is solid.


5.   With one person pulling on the installation handle from the rear of the rack or
     cabinet while two people push on the front-mounting flanges, slide the TX Matrix
     platform onto the mounting shelves until the mounting brackets or front-mounting
     flanges contact the rack rails or spacer bars (depending on your type of
     installation). The shelves ensure that the holes in the mounting brackets and the
     front-mounting flanges of the chassis align with the holes in the rack rails.




                                         Installing the Chassis in the Rack Manually    ■     103
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             6.     If you are installing the TX Matrix platform in a four-post rack or cabinet, install
                                    a mounting screw and a cage nut into each of the holes aligned with the threaded
                                    holes in the spacer bars. If you are installing the TX Matrix platform in an
                                    open-frame rack, install a mounting screw into each of the open mounting holes
                                    aligned with the rack, starting from the bottom.
                             7.     Using a Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2, loosen the captive screws on the
                                    installation handle completely, and remove the handle from the chassis.
                             8.     Visually inspect the alignment of the TX Matrix platform. If the TX Matrix platform
                                    is installed properly in the rack, all the mounting screws on one side of the rack
                                    should be aligned with the mounting screws on the opposite side and the
                                    TX Matrix platform should be level.


                             Figure 49: Installing the TX Matrix Platform in the Rack




                             NOTE: This illustration depicts the TX Matrix platform being installed in a four-post
                             rack. For an illustration of the mounting hardware required for an open-frame rack,
                             see Figure 36 on page 85.




104    ■    Installing the Chassis in the Rack Manually
                                                 Chapter 9: Installing the TX Matrix Platform Without a Mechanical Lift




Reinstalling Components in the Chassis
                    After the TX Matrix platform is installed in the rack, you reinstall the removed
                    components before cabling, booting, and configuring the TX Matrix platform. The
                    following procedures describe how to reinstall components in the chassis, first in the
                    rear and then in the front:
                    ■    Reinstalling the Rear Fan Tray on page 105
                    ■    Reinstalling TX-CBs on page 106
                    ■    Reinstalling the Power Supplies on page 107
                    ■    Reinstalling the TX-SIBs on page 108
                    ■    Reinstalling Front Fan Trays on page 109

Reinstalling the Rear Fan Tray
                    To reinstall the rear fan tray, follow this procedure (see Figure 50 on page 106):
                    1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                         connect the strap to an approved site ESD grounding point. For more information
                         about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                    2.   Grasp the fan tray by its handles and insert it straight into the chassis.
                    3.   Tighten the captive screws on the top and bottom of the fan tray faceplate to
                         secure it in the chassis.




                                                                Reinstalling Components in the Chassis      ■     105
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 50: Reinstalling the Rear Fan Tray




Reinstalling TX-CBs
                             To reinstall the TX-CBs, follow this procedure (see Figure 51 on page 107):
                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to an approved site ESD grounding point. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             2.     Ensure the ejector handles are not flush with the faceplate. If necessary, loosen
                                    the captive screws and flip the ejector handles outward.
                             3.     Carefully align the sides of the TX-CB with the guides inside the chassis.
                             4.     Slide the TX-CB into the chassis, carefully ensuring that it is correctly aligned.
                             5.     Grasp both ejector handles and press them inward to seat the TX-CB.
                             6.     Tighten the captive screws on the ejector handles, using a Phillips (+) screwdriver,
                                    number 2.




106    ■    Reinstalling Components in the Chassis
                                                Chapter 9: Installing the TX Matrix Platform Without a Mechanical Lift




                   7.   If applicable, reconnect the cable previously plugged into the CIP port.
                   8.   Repeat the procedure to reinstall the remaining TX-CB.


                   Figure 51: Reinstalling a TX-CB




Reinstalling the Power Supplies
                   To reinstall the power supplies, follow this procedure (see Figure 52 on page 108):
                   1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                        connect the strap to an approved site ESD grounding point. For more information
                        about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                   2.   Switch both circuit breakers on the power supply faceplate to the off position (O).
                   3.   Using both hands, slide the power supply into the chassis until you feel resistance.
                   4.   Twist the ejector handles at the upper corners of the power supply faceplate
                        clockwise until they stop.
                   5.   Tighten the captive screws at the lower corners of the power supply faceplate
                        to secure the power supply in the chassis.
                   6.   Repeat the procedure for the other power supply.




                                                               Reinstalling Components in the Chassis      ■     107
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 52: Reinstalling a Power Supply




Reinstalling the TX-SIBs
                             To reinstall the TX-SIBs, follow this procedure (see Figure 53 on page 109):


                             CAUTION: Be prepared to support the weight of the TX-SIB (approximately
                             35 lb [15.9 kg]) before you lift it.


                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to an approved site ESD grounding point. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             2.     Place one hand under the bottom edge of the TX-SIB and one hand around the
                                    top of the TX-SIB faceplate.


                             CAUTION: When the TX-SIB is out of the chassis, do not hold it by its ejector handles
                             or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight.


                             3.     Locate the slot in the TX-SIB card cage in which you plan to install the TX-SIB.
                             4.     Lift the TX-SIB into place and carefully align first the bottom, then the top of the
                                    TX-SIB with the guides inside the card cage.
                             5.     Carefully slide the TX-SIB all the way into the card cage until you feel resistance.
                             6.     Starting with the ejector handles on the top and bottom of the TX-SIB faceplate
                                    nearly horizontal, simultaneously turn both ejector handles clockwise to seat the
                                    TX-SIB.
                             7.     Repeat the procedure for each of the remaining TX-SIBs.




108    ■    Reinstalling Components in the Chassis
                                                 Chapter 9: Installing the TX Matrix Platform Without a Mechanical Lift




                    Figure 53: Reinstalling a TX-SIB




Reinstalling Front Fan Trays
                    To reinstall front fan trays, follow this procedure (see Figure 54 on page 110):
                    1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                         connect the strap to an approved site ESD grounding point. For more information
                         about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                    2.   Grasp one of the fan trays by its handles and insert it straight into the chassis.
                    3.   Tighten the captive screw on each side of the fan tray faceplate to secure it in
                         the chassis.
                    4.   Repeat the procedure to reinstall the remaining fan tray.




                                                                Reinstalling Components in the Chassis      ■     109
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 54: Reinstalling a Front Fan Tray




Installing the Cable Management System
                             After you have reinstalled all the hardware components, you can install the provided
                             comb panel assembly and the optional cable shelf assembly. For instructions, see
                             “Installing the Cable Management System” on page 92.




110    ■    Installing the Cable Management System
Chapter 10
Connecting the TX Matrix Platform

                 This chapter discusses the following procedures:
                 ■   Tools and Parts Required on page 111
                 ■   Grounding the TX Matrix Platform on page 112
                 ■   Connecting Power to the TX Matrix Platform on page 112
                 ■   Routing the Fiber-Optic Array Cables on page 114
                 ■   Connecting the TX Matrix Platform to Management and Alarm Devices on page 119
                 ■   Powering On the TX Matrix Platform on page 123
                 ■   Powering Off the TX Matrix Platform on page 124
                 ■   Testing and Connecting the TX Matrix Platform Fiber-Optic Connections on page
                     125


Tools and Parts Required
                 To connect the TX Matrix platform to T640 routing nodes, power, and management
                 devices and to power on the TX Matrix platform, you need the following tools and
                 parts:
                 ■   2.5-mm flat-blade (–) screwdriver for the alarm relay contacts
                 ■   7/16-in. hexagonal-head external drive socket wrench, or nut driver, with a
                     minimum of 23 lb-in. (2.6 Nm) and 25 lb-in. (2.8 Nm) tightening torque, for
                     tightening nuts to terminal studs on each power supply




                                                                     Tools and Parts Required   ■   111
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             CAUTION: Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench. A tool that does not fit
                             the nuts exactly can damage them. If a 7/16-in. tool is not available, use pliers or an
                             adjustable wrench.


                             ■      Wire cutters
                             ■      Pliers
                             ■      One fiber-optic array loopback connector for testing TX-SIBs and T640-SIBs
                             ■      One fiber-optic array loopback adapter for testing fiber-optic array cables
                             ■      Small slotted screwdriver, at least 4 in. long (for the fiber-optic array connectors)
                             ■      2.5-mm ball hex driver for the fiber-optic array loopback connector and adapter
                             ■      Dust-free resealable plastic bags for temporary storage of fiber-optic array adapter
                                    dust covers
                             ■      Lint-free swabs for cleaning optical components
                             ■      Isopropyl alcohol (99 percent) for cleaning optical components
                             ■      Dry cloth cleaning tool for cleaning optical components
                             ■      Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding wrist strap


Grounding the TX Matrix Platform
                             You ground the TX Matrix platform by attaching a grounding cable to the chassis.
                             You must provide the grounding cable (the cable lugs are supplied with the TX Matrix
                             platform). For grounding cable specifications, see “Chassis Grounding” on page 291.

                             To ground the TX Matrix platform, follow this procedure:
                             1.     Connect the grounding cable to a proper earth ground.
                             2.     Verify that a licensed electrician has attached the cable lug provided with the
                                    TX Matrix platform to the grounding cable.
                             3.     Place the grounding cable lug over the grounding points on the bottom rear of
                                    the chassis. The left pair is sized for M6 bolts, and the right pair is sized for UNC
                                    1/4-20 bolts.
                             4.     Secure the grounding cable lug to the grounding points, first with the washers,
                                    then with the screws.
                             5.     Verify that the grounding cabling is correct, that it is not touching or blocking
                                    access to TX Matrix platform components, and that it does not drape where
                                    people could trip on it.


Connecting Power to the TX Matrix Platform
                             You connect DC power to the TX Matrix platform by attaching power cables from
                             the DC power sources to the terminal studs on the power supply faceplates. To
                             connect power to the TX Matrix platform, you must provide power cables (the cable




112    ■    Grounding the TX Matrix Platform
                                                Chapter 10: Connecting the TX Matrix Platform




lugs are supplied with the TX Matrix platform). For power cable specifications, see
“DC Power Cable Specifications” on page 290.

To connect the DC source power cables to the TX Matrix platform, follow this
procedure for each power supply:
1.   Switch off the external circuit breakers. Ensure that the voltage across the DC
     power source cable leads is 0 V and that there is no chance that the cable leads
     might become active during installation.


CAUTION: There is no standard color coding for DC power cables. The color coding
used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding for
the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal studs on each power supply.
You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity. The power
source cables might be labeled (+) and (–) to indicate their polarity.


2.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
     connect the strap to an approved site ESD grounding point. For more information
     about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
3.   Switch the circuit breakers on the power supply faceplate to the off position (O).
4.   Remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal studs on the faceplate.
5.   Remove the nuts and washers from the terminal studs.
6.   Attach the lugs on the DC source power cables to the terminal studs, making
     sure the cables are not touching or in the way of any TX Matrix platform
     components:
     a.   Attach the positive (+) DC source power cable lugs to the RTN (return)
          terminals.

     b.   Attach the negative (–) DC source power cable lugs to the –48V (input)
          terminals.

     Secure the cable lugs to the terminal studs, first with the washers, then with the
     nuts. Use a 7/16-in. nut driver or wrench to tighten the nuts. Apply between 23
     lb-in. (2.6 Nm) and 25 lb-in. (2.8 Nm) of torque to each nut.


CAUTION: Each power supply must be connected to one dedicated DC power source
for each set of return and input terminals.


7.   Loosen the captive screws on the cable restraints on the right edge of the power
     supply faceplate.
8.   Route the positive and negative DC power cables through the top and bottom
     of each cable restraint.
9.   Tighten the cable restraint captive screws to hold the power cables in place.




                                       Connecting Power to the TX Matrix Platform   ■   113
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             10. Verify that the power cabling is correct, that the cables are not touching or
                                    blocking access to TX Matrix platform components, and that they do not drape
                                    where people could trip on them.
                             11. Replace the clear plastic cover over the terminal studs on the faceplate.


                             Figure 55: Connect DC Power to the TX Matrix Platform




Routing the Fiber-Optic Array Cables
                             This section describes the procedure for routing the fiber-optic array cables between
                             the TX Matrix platform and a T640 routing node. The procedure assumes you have
                             rack-mounted each system and procured cables of the appropriate length for your
                             routing matrix configuration.

                             A fiber-optic array cable 10 m long or less is uniformly flexible and has a fiber-optic
                             array connector on each end. A fiber-optic array cable greater than 10 m long has
                             3-m flexible ends, but the remainder of the cable is rigid. This type of cable has a
                             fiber-optic array connector on one end and a pulling-eye assembly on the other end,
                             which facilitates pulling the cable through raceways. After the cable is routed to its
                             destination, you replace the pulling-eye assembly with a fiber-optic array connector.


                             NOTE: You must use the same length for every fiber-optic array cable from a particular
                             T640 routing node to the TX Matrix platform. However, you do not need to use the
                             same length for all fiber-optic array cables within a routing matrix.


                             To route a fiber-optic array cable, follow this procedure:




114    ■    Routing the Fiber-Optic Array Cables
                                                                           Chapter 10: Connecting the TX Matrix Platform




                          NOTE: This procedure describes fiber-optic array cable routing only. Do not connect
                          the cable connectors to TX-SIB or T640-SIB adapters.


                          1.   Using the supplied label sheets, attach a label to each end of the fiber-optic array
                               cable to help you identify the corresponding TX-SIB adapter and T640-SIB. The
                               labels are marked with the chassis ID and the switching plane (separated with
                               a slash). For example, use the label marked 0/2 to identify a connection between
                               adapter LCC0 on TX-SIB-2 and T640-SIB-2 in routing node LCC0. Table 23 on page
                               115 lists the connections between TX-SIBs and T640-SIBs.

Table 23: Fiber-Optic Array Cable Connections between TX-SIBs and T640-SIBs

 TX-SIB-0 Adapter and   TX-SIB-1 Adapter and   TX-SIB-2 Adapter and   TX-SIB-3 Adapter and      TX-SIB-4 Adapter and
 Destination            Destination            Destination            Destination               Destination

 LCC0—T640-SIB-0 in     LCC0—T640-SIB-1 in     LCC0—T640-SIB-2 in     LCC0—T640-SIB-3 in        LCC0—T640-SIB-4 in
 LCC0                   LCC0                   LCC0                   LCC0                      LCC0

 LCC1—T640-SIB-0 in     LCC1—T640-SIB-1 in     LCC1—T640-SIB-2 in     LCC1—T640-SIB-3 in        LCC1—T640-SIB-4 in
 LCC1                   LCC1                   LCC1                   LCC1                      LCC1

 LCC2—T640-SIB-0 in     LCC2—T640-SIB-1 in     LCC2—T640-SIB-2 in     LCC2—T640-SIB-3 in        LCC2—T640-SIB-4 in
 LCC2                   LCC2                   LCC2                   LCC2                      LCC2

 LCC3—T640-SIB-0 in     LCC3—T640-SIB-1 in     LCC3—T640-SIB-2 in     LCC3—T640-SIB-3 in        LCC3—T640-SIB-4 in
 LCC3                   LCC3                   LCC3                   LCC3                      LCC3



                          2.   Route the end of the fiber-optic array cable that plugs into the TX-SIB over the
                               TX Matrix platform to the TX-SIB adapter. If you have installed the optional cable
                               shelf assembly, use the lowest shelf to support a cable destined to any TX-SIB
                               adapter labeled LCC0, use the next shelf up to support a cable destined to any
                               TX-SIB adapter labeled LCC1, and so on (see Figure 59 on page 119).


                          CAUTION: You must maintain a minimum bend radius of 2 in. (5.1 cm). We
                          recommend you maintain a bend radius of 10 in. (25.4 cm). If you must bend a
                          fiber-optic array cable to a 2-inch radius, we recommend you do not use more than
                          two such bends.



                          CAUTION: Plastic wrap-ties can damage or crimp the fiber-optic array cables (see
                          Figure 56 on page 116). We recommend you use soft band straps to secure fiber-optic
                          array cables.




                                                                        Routing the Fiber-Optic Array Cables   ■   115
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 56: Using Soft Band Straps to Secure Fiber-Optic Array Cables




                             3.     Grasp the metal cover on the comb within the comb panel assembly that extends
                                    over the TX-SIB you will be connecting. Firmly pull the cover away from the
                                    chassis until it is removed from the comb (see Figure 58 on page 118).
                             4.     While aligning the fiber-optic array cable connector with its corresponding TX-SIB
                                    adapter, route the cable upward along the comb tooth and press it into the tooth.
                                    Use the tooth closest to the chassis to support a cable destined to any TX-SIB
                                    adapter labeled LCC0, use the next tooth away from the chassis to support a
                                    cable destined to any TX-SIB adapter labeled LCC1, and so on (see
                                    Figure 59 on page 119).
                             5.     Reinstall the metal cover on the comb by firmly pressing it toward the chassis
                                    until it stops.
                             6.     Route the end of the fiber-optic array cable that plugs into the T640-SIB to the
                                    lower rear of the T640 routing node.
                             7.     Dress the fiber-optic array cable so it does not interfere with system airflow and
                                    maintenance access (see Figure 57 on page 117).




116    ■    Routing the Fiber-Optic Array Cables
                                              Chapter 10: Connecting the TX Matrix Platform




Figure 57: Maintaining a Minimum Bend Radius of 10 in. (25.4 cm)




    For an illustration of airflow through the TX Matrix platform and the T640 routing
    node, see Figure 15 on page 31 and the T640 Internet Routing Node Hardware
    Guide.

Repeat this procedure for each of the remaining fiber-optic array cables.




                                            Routing the Fiber-Optic Array Cables   ■   117
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 58: Removing a Comb Cover on the Comb Panel Assembly




118    ■    Routing the Fiber-Optic Array Cables
                                                                    Chapter 10: Connecting the TX Matrix Platform




                 Figure 59: Fiber-Optic Array Cable Routing Through Cable Management System




Connecting the TX Matrix Platform to Management and Alarm Devices
                 After you have installed the TX Matrix platform into the rack and routed the fiber-optic
                 array cables, attach one or more external devices to the ports on each TX-CIP that
                 connect to the Routing Engines for management and service operations (see




                                  Connecting the TX Matrix Platform to Management and Alarm Devices    ■    119
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 60 on page 120). For specifications for the cable accepted by the Routing Engine
                             management ports, see “Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire
                             Specifications” on page 297.

                             Figure 60: Routing Engine Management Ports and Alarm Relay Contacts




                             To connect external devices to the Routing Engine management ports, perform the
                             procedures described in the following sections:
                             ■      Connecting to a Network for Out-of-Band Management on page 121
                             ■      Connecting to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device on page 121
                             ■      Connecting to External Alarm-Reporting Devices on page 122




120    ■    Connecting the TX Matrix Platform to Management and Alarm Devices
                                                                      Chapter 10: Connecting the TX Matrix Platform




Connecting to a Network for Out-of-Band Management
                   To connect the Routing Engines in a TX Matrix platform to a network for out-of-band
                   management of the routing matrix, connect the provided UTP Category 5 Ethernet
                   cables with RJ-45/RJ-45 plugs to the ETHERNET ports on each TX-CIP. For cable
                   specifications, see “Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire
                   Specifications” on page 297.


                   NOTE: If your TX Matrix platform contains two host subsystems, we recommend
                   you connect each TX-CIP to a network for out-of-band management.


                   To connect the cables for out-of-band management, follow this procedure:
                   1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                        connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                        about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                   2.   Plug one end of a UTP Category 5 Ethernet cable (Figure 61 on page 121 shows
                        the connector) into the ETHERNET port on TX-CIP-0 (see Figure 60 on page 120).
                        This port connects to the Routing Engine in the upper Routing Engine slot (RE0).
                   3.   Plug the other end of the cable into the network device.
                   4.   Plug one end of another UTP Category 5 Ethernet cable into the ETHERNET port
                        on TX-CIP-1. This port connects to the Routing Engine in the lower Routing
                        Engine slot (RE1).
                   5.   Plug the other end of the cable into the network device.


                   Figure 61: Routing Engine Ethernet Cable Connector




Connecting to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device
                   To connect the Routing Engines in a TX Matrix platform to a system console to
                   configure and manage the routing matrix, connect the CONSOLE ports on the TX-CIPs
                   to the system console. To use a laptop, modem, or other auxiliary device, connect
                   it to the AUXILIARY port on the TX-CIP that corresponds to the master host subsystem.
                   Both ports accept an RS-232 (EIA-232) serial cable with DB-9/DB-9 connectors. For
                   cable specifications, see “Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire
                   Specifications” on page 297.


                   NOTE: If your TX Matrix platform contains two host subsystems, we recommend
                   you connect each TX-CIP to the system console.


                   To connect the cables for a management console or auxiliary device, follow this
                   procedure:




                                    Connecting the TX Matrix Platform to Management and Alarm Devices    ■    121
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             2.     If necessary, turn off the power to the console or auxiliary device.
                             3.     Plug the female end (shown in Figure 62 on page 122) of a serial cable into the
                                    appropriate CONSOLE or AUXILIARY port on TX-CIP-0 (see Figure 60 on page 120).
                                    This port connects to the Routing Engine in the upper Routing Engine slot (RE0).
                             4.     Using a 2.5-mm flat-blade screwdriver, tighten the screws on the connector.
                             5.     Attach the other end of the cable to the console or auxiliary device.
                             6.     Plug the female end of another serial cable into the appropriate CONSOLE or
                                    AUXILIARY port on TX-CIP-1. This port connects to the Routing Engine in the lower
                                    Routing Engine slot (RE1).
                             7.     Using a 2.5-mm flat-blade screwdriver, tighten the screws on the connector.
                             8.     Attach the other end of the cable to the console or auxiliary device.


                             Figure 62: Console and Auxiliary Serial Port Connector




Connecting to External Alarm-Reporting Devices
                             To connect the TX Matrix platform to external alarm-reporting devices, attach wires
                             to the RED ALARM and YELLOW ALARM relay contacts on a TX-CIP. A system condition
                             that triggers the red or yellow alarm LED on the craft interface also activates the
                             corresponding alarm relay contact.

                             The terminal blocks that plug into the alarm relay contacts are supplied with the
                             TX Matrix platform. They accept wire of any gauge between 28-AWG and 14-AWG
                             (0.08 and 2.08 mm2), which is not provided. Use the gauge of wire appropriate for
                             the external device you are connecting.

                             The alarms on TX-CIP-0 and TX-CIP-1 correspond to the Routing Engines in slots RE0
                             and RE1.


                             NOTE: If you are connecting to reporting devices and your TX Matrix platform
                             contains two host subsystems, we recommend you connect each relay contact on
                             each TX-CIP to a separate reporting device (for a total of either two or four devices).


                             To connect an external device to an alarm relay contact, follow this procedure for
                             each TX-CIP (see Figure 60 on page 120):




122    ■    Connecting the TX Matrix Platform to Management and Alarm Devices
                                                                  Chapter 10: Connecting the TX Matrix Platform




                 1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                      connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                      about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                 2.   Prepare the required length of wire with gauge between 28-AWG and 14-AWG
                      (0.08 and 2.08 mm2).
                 3.   While the terminal block is not plugged into the relay contact, use a 2.5-mm
                      flat-blade screwdriver to loosen the small screws on its side. With the small
                      screws on its side facing left, insert wires into the slots in the front of the block
                      based on the wiring for the external device. The top, middle, and bottom slots
                      correspond to NO (normally open), C (common), and NC (normally closed).
                      Tighten the screws to secure the wire.
                 4.   Plug the terminal block into the relay contact and use a 2.5-mm flat-blade
                      screwdriver to tighten the screws on the face of the block.
                 5.   Attach the other end of the wires to the external device.

                 To attach a reporting device for the other kind of alarm, repeat the procedure.


Powering On the TX Matrix Platform
                 After the TX Matrix platform is connected to management and alarm devices, power
                 it on and monitor the boot process. To power on the TX Matrix platform, follow this
                 procedure:
                 1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                      connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                      about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                 2.   Verify that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis and that the captive
                      screws on their faceplates are tightened.
                 3.   Verify that the source power cables are connected to the appropriate terminal:
                      the positive (+) source cable to the return terminal (labeled RTN) and the negative
                      (–) source cable to the input terminal (labeled –48V).
                 4.   Verify that external management devices are connected to the Routing Engine
                      ports on the TX-CIPs (ETHERNET, CONSOLE, or AUXILIARY). For more information
                      on connecting management devices, see “Connecting the TX Matrix Platform to
                      Management and Alarm Devices” on page 119.
                 5.   Verify that the M/S and CHASSIS ID switches on the faceplate of each TX-CB are
                      set to S and 0.
                 6.   If necessary, turn on the power to all external management devices.
                 7.   Switch the circuit breakers on one of the power supplies to the on position (|)
                      and observe the LEDs on the power supply faceplate. If the power supply is
                      correctly installed and is functioning properly, the DC OK LED lights steadily, and
                      the CB ON LED blinks momentarily, then lights steadily.




                                                                Powering On the TX Matrix Platform   ■    123
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             NOTE: After powering off a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning it
                             back on. After powering on a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning
                             it off.

                             If the system is completely powered off when you power on the power supply, the
                             Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence. If the
                             Routing Engine finishes booting and you need to power off the system again, first
                             issue the CLI request system halt command.

                             After a power supply is powered on, it can take up to 60 seconds for status
                             indicators—such as the output status LEDs on the power supply, the show chassis
                             command display, and messages on the LED display on the craft interface—to indicate
                             that the power supply is functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear
                             during the first 60 seconds.



                             8.     Repeat Step 7 for the remaining power supply.


                             NOTE: If any of the output status LEDs does not light steadily, repeat the installation
                             and cabling procedures described in “Reinstalling the Power Supplies” on page 107
                             and “Connecting Power to the TX Matrix Platform” on page 112.


                             9.     On the external management device connected to the Routing Engine, monitor
                                    the startup process to verify that the system has booted properly.


Powering Off the TX Matrix Platform
                             If you need to power off the TX Matrix platform, follow this procedure:
                             1.     On the external management device connected to the Routing Engine, issue the
                                    request system halt both-routing-engines operational mode command. The
                                    command shuts down the Routing Engines cleanly, so their state information is
                                    preserved. (If the TX Matrix platform contains only one Routing Engine, issue
                                    the request system halt command.)

                                       user@host> request system halt both-routing-engines



                                    Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system
                                    has halted. For more information about the command, see the JUNOS System
                                    Basics and Services Command Reference.
                             2.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             3.     Switch both circuit breakers on each power supply faceplate to the off position (O).




124    ■    Powering Off the TX Matrix Platform
                                                                        Chapter 10: Connecting the TX Matrix Platform




Testing and Connecting the TX Matrix Platform Fiber-Optic Connections
                    After the TX Matrix platform has successfully booted, you must test the integrity of
                    the TX Matrix platform fiber-optic connections, including the fiber-optic array adapters
                    on the TX-SIBs and the fiber-optic array cables that plug into them. These tests are
                    performed on the TX Matrix platform in standalone mode before you connect the
                    TX Matrix platform to a T640 routing node.


                    NOTE: While you install the TX Matrix platform or replace a fiber-optic array cable,
                    small deposits of oil, dust, and debris can enter the TX-SIB and T640-SIB fiber-optic
                    array adapters, the fiber-optic array cable connectors, and the loopback connectors
                    and adapters. We recommend you clean the optics in these components, as well as
                    the loopback connector and adapter dust covers, immediately before connecting
                    them. For cleaning instructions, see “Cleaning the Fiber-Optic
                    Components” on page 177.


                    To test and connect the TX Matrix platform fiber-optic array cables that you will
                    connect to a single T640 routing node, follow these procedures:
                    ■   Disabling and Enabling TX-SIB Fiber-Optic Array Adapter Receivers on page 125
                    ■   Testing the TX-SIB Fiber-Optic Array Adapters on page 125
                    ■   Connecting the Fiber-Optic Array Cables to a TX Matrix Platform on page 127
                    ■   Testing the Fiber-Optic Array Cables on page 128

Disabling and Enabling TX-SIB Fiber-Optic Array Adapter Receivers
                    During the initial testing of the TX-SIB fiber-optic array adapters and fiber-optic array
                    cables, you must disable or enable the TX-SIB adapter receivers, depending on the
                    operation you are performing.

                    To disable the TX-SIB adapter receivers, issue the following CLI command:

                    user@host> request chassis sib slot slot-number stop-receiver interface-number
                    scc

                    To enable the TX-SIB adapter receivers, issue the following CLI command:

                    user@host> request chassis sib slot slot-number start-receiver interface-number
                    scc

                    The slot number can be from 0 through 4 and corresponds to the TX-SIB chassis slot.
                    The interface number can be 0 through 3 and corresponds to the TX-SIB adapters
                    labeled LCC0 through LCC3.

Testing the TX-SIB Fiber-Optic Array Adapters
                    To test the TX-SIB fiber-optic array adapters, you use the fiber-optic array loopback
                    connector that is shipped with the TX Matrix platform (see Figure 63 on page 126).




                                    Testing and Connecting the TX Matrix Platform Fiber-Optic Connections   ■   125
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 63: Fiber-Optic Array Loopback Connector and Loopback Adapter




                             To perform this test for the five TX-SIB fiber-optic array adapters that connect to a
                             single T640 routing node, follow this procedure:


                             CAUTION: Do not connect and disconnect a fiber-optic array cable connector, a
                             loopback connector, or a loopback adapter more frequently than required to perform
                             the procedures in this hardware guide. These fiber-optic components are rated for
                             a limited number of insertions (approximately 100).


                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             2.     Remove the protective tape covering each of the five TX-SIB fiber-optic array
                                    adapters that connect to the T640 routing node. For example, if you are
                                    connecting a T640 routing node with a chassis ID of 0, remove the tape from
                                    each TX-SIB fiber-optic array adapter labeled LCC0 (top row of adapters).
                                    (Table 25 on page 138 lists the connections between TX-SIBs and T640-SIBs.)


                             CAUTION: Do not remove the protective tape covering unused fiber-optic array
                             adapters. The tape prevents dust from entering the adapters.


                             3.     Remove the dust cover from the loopback connector by loosening the two hex
                                    screws with a 2.5-mm ball hex driver and pulling off the cover. Temporarily store
                                    the dust cover in a dust-free resealable plastic bag.


                             WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic array adapter or a connector at the
                             end of a fiber-optic array cable attached to an adapter. The fiber optics emit laser
                             light that can damage your eyes.




126    ■    Testing and Connecting the TX Matrix Platform Fiber-Optic Connections
                                                                        Chapter 10: Connecting the TX Matrix Platform




                    4.   Starting with TX-SIB-0, align the loopback connector with the TX-SIB adapter and
                         carefully press it into the adapter until it stops. The loopback connector and
                         TX-SIB adapter are keyed to ensure proper mating.


                    NOTE: The optics in a fiber-optic array adapter are spring loaded, so you must
                    continue to apply force to a fiber-optic array cable connector or loopback connector
                    while securing it to a TX-SIB or T640-SIB adapter.


                    5.   Using a 2.5-mm ball hex driver, at least 4 in. long, partially tighten the upper
                         and lower hex screws on the loopback connector. Alternate between the upper
                         and lower hex screws until the loopback connector is secured to the adapter.
                    6.   Enable the TX-SIB adapter receivers as described in “Disabling and Enabling
                         TX-SIB Fiber-Optic Array Adapter Receivers” on page 125.
                    7.   Verify that the RX LED next to the TX-SIB adapter is steadily lit green.
                    8.   Disable the TX-SIB adapter receivers as described in “Disabling and Enabling
                         TX-SIB Fiber-Optic Array Adapter Receivers” on page 125.
                    9.   Using a 2.5-mm ball hex driver, at least 4 in. long, partially loosen the upper and
                         lower hex screws on the loopback connector. Alternate between the upper and
                         lower hex screws until the loopback connector is removed from the adapter.
                    10. Repeat Step 4 through Step 9 for TX-SIB-1 through TX-SIB-4. If the RX LED next
                         to each of the five TX-SIB adapters was steadily lit green, proceed to Step 14.
                    11. If the RX LED next to any of the five TX-SIB adapters was not steadily lit green,
                         disable the adapter receivers (see “Disabling and Enabling TX-SIB Fiber-Optic
                         Array Adapter Receivers” on page 125), remove the loopback connector, and
                         clean it and the TX-SIB adapter. For cleaning instructions, see “Cleaning the
                         Fiber-Optic Components” on page 177.
                    12. After you have cleaned the fiber-optic array adapter and the loopback connector,
                         reconnect them as described in Step 4 through Step 5.
                    13. Enable the TX-SIB adapter receivers and verify the state of the RX LED as
                         described in Step 6 through Step 7. If the RX LED next to the TX-SIB adapter is
                         not steadily lit green, contact your customer support representative for additional
                         instructions. Do not proceed with the installation of the TX Matrix platform until
                         you have spoken to your customer support representative.
                    14. Remove a dust cover from the dust-free resealable plastic bag and reinstall it on
                         the loopback connector. Align the dust cover with the loopback connector and
                         carefully press them together until they stop. The cover and the loopback
                         connector are keyed to ensure proper mating.
                    15. Secure the dust cover by tightening the hex screws, then store the loopback
                         connector in the dust-free resealable plastic bag.


Connecting the Fiber-Optic Array Cables to a TX Matrix Platform
                    After you have tested the TX-SIB fiber-optic array adapters, you connect the fiber-optic
                    array cables to them. The procedure in this section assumes you have labeled both
                    ends of each fiber-optic array cable and routed them immediately in front of their




                                    Testing and Connecting the TX Matrix Platform Fiber-Optic Connections   ■   127
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             corresponding TX-SIB fiber-optic array adapters (for more information, see “Routing
                             the Fiber-Optic Array Cables” on page 114). To connect the five fiber-optic array cables
                             to the five TX-SIB fiber-optic array adapters used to connect a single T640 routing
                             node, follow this procedure:
                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             2.     Ensure that each TX-SIB fiber-optic array adapter immediately in front of each
                                    fiber-optic array cable connector corresponds to the label you attached to the
                                    end of each cable.
                             3.     If the receivers of the five TX-SIB adapters you are connecting are enabled,
                                    disable them as described in “Disabling and Enabling TX-SIB Fiber-Optic Array
                                    Adapter Receivers” on page 125.
                             4.     Remove the dust cover from the fiber-optic array cable connector that connects
                                    to TX-SIB-0. To remove the dust cover, loosen the thumbscrew and captive screw
                                    on the connector. (Use the supplied small slotted screwdriver to loosen the captive
                                    screw.) Store the dust cover in a dust-free resealable plastic bag.


                             WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic array adapter or a connector at the
                             end of a fiber-optic array cable attached to an adapter. The fiber optics emit laser
                             light that can damage your eyes.


                             5.     Align the cable connector with the corresponding TX-SIB adapter and carefully
                                    press it into the adapter until it stops. The cable connector and adapter are keyed
                                    to ensure proper mating.


                             NOTE: The optics in a fiber-optic array adapter are spring loaded, so you must
                             continue to apply force to a fiber-optic array cable connector or loopback connector
                             while securing it to a TX-SIB or T640-SIB adapter.


                             6.     Partially tighten the thumbscrew and captive screw on the fiber-optic array cable
                                    connector. (Use the supplied small slotted screwdriver to tighten the captive
                                    screw.) Alternate between the thumbscrew and captive screw until the cable
                                    connector is secured to the adapter.
                             7.     Repeat Step 4 through Step 6 for the four remaining fiber-optic array cables that
                                    connect to TX-SIB-1 through TX-SIB-4.


Testing the Fiber-Optic Array Cables
                             To test the fiber-optic array cables, you use the fiber-optic array loopback adapter
                             that is shipped with the TX Matrix platform (see Figure 63 on page 126). To perform
                             this test for the five fiber-optic array cables that connect to a single T640 routing
                             node, follow this procedure:




128    ■    Testing and Connecting the TX Matrix Platform Fiber-Optic Connections
                                                    Chapter 10: Connecting the TX Matrix Platform




1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
     connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
     about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
2.   Remove the dust cover from the loopback adapter by loosening the two hex
     screws with a 2.5-mm hex Allen wrench and pulling off the cover. Temporarily
     store the dust cover in a dust-free resealable plastic bag.
3.   Remove the dust cover from the fiber-optic array cable connector that connects
     to T640-SIB-0. To remove the dust cover, loosen the thumbscrew and captive
     screw on the connector. (Use the supplied small slotted screwdriver to loosen
     the captive screw.) Temporarily store the dust cover in a dust-free resealable
     plastic bag.


WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic array adapter or a connector at the
end of a fiber-optic array cable attached to an adapter. The fiber optics emit laser
light that can damage your eyes.


4.   Align the loopback adapter with the cable connector and carefully press it into
     the connector until it stops. The loopback adapter and the cable connector are
     keyed to ensure proper mating.


NOTE: The optics in a fiber-optic array cable connector are spring loaded, so you
must continue to apply force to the loopback adapter while securing it to the cable
connector.


5.   Using a 2.5-mm ball hex driver, at least 4 in. long, partially tighten the upper
     and lower hex screws on the loopback adapter. Alternate between the upper
     and lower hex screws until the loopback adapter is secured to the fiber-optic
     array cable connector.
6.   Enable the TX-SIB adapter receivers as described in “Disabling and Enabling
     TX-SIB Fiber-Optic Array Adapter Receivers” on page 125.
7.   Verify that the RX LED next to the TX-SIB adapter is steadily lit green.
8.   Disable the TX-SIB adapter receivers as described in “Disabling and Enabling
     TX-SIB Fiber-Optic Array Adapter Receivers” on page 125.
9.   Using a 2.5-mm ball hex driver, at least 4 in. long, partially loosen the upper and
     lower hex screws on the loopback adapter. Alternate between the upper and
     lower hex screws until the loopback adapter is removed from the fiber-optic
     array cable connector.
10. Remove a dust cover from the dust-free resealable plastic bag and reinstall it on
     the fiber-optic array cable connector. Align the dust cover with the cable connector
     and carefully press them together until they stop. The cover and the cable
     connector are keyed to ensure proper mating. Secure the dust cover by tightening
     the thumbscrew and captive screw on the connector. (Use the supplied small
     slotted screwdriver to tighten the captive screw.)




                Testing and Connecting the TX Matrix Platform Fiber-Optic Connections   ■   129
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             11. Repeat Step 3 through Step 10 for the fiber-optic array cables destined to
                                    T640-SIB-1 through T640-SIB-4. If the RX LED next to each of the five TX-SIB
                                    adapters was steadily lit green, proceed to Step 15.
                             12. If the RX LED next to any of the five TX-SIB adapters was not steadily lit green,
                                    disable the adapter receivers (see “Disabling and Enabling TX-SIB Fiber-Optic
                                    Array Adapter Receivers” on page 125), remove the loopback adapter, and clean
                                    it and the fiber-optic array cable connector. For cleaning instructions, see
                                    “Cleaning the Fiber-Optic Components” on page 177.
                             13. After you have cleaned the fiber-optic array cable connector and the loopback
                                    adapter, reconnect them as described in Step 4 through Step 5.
                             14. Enable the TX-SIB adapter receivers and verify the state of the RX LED as
                                    described in Step 6 through Step 7. If the RX LED next to the TX-SIB adapter is
                                    not steadily lit green, contact your customer support representative for additional
                                    instructions. Do not proceed with the installation of the TX Matrix platform until
                                    you have spoken to your customer support representative.
                             15. Remove a dust cover from the dust-free resealable plastic bag and reinstall it on
                                    the loopback adapter. Align the dust cover with the loopback adapter and carefully
                                    press them together until they stop. The cover and the loopback adapter are
                                    keyed to ensure proper mating.
                             16. Secure the dust cover by tightening the hex screws, then store the loopback
                                    adapter in the dust-free resealable plastic bag.




130    ■    Testing and Connecting the TX Matrix Platform Fiber-Optic Connections
Chapter 11
Configuring the TX Matrix

                  ■   Configuring the TX Matrix Platform on page 131


Configuring the TX Matrix Platform
                  The TX Matrix platform is shipped with the JUNOS software preinstalled and ready
                  to be configured when the TX Matrix platform is powered on. There are three copies
                  of the software: one on a nonrotating internal compact flash disk in the Routing
                  Engine, one on a rotating hard disk in the Routing Engine, and one on a PC Card
                  that can be inserted into the slot in the Routing Engine faceplate.

                  When the TX Matrix platform boots, it first attempts to start the image on the PC
                  Card. If a PC Card is not inserted into the Routing Engine or the attempt otherwise
                  fails, the TX Matrix platform next tries the compact flash disk (if installed), and finally
                  the hard disk.

                  You configure the TX Matrix platform by issuing JUNOS command-line interface (CLI)
                  commands, either on a console device attached to the CONSOLE port on the TX-CIP,
                  or over a telnet connection to a network connected to the ETHERNET port on the
                  TX-CIP.


                  NOTE: You configure and manage the TX Matrix platform and all T640 routing nodes
                  in the routing matrix through the CLI on the TX Matrix platform.


                  Gather the following information before configuring the TX Matrix platform:
                  ■   Name the TX Matrix platform will use on the network
                  ■   Domain name the TX Matrix platform will use
                  ■   IP address and prefix length information for the Ethernet interface
                  ■   IP address of a default TX Matrix platform
                  ■   IP address of a DNS server
                  ■   Password for the root user




                                                                   Configuring the TX Matrix Platform   ■   131
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             This procedure connects the router to the network but does not enable it to forward
                             traffic. For complete information about enabling the router to forward traffic, including
                             examples, see the JUNOS software configuration guides.

                             To configure the software, follow this procedure:
                             1.     Verify that the TX Matrix platform is powered on as described in “Powering On
                                    the TX Matrix Platform” on page 123.
                             2.     Log in as the “root” user. There is no password.
                             3.     Start the CLI.

                                      root# cli
                                      root@>

                             4.     Enter configuration mode.

                                      cli> configure
                                      [edit]
                                      root@#

                             5.     Configure the name of the TX Matrix platform. If the name includes spaces,
                                    enclose the name in quotation marks (“ ”).

                                      [edit]
                                      root@# set system host-name host-name

                             6.     Configure the TX Matrix platform’s domain name.

                                      [edit]
                                      root@# set system domain-name domain-name

                             7.     Configure the IP address and prefix length for the TX Matrix platform’s Ethernet
                                    interface.

                                      [edit]
                                      root@# set interfaces fxp0 unit 0 family inet address address/prefix-length

                             8.     Configure the IP address of a backup TX Matrix platform, which is used only
                                    while the routing protocol is not running.

                                      [edit]
                                      root@# set system backup-router address

                             9.     Configure the IP address of a DNS server.

                                      [edit]
                                      root@# set system name-server address

                             10. Set the root authentication password by entering either a clear-text password,
                                    an encrypted password, or an SSH public key string (DSA or RSA).

                                      [edit]
                                      root@# set system root-authentication plain-text-password
                                      New password: password
                                      Retype new password: password




132    ■    Configuring the TX Matrix Platform
                                                          Chapter 11: Configuring the TX Matrix




    or

         [edit]
         root@# set system root-authentication encrypted-password encrypted-password

    or

         [edit]
         root@# set system root-authentication ssh-dsa public-key

    or

         [edit]
         root@# set system root-authentication ssh-rsa public-key

11. Optionally, display the configuration to verify that it is correct.

         [edit]
         root@# show
         system {
            host-name host-name;
            domain-name domain-name;
            backup-router address;
            root-authentication {
              authentication-method (password | public-key);
            }
            name-server {
              address;
            }
         }
         interfaces {
            fxp0 {
              unit 0 {
                 family inet {
                   address address/prefix-length;
                 }
              }
            }
         }

12. Commit the configuration to activate it on the TX Matrix platform.

         [edit]
         root@# commit

13. Optionally, configure additional properties by adding the necessary configuration
    statements. Then commit the changes to activate them on the TX Matrix platform.

         [edit]
         root@host# commit

14. When you have finished configuring the TX Matrix platform, exit configuration
    mode.

         [edit]
         root@host# exit




                                                 Configuring the TX Matrix Platform   ■   133
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                                     root@host>




134    ■    Configuring the TX Matrix Platform
Chapter 12
Converting the T640 Routing Node

                 This chapter discusses the following procedures:
                 ■   Tools and Parts Required on page 135
                 ■   T640 Routing Node Conversion Overview on page 135
                 ■   Control and Switching Planes Connections on page 136
                 ■   Converting an Offline or Operational T640 Routing Node on page 139


Tools and Parts Required
                 To convert a T640 routing node, you need the following tools and parts:
                 ■   Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
                 ■   Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding wrist strap


T640 Routing Node Conversion Overview
                 If your T640 routing node is not shipped from Juniper Networks with the hardware
                 and software components required to connect it to a TX Matrix platform, you must
                 convert the routing node by performing the following tasks:
                 ■   Upgrade the software to JUNOS Release 7.0 or later.
                 ■   Upgrade the firmware on the FPCs.
                 ■   Replace the standard rear fan tray with a different model required to cool the
                     chassis.
                 ■   Replace the standard CBs with T-CBs.
                 ■   Replace the standard SIBs with T640-SIBs.

                 You can convert your existing T640 routing node by ordering and installing a kit that
                 contains these hardware components, or you can order a T640 routing node with
                 the hardware and software components already installed.

                 Figure 20 on page 36 and Figure 64 on page 136 illustrate the difference between a
                 T-CB and a CB. Figure 19 on page 35 and Figure 65 on page 136 illustrate the difference
                 between a T640-SIB and a SIB. The rear fan tray required for the converted T640
                 routing node contains eight fans (the fan tray being replaced has five blowers).




                                                                       Tools and Parts Required   ■   135
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             If your T640 routing node already contains T-CBs and the new rear fan tray, but
                             contains standards SIBs, you can order and install a kit that contains only T640-SIBs.

                             Figure 64: T640 Routing Node CB




                             Figure 65: T640 Routing Node SIB




Control and Switching Planes Connections
                             The TX Matrix platform can connect from one to four T640 routing nodes through
                             redundant control and switching (data) planes. The following sections describe these
                             connections:
                             ■      Control Plane Connections on page 136
                             ■      Switching Plane Connections on page 137

Control Plane Connections
                             The control plane connections between the T640 routing nodes and the TX Matrix
                             platform are provided by UTP Category 5 Ethernet cables between the RJ-45 ports
                             on the TX-CIPs in the TX Matrix platform and the T-CBs in the T640 routing nodes.
                             The maximum length supported is 100 m. The UTP Category 5 cables do not have
                             to be the same length. The cable wiring is straight-through (not crossover).

                             Table 24 on page 137 shows these connections. Each column represents a TX-CIP
                             (TX-CIP-0 and TX-CIP-1), and each cell within a column represents a port on that TX-CIP.




136    ■    Control and Switching Planes Connections
                                                                 Chapter 12: Converting the T640 Routing Node




                  Each cell specifies the TX-CIP port (LCC0 through LCC3) and its connection to the
                  port labeled CIP on a T-CB in one of the T640 routing nodes. For example, port LCC0
                  on TX-CIP-0 is connected to T-CB-0 in chassis LCC0, port LCC1 on TX-CIP-0 is connected
                  to T-CB-0 in chassis LCC1, and so on.


                  NOTE: The RJ-45 port labeled AUX on a T-CB is reserved for future use.


                  The cable connections provided in Table 24 on page 137 apply to routing matrix
                  configurations using from one through four T640 routing nodes. For example, if you
                  have a single T640 routing node in your configuration, the connections from each
                  TX-CIP to chassis LCC0 are presented in the first row of the table. If you have two
                  T640 routing nodes in your configuration, the connections from each TX-CIP to
                  chassis LCC0 and LCC1 are presented in the first two rows of the table, and so on.


                  NOTE: The RJ-45 ports labeled LCC4 through LCC7 on a TX-CIP are reserved for future
                  use.



                  Table 24: Cable Connections between TX-CIPs and T-CBs

                    TX-CIP-0 Port and Destination             TX-CIP-1 Port and Destination

                    LCC0—T-CB-0 in LCC0                       LCC0—T-CB-1 in LCC0

                    LCC1—T-CB-0 in LCC1                       LCC1—T-CB-1 in LCC1

                    LCC2—T-CB-0 in LCC2                       LCC2—T-CB-1 in LCC2

                    LCC3—T-CB-0 in LCC3                       LCC3—T-CB-1 in LCC3




Switching Plane Connections
                  The switching plane connections between the T640 routing nodes and the TX Matrix
                  platform are provided by the fiber-optic array cables that connect the T640-SIBs to
                  the TX-SIBs. Table 25 on page 138 shows these connections. Each column represents
                  a TX-SIB (TX-SIB-0 through TX-SIB-4), and each cell within a column represents an
                  adapter on that TX-SIB. Each cell specifies the TX-SIB adapter (LCC0 through LCC3)
                  and its connection to a T640-SIB in one of the T640 routing nodes. For example,
                  adapter LCC0 on TX-SIB-0 is connected to T640-SIB-0 in chassis LCC0, adapter LCC1
                  on TX-SIB-0 is connected to T640-SIB-0 in chassis LCC1, and so on.

                  The cable connections provided in Table 25 on page 138 apply to routing matrix
                  configurations using from one through four T640 routing nodes. For example, if you
                  have a single T640 routing node in your configuration, the connections from each
                  TX-SIB to chassis LCC0 are presented in the first row of the table. If you have two
                  T640 routing nodes in your configuration, the connections from each TX-SIB to
                  chassis LCC0 and LCC1 are presented in the first two rows of the table, and so on.




                                                         Control and Switching Planes Connections   ■   137
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




Table 25: Fiber-Optic Array Cable Connections between TX-SIBs and T640-SIBs

 TX-SIB-0 Adapter and      TX-SIB-1 Adapter and    TX-SIB-2 Adapter and   TX-SIB-3 Adapter and   TX-SIB-4 Adapter and
 Destination               Destination             Destination            Destination            Destination

 LCC0—T640-SIB-0 in        LCC0—T640-SIB-1 in      LCC0—T640-SIB-2 in     LCC0—T640-SIB-3 in     LCC0—T640-SIB-4 in
 LCC0                      LCC0                    LCC0                   LCC0                   LCC0

 LCC1—T640-SIB-0 in        LCC1—T640-SIB-1 in      LCC1—T640-SIB-2 in     LCC1—T640-SIB-3 in     LCC1—T640-SIB-4 in
 LCC1                      LCC1                    LCC1                   LCC1                   LCC1

 LCC2—T640-SIB-0 in        LCC2—T640-SIB-1 in      LCC2—T640-SIB-2 in     LCC2—T640-SIB-3 in     LCC2—T640-SIB-4 in
 LCC2                      LCC2                    LCC2                   LCC2                   LCC2

 LCC3—T640-SIB-0 in        LCC3—T640-SIB-1 in      LCC3—T640-SIB-2 in     LCC3—T640-SIB-3 in     LCC3—T640-SIB-4 in
 LCC3                      LCC3                    LCC3                   LCC3                   LCC3



                             Figure 66 on page 139 shows the control and switching planes connections between
                             the TX Matrix platform and a T640 routing node.


                             NOTE: Because the T640-SIB adapters and fiber-optic array cable connectors extend
                             beyond the rear of the chassis, you need a minimum of 4 inches of clearance in the
                             rear of a T640 routing node installed in a cabinet.




138    ■    Control and Switching Planes Connections
                                                                   Chapter 12: Converting the T640 Routing Node




                  Figure 66: Control and Switching Planes Connections




Converting an Offline or Operational T640 Routing Node
                  Before you integrate a T640 routing node with the TX Matrix platform, you must
                  convert the T640 routing node by replacing certain hardware and software
                  components. (For an overview of the conversion, see “T640 Routing Node Conversion
                  Overview” on page 135.) This section describes the following conversion tasks, which
                  apply to both offline and operational T640 routing nodes:
                  ■   Upgrading the JUNOS Software on page 140
                  ■   Preparing the T640 Routing Node for Graceful Switchover on page 140
                  ■   Upgrading the FPC Firmware on page 142
                  ■   Merging the T640 Routing Node Configuration into the TX Matrix Platform
                      Configuration on page 143

                  After you convert the T640 routing node, you integrate it with the TX Matrix platform.
                  If the T640 routing node is offline (not passing traffic), use the procedures described
                  in “Integrating an Offline T640 Routing Node with the TX Matrix




                                              Converting an Offline or Operational T640 Routing Node   ■   139
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Platform” on page 145. If the T640 routing node is operational (passing traffic), use
                             the procedures described in “Integrating an Operational T640 Routing Node with
                             the TX Matrix Platform” on page 155. When you integrate an operational T640 routing
                             node with the TX Matrix platform, the T640 routing node continues to pass traffic
                             until it is rebooted.


                             NOTE: The procedures for replacing standard CBs and SIBs with T-CBs and T640-SIBs
                             are different for offline and operational T640 routing nodes. To replace CBs and SIBs,
                             see either “Integrating an Offline T640 Routing Node with the TX Matrix
                             Platform” on page 145 or “Integrating an Operational T640 Routing Node with the
                             TX Matrix Platform” on page 155.



Upgrading the JUNOS Software
                             If the version of the JUNOS software running on the T640 routing node is earlier than
                             Release 7.0, you must upgrade the software before connecting it to the TX Matrix
                             platform. For information about installing and upgrading JUNOS software, see the
                             JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide.

                             After you have upgraded the software on the router and are satisfied that the new
                             packages are successfully installed and running, issue the request system snapshot
                             command to back up the new software. For more information, see the JUNOS System
                             Basics and Services Command Reference.

                             If you are integrating an operational T640 routing node with the TX Matrix platform,
                             the TX Matrix platform and T640 routing node must each contain two host
                             subsystems, and all host subsystems must be running the same JUNOS software
                             release. This is a requirement for graceful switchover, which is a requirement for
                             integrating an operational T640 routing node with the TX Matrix platform. For
                             information about graceful switchover, see the JUNOS System Basics Configuration
                             Guide.


                             NOTE: We recommend you run the same JUNOS software release on the master and
                             backup Routing Engines. If you elect to run different JUNOS software releases on the
                             Routing Engines, a change in Routing Engine mastership can cause one or all T640
                             routing nodes to be logically disconnected from the TX Matrix platform. For more
                             information, see “Running Different JUNOS Software Releases on the Routing
                             Engines” on page 50.



Preparing the T640 Routing Node for Graceful Switchover
                             If you are integrating an operational T640 routing node with the TX Matrix platform,
                             you must prepare the T640 routing node for graceful switchover. If you are integrating
                             an offline T640 routing node with the TX Matrix platform, this procedure is optional,
                             and you can proceed to “Upgrading the FPC Firmware” on page 142.




140    ■    Converting an Offline or Operational T640 Routing Node
                                                  Chapter 12: Converting the T640 Routing Node




NOTE: We recommend you run JUNOS Release 7.3 or later on the TX Matrix platform
to support graceful switchover.


To prepare the T640 routing node for graceful switchover, follow this procedure:
1.   Verify that graceful switchover is enabled on the T640 routing node by displaying
     its configuration at the [edit chassis redundancy graceful-switchover] hierarchy
     level:

        user@host> show configuration chassis redundancy graceful-switchover

        traceoptions {
            flag update;
        }
        enable;



     If graceful switchover is not enabled, enable it in configuration mode as follows:

        user@host# set chassis redundancy graceful-switchover enable



     For more information about graceful switchover, see the JUNOS System Basics
     Configuration Guide.
2.   Verify the state of the Packet Forwarding Engines by issuing the show pfe terse
     command on the master and backup Routing Engines:

        user@host> show pfe terse

        Slot Type Slot        State        Uptime
         0   GFPC Present     Online       03:46:19
         1   RE   Present     Online       03:47:09



     Verify that the State field of each Packet Forwarding Engine and the backup
     Routing Engine is Online.

        user@host> request routing-engine login other-routing-engine



        % cli



        user@host> show pfe terse

        Slot Type Slot        State        Uptime
         0   GFPC Present     Valid        03:46:19



     Verify that the State field of each Packet Forwarding Engine is Valid.




                             Converting an Offline or Operational T640 Routing Node   ■   141
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             3.     Verify that the T640 routing node Routing Engines are ready for a graceful
                                    switchover by issuing the show system switchover command on the backup
                                    Routing Engine:

                                       user@host> show system switchover

                                       Graceful switchover: On
                                       Configuration database: Ready
                                       Kernel database: Ready



                                    If the status of graceful switchover is not On, or the configuration and kernel
                                    database status are not Ready, see the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide
                                    for instructions. Do not continue integrating an operational T640 routing node
                                    with the TX Matrix platform until the Routing Engines are ready for a graceful
                                    switchover.
                             4.     Log out of the backup Routing Engine:

                                       user@host> exit



                                       % exit

                             5.     Issue the commit synchronize command and ensure that there are no
                                    synchronization errors:

                                       user@host# commit synchronize




Upgrading the FPC Firmware
                             Before integrating the T640 routing node with the TX Matrix platform, you might
                             have to upgrade the firmware on one or more FPCs in the T640 routing node. To
                             upgrade the firmware, you must contact your customer support representative.

                             To determine if you need to upgrade the FPC firmware, display the version of the
                             firmware on all FPCs by issuing the show system firmware command:

                             user@host> show system firmware
                             Part             Type           Tag Current       Available Status
                                                                 version       version
                             FPC 0            ROM Monitor 0 0    6.4.18                  OK
                               PIC 0          ATM 1/0 FLASH 0    ??                      OK
                               PIC 0          ATM 1/0 FLASH 1    ??                      OK
                               PIC 1          DCHIP 1/1      0   5                       OK
                               PIC 2          DCHIP 1/2      0   5                       OK
                               PIC 3          QGE 1/3        1   4                       OK
                             ...

                             If the Current version field is not 6.4.18 or later for any FPC, you must upgrade the
                             firmware for that FPC.




142    ■    Converting an Offline or Operational T640 Routing Node
                                                                     Chapter 12: Converting the T640 Routing Node




Merging the T640 Routing Node Configuration into the TX Matrix Platform Configuration
                   Using the current T640 routing node configuration, create a configuration file on the
                   T640 routing node that will be merged into the TX Matrix platform configuration:
                   1.   Save the T640 routing node configuration. For example:

                           user@host# save t640-config.conf

                   2.   As described in “Configuration Groups” on page 49, special configuration groups
                        re0 and re1 apply to the Routing Engines in slots 0 and 1 of the TX Matrix
                        platform. If the T640 routing node configuration contains these groups, you must
                        change them to lcclcc-number-re0 and lcclcc-number-re1, where lcc-number equals
                        the chassis ID of the routing node.
                   3.   If the configuration includes special Routing Engine configuration groups, include
                        the apply-groups statement at the [edit] hierarchy level. For example:

                          apply-groups [ lcc0-re0 lcc0-re1 ]

                   4.   Change the configuration hierarchy of all statements at the [edit chassis
                        fpc slot-number] hierarchy level to the [edit chassis lcc lcc-number fpc slot-number]
                        hierarchy level.
                   5.   If the chassis ID of the T640 routing node is 0, you do not need to change
                        interface names or the configuration hierarchy of any other statements.
                        Otherwise, you must modify the FPC number throughout the configuration based
                        on the chassis ID you select. For more information, see “Chassis and Interface
                        Names” on page 46.
                   6.   Save the modified T640 routing node configuration using a different filename
                        from the one you selected in Step 1. For example:

                           user@host# save tx-config.conf




                   NOTE: Do not commit the configuration.


                   7.   Transfer the modified T640 routing node configuration to the TX Matrix platform.
                        You can use an intermediate server on the out-of-band management network
                        accessible by both the T640 routing node and the TX Matrix platform.
                   8.   On an external management device connected to the console or auxiliary port
                        of the TX-CIP, load the configuration saved in 6. Use the merge option as follows:

                           user@host# load merge tx-config.conf

                   9.   Commit the configuration on both the master and the backup Routing Engines.

                           user@host# commit synchronize




                                                Converting an Offline or Operational T640 Routing Node   ■   143
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             NOTE: If you elect to run different JUNOS software releases on the Routing Engines,
                             or if you want a different configuration on the backup Routing Engine, issue the
                             commit command without the synchronize option. In either case, you must create a
                             configuration for the backup Routing Engine. To do this, log in to the backup Routing
                             Engine and follow the procedure in this section. The TX Matrix platform will copy
                             this configuration to all the backup Routing Engines in the routing matrix after control
                             is transferred to the TX Matrix platform.



                             This is an example of a modified T640 routing node configuration at the
                             [group lcc0-re0] hierarchy level:

                               group lcc0-re0 {
                                 system {
                                    host-name host-name;
                                    backup-router address destination destination-address;
                                 }
                                 interfaces {
                                    fxp0 {
                                      unit 0 {
                                        family inet {
                                           address address/prefix-length
                                        }
                                      }
                                    }
                                 }
                               }




144    ■    Converting an Offline or Operational T640 Routing Node
Chapter 13
Integrating an Offline T640 Routing Node
with the TX Matrix Platform

                  This chapter describes how to integrate an offline T640 routing node with the
                  TX Matrix platform. Before you connect a T640 routing node to the TX Matrix
                  platform, you must perform the conversion tasks described in “Converting an Offline
                  or Operational T640 Routing Node” on page 139.

                  To integrate an offline T640 routing node with the TX Matrix platform, follow these
                  procedures:
                  ■    Tools and Parts Required on page 145
                  ■    Replacing the Rear Fan Tray on page 145
                  ■    Replacing the Standard CBs and SIBs in the T640 Routing Node on page 146
                  ■    Connecting an Offline T640 Routing Node to the TX Matrix Platform on page 147
                  ■    Powering On the T640 Routing Node on page 149
                  ■    Verifying the State of the Routing Matrix on page 150


Tools and Parts Required
                  To connect the TX Matrix platform to an offline T640 routing node, you need the
                  following tools and parts:
                  ■    Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
                  ■    Small slotted screwdriver, at least 4 in. long (for the fiber-optic array connectors)
                  ■    Dust-free resealable plastic bags for temporary storage of fiber-optic array adapter
                       dust covers
                  ■    Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding wrist strap


Replacing the Rear Fan Tray
                  To replace the rear fan tray with the new one, follow this procedure:
                  1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                       connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                       about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.




                                                                          Tools and Parts Required   ■   145
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             2.     Replace the rear fan tray with the model required for a converted T640 routing
                                    node. Use the standard replacement procedure described in the T640 Internet
                                    Routing Node Hardware Guide. To display the status of the fans in the routing
                                    node, issue the show chassis environment command. The output is similar to the
                                    following:

                                       user@host> show chassis environment

                                       ...
                                              Rear   Tray   Top fan        OK       Spinning   at   normal   speed
                                              Rear   Tray   Second fan     OK       Spinning   at   normal   speed
                                              Rear   Tray   Third fan      OK       Spinning   at   normal   speed
                                              Rear   Tray   Fourth fan     OK       Spinning   at   normal   speed
                                              Rear   Tray   Fifth fan      OK       Spinning   at   normal   speed
                                              Rear   Tray   Sixth fan      OK       Spinning   at   normal   speed
                                              Rear   Tray   Seventh fan    OK       Spinning   at   normal   speed
                                              Rear   Tray   Bottom fan     OK       Spinning   at   normal   speed
                                       ...




                             CAUTION: To maintain proper cooling, do not operate the T640 routing node with
                             the rear fan tray removed for more than one minute.




Replacing the Standard CBs and SIBs in the T640 Routing Node
                             Before you connect an offline T640 routing node to the TX Matrix platform, you must
                             replace the standard CBs and SIBs with T-CBs and T640-SIBs. Follow this procedure:
                             1.     If the T640 routing node is powered on, issue the request system halt
                                    both-routing-engines operational mode command from the console or other
                                    management device connected to the T640 routing node. The command shuts
                                    down the Routing Engines cleanly, so their state information is preserved.

                                       user@host> request system halt both-routing-engines



                                    Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system
                                    has halted. For more information about the command, see the JUNOS System
                                    Basics and Services Command Reference.
                             2.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             3.     Switch both circuit breakers on each power supply faceplate to the off position (O).


                             NOTE: The CBs and T-CBs are hot-removable and hot-insertable if the routing node
                             contains redundant host subsystems. SIBs and T640-SIBs are hot-removable and
                             hot-insertable. However, we recommend you power off the T640 routing node before
                             you replace the CBs and SIBs.




146    ■    Replacing the Standard CBs and SIBs in the T640 Routing Node
                                     Chapter 13: Integrating an Offline T640 Routing Node with the TX Matrix Platform




                  4.   Set the switches on each T-CB:
                       ■   Set the chassis ID switch to a value from 0 through 3. You must use the same
                           chassis ID on each T-CB.
                       ■   Set the M/S switch on the T-CB faceplate to M.



                  NOTE: If the routing matrix contains only one T640 routing node, we recommend
                  you assign a chassis ID of 0 to the routing node.


                  5.   Replace each CB with a T-CB. Use the standard replacement procedure described
                       in the T640 Internet Routing Node Hardware Guide.
                  6.   Replace each SIB with a T640-SIB. Use the standard replacement procedure
                       described in the T640 Internet Routing Node Hardware Guide.


                  NOTE: Ensure the ejector handle tabs are properly mated inside their corresponding
                  chassis slots before you tighten the captive screws on the ejector handles. You might
                  have to close and open the handles a few times before the tabs catch the slots.


                  7.   You can optionally upgrade the Routing Engines in the T640 routing node. To
                       replace each Routing Engine, follow the standard replacement procedure
                       described in the T640 Internet Routing Node Hardware Guide. For a list of Routing
                       Engines supported in the TX Matrix platform, see the M-series and T-series Routing
                       Engine and MCS Installation Instructions.


Connecting an Offline T640 Routing Node to the TX Matrix Platform
                  After you replace the CBs and SIBs with T-CBs and T640-SIBs, you connect the T640
                  routing node to the TX Matrix platform, including its redundant control and switching
                  planes.

                  To connect the control planes, follow this procedure (see Table 24 on page 137 for
                  the TX-CIP and T-CB ports to connect):
                  1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                       connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                       about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                  2.   If the receivers of the five TX-SIB adapters you are connecting are enabled,
                       disable them as described in “Disabling and Enabling TX-SIB Fiber-Optic Array
                       Adapter Receivers” on page 125.
                  3.   Plug one end of a UTP Category 5 cable into the appropriate RJ-45 port on
                       TX-CIP-0. The cable wiring is straight-through (not crossover).
                  4.   Plug the other end of the cable into the port labeled CIP on T-CB-0. Dress the
                       cable appropriately.




                                     Connecting an Offline T640 Routing Node to the TX Matrix Platform     ■    147
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             NOTE: The RJ-45 port labeled AUX on a T-CB is reserved for future use.


                             5.     Plug one end of a UTP Category 5 cable into the appropriate RJ-45 port on
                                    TX-CIP-1.
                             6.     Plug the other end of the cable into the port labeled CIP on T-CB-1. Dress the
                                    cable appropriately.



                             NOTE: The RJ-45 ports labeled LCC4 through LCC7 on a TX-CIP are reserved for future
                             use.



                             NOTE: The connections between the TX-CIPs and the T-CBs are proprietary Ethernet
                             connections. Do not attempt to connect these components through a switch or hub.


                             To complete the connection of the switching planes, you connect the five fiber-optic
                             array cables to the five T640-SIBs in the T640 routing node. The fiber-optic array
                             cables should already be routed between the TX Matrix platform and the T640 routing
                             node, tested, and connected to the TX Matrix platform (see “Routing the Fiber-Optic
                             Array Cables” on page 114 and “Testing and Connecting the TX Matrix Platform
                             Fiber-Optic Connections” on page 125). Follow this procedure (see Table 25 on page
                             138 for the T640-SIB adapter connections):


                             WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic array adapter or a connector at the
                             end of a fiber-optic array cable attached to an adapter. The fiber optics emit laser
                             light that can damage your eyes.


                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             2.     Using the labels you attached to the ends of the fiber-optic array cables, identify
                                    the cable that plugs into T640-SIB-0.
                             3.     If applicable, remove the protective tape covering the T640-SIB fiber-optic array
                                    adapter.


                             NOTE: While you install the TX Matrix platform or replace a fiber-optic array cable,
                             small deposits of oil, dust, and debris can enter the TX-SIB and T640-SIB fiber-optic
                             array adapters, the fiber-optic array cable connectors, and the loopback connectors
                             and adapters. We recommend you clean the optics in these components, as well as
                             the loopback connector and adapter dust covers, immediately before connecting
                             them. For cleaning instructions, see “Cleaning the Fiber-Optic
                             Components” on page 177.




148    ■    Connecting an Offline T640 Routing Node to the TX Matrix Platform
                                    Chapter 13: Integrating an Offline T640 Routing Node with the TX Matrix Platform




                 4.   Remove the dust cover from the fiber-optic array cable connector by loosening
                      the thumbscrew and captive screw on the connector. (Use the supplied small
                      slotted screwdriver to loosen the captive screw.) Store the dust cover in a dust-free
                      resealable plastic bag.
                 5.   With the fiber-optic array cable extending toward the left side of the chassis (as
                      you face the rear), align the cable connector with the T640-SIB-0 adapter and
                      carefully press it into the adapter until it stops. The cable connector and adapter
                      are keyed to ensure proper mating.


                 NOTE: The optics in a fiber-optic array adapter are spring loaded, so you must
                 continue to apply force to a fiber-optic array cable connector or loopback connector
                 while securing it to a TX-SIB or T640-SIB adapter.


                 6.   Partially tighten the thumbscrew and captive screw on the fiber-optic array cable
                      connector. (Use the supplied small slotted screwdriver to tighten the captive
                      screw.) Alternate between the thumbscrew and captive screw until the cable
                      connector is secured to the adapter.
                 7.   Repeat Step 2 through Step 6 for the four remaining fiber-optic array cables that
                      connect to T640-SIB-1 through T640-SIB-4.

                 Figure 66 on page 139 shows the control and switching planes connections between
                 the TX Matrix platform and a T640 routing node.


Powering On the T640 Routing Node
                 After you have connected the control and switching planes between the T640 routing
                 node and the TX Matrix platform, power on the T640 routing node, monitor the boot
                 process, and verify the connections. Follow this procedure:
                 1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                      connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                      about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                 2.   Switch the circuit breakers on one of the power supplies to the on position (|)
                      and observe the LEDs on the power supply faceplate. If the power supply is
                      correctly installed and is functioning properly, the DC OK LED lights steadily, and
                      the CB ON LED blinks momentarily, then lights steadily.




                                                                  Powering On the T640 Routing Node       ■    149
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                              NOTE: After powering off a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning it
                              back on. After powering on a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning
                              it off.

                              If the system is completely powered off when you power on the power supply, the
                              Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence. If the
                              Routing Engine finishes booting and you need to power off the system again, first
                              issue the CLI request system halt command.

                              After a power supply is powered on, it can take up to 60 seconds for status
                              indicators—such as the output status LEDs on the power supply, the show chassis
                              command display, and messages on the LED display on the craft interface—to indicate
                              that the power supply is functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear
                              during the first 60 seconds.



                              3.    Repeat Step 2 for the remaining power supply.
                              4.    On an external management device connected to the console or auxiliary port
                                    of the T640-CIP, monitor the startup process to verify that the system has booted
                                    properly.



                              NOTE: You do not need to reboot the TX Matrix platform after the T640 routing node
                              has booted.



Verifying the State of the Routing Matrix
                              After the T640 routing node has booted, verify the state of the control planes,
                              switching planes, and interfaces within the routing matrix. The TX Matrix platform
                              is now the point of control for the routing matrix. You configure and manage the
                              routing matrix through the external management devices connected to the TX Matrix
                              platform. Follow this procedure:




150    ■    Verifying the State of the Routing Matrix
                   Chapter 13: Integrating an Offline T640 Routing Node with the TX Matrix Platform




1.   Verify that the routing matrix control plane is operating correctly by issuing the
     show tnp addresses command:

        user@host> show tnp addresses

           Name         TNPaddr           MAC address           IF     MTU     Expire     Hopcnt
        Alias
        lcc0-master    0x01000001     02:00:00:01:01:01        em0 1500        3          0
        lcc0-re0       0x01000004     02:00:00:01:00:01        bcm0 1500       3          0
        lcc0-re1       0x01000005     02:00:00:01:01:01        em0 1500        3          0
        lcc0-fpc0      0x01000010     02:00:00:01:00:10        em0 1500        5          0
        fpc0
        lcc0-spmb0     0x01000030     02:00:00:01:00:30        bcm0    1500    5          1
        lcc0-spmb1     0x01000031     02:00:00:01:00:31        em0    1500     5          1
        scc-master     0x10000001     02:00:00:10:00:01        bcm0    1500    0          0
        scc-master     0x10000001     00:80:42:12:c6:38        em0    1500     0          1
        scc-re0        0x10000004     02:00:00:10:00:01        bcm0    1500    0          0
        scc-re0        0x10000004     00:80:42:12:c6:38        em0    1500     0          1
        scc-re1        0x10000005     02:00:00:10:01:01        em0    1500     2          0
        scc-spmb0      0x10000030     02:00:00:10:00:30        bcm0    1500    4          0
        scc-spmb1      0x10000031     02:00:00:10:00:31        em0    1500     5          0
        bcast          0xFFFFFFFF     ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff        bcm0    1500    0          0
        bcast          0xFFFFFFFF     ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff        em0    1500     0          1



     Verify the display contains entries for the TX Matrix platform (scc-master) and
     T640 routing node (lcclcc-number-master) and for each Routing
     Engine (lcclcc-number-ren) and FPC (lcclcc-number-fpcn) in the routing matrix
     (where lcc-number is the chassis ID of the T640 routing node and n equals the
     number of the component).
2.   Verify that the routing matrix control plane is operating correctly by issuing the
     show chassis ethernet-switch scc command:

        user@host> show chassis ethernet-switch scc

        scc-re0:
        --------------------------------------------------------------------------
        Link is good on FE port 4 connected to device: LCC0
          Speed is 100Mb
          Duplex is full
          Autonegotiate is Enabled

        Link is good on FE port 8 connected to device: SPMB
          Speed is 100Mb
          Duplex is full
          Autonegotiate is Enabled

        Link is good on GE port 13 connected to device: Other RE
          Speed is 1000Mb
          Duplex is full
          Autonegotiate is Enabled




                                              Verifying the State of the Routing Matrix   ■   151
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                              NOTE: The throughput of the control plane connections between the TX Matrix
                              platform and the T640 routing nodes is 100 Mbps. The throughput of the connections
                              between Routing Engines in a TX Matrix platform is 1000 Mbps.


                                    Verify that the link to the T640 routing node (LCClcc-number) is good.
                              3.    Verify that all FPCs in the T640 routing node are detected and online by issuing
                                    the show chassis hardware and show chassis fpc commands. For example:

                                       user@host> show chassis hardware lcc 0

                                       lcc0-re0:
                                       --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                       Hardware inventory:
                                       ...
                                       FPC 0            REV 05    710-001721   HD5965            FPC Type 3
                                         CPU            REV 09    710-001726   AY4909            FPC CPU
                                         PIC 0          REV 04    750-009553   HV3648            4x OC-48 SONET
                                           SFP 0        REV 01    740-009029   P11JXWP           SFP-IR
                                           SFP 1        REV 01    740-008169   36D525P00154      UNKNOWN
                                           SFP 2        REV 01    740-009028   2353110           SFP-SR
                                           SFP 3        REV 01    740-008169   36D525P00159      UNKNOWN
                                         PIC 1          REV 02    750-009567   HX2875            1x
                                       10GE(LAN),XENPAK
                                           SFP 0        REV 01    740-009898   USC202YW25        XENPAK-LR
                                         MMB 0          REV 03    710-004047   HE3427            MMB-288mbit
                                         MMB 1          REV 03    710-004047   HD5812            MMB-288mbit
                                         ICBM           REV 04    710-003384   HB1884            FPC ICBM
                                         PPB 0          REV 02    710-002845   HC0964            PPB Type 3
                                         PPB 1          REV 02    710-002845   HC0987            PPB Type 3
                                       ...



                                       user@host> show chassis fpc

                                       lcc0-re0:
                                       --------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                              Temp   CPU Utilization (%)    Memory    Utilization
                                       (%)
                                       Slot State             (C)    Total   Interrupt     DRAM (MB) Heap    Buffer

                                          0   Online            32       2           0       256        14
                                       44
                                          1   Empty
                                          2   Empty
                                          3   Empty
                                          4   Empty
                                          5   Empty
                                          6   Empty
                                          7   Empty

                              4.    Verify that the TX-SIBs and T640-SIBs are online by issuing the show chassis
                                    sibs command:

                                       user@host> show chassis sibs




152    ■    Verifying the State of the Routing Matrix
                   Chapter 13: Integrating an Offline T640 Routing Node with the TX Matrix Platform




        scc-re0:
        --------------------------------------------------------------------------
        Slot State                 Uptime
         0    Spare               10 hours, 41 minutes, 23 seconds
         1    Online              10 hours, 41 minutes, 23 seconds
         2    Online              10 hours, 41 minutes, 23 seconds
         3    Online              10 hours, 41 minutes, 23 seconds
         4    Online              10 hours, 41 minutes, 23 seconds

        lcc0-re0:
        --------------------------------------------------------------------------
        Slot State                 Uptime
         0    Spare               10 hours, 41 minutes, 9 seconds
         1    Online              10 hours, 41 minutes, 9 seconds
         2    Online              10 hours, 41 minutes, 9 seconds
         3    Online              10 hours, 41 minutes, 9 seconds
         4    Online              10 hours, 41 minutes, 9 seconds

5.   Verify the state of the electrical and optical switch fabric links by issuing the
     show chassis fabric sibs command:

        user@host> show chassis fabric sibs

        scc-re0:
        --------------------------------------------------------------------------
        Fabric management SIB state:
        SIB #0
            plane state: S_SPARE
            LCC #0      : Links ok
        SIB #1
            plane state: S_ACTIVE
            LCC #0      : Links ok
        SIB #2
            plane state: S_ACTIVE
            LCC #0      : Links ok
        SIB #3
            plane state: S_ACTIVE
            LCC #0      : Links ok
        SIB #4
            plane state: S_ACTIVE
            LCC #0      : Links ok

        lcc0-re0:
        --------------------------------------------------------------------------
        Fabric management SIB state:
        SIB #0
            plane state: S_SPARE
            FPC #0
                PFE #0 : Links ok
                PFE #1 : Links ok
            SCC         : Links ok
        SIB #1
            plane state: S_ACTIVE
            FPC #0
                PFE #0 : Links ok
                PFE #1 : Links ok
            SCC         : Links ok
        SIB #2
            plane state: S_ACTIVE
            FPC #0




                                              Verifying the State of the Routing Matrix   ■   153
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                                                  PFE #0   : Links ok
                                                  PFE #1   : Links ok
                                           SCC             : Links ok
                                       SIB #3
                                           plane state: S_ACTIVE
                                           FPC #0
                                               PFE #0 : Links ok
                                               PFE #1 : Links ok
                                           SCC         : Links ok
                                       SIB #4
                                           plane state: S_ACTIVE
                                           FPC #0
                                               PFE #0 : Links ok
                                               PFE #1 : Links ok
                                           SCC         : Links ok



                                    Verify that the state of each link is Links ok.
                              6.    Verify that all interfaces in the T640 routing node are up by issuing the show
                                    interfaces terse command:

                                       user@host> show interfaces terse

                                       Interface                   Admin Link Proto Local                 Remote
                                        so-0/0/0                    up    up
                                        so-0/0/1                    up    up
                                        so-0/0/2                    up    up
                                        so-0/0/3                    up    up
                                        ge-0/1/0                    up    up
                                        ge-0/1/1                    up    up
                                        ge-1/0/0                    up    up
                                        ge-1/0/1                    up    up
                                        so-1/1/0                    up    up
                                        so-1/1/1                    up    up
                                        so-1/1/2                    up    up
                                        so-1/1/3                    up    up
                                       ...



                              If the state of the control planes, switching planes, and interfaces displayed in Step
                              1 through Step 6 is correct, you have successfully completed the integration procedure.
                              If the state of any link is incorrect, see “Troubleshooting Hardware
                              Components” on page 185, or contact your customer support representative for
                              additional instructions.




154    ■    Verifying the State of the Routing Matrix
Chapter 14
Integrating an Operational T640 Routing
Node with the TX Matrix Platform

                 This chapter describes how to integrate an operational T640 routing node with the
                 TX Matrix platform. As you perform the integration, the T640 routing node continues
                 to pass traffic until it is rebooted. The traffic interruption during the reboot is
                 comparable to the interruption that occurs during a JUNOS software major upgrade.


                 NOTE: Only the first T640 routing node you integrate with the TX Matrix platform
                 can be operational. Additional T640 routing nodes you integrate must be offline.
                 Follow the procedures described in “Integrating an Offline T640 Routing Node with
                 the TX Matrix Platform” on page 145.


                 Before you connect a T640 routing node to the TX Matrix platform, you must perform
                 the conversion tasks described in “Converting an Offline or Operational T640 Routing
                 Node” on page 139. If any problems occur during the conversion procedure, you can
                 convert the T640 routing node back to its original state.

                 To integrate an operational T640 routing node with the TX Matrix platform, follow
                 these procedures:
                 ■   Tools and Parts Required on page 155
                 ■   Replacing the Rear Fan Tray on page 156
                 ■   Converting and Connecting the Control Planes on page 157
                 ■   Converting and Connecting the Switching Planes on page 158
                 ■   Transferring Control from the T640 Routing Node to the TX Matrix
                     Platform on page 163
                 ■   Rolling Back the Integration on page 164


Tools and Parts Required
                 To connect the TX Matrix platform to an operational T640 routing node, you need
                 the following tools and parts:




                                                                     Tools and Parts Required   ■   155
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             ■      Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2
                             ■      Small slotted screwdriver, at least 4 in. long (for the fiber-optic array connectors)
                             ■      One fiber-optic array loopback connector for testing T640-SIBs
                             ■      2.5-mm ball hex driver for the fiber-optic array loopback connector
                             ■      Dust-free resealable plastic bags for temporary storage of fiber-optic array adapter
                                    dust covers
                             ■      Lint-free swabs for cleaning optical components
                             ■      Isopropyl alcohol (99 percent) for cleaning optical components
                             ■      Dry cloth cleaning tool for cleaning optical components
                             ■      Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding wrist strap


Replacing the Rear Fan Tray
                             To replace the rear fan tray with the new one, follow this procedure:
                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             2.     Replace the rear fan tray with the model required for a converted T640 routing
                                    node. Use the standard replacement procedure described in the T640 Internet
                                    Routing Node Hardware Guide. To display the status of the fans in the routing
                                    node, issue the show chassis environment command. The output is similar to the
                                    following:

                                       user@host> show chassis environment

                                       ...
                                              Rear   Tray   Top fan       OK        Spinning   at   normal   speed
                                              Rear   Tray   Second fan    OK        Spinning   at   normal   speed
                                              Rear   Tray   Third fan     OK        Spinning   at   normal   speed
                                              Rear   Tray   Fourth fan    OK        Spinning   at   normal   speed
                                              Rear   Tray   Fifth fan     OK        Spinning   at   normal   speed
                                              Rear   Tray   Sixth fan     OK        Spinning   at   normal   speed
                                              Rear   Tray   Seventh fan   OK        Spinning   at   normal   speed
                                              Rear   Tray   Bottom fan    OK        Spinning   at   normal   speed
                                       ...




                             CAUTION: To maintain proper cooling, do not operate the T640 routing node with
                             the rear fan tray removed for more than one minute.




156    ■    Replacing the Rear Fan Tray
                               Chapter 14: Integrating an Operational T640 Routing Node with the TX Matrix Platform




Converting and Connecting the Control Planes

                 NOTE: We recommend you manage the system using a directly attached management
                 device instead of an out-of-band management device. This provides you access to
                 the system if its control plane is not functioning.


                 To convert and connect the control planes of an operational T640 routing node,
                 follow this procedure (see Table 24 on page 137 for the TX-CIP and T-CB ports to
                 connect):
                 1.   Determine which host subsystem is functioning as the master or the backup
                      using one of the two following methods:
                      ■   Check the Routing Engine LEDs on the craft interface. If the green MASTER
                          LED is lit, the corresponding host subsystem is functioning as the master.
                      ■   Issue the following CLI command. The master Routing Engine is designated
                          Master in the Current state field:

                          user@host> show chassis routing-engine

                          Routing Engine status:
                            Slot 0:
                              Current state                       Master
                          ...




                 2.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                      connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                      about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                 3.   Set the switches on each T-CB before you install them in the chassis:
                      ■   Set the chassis ID switch on each T-CB to 0.
                      ■   Set the M/S switch on each T-CB faceplate to S.



                 NOTE: When you integrate an operational T640 routing node with the TX Matrix
                 platform, you must assign a chassis ID of 0 to the routing node.


                 4.   Replace the backup CB with a T-CB. Use the standard replacement procedure
                      described in the T640 Internet Routing Node Hardware Guide.
                 5.   Perform a graceful switchover to the backup by issuing the request chassis
                      routing-engine master switch command:

                          user@host> request chassis routing-engine master switch



                      The Routing Engine paired with the T-CB immediately assumes Routing Engine
                      functions and there is no interruption to packet forwarding.




                                                         Converting and Connecting the Control Planes    ■    157
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             6.     Replace the other CB (which now belongs to the backup host subsystem) with a
                                    T-CB. Use the standard replacement procedure described in the T640 Internet
                                    Routing Node Hardware Guide.
                             7.     Perform a graceful switchover to the original master by issuing the request chassis
                                    routing-engine master switch command:

                                       user@host> request chassis routing-engine master switch

                             8.     Verify that the T-CBs are displayed in the output of the show chassis hardware
                                    command:

                                       user@host> show chassis hardware

                                       Hardware inventory:
                                       Item             Version     Part number   Serial number       Description
                                       Chassis                                    65409               T640
                                       Midplane         REV 03      710-005608    RA1395              T640 Backplane
                                       ...
                                       CB 0             REV 02      710-007655    HS5909              Control Board
                                       (CB-T)
                                       CB 1             REV 02      710-007655    HS5910              Control Board
                                       (CB-T)
                                       ...

                             9.     Plug one end of a UTP Category 5 cable into the appropriate RJ-45 port on
                                    TX-CIP-0.
                             10. Plug the other end of the cable into the port labeled CIP on T-CB-0. Dress the
                                    cable appropriately.


                             NOTE: The RJ-45 port labeled AUX on a T-CB is reserved for future use.


                             11. Plug one end of a UTP Category 5 cable into the appropriate RJ-45 port on
                                    TX-CIP-1.
                             12. Plug the other end of the cable into the port labeled CIP on T-CB-1. Dress the
                                    cable appropriately.
                             13. Verify that the Ethernet connection LED on the left side of each T-CB CIP port is
                                    lit green, which indicates a 100-Mbps connection.



                             NOTE: The connections between the TX-CIPs and the T-CBs are proprietary Ethernet
                             connections. Do not attempt to connect these components through a switch or hub.



Converting and Connecting the Switching Planes
                             To convert and connect a switching plane of an operational T640 routing node, you
                             replace a standard SIB in the T640 routing node with a T640-SIB, then connect a
                             fiber-optic array cable to the T640-SIB. You repeat these procedures for each of the
                             five SIBs in the T640 routing node. The fiber-optic array cables should already be



158    ■    Converting and Connecting the Switching Planes
                                  Chapter 14: Integrating an Operational T640 Routing Node with the TX Matrix Platform




                   routed between the TX Matrix platform and the T640 routing node, tested, and
                   connected to the TX Matrix platform (see “Routing the Fiber-Optic Array
                   Cables” on page 114 and “Testing and Connecting the TX Matrix Platform Fiber-Optic
                   Connections” on page 125).

                   Figure 66 on page 139 shows the control and switching planes connections between
                   the TX Matrix platform and a T640 routing node.


                   NOTE: During the conversion and connection of the switching planes, the T640
                   routing node might experience some packet loss, depending on the operational
                   environment. For more information, contact your customer support representative.


                   Follow these procedures for each of the five SIBs in the T640 routing node:
                   ■    Converting a Switching Plane on page 159
                   ■    Connecting and Testing a Switching Plane on page 161

Converting a Switching Plane
                   To convert a switching plane from a SIB to a T640-SIB, follow this procedure:


                   WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic array adapter or a connector at the
                   end of a fiber-optic array cable attached to an adapter. The fiber optics emit laser
                   light that can damage your eyes.



                   NOTE: We recommend you manage the system using a directly attached management
                   device instead of an out-of-band management device. This provides you access to
                   the system if its control plane is not functioning.


                   1.   Verify that the T640 routing node contains five standard SIBs (a requirement for
                        integrating an operational T640 routing node with the TX Matrix platform). If
                        needed, install additional SIBs. Use the standard installation procedure described
                        in the T640 Internet Routing Node Hardware Guide.
                   2.   Include the fabric upgrade-mode statement in the configuration at the [edit chassis]
                        hierarchy level.

                           user@host# set chassis fabric upgrade-mode

                   3.   Commit the configuration on both the master and the backup Routing Engines.

                           user@host# commit synchronize

                   4.   Display the status of the T640 routing node SIBs by issuing the show chassis sibs
                        command:




                                                         Converting and Connecting the Switching Planes     ■    159
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                                        user@host> show chassis sibs

                                        Slot   State                Uptime
                                         0     Spare             255 days,   31   minutes,   12   seconds
                                         1     Online            255 days,   31   minutes,   12   seconds
                                         2     Online            255 days,   31   minutes,   12   seconds
                                         3     Online            255 days,   31   minutes,   12   seconds
                                         4     Online            255 days,   31   minutes,   12   seconds



                                    Verify that four SIBs are in the Online state and one SIB is in the Spare state. To
                                    bring a SIB online, issue the request chassis sib online operational mode
                                    command.
                             5.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             6.     Select one of the SIBs to replace and take it offline by using one of the following
                                    methods (we recommend you start with the spare SIB as determined in Step 4):
                                    ■   Press and hold the ONLINE/OFFLINE button on the SIB faceplate for about
                                        five seconds until the OK LED is not lit.
                                    ■   Issue the request chassis sib offline command. For example:

                                        user@host> request chassis sib offline slot 0




                             NOTE: When you bring an active SIB offline, the spare SIB becomes active and
                             transitions to the Online state.


                             7.     Replace the SIB with a T640-SIB. Use the standard replacement procedure
                                    described in the T640 Internet Routing Node Hardware Guide.


                             NOTE: Ensure the ejector handle tabs are properly mated inside their corresponding
                             chassis slots before you tighten the captive screws on the ejector handles. You might
                             have to close and open the handles a few times before the tabs catch the slots.




                             NOTE: After you replace a SIB with a T640-SIB, proceed to “Connecting and Testing
                             a Switching Plane” on page 161. Do not replace another SIB in the T640 routing node
                             until you have successfully connected and tested the T640-SIB you just installed.




160    ■    Converting and Connecting the Switching Planes
                                  Chapter 14: Integrating an Operational T640 Routing Node with the TX Matrix Platform




Connecting and Testing a Switching Plane
                   After you convert a switching plane from a SIB to a T640-SIB, you connect a fiber-optic
                   array cable to it and test it using the following procedure (see Table 25 on page 138
                   for the T640-SIB adapter connections):


                   NOTE: While you install the TX Matrix platform or replace a fiber-optic array cable,
                   small deposits of oil, dust, and debris can enter the TX-SIB and T640-SIB fiber-optic
                   array adapters, the fiber-optic array cable connectors, and the loopback connectors
                   and adapters. We recommend you clean the optics in these components, as well as
                   the loopback connector and adapter dust covers, immediately before connecting
                   them. For cleaning instructions, see “Cleaning the Fiber-Optic
                   Components” on page 177.


                   1.   Using the labels you attached to the ends of the fiber-optic array cables, identify
                        the cable that plugs into the T640-SIB.
                   2.   Remove the dust cover from the fiber-optic array cable connector by loosening
                        the thumbscrew and captive screw on the connector. (Use the supplied small
                        slotted screwdriver to loosen the captive screw.) Store the dust cover in a dust-free
                        resealable plastic bag.
                   3.   With the fiber-optic array cable extending toward the left side of the chassis (as
                        you face the rear), align the cable connector with the T640-SIB adapter and
                        carefully press it into the adapter until it stops. The cable connector and adapter
                        are keyed to ensure proper mating.


                   NOTE: The optics in a fiber-optic array adapter are spring loaded, so you must
                   continue to apply force to a fiber-optic array cable connector or loopback connector
                   while securing it to a TX-SIB or T640-SIB adapter.


                   4.   Partially tighten the thumbscrew and captive screw on the fiber-optic array cable
                        connector. (Use the supplied small slotted screwdriver to tighten the captive
                        screw.) Alternate between the thumbscrew and captive screw until the cable
                        connector is secured to the adapter.
                   5.   On an external management device connected to the console or auxiliary port
                        of the T640-CIP, bring the T640-SIB online using one of the following methods:
                        ■   Press and hold the ONLINE/OFFLINE button on the T640-SIB faceplate until
                            the OK LED blinks.
                        ■   Issue the request chassis sib online command. For example:

                            user@host> request chassis sib online slot 0


                   6.   On an external management device connected to the console or auxiliary port
                        of the TX-CIP, enable the TX-SIB fiber-optic array adapter receivers by issuing
                        the request chassis sib slot start-receiver scc command. For example, if you are
                        enabling adapter LCC0 on TX-SIB-0, issue the following command:




                                                         Converting and Connecting the Switching Planes     ■    161
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                                        user@host> request chassis sib slot 0 start-receiver 0 scc

                             7.     On an external management device connected to the console or auxiliary port
                                    of the T640-CIP, enable the T640-SIB fiber-optic array adapter receivers by issuing
                                    the request chassis sib slot start-receiver command. For example, if you are
                                    enabling the adapter on T640-SIB-0, issue the following command:

                                        user@host> request chassis sib slot 0 start-receiver 0

                             8.     Verify that the RX LED next to the TX-SIB adapter is steadily lit green.
                             9.     Verify that the RX LED next to the T640-SIB adapter is steadily lit green.
                             10. If the RX LEDs next to the TX-SIB adapter and T640-SIB adapter are steadily lit
                                    green, the connection between the TX-SIB and T640-SIB is operating correctly.
                                    Repeat the procedures described in “Converting a Switching Plane” on page 159
                                    through “Connecting and Testing a Switching Plane” on page 161 for the remaining
                                    SIBs in the T640 routing node.

                                    If the RX LEDs next to the TX-SIB adapter and T640-SIB adapter are not steadily
                                    lit green, disable the TX-SIB and T640-SIB adapter receivers, disconnect the
                                    fiber-optic array cable connector from the T640-SIB, and clean it and the T640-SIB
                                    adapter:
                                    ■   To disable the adapter receivers, issue the request chassis sib slot stop-receiver
                                        scc and request chassis sib slot stop-receiver commands on the TX Matrix
                                        platform and T640 routing node. For example, if you are disabling the
                                        adapters on TX-SIB-0 and T640-SIB-0, issue the following commands on the
                                        TX Matrix platform and T640 routing node:

                                        user@host> request chassis sib slot 0 stop-receiver 0 scc



                                        user@host> request chassis sib slot 0 stop-receiver 0


                                    ■   To disconnect the cable connector, partially loosen its thumbscrew and
                                        captive screw. (Use the supplied small slotted screwdriver to loosen the
                                        captive screw.) Alternate between the thumbscrew and the hex screw until
                                        the cable connector is removed from the adapter.

                                    ■   For instructions on cleaning the fiber-optic array cable connector and
                                        T640-SIB adapter, see “Cleaning the Fiber-Optic Components” on page 177.

                             11. Reconnect the fiber-optic array cable connector and T640-SIB adapter as
                                    described in Step 3 through Step 4.
                             12. Enable the TX-SIB and T640-SIB adapter receivers as described in Step 6 through
                                    Step 7.
                             13. If the RX LEDs next to the TX-SIB adapter and T640-SIB adapter are steadily lit
                                    green, the connection between the TX-SIB and T640-SIB is operating correctly.
                                    Repeat the procedures described in “Converting a Switching Plane” on page 159
                                    through “Connecting and Testing a Switching Plane” on page 161 for the remaining
                                    SIBs in the T640 routing node.




162    ■    Converting and Connecting the Switching Planes
                                 Chapter 14: Integrating an Operational T640 Routing Node with the TX Matrix Platform




                       If the RX LEDs next to the TX-SIB adapter and T640-SIB adapter are not steadily
                       lit green, contact your customer support representative for additional instructions.
                       Do not proceed with the installation of the TX Matrix platform until you have
                       spoken to your customer support representative.


Transferring Control from the T640 Routing Node to the TX Matrix Platform
                  The final step of the integration of an operational T640 routing node with the
                  TX Matrix platform is transferring control from the T640 routing node to the TX Matrix
                  platform. Follow this procedure:


                  NOTE: After you transfer control to the TX Matrix platform, you can roll back the
                  T640 routing node to its original configuration, but traffic through the T640 routing
                  node will be interrupted (see “Rolling Back the Integration” on page 164 for more
                  information).


                  1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                       connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                       about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                  2.   Set the M/S switch on each T-CB faceplate to M.
                  3.   If graceful switchover is enabled on the T640 routing node, disable it on the
                       master Routing Engine before rebooting the Routing Engines:

                          user@host> show configuration chassis redundancy graceful-switchover

                          traceoptions {
                              flag update;
                          }
                          enable;



                          user@host# set chassis redundancy graceful-switchover disable



                       For more information about graceful switchover, see the JUNOS System Basics
                       Configuration Guide.
                  4.   Issue the commit synchronize command and ensure that there are no
                       synchronization errors:

                          user@host# commit synchronize

                  5.   On an external management device connected to the console or auxiliary port
                       of T640-CIP-0, reboot the corresponding Routing Engine in the T640 routing
                       node:

                          user@host> request system reboot




                               Transferring Control from the T640 Routing Node to the TX Matrix Platform   ■    163
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             6.     On an external management device connected to the console or auxiliary port
                                    of T640-CIP-1, reboot the corresponding Routing Engine in the T640 routing
                                    node:

                                        user@host> request system reboot

                             7.     On an external management device connected to the console or auxiliary port
                                    of TX-CIP-0, reboot the corresponding Routing Engine in the TX Matrix platform:

                                        user@host> request system reboot

                             8.     On an external management device connected to the console or auxiliary port
                                    of TX-CIP-1, reboot the corresponding Routing Engine in the TX Matrix platform:

                                        user@host> request system reboot



                             After the T640 routing node and TX Matrix platform have booted, verify the state of
                             the control planes, switching planes, and interfaces within the routing matrix. The
                             TX Matrix platform is now the point of control for the routing matrix. You configure
                             and manage the routing matrix through the external management devices connected
                             to the TX Matrix platform. To verify the routing matrix, perform the procedures
                             described in “Verifying the State of the Routing Matrix” on page 150.


Rolling Back the Integration
                             If you want to return the T640 routing node to its original state as a standalone
                             system after you have transferred control to the TX Matrix platform, you can roll back
                             the integration by following the procedure in this section. During the rollback, traffic
                             passing through the routing node will be interrupted.

                             To roll back the integration, follow this procedure, which uses LCC0 as an example:


                             WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic array adapter or a connector at the
                             end of a fiber-optic array cable attached to an adapter. The fiber optics emit laser
                             light that can damage your eyes.


                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             2.     Take each T640-SIB offline by using one of the following methods:
                                    ■      Press and hold the ONLINE/OFFLINE button on the T640-SIB faceplate until
                                           the OK LED is not lit.
                                    ■      On an external management device connected to the console or auxiliary
                                           port of the TX-CIP, issue the request chassis sib offline command:

                                        user@host> request chassis sib lcc 0 slot 0 offline




164    ■    Rolling Back the Integration
               Chapter 14: Integrating an Operational T640 Routing Node with the TX Matrix Platform




3.   If the online-expected statement is included at the [edit chassis lcc number]
     hierarchy level, delete it:

          user@host# delete chassis lcc 0 online-expected

4.   Issue the commit synchronize command and ensure that there are no
     synchronization errors:

          user@host# commit synchronize

5.   Take the T640 routing node offline:

          user@host> request chassis lcc slot 0 offline

6.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
     connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
     about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
7.   Remove the control plane connections between the TX-CIPs and the T-CBs:
     a.   Disconnect the Ethernet cable plugged into the port labeled LCC0 on TX-CIP-0.

     b.   Disconnect the other end of the Ethernet cable plugged into the port labeled
          CIP on T-CB-0.

     c.   Disconnect the Ethernet cable plugged into the port labeled LCC0 on TX-CIP-1.

     d.   Disconnect the other end of the Ethernet cable plugged into the port labeled
          CIP on T-CB-1.

8.   Remove the fiber-optic array cable connector from each T640-SIB adapter.
     Partially loosen the thumbscrew and captive screw on the fiber-optic array cable
     connector. (Use the supplied small slotted screwdriver to loosen the captive
     screw.) Alternate between the thumbscrew and captive screw until the cable
     connector is removed from the adapter.
9.   Remove the dust covers from the dust-free resealable plastic bag and reinstall
     them on the fiber-optic array cable connectors. Align the dust cover with the
     cable connector and carefully press them together until they stop. The cover and
     the cable connector are keyed to ensure proper mating. Secure the dust cover
     by tightening the thumbscrew and captive screw on the connector. (Use the
     supplied small slotted screwdriver to tighten the captive screw.)
10. Dress the fiber-optic array cables so that they are not touching or blocking access
     to T640 routing node components, and that they do not drape where people
     could trip on them.
11. Replace each T640-SIB with a SIB. Use the standard replacement procedure
     described in the T640 Internet Routing Node Hardware Guide.

     Do not bring any of the SIBs online.




                                                           Rolling Back the Integration   ■   165
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             NOTE: Ensure the ejector handle tabs are properly mated inside their corresponding
                             chassis slots before you tighten the captive screws on the ejector handles. You might
                             have to close and open the handles a few times before the tabs catch the slots.


                             12. Set the M/S switch on each T-CB faceplate to S.
                             13. Set the CHASSIS ID switch on each T-CB faceplate to 0.
                             14. On an external management device connected to the console or auxiliary port
                                    of the T640-CIP, load the original T640 routing node configuration. For example:

                                       user@host# load override t640-config.conf

                             15. If graceful switchover is enabled in the original T640 routing node configuration,
                                    disable it as follows:

                                       user@host# delete chassis redundancy graceful-switchover

                             16. Issue the commit synchronize command and ensure that there are no
                                    synchronization errors:

                                       user@host# commit synchronize

                             17. On an external management device connected to the console or auxiliary port
                                    of T640-CIP-0, reboot the corresponding Routing Engine in the T640 routing
                                    node:

                                       user@host> request system reboot

                             18. On an external management device connected to the console or auxiliary port
                                    of T640-CIP-1, reboot the corresponding Routing Engine in the T640 routing
                                    node:

                                       user@host> request system reboot

                             19. Display the status of the SIBs by issuing the show chassis sibs command on the
                                    master Routing Engine:

                                       user@host> show chassis sibs

                                       Slot   State                 Uptime
                                        0     Spare              255 days,   31   minutes,   12   seconds
                                        1     Online             255 days,   31   minutes,   12   seconds
                                        2     Online             255 days,   31   minutes,   12   seconds
                                        3     Online             255 days,   31   minutes,   12   seconds
                                        4     Online             255 days,   31   minutes,   12   seconds



                                    Verify that four SIBs are in the Online state and one SIB is in the Spare state.
                             20. Delete all statements associated with LCC0 from the TX Matrix platform
                                    configuration. To review the T640 routing node configuration changes that were




166    ■    Rolling Back the Integration
             Chapter 14: Integrating an Operational T640 Routing Node with the TX Matrix Platform




    merged into the TX Matrix platform configuration, see “Merging the T640 Routing
    Node Configuration into the TX Matrix Platform Configuration” on page 143.



NOTE: You do not need to replace the rear fan tray with the original one.




                                                         Rolling Back the Integration   ■   167
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




168    ■    Rolling Back the Integration
Part 3
Hardware Maintenance, Troubleshooting,
and Replacement Procedures
         ■   Hardware Maintenance Overview on page 171
         ■   Troubleshooting Hardware Components on page 185
         ■   Replacing Hardware Components on page 197




                      Hardware Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Replacement Procedures   ■   169
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




170    ■    Hardware Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Replacement Procedures
Chapter 15
Hardware Maintenance Overview

                 This chapter describes how to maintain hardware components installed in the
                 TX Matrix platform. Some components, such as the TX-CIP and the craft interface,
                 require no maintenance.

                 For information about returning a part to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement,
                 see “Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware” on page 299.
                 ■   Tools and Parts Required on page 171
                 ■   Routine Maintenance Procedures on page 171
                 ■   Maintaining Cooling System Components on page 172
                 ■   Maintaining the Host Subsystem on page 174
                 ■   Maintaining the TX-SIBs on page 175
                 ■   Maintaining the Power Supplies on page 182


Tools and Parts Required
                 To maintain hardware components, you need the following tools and parts:
                 ■   ESD grounding wrist strap
                 ■   Flat-blade (–) screwdriver
                 ■   Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1
                 ■   Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2


Routine Maintenance Procedures
                 For optimum TX Matrix platform performance, perform the following preventive
                 maintenance procedures regularly:
                 ■   Inspect the installation site for moisture, loose wires or cables, and excessive
                     dust. Make sure that airflow is unobstructed around the TX Matrix platform and
                     into the air intake vents.
                 ■   Check the status-reporting devices on the craft interface: system alarms, LEDs,
                     and LED display. See “Craft Interface” on page 23.




                                                                      Tools and Parts Required   ■   171
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             ■      Inspect the air filters at the bottom front and left rear of the TX Matrix platform,
                                    cleaning or replacing them as needed for optimum cooling system performance.
                                    Do not run the TX Matrix platform for more than a few minutes without the air
                                    filters in place. For maintenance instructions, see “Maintaining the Air
                                    Filters” on page 172.


Maintaining Cooling System Components
                             This section discusses the following topics:
                             ■      Maintaining the Air Filters on page 172
                             ■      Maintaining the Fan Trays on page 172

Maintaining the Air Filters
                             Check the air filters regularly for dust and debris. Replace the filter elements as
                             needed. The filter elements degrade over time, so the filter elements in use, as well
                             as spares, should be replaced periodically. Spare filter elements should be used within
                             one year of manufacture. Check the date of manufacture printed on the filter. For
                             procedures to replace the air filters, see “Replacing an Air Filter” on page 210.

                             Store spare filter elements in a dark, cool, and dry place. Storing the filter elements
                             at higher temperatures, or where they can be exposed to ultraviolet (UV) radiation,
                             hydrocarbon emissions, or vapors from solvents, can significantly reduce their life.


                             CAUTION: Always keep both air filters in place while the TX Matrix platform is
                             operating. Because the fans are very powerful, they could pull small bits of wire or
                             other materials into the TX Matrix platform through the unfiltered air intake. This
                             could damage the TX Matrix platform components.



Maintaining the Fan Trays
                             The fan trays each contain multiple fans that work in unison to cool the TX Matrix
                             platform components. If one fan fails, the host subsystem adjusts the speed of the
                             remaining fans to maintain proper cooling. A red alarm is triggered when a fan fails,
                             and a yellow alarm is triggered when a fan tray is removed.

                             To display the status of the fans in the TX Matrix platform, issue the show chassis
                             environment scc command. The output is similar to the following:

                             user@host> show chassis environment scc
                             scc-re0:
                             --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                             Class Item                   Status     Measurement
                             Temp PEM 0                   OK         27 degrees C / 80 degrees F
                                   PEM 1                  OK         27 degrees C / 80 degrees F
                                   Routing Engine 0       OK         34 degrees C / 93 degrees F
                                   Routing Engine 1       OK         34 degrees C / 93 degrees F
                                   CB 0                   OK         33 degrees C / 91 degrees F
                                   CB 1                   OK         32 degrees C / 89 degrees F




172    ■    Maintaining Cooling System Components
                                                 Chapter 15: Hardware Maintenance Overview




       SIB 0                  OK            42 degrees C / 107 degrees F
       SIB 0 (B)              OK            41 degrees C / 105 degrees F
       SIB 1                  OK            42 degrees C / 107 degrees F
       SIB 1 (B)              OK            41 degrees C / 105 degrees F
       SIB 2                  OK            43 degrees C / 109 degrees F
       SIB 2 (B)              OK            42 degrees C / 107 degrees F
       SIB 3                  OK            44 degrees C / 111 degrees F
       SIB 3 (B)              OK            42 degrees C / 107 degrees F
       SIB 4                  OK            43 degrees C / 109 degrees F
       SIB 4 (B)              OK            43 degrees C / 109 degrees F
       FPM GBUS               OK            28 degrees C / 82 degrees F
       FPM Display            OK            32 degrees C / 89 degrees F
Fans   Top Left Front fan     OK            Spinning at normal speed
       Top Left Middle fan    OK            Spinning at normal speed
       Top Left Rear fan      OK            Spinning at normal speed
       Top Right Front fan    OK            Spinning at normal speed
       Top Right Middle fan   OK            Spinning at normal speed
       Top Right Rear fan     OK            Spinning at normal speed
       Bottom Left Front fan OK             Spinning at normal speed
       Bottom Left Middle fan OK            Spinning at normal speed
       Bottom Left Rear fan   OK            Spinning at normal speed
       Bottom Right Front fan OK            Spinning at normal speed
       Bottom Right Middle fan OK           Spinning at normal speed
       Bottom Right Rear fan OK             Spinning at normal speed
       Rear Tray Top fan      OK            Spinning at normal speed
       Rear Tray Second fan   OK            Spinning at normal speed
       Rear Tray Third fan    OK            Spinning at normal speed
       Rear Tray Fourth fan   OK            Spinning at normal speed
       Rear Tray Fifth fan    OK            Spinning at normal speed
       Rear Tray Sixth fan    OK            Spinning at normal speed
       Rear Tray Seventh fan OK             Spinning at normal speed
       Rear Tray Bottom fan   OK            Spinning at normal speed
Misc   CIP 0                  OK
       CIP 1                  OK
       SPMB 0                 OK
       SPMB 1                 OK

Top Left and Top Right refer to fans in the upper front fan tray; Bottom Left and Bottom
Right refer to fans in the lower front fan tray.

To display the status of the fans in the routing matrix (TX Matrix platform and all
T640 routing nodes), issue the show chassis environment command. To display the
status of the fans in a specific T640 routing node, issue the show chassis environment
lcc lcc-number command, where lcc-number is the chassis ID of the routing node and
can be from 0 through 3.


NOTE: The speed of the fans in the rear fan tray of a T640 routing node is affected
by the temperature of the T640-SIB main board (displayed as SIB n ), not by the
temperature of the T640-SIB mezzanine board [displayed as SIB n (B)].




                                         Maintaining Cooling System Components   ■   173
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




Maintaining the Host Subsystem
                             The host subsystem comprises a Routing Engine and up to two adjacent CBs or T-CBs
                             functioning together. To maintain the host subsystem components, follow these
                             guidelines:
                             ■      Check the host subsystem LEDs (HOST 0 and HOST 1) on the craft interface. If
                                    the red HOST 0 or HOST 1 LED is lit, look at the LED display to get more
                                    information about the cause of the problem. For more information about the
                                    LEDs and the display, see “Craft Interface” on page 23.
                             ■      Check the LED display on the craft interface to view information about the
                                    TX Matrix platform temperature and the status of the Routing Engines.
                             ■      Check the LEDs on the TX-CB faceplate to see information about the TX-CB.
                             ■      To check the status of the Routing Engines, issue the show chassis routing-engine
                                    command. The output is similar to the following:

                                       user@host> show chassis routing-engine scc

                                       scc-re0:
                                       --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                       Routing Engine status:
                                         Slot 0:
                                           Current state                   Master
                                           Election priority               Master (default)
                                           Temperature                  36 degrees C / 96 degrees F
                                           CPU temperature              38 degrees C / 100 degrees F
                                           DRAM                       2048 MB
                                           Memory utilization           11 percent
                                           CPU utilization:
                                             User                        0 percent
                                             Background                  0 percent
                                             Kernel                      2 percent
                                             Interrupt                   1 percent
                                             Idle                       97 percent
                                           Model                           RE-4.0
                                           Serial ID                       212058900121
                                           Start time                      2004-07-26 13:27:24 PDT
                                           Uptime                         2 hours, 34 minutes, 50 seconds
                                           Load averages:                  1 minute   5 minute 15 minute
                                                                               0.06       0.03       0.02
                                       Routing Engine status:
                                         Slot 1:
                                           Current state                   Backup
                                           Election priority               Backup (default)
                                           Temperature                  36 degrees C / 96 degrees F
                                           CPU temperature              37 degrees C / 98 degrees F
                                           DRAM                       2048 MB
                                           Memory utilization           10 percent
                                           CPU utilization:
                                             User                        0 percent
                                             Background                  0 percent
                                             Kernel                      0 percent
                                             Interrupt                   1 percent
                                             Idle                       99 percent
                                           Model                           RE-4.0
                                           Serial ID                       211123900258




174    ■    Maintaining the Host Subsystem
                                                                Chapter 15: Hardware Maintenance Overview




                              Start time                      2004-07-26 14:16:02 PDT
                              Uptime                         1 hour, 46 minutes


                  ■   To check the status of the TX-CBs, issue the show chassis environment cb
                      command. The output is similar to the following:

                          user@host> show chassis environment cb scc

                          scc-re0:
                          --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                          CB 0 status:
                            State                            Online Master
                            Temperature                   34 degrees C / 93 degrees F
                            Power:
                              1.8 V                     1793 mV
                              2.5 V                     2479 mV
                              3.3 V                     3301 mV
                              4.6 V                     4752 mV
                              5.0 V                     5032 mV
                              12.0 V                   12214 mV
                              3.3 V bias                3313 mV
                              8.0 V bias                7706 mV
                            BUS Revision                  40
                            FPGA Revision                  1
                          CB 1 status:
                            State                            Online Standby
                            Temperature                   33 degrees C / 91 degrees F
                            Power:
                              1.8 V                     1785 mV
                              2.5 V                     2468 mV
                              3.3 V                     3293 mV
                              4.6 V                     4747 mV
                              5.0 V                     5025 mV
                              12.0 V                   12253 mV
                              3.3 V bias                3306 mV
                              8.0 V bias                7721 mV
                            BUS Revision                  40
                            FPGA Revision                  1



                  For more information about using the CLI, see the JUNOS software manuals.


Maintaining the TX-SIBs
                  To maintain the TX-SIBs, follow these guidelines:
                  ■   To observe the status of the TX-SIBs, check the LEDs on the TX-SIB faceplate
                      and craft interface. For more information on the TX-SIB LEDs, see “TX-SIB
                      Components” on page 14 and “TX-SIB LEDs” on page 26.
                  ■   To check the status of the TX-SIBs using the CLI, issue the show chassis
                      environment sib scc command. The output is similar to the following:

                          user@host> show chassis environment sib scc




                                                                        Maintaining the TX-SIBs   ■   175
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                                      scc-re0:
                                      --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                      SIB 0 status:
                                        State                            Spare
                                        Temperature                   42 degrees C / 107 degrees F
                                        Temperature (B)               41 degrees C / 105 degrees F
                                        Power:
                                          GROUND                       0 mV
                                          1.8 V                     1785 mV
                                          2.5 V                     2493 mV
                                          3.3 V                     3301 mV
                                          1.8 V bias                1782 mV
                                          3.3 V bias                3294 mV
                                          5.0 V bias                4996 mV
                                          8.0 V bias                7133 mV
                                        Power (B):
                                          GROUND                       0 mV
                                          1.8 V                     1794 mV
                                          2.5 V                     2495 mV
                                          3.3 V                     3291 mV
                                          1.8 V bias                1787 mV
                                          3.3 V bias                3296 mV
                                          5.0 V bias                4998 mV
                                          8.0 V bias                7775 mV
                                      SIB 1 status:
                                        State                            Online
                                        Temperature                   43 degrees C / 109 degrees F
                                        Temperature (B)               42 degrees C / 107 degrees F
                                        Power:
                                          GROUND                       0 mV
                                          1.8 V                     1787 mV
                                          2.5 V                     2495 mV
                                          3.3 V                     3299 mV
                                          1.8 V bias                1785 mV
                                          3.3 V bias                3286 mV
                                          5.0 V bias                4979 mV
                                          8.0 V bias                7054 mV
                                        Power (B):
                                          GROUND                       0 mV
                                          1.8 V                     1792 mV
                                          2.5 V                     2500 mV
                                          3.3 V                     3308 mV
                                          1.8 V bias                1799 mV
                                          3.3 V bias                3301 mV
                                          5.0 V bias                5015 mV
                                          8.0 V bias                7785 mV
                                      SIB 2 status:
                                        State                            Online
                                        Temperature                   43 degrees C / 109 degrees F
                                        Temperature (B)               43 degrees C / 109 degrees F
                                        Power:
                                          GROUND                       0 mV
                                          1.8 V                     1787 mV
                                          2.5 V                     2490 mV
                                          3.3 V                     3306 mV
                                          1.8 V bias                1789 mV
                                          3.3 V bias                3291 mV
                                          5.0 V bias                4998 mV
                                          8.0 V bias                7155 mV
                                        Power (B):
                                          GROUND                       0 mV




176    ■    Maintaining the TX-SIBs
                                                                     Chapter 15: Hardware Maintenance Overview




                              1.8 V                      1792   mV
                              2.5 V                      2478   mV
                              3.3 V                      3301   mV
                              1.8 V bias                 1792   mV
                              3.3 V bias                 3299   mV
                              5.0 V bias                 4991   mV
                              8.0 V bias                 7860   mV
                          SIB 3 status:
                            State                              Online
                            Temperature                     45 degrees C / 113 degrees F
                            Temperature (B)                 42 degrees C / 107 degrees F
                            Power:
                              GROUND                        0   mV
                              1.8 V                      1787   mV
                              2.5 V                      2485   mV
                              3.3 V                      3304   mV
                              1.8 V bias                 1799   mV
                              3.3 V bias                 3289   mV
                              5.0 V bias                 4989   mV
                              8.0 V bias                 7159   mV
                            Power (B):
                              GROUND                        0   mV
                              1.8 V                      1789   mV
                              2.5 V                      2493   mV
                              3.3 V                      3306   mV
                              1.8 V bias                 1787   mV
                              3.3 V bias                 3291   mV
                              5.0 V bias                 4993   mV
                              8.0 V bias                 7846   mV
                          SIB 4 status:
                            State                              Online
                            Temperature                     44 degrees C / 111 degrees F
                            Temperature (B)                 43 degrees C / 109 degrees F
                            Power:
                              GROUND                        0   mV
                              1.8 V                      1787   mV
                              2.5 V                      2488   mV
                              3.3 V                      3306   mV
                              1.8 V bias                 1792   mV
                              3.3 V bias                 3286   mV
                              5.0 V bias                 5020   mV
                              8.0 V bias                 7230   mV
                            Power (B):
                              GROUND                        0   mV
                              1.8 V                      1789   mV
                              2.5 V                      2498   mV
                              3.3 V                      3308   mV
                              1.8 V bias                 1797   mV
                              3.3 V bias                 3291   mV
                              5.0 V bias                 4991   mV
                              8.0 V bias                 7843   mV



                       For more information about using the CLI, see the JUNOS software manuals.


Cleaning the Fiber-Optic Components
                   While you install the TX Matrix platform or replace a fiber-optic array cable, small
                   deposits of oil, dust, and debris can enter the TX-SIB and T640-SIB fiber-optic array



                                                                            Maintaining the TX-SIBs   ■   177
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             adapters, the fiber-optic array cable connectors, and the loopback connectors and
                             adapters used to test the optical connections. These deposits can cause loss of light,
                             reducing signal power and causing intermittent problems with the optical connection.

                             We recommend using both of the following methods to clean the fiber-optic
                             components:
                             ■      Use lint-free swabs and isopropyl alcohol (99 percent).

                                    This method is effective for removing most particles of contamination and dust,
                                    but will leave small pieces of contamination on the optics.


                             NOTE: Common retail outlets generally do not sell 99 percent isopropyl alcohol. Do
                             not use isopropyl alcohol with a concentration less than 99 percent.


                             ■      Use a dry cloth cleaning tool, such as USConec's In-Bulkhead-Connector (I.B.C.)
                                    Cleaning Tool (see Figure 67 on page 178).

                             Figure 67: Cleaning Tool and Adapter




                                    This tool uses a dry cloth to remove dust and oil from the fiber optics. It is safe
                                    and effective for removing any contaminants that were left after cleaning with
                                    a lint-free swab and isopropyl alcohol (99 percent).



                             NOTE: As part of your routine maintenance, we recommend that you clean all exposed
                             fiber-optic components each time you disconnect and reconnect a fiber-optic cable.


                             ■      Cleaning with Alcohol and Swabs on page 179
                             ■      Cleaning with the Dry Cloth Cleaning Tool on page 179




178    ■    Maintaining the TX-SIBs
                                                  Chapter 15: Hardware Maintenance Overview




Cleaning with Alcohol and Swabs

To clean the fiber-optic components using lint-free swabs and isopropyl alcohol (99
percent):
1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
     connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
     about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
2.   Bring the corresponding interface offline and disconnect the fiber-optic array
     cable from the TX-SIB or T640-SIB as described in “Replacing a Fiber-Optic Array
     Cable” on page 231.


WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic array adapter or a connector at the
end of a fiber-optic array cable attached to an adapter. The fiber optics emit laser
light that can damage your eyes.


3.   Moisten the tip of a lint-free swab with isopropyl alcohol (99 percent).
4.   If you are cleaning a TX-SIB or T640-SIB fiber-optic array adapter, use your fingers
     to hold open the dust shutters.
5.   Gently wipe the eight sets of optics within the adapter or connector with the
     swab. Do not touch the optics because the oil from your finger will contaminate
     them. Take care not to snag the swab on the ferrules because particles could be
     left behind.
6.   Moisten the tip of another lint-free swab with isopropyl alcohol (99 percent).
7.   Gently clean the area between and around the optics within the adapter or
     connector.
8.   Proceed to “Cleaning with the Dry Cloth Cleaning Tool” on page 179 to remove
     any contaminants that were left after cleaning with a lint-free swab.


Cleaning with the Dry Cloth Cleaning Tool

To clean the fiber-optic components using the dry cloth cleaning tool:
1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
     connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
     about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
2.   Bring the corresponding interface offline and disconnect the fiber-optic array
     cable from the TX-SIB or T640-SIB as described in “Replacing a Fiber-Optic Array
     Cable” on page 231.


WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic array adapter or a connector at the
end of a fiber-optic array cable attached to an adapter. The fiber optics emit laser
light that can damage your eyes.


3.   Insert the cleaning adapter into the connector slot and hold in place (see
     Figure 68 on page 180).




                                                         Maintaining the TX-SIBs   ■   179
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 68: Inserting the Cleaning Adapter into the Connector Slot




                             4.     Remove the dust cap from the cleaning tool.
                             5.     Insert the tip of the dry cloth cleaning tool into the cleaning adapter (see
                                    Figure 69 on page 180).

                             Figure 69: Inserting the Cleaning Tip into the Keyed Slot of the Cleaning Adapter




                             NOTE: The cleaning adapter is keyed to ensure that the cleaning tip can be inserted
                             in only one way.


                             6.     Rotate the thumb wheel in the direction indicated on the cleaning tool until the
                                    thumb wheel clicks to indicate a completed cleaning action (see
                                    Figure 70 on page 181).




180    ■    Maintaining the TX-SIBs
                                                 Chapter 15: Hardware Maintenance Overview




Figure 70: Rotating the Thumb Wheel




7.   Clean the four visible ferrules.
8.   Rotate the cleaning adapter 180 degrees so that it aligns with the remaining four
     ferrules.
9.   Rotate the dry cloth cleaning tool 180 degrees (see Figure 71 on page 181).

Figure 71: Rotating the Cleaning Tool and Cleaning Adapter




10. Repeat these steps for all fiber-optic components that require cleaning.
11. Replace the dust cap on the cleaning tool.




                                                        Maintaining the TX-SIBs   ■   181
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




Maintaining the Power Supplies
                             To maintain the power supplies, follow these guidelines:
                             ■      To check the status of the power supplies, issue the show chassis environment
                                    pem command. The output is similar to the following:

                                       user@host> show chassis environment pem scc

                                       scc-re0:
                                       --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                       PEM 0 status:
                                         State                             Online
                                         Temperature                    29 degrees C / 84 degrees F
                                         DC input:                         OK
                                         DC Output:             Voltage    Current       Power    Load
                                               SIB 0              55141       6156         339      45
                                               SIB 1              55550       6218         345      46
                                               SIB 2              55491       5981         331      44
                                               SIB 3              55450       6331         351      46
                                               SIB 4              55633       6331         352      46
                                       PEM 1 status:
                                         State                             Online
                                         Temperature                    29 degrees C / 84 degrees F
                                         DC input:                         OK
                                         DC Output:             Voltage    Current       Power    Load
                                               SIB 0              55122       6166         340      45
                                               SIB 1              55254       6228         346      47
                                               SIB 2              55258       5951         332      48
                                               SIB 3              55546       6321         352      50
                                               SIB 4              55971       6341         353      47




                             NOTE: If 0 is displayed for the SCG/CB/SIB in the Current, Power, and Load fields for
                             a PEM, and the voltage field does not match the other PEM, it might indicate a
                             difference between the DC input voltages applied to PEM0 and PEM1. Consider
                             checking your DC power network for unintended voltage drops to the TX Matrix
                             platform (see Figure 109 on page 291 for a typical DC source cabling arrangement).

                             The current sharing between PEMs relies on equal voltages at the input terminals of
                             the PEMs. The TX Matrix platform system power is divided into two load zones, one
                             load zone consists of INPUT 0 of PEM0 and PEM1, while the other load zone consists
                             of INPUT 1 of PEM0 and PEM1. Load sharing will only occur between the PEMs of
                             each load zone (INPUT 0 or INPUT 1) and therefore those two PEMs voltages are the
                             ones that should be equal for current sharing. However, if the voltages do not match,
                             the TX Matrix platform operates normally as long as the DC input voltages are within
                             the operating range provided in Table 32 on page 287.



                             ■      Make sure that the power and grounding cables are arranged so that they do not
                                    obstruct access to other TX Matrix platform components.
                             ■      Routinely check the LEDs on the power supply faceplates. If the CB ON LEDs are
                                    lit, the power supplies are functioning normally. For more information about the
                                    power supply LEDs, see “Power Supplies” on page 29.




182    ■    Maintaining the Power Supplies
                                                 Chapter 15: Hardware Maintenance Overview




■   Check the red and yellow alarm LEDs and the LED display on the craft interface.
    Power supply failure or removal triggers an alarm that causes one or both of the
    LEDs to light and an error message to appear on the LED display. You can display
    the associated error messages by issuing the following CLI command:

         user@host> show chassis alarms scc



    For a list of possible alarm messages, see “Chassis and Interface Alarm
    Messages” on page 187.
■   The power supplies require an unobstructed airflow at both the front and rear
    of the chassis. Periodically check the site to ensure that both the air intake at the
    bottom front of the chassis and the exhaust from the power supply faceplates
    are unobstructed.
■   Periodically inspect the site to ensure that the grounding and power cables
    connected to the TX Matrix platform are securely in place and that there is no
    moisture accumulating near the TX Matrix platform. To review grounding and
    site wiring requirements for the TX Matrix platform, see “Preparing for TX Matrix
    Platform Installation” on page 65.
■   Regularly inspect the air filter on each power supply for dust and debris, and
    replace the filter element as needed. To replace a power supply filter element,
    follow this procedure (see Figure 72 on page 184):
    1.   Grasp the filter cover on the power supply faceplate and pull it straight off
         the power supply.

    2.   Remove the filter element.

    3.   Install a new filter element.

    4.   Press the filter cover straight onto the power supply faceplate until all four
         sides click into place.




                                                  Maintaining the Power Supplies   ■   183
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 72: Replacing the Power Supply Filter Cover




184    ■    Maintaining the Power Supplies
Chapter 16
Troubleshooting Hardware Components

                  This chapter describes how to troubleshoot problems with hardware components
                  installed in the TX Matrix platform. If you encounter software problems, or problems
                  with hardware components not discussed here, contact the Juniper Networks Technical
                  Assistance Center (JTAC) as described in “Requesting Support” on page xxix.
                  ■   Overview of Troubleshooting Resources on page 185
                  ■   Troubleshooting the Cooling System on page 190
                  ■   Troubleshooting the Power System on page 191
                  ■   Troubleshooting the TX-SIBs and the Switching Planes on page 193


Overview of Troubleshooting Resources
                  This section provides an overview of the resources you can use while troubleshooting
                  problems with the TX Matrix platform:
                  ■   Command-Line Interface on page 185
                  ■   LEDs on page 186
                  ■   Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages on page 187
                  ■   Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center on page 190

Command-Line Interface
                  The JUNOS software command-line interface (CLI) is the primary tool for controlling
                  and troubleshooting routing matrix hardware, the JUNOS software, routing protocols,
                  and network connectivity. CLI commands display information from routing tables,
                  information specific to routing protocols, and information about network connectivity
                  derived from the ping and traceroute utilities.

                  You enter CLI commands on one or more external management devices connected
                  to the Routing Engine through ports on the corresponding TX-CIP. The port labeled
                  AUXILIARY attaches the Routing Engine to a laptop, modem, or other auxiliary device,
                  the port labeled CONSOLE attaches to a system console, and the port labeled ETHERNET
                  attaches to a management LAN. For more information, see “Routing Engine
                  Ports” on page 28.




                                                           Overview of Troubleshooting Resources   ■   185
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             For information about using the CLI to display details about alarms generated by
                             interfaces and hardware components, see “Chassis and Interface Alarm
                             Messages” on page 187.

                             For information about using the CLI to troubleshoot the JUNOS software, see the
                             appropriate JUNOS software configuration guide.

LEDs
                             LEDs on the TX Matrix platform display the status of various components. This section
                             describes the following types of LEDs:
                             ■      Craft Interface LEDs on page 186
                             ■      Component LEDs on page 186

                             Craft Interface LEDs

                             The craft interface is the panel on the front of the TX Matrix platform that displays
                             system status messages and allows you to troubleshoot the TX Matrix platform. The
                             craft interface is located on the lower front of the TX Matrix platform below the air
                             filter. It contains LEDs, buttons, and an LED display showing status messages for the
                             TX Matrix platform.

                             To display system alarm messages on the LED display, see “Chassis and Interface
                             Alarm Messages” on page 187. For more information about using the craft interface,
                             see “Craft Interface” on page 23.

                             LEDs on the craft interface include the following:
                             ■      Host subsystem LEDs—Three LEDs (one green MASTER, one green ONLINE, and
                                    one red OFFLINE) indicate the status of each host subsystem. The host subsystem
                                    LEDs are located on the right of the craft interface, and are labeled HOST 0 and
                                    HOST 1. For more information, see “Host Subsystem LEDs” on page 25.
                             ■      TX-SIB LEDs—Three LEDs (one green ACTIVE, one green OK, and one red FAIL)
                                    indicate the status of each TX-SIB. The TX-SIB LEDs are located along the top of
                                    the craft interface. The corresponding TX-SIB slots are identified by the labels
                                    on the TX-SIB online/offline buttons (SIB0 through SIB4). For more information,
                                    see “TX-SIB LEDs” on page 26.
                             ■      Alarm LEDs—One large red circular LED and one large yellow triangular LED,
                                    located on the left of the craft interface, indicate two levels of alarm conditions.
                                    You can determine the cause of the alarm condition by looking at the LED display
                                    on the craft interface. For more information, see “Alarm LEDs and Alarm
                                    Cutoff/Lamp Test Button” on page 23.


                             Component LEDs

                             The following LEDs are located on various TX Matrix platform components and
                             display the status of those components:
                             ■      TX-SIB LEDs—Three LEDs on each TX-SIB faceplate indicate the status of that
                                    TX-SIB. For more information, see “TX-SIB Components” on page 14.




186    ■    Overview of Troubleshooting Resources
                                                               Chapter 16: Troubleshooting Hardware Components




                  ■     TX-CB LEDs—Three LEDs on each TX-CB faceplate indicate the status of that
                        TX-CB. If no LEDs are lit, the TX-CB is not receiving power. For more information,
                        see “TX-CB Components” on page 22.
                  ■     Power supply LEDs—Four LEDs on each power supply faceplate indicate the
                        status of that power supply. For more information, see “Two-Input 160-A Power
                        Supply LEDs” on page 30.


Chassis and Interface Alarm Messages
                  When the Routing Engine detects an alarm condition, it lights the red or yellow alarm
                  LED on the craft interface as appropriate, trips the corresponding alarm relay contact
                  on the TX-CIP, and reports the cause of the alarm in the craft interface LED display.
                  To view a more detailed description of the alarm cause, issue the show chassis alarms
                  scc CLI command:

                  user@host> show chassis alarms scc

                  To display all alarms in the routing matrix, issue the show chassis alarms command
                  without the scc option.

                  There are three classes of alarm messages:
                  ■     TX Matrix chassis alarms—Indicate a problem with a TX Matrix chassis
                        component such as the cooling system or power supplies, as described in
                        Table 26 on page 187.
                  ■     T640 routing node alarms—Indicate a problem with a T640 routing node (LCC)
                        in the routing matrix, as described in Table 27 on page 188. For a list of additional
                        alarm messages that apply only to the T640 routing node chassis, see the T640
                        Internet Routing Node Hardware Guide.
                  ■     Interface alarms—Indicate a problem with a specific network interface. For
                        example, Table 28 on page 189 lists the alarm messages for a SONET/SDH
                        interface. These messages apply only to a T640 routing node in a routing matrix.
                        For more information about interface alarms, see the T640 PIC Guide.

                  In Table 26 on page 187 through Table 28 on page 189, the text in the column labeled
                  ”Craft Interface Message” appears in the display of the craft interface. The text in
                  the column labeled “CLI Message” appears in the output from the show chassis alarms
                  command.

                  Table 26: TX Matrix Chassis Alarm Messages

                                                          Craft Interface
                      Component         Alarm Type        Message                   CLI Message

                      Fans              Red               Fan Failure               fan-name Failure

                                                          Fans Missing              Too many fans missing or
                                                                                    failing

                                        Yellow            Fan Removed               fan-name Removed




                                                               Overview of Troubleshooting Resources   ■   187
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Table 26: TX Matrix Chassis Alarm Messages (continued)

                                                                 Craft Interface
                              Component             Alarm Type   Message                    CLI Message

                              Temperature           Red          Temperature Hot            Temperature Hot
                              sensors
                                                                 Sensor Failure             Temperature sensor failure

                                                    Yellow       Temperature Warm           Temperature Warm

                              Power supplies        Red          PEM pem-number Over        PEM pem-number Over
                                                                 Temp                       Temperature

                                                                 PEM pem-number Output      PEM pem-number Output
                                                                 Fail                       Failure

                                                                 PEM pem-number Input       PEM pem-number Input
                                                                 Fail                       Failure

                                                    Yellow       PEM pem-number             PEM pem-number Removed
                                                                 Removed

                              TX-SIBs               Red          SIB sib-number Failure     SIB sib-number Fault

                                                                 SIB sib-number Removed     SIB sib-number Absent

                                                    Yellow       Spare SIB Failure          Spare SIB Fault

                                                                 Spare SIB Removed          Spare SIB Absent

                                                                 Check SIB                  Check SIB

                              Host subsystems       Red          Host host-number           Host host-number Removed
                                                                 Removed

                                                    Yellow       Host host-number Failure   Host host-number Failure

                              TX-CB                 Red          CB cb-number Removed       CB cb-number Removed

                                                                 CB cb-number Failure       CB cb-number Failure

                                                    Yellow       CB cb-number Ethernet      CB cb-number Ethernet
                                                                 Switch Failure             Switch Failure

                              Craft interface       Yellow       Craft Failure              Craft Failure



                             Table 27: T640 Routing Node Alarm Messages

                                                                 Craft Interface
                              Component             Alarm Type   Message                    CLI Message

                              Fans                  Red          T640 Rear Fan Tray in      T640 Rear Fan Tray in LCC
                                                                 LCC




188    ■    Overview of Troubleshooting Resources
                                           Chapter 16: Troubleshooting Hardware Components




Table 27: T640 Routing Node Alarm Messages (continued)

                                     Craft Interface
 Component            Alarm Type     Message                     CLI Message

 T640 routing node    Red            LCC lcc-number Hard         LCC lcc-number Hard Errors
                                     Errors

                                     LCC lcc-number Major        LCC lcc-number Major Errors
                                     Errors

                                     No LCC Online               No LCC Online

                                     LCC lcc-number Not          LCC lcc-number Not Online
                                     Online

                      Yellow         LCC lcc-number Soft         LCC lcc-number Soft Errors
                                     Errors

                                     LCC lcc-number Minor        LCC lcc-number Minor Errors
                                     Errors



Table 28: SONET/SDH Interface Alarm Messages

 Craft Interface Message           CLI Message

 interface-name so-x/x/x BERR-SD   interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET bit error rate defect

 interface-name so-x/x/x BERR-SF   interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET bit error rate fault

 interface-name so-x/x/x LAIS      interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET line AIS

 interface-name so-x/x/x LOF       interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET loss of frame

 interface-name so-x/x/x LOL       interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET loss of light

 interface-name so-x/x/x LOP       interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET loss of pointer

 interface-name so-x/x/x LOS       interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET loss of signal

 interface-name so-x/x/x LRDI      interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET line remote defect indicator

 interface-name so-x/x/x PAIS      interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET path AIS

 interface-name so-x/x/x PLL       interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET PLL lock

 interface-name so-x/x/x PMIS      interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET path mismatch

 interface-name so-x/x/x PRDI      interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET path remote defect indicator

 interface-name so-x/x/x REI       interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET remote error indicator

 interface-name so-x/x/x SEF       interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET severely errored frame

 interface-name so-x/x/x UNEQ      interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET unequipped




                                          Overview of Troubleshooting Resources       ■     189
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center
                             If you need assistance during troubleshooting, you can contact the Juniper Networks
                             Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) by using the Web or by telephone. See “Requesting
                             Support” on page xxix.


Troubleshooting the Cooling System
                             The TX Matrix platform cooling system comprises two front and one rear fan tray
                             (see Figure 2 on page 10 and Figure 3 on page 11). The front fan trays each contain
                             six fans and are interchangeable. The rear fan tray contains eight fans and is not
                             interchangeable with the front trays. The front fan trays cool the components installed
                             in the front card cage (the TX-SIBs, TX-CIPs, and midplane). The rear fan tray cools
                             the components installed in the rear card cage (the Routing Engines and TX-CBs).
                             Each power supply has one fan that cools that power supply. Figure 73 on page 190
                             shows the airflow through the TX Matrix platform.

                             Air filters for both the front and rear fan trays help keep dust and other particles
                             from entering the cooling system. To function properly, the entire cooling system
                             requires an unobstructed airflow and proper clearance around the site, as described
                             in “Preparing for TX Matrix Platform Installation” on page 65.

                             Figure 73: Airflow Through the Chassis



                                                                  xhaust
                                                              Air e




                             During normal operation, the fans in each fan tray function at less than full speed.
                             Control boards (TX-CBs ) constantly monitor the temperatures detected by sensors
                             on the midplane and TX Matrix platform components, adjusting the speed of the
                             fans as necessary. If the TX Matrix platform temperature exceeds the acceptable
                             maximum, the TX-CB turns off the power supplies. The following conditions
                             automatically cause the fans to run at full speed and also trigger the indicated alarm:




190    ■    Troubleshooting the Cooling System
                                                           Chapter 16: Troubleshooting Hardware Components




                 ■   A fan fails (red alarm).
                 ■   One of the fan trays is removed (yellow alarm).
                 ■   The TX Matrix platform temperature exceeds the “temperature warm” threshold
                     (yellow alarm).
                 ■   The temperature of the TX Matrix platform exceeds the maximum (“temperature
                     hot”) threshold (red alarm and automatic shutdown of the power supplies).

                 To troubleshoot the fans, follow these guidelines:
                 ■   If the red alarm LED on the craft interface lights, find the source of the problem
                     by looking at the display on the craft interface. The number of alarm conditions,
                     as well as the source of each alarm, appears on the screen.
                 ■   Use the CLI to check the status of the fans. For example, you can issue the
                     following command to get information about the source of an alarm condition:

                        user@host> show chassis alarms scc



                     For information about the alarms, see Table 26 on page 187.
                 ■   Place your hand near the exhaust vents at the rear of the chassis to determine
                     whether the fans are pushing air out of the chassis.
                 ■   If the DC OK LED on one or both of the power supplies is not lit, check the power
                     supply fans to see if they are operating.
                 ■   If all power supplies have failed, the system temperature might have exceeded
                     the threshold, causing the system to shut down.
                 ■   If the display on the craft interface lists only one fan failure and the other fans
                     are functioning normally, the fan is probably faulty and you need to replace the
                     fan tray, as described in “Replacing a Fan Tray” on page 205.


Troubleshooting the Power System
                 To verify that a power supply is functioning normally, perform the following steps:
                 ■   Check the four LEDs on each power supply faceplate. If the green CB ON and the
                     blue DC OK LEDs are on, the power source is good and the power supplies are
                     functional. The CB ON LED on the power supply lights when the circuit breaker
                     is functioning, and the DC OK LED lights when the power supply is receiving
                     source DC power. The amber CB TRIP LED lights when the power supply detects
                     a fault (the power supply fails, does not have sufficient airflow, is going through
                     a startup test, or is not properly inserted). The amber OVER TEMP LED lights
                     when the power supply is not receiving enough airflow to maintain proper
                     temperature.
                 ■   Check the display on the craft interface. The JUNOS software constantly updates
                     the screen with status information for each component. For more information
                     about the display, see “Craft Interface” on page 23.




                                                               Troubleshooting the Power System   ■   191
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             NOTE: On the display and in the CLI, the power supplies are referred to as PEM0
                             and PEM1, from top to bottom.



                             If a power supply is not functioning normally, perform the following steps to diagnose
                             and correct the problem:
                             ■      If the DC OK power supply LED is off, check the red alarm LED on the craft
                                    interface. The JUNOS software monitors the system temperature, and if it exceeds
                                    a certain limit, the software triggers a red alarm, a condition that shuts down
                                    the power supplies.
                             ■      If a red alarm condition occurs, check the display on the craft interface to
                                    determine the source of the problem.


                             NOTE: If the system temperature exceeds the threshold, the JUNOS software shuts
                             down all power supplies so that no status is displayed.

                             The JUNOS software also can shut down one of the power supplies for other reasons.
                             In this case, the remaining power supply assumes the load, and you can still view
                             the system status through the CLI or display.



                             ■      If the DC OK power supply LED is off and no red alarm condition exists, check
                                    that the circuit breaker is switched to the on position (|).
                             ■      Verify that the source circuit breaker has the proper current rating. Each input
                                    on each power supply must be connected to a separate power source.
                             ■      Verify that the power cables from the power source to the TX Matrix platform
                                    are not damaged. If the insulation is cracked or broken, immediately replace the
                                    cable.
                             ■      Connect the power supply to a different power source with a new power cable.
                                    If the power supply DC OK LED still does not light, the power supply is the source
                                    of the problem. Replace the power supply with a spare, as described in “Replacing
                                    Power System Components” on page 238.
                             ■      If the DC OK LED on the installed spare lights, the replaced power supply is faulty,
                                    and you should return it for replacement, as described in “Contacting Customer
                                    Support and Returning Hardware” on page 299.
                             ■      If the OVER TEMP LED on one of the power supplies lights, check the fans and
                                    air filters to be sure they are functioning and providing sufficient airflow through
                                    the chassis.
                             ■      If you cannot determine the cause of the problem or need additional assistance,
                                    see “Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center” on page 190.




192    ■    Troubleshooting the Power System
                                                              Chapter 16: Troubleshooting Hardware Components




Troubleshooting the TX-SIBs and the Switching Planes
                 To troubleshoot the switching plane connections between the TX-SIBs in the TX Matrix
                 platform and the T640-SIBs in the T640 routing nodes, perform the following steps:
                 1.   Verify that the TX-SIBs and T640-SIBs are online by issuing the show chassis
                      sibs command:

                         user@host> show chassis sibs

                         scc-re0:
                         --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                         Slot State                 Uptime
                          0    Spare             133 days, 12 minutes, 41 seconds
                          1    Online            133 days, 12 minutes, 41 seconds
                          2    Online            133 days, 12 minutes, 41 seconds
                          3    Online            133 days, 12 minutes, 41 seconds
                          4    Online            133 days, 12 minutes, 41 seconds

                         lcc0-re0:
                         --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                         Slot State                 Uptime
                          0    Spare             133 days, 12 minutes, 2 seconds
                          1    Online            133 days, 12 minutes, 2 seconds
                          2    Online            133 days, 12 minutes, 2 seconds
                          3    Online            133 days, 12 minutes, 2 seconds
                          4    Online            133 days, 12 minutes, 2 seconds

                 2.   Verify the state of the electrical and optical switch fabric links by issuing the
                      show chassis fabric sibs command:

                         user@host> show chassis fabric sibs

                         scc-re0:
                         --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                         Fabric management SIB state:
                         SIB #0
                             plane state: S_SPARE
                             LCC #0      : Links ok
                         SIB #1
                             plane state: S_ACTIVE
                             LCC #0      : Links ok
                         SIB #2
                             plane state: S_ACTIVE
                             LCC #0      : Links ok
                         SIB #3
                             plane state: S_ACTIVE
                             LCC #0      : Links ok
                         SIB #4
                             plane state: S_ACTIVE
                             LCC #0      : Links ok

                         lcc0-re0:
                         --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                         Fabric management SIB state:
                         SIB #0
                             plane state: S_SPARE
                             FPC #0
                                 PFE #0 : Links ok




                                                Troubleshooting the TX-SIBs and the Switching Planes   ■   193
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                                                 PFE #1 : Links ok
                                             SCC         : Links ok
                                       SIB   #1
                                             plane state: S_ACTIVE
                                             FPC #0
                                                 PFE #0 : Links ok
                                                 PFE #1 : Links ok
                                             SCC         : Links ok
                                       SIB   #2
                                             plane state: S_ACTIVE
                                             FPC #0
                                                 PFE #0 : Links ok
                                                 PFE #1 : Links ok
                                             SCC         : Links ok
                                       SIB   #3
                                             plane state: S_ACTIVE
                                             FPC #0
                                                 PFE #0 : Links ok
                                                 PFE #1 : Links ok
                                             SCC         : Links ok
                                       SIB   #4
                                             plane state: S_ACTIVE
                                             FPC #0
                                                 PFE #0 : Links ok
                                                 PFE #1 : Links ok
                                             SCC         : Links ok



                                    Verify that the state of each link is Links ok.
                             3.     Display the system log messages to obtain information about link failures. The
                                    /var/log/messages file is a commonly configured destination for system log
                                    messages. To display it, issue the show log messages command:

                                       user@host> show log messages



                                    For more information about system log messages, see the JUNOS System Log
                                    Messages Reference.

                                    Your customer support representative can assist you with using the information
                                    in the system log, along with the supplied fiber-optic array loopback connector
                                    and adapter, to determine if you have a faulty TX-SIB, T640-SIB, or fiber-optic
                                    array cable.


                             CAUTION: Do not connect and disconnect a fiber-optic array cable connector, a
                             loopback connector, or a loopback adapter more frequently than required to perform
                             the procedures in this hardware guide. These fiber-optic components are rated for
                             a limited number of insertions (approximately 100).


                             4.     If the red FAIL LED below a TX-SIB on the craft interface is on, look at the display
                                    on the craft interface to check the status of the TX-SIB. For information about
                                    using the display, see “Craft Interface” on page 23.




194    ■    Troubleshooting the TX-SIBs and the Switching Planes
                                                                Chapter 16: Troubleshooting Hardware Components




                   5.   If an RX LED next to a fiber-optic array adapter is lit amber, the fiber-optic array
                        cable plugged into the adapter might be connected to the wrong T640-SIB. Check
                        that the fiber-optic array cable is connected as specified in Table 25 on page 138.
                   6.   If a TX or RX LED next to a fiber-optic array adapter is lit red, look at the display
                        on the craft interface to check the status of the TX-SIB. If an RX LED is lit red,
                        the corresponding receive link either has detected errors or is not functioning
                        normally.
                   7.   Make sure the TX-SIB is properly seated in the midplane. Check that each ejector
                        handle has been turned clockwise and is tight.


Cleaning the Fiber-Optic Array Adapters and Connectors
                   If the state of any link between a TX-SIB and a T640-SIB is incorrect, we recommend
                   you clean the corresponding TX-SIB and T640-SIB fiber-optic array adapters and the
                   fiber-optic array cable connectors on the connecting fiber-optic array cable. Follow
                   this procedure:
                   1.   Bring the interface offline and disconnect the fiber-optic array cable between
                        the TX-SIB and T640-SIB as described in “Replacing a Fiber-Optic Array
                        Cable” on page 231.
                   2.   Clean the TX-SIB and T640-SIB fiber-optic array adapters and the fiber-optic
                        array cable connectors as described in “Cleaning the Fiber-Optic
                        Components” on page 177.
                   3.   Connect the fiber-optic array cable between the TX-SIB and T640-SIB and bring
                        the interface online as described in “Replacing a Fiber-Optic Array
                        Cable” on page 231.
                   4.   If the state of any link between a TX-SIB and a T640-SIB is still incorrect, contact
                        your customer support representative.




                                                  Troubleshooting the TX-SIBs and the Switching Planes   ■   195
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




196    ■    Troubleshooting the TX-SIBs and the Switching Planes
Chapter 17
Replacing Hardware Components

                 This chapter explains how to replace hardware components on the TX Matrix platform.
                 It discusses the following topics:
                 ■      Tools and Parts Required on page 197
                 ■      Replacing a TX-CIP and Its Cables on page 198
                 ■      Replacing Cooling System Components on page 205
                 ■      Replacing the Craft Interface on page 214
                 ■      Replacing Host Subsystem Components on page 216
                 ■      Replacing a TX-SIB and Its Cables on page 226
                 ■      Replacing Power System Components on page 238


Tools and Parts Required
                 To replace hardware components, you need the tools and parts listed in
                 Table 29 on page 197.

                 Table 29: Tools and Parts Required for Component Replacement

                     Tool or part                                     Components

                     7/16–in. nut driver or pliers                    Power cables

                                                                      Power supply

                     Blank panels (if component is not reinstalled)   TX-CB

                                                                      Routing Engine

                                                                      TX-SIB

                     Dust covers                                      Fiber-optic array cables

                     Electrostatic bag or antistatic mat              TX-CB

                                                                      Routing Engine

                                                                      TX-SIB




                                                                                Tools and Parts Required   ■   197
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Table 29: Tools and Parts Required for Component Replacement (continued)

                              Tool or part                                     Components

                              Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding wrist    All
                              strap

                              Small slotted screwdriver, at least 4 in. long   Fiber-optic array cables

                              Flat-blade (–) screwdriver, 2.5 mm               Serial cable to AUXILIARY or CONSOLE Routing
                                                                               Engine ports

                              Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1               Craft interface

                              Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2               Air filter (front or rear)

                                                                               Cables and connectors

                                                                               TX-CB

                                                                               TX-CIP

                                                                               Fan tray (front or rear)

                                                                               Power supply

                                                                               Routing Engine

                                                                               TX-SIB

                              Wire cutters                                     Power cables

                                                                               Power supply



Replacing a TX-CIP and Its Cables
                             The TX-CIP is located to the left side of the TX-SIB card cage, as shown in
                             Figure 2 on page 10. It houses the routing matrix control plane ports and the Routing
                             Engine interface ports, which accept connections to external management and
                             alarm-reporting devices.

                             The TX-CIP is hot-removable and hot-insertable. It weighs approximately 8 lb (3.6 kg).
                             When the TX-CIP is removed, the backup TX-CIP provides redundant connections
                             to the active host subsystem in the TX Matrix platform and the active T-CBs in the
                             T640 routing nodes.


                             NOTE: If you are replacing a TX-CIP in an operational TX Matrix platform, the
                             TX Matrix platform and each T640 routing node in the routing matrix must have
                             redundant host subsystems.




198    ■    Replacing a TX-CIP and Its Cables
                                                                   Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




                    To replace the TX-CIP and its cables, use the following procedures:
                    ■    Removing a TX-CIP on page 199
                    ■    Installing a TX-CIP on page 200
                    ■    Replacing Connections to TX-CIP Ports on page 202

Removing a TX-CIP
                    To remove a TX-CIP, follow this procedure (see Figure 74 on page 200):
                    1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                         connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                         about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                    2.   Label each cable with its corresponding port name—for example, LCC0,
                         ETHERNET, CONSOLE, and RED ALARM.
                    3.   Disconnect all cables connected to the TX-CIP. For instructions, see “Replacing
                         Connections to TX-CIP Ports” on page 202.
                    4.   Loosen the captive screws at the top and bottom of the TX-CIP faceplate.
                    5.   Grasp the handle on the TX-CIP faceplate and carefully pull the TX-CIP straight
                         out of the chassis.


                    CAUTION: Be sure to slide the TX-CIP straight within the slot to avoid damaging the
                    connector pins on the front of the midplane.




                                                                  Replacing a TX-CIP and Its Cables   ■   199
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 74: Removing a TX-CIP




Installing a TX-CIP
                             To install a TX-CIP, follow this procedure (see Figure 75 on page 201):
                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             2.     Grasp the TX-CIP handle with one hand and hold the bottom edge of the TX-CIP
                                    with the other hand to support its weight.


                             NOTE: The components on the TX-CIP are on the left side of the board, unlike the
                             components of a TX-SIB, which are on the right side. Verify that the components are
                             on the left before inserting the TX-CIP.




200    ■    Replacing a TX-CIP and Its Cables
                                                 Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




3.   Insert the TX-CIP into its chassis slot, carefully aligning the top and bottom of
     the TX-CIP with the guides in the card cage.
4.   Carefully push the TX-CIP straight into the chassis until it contacts the midplane.


CAUTION: Be sure to slide the TX-CIP straight within the slot to avoid damaging the
connector pins on the front of the midplane.


5.   Tighten the screws at the top and bottom of the TX-CIP faceplate.
6.   Using the labels to assist you, reattach all cables to the TX-CIP.
7.   To verify that the TX-CIP is installed correctly, plug an Ethernet cable into the
     ETHERNET port on the TX-CIP. If the host module is operational, the ACT LED
     blinks to indicate Ethernet activity. If you can run the CLI from a management
     device attached to the TX-CIP, the TX-CIP is installed correctly.


Figure 75: Installing a TX-CIP




                                                Replacing a TX-CIP and Its Cables   ■   201
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




Replacing Connections to TX-CIP Ports
                             The ports on the TX-CIP connect the routing matrix control planes and the Routing
                             Engines to external management devices (see Figure 76 on page 202).

                             Figure 76: Control Plane and Routing Engine Interface Ports




202    ■    Replacing a TX-CIP and Its Cables
                                               Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




To replace the cables that connect to the ports, perform the procedures described
in the following sections:
■    Replacing Control Plane Connections on page 203
■    Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable on page 203
■    Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable on page 204

Replacing Control Plane Connections

The control plane connections between the T640 routing nodes and the TX Matrix
platform are provided by UTP Category 5 Ethernet cables between the RJ-45 ports
on the TX-CIPs in the TX Matrix platform and the T-CBs in the T640 routing nodes.
The maximum length supported is 100 m. The UTP Category 5 cables do not have
to be the same length. The cable wiring is straight-through (not crossover).


NOTE: If you are replacing a control plane connection in an operational routing
matrix, the TX Matrix platform and the T640 routing node controlled through this
connection must have redundant host subsystems.


To replace a control plane connection, follow this procedure:
1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
     connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
     about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
2.   Press the tab on the cable connector installed in the TX-CIP port and pull the
     connector straight out of the port. Figure 77 on page 204 shows the connector.
     The control plane ports on the TX-CIP are labeled LCC0 through LCC3.


NOTE: The RJ-45 ports labeled LCC4 through LCC7 on a TX-CIP are reserved for future
use.


3.   Disconnect the cable plugged into the port labeled CIP on the corresponding
     T-CB.
4.   Plug one end of the replacement cable into the appropriate TX-CIP port.
5.   Plug the other end of the cable into the port labeled CIP on the corresponding
     T-CB.
6.   Dress the cable appropriately.


Replacing the Management Ethernet Cable

To connect the Routing Engine to a network for out-of-band management, connect
an Ethernet cable with RJ-45/RJ-45 connectors to the ETHERNET port on the TX-CIP.
One cable is provided with the TX Matrix platform. For cable specifications, see
“Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications” on page 297. Follow this
procedure:




                                              Replacing a TX-CIP and Its Cables   ■   203
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             2.     If a cable is already installed in the ETHERNET port for the relevant Routing Engine,
                                    perform the following steps:
                                    a.   Press the tab on the connector and pull the connector straight out of the
                                         port. Figure 77 on page 204 shows the connector.

                                    b.   Disconnect the cable from the network device.

                             3.     Plug one end of the replacement Ethernet cable into the appropriate ETHERNET
                                    port. Figure 76 on page 202 shows the external device ports on the TX-CIP. The
                                    port labeled HOST on TX-CIP-0 connects to the Routing Engine in the upper Routing
                                    Engine slot (RE0), and the port labeled HOST on TX-CIP-1 connects to the Routing
                                    Engine in the lower Routing Engine slot (RE1).
                             4.     Plug the other end of the cable into the network device.


                             Figure 77: Ethernet Cable Connector




                             Replacing the Console or Auxiliary Cable

                             To use a system console to configure and manage the Routing Engine, connect it to
                             the appropriate CONSOLE port on the TX-CIP. To use a laptop, modem, or other
                             auxiliary device, connect it to the appropriate AUXILIARY port on the TX-CIP. Both
                             ports accept an RS-232 (EIA-232) serial cable with DB-9/DB-9 connectors. One cable
                             is provided with the TX Matrix platform. If you want to connect a device to both
                             ports, you must supply another cable. For cable specifications, see “Routing Engine
                             Interface Cable and Wire Specifications” on page 297.

                             To connect a management console or auxiliary device, follow this procedure:
                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             2.     If a cable is already installed in the CONSOLE or AUXILIARY port, perform the
                                    following steps:
                                    a.   Turn off the power to the console or auxiliary device.

                                    b.   Unscrew the screws that secure the cable connector to the port, using a
                                         2.5-mm flat-blade screwdriver if necessary.

                                    c.   Pull the cable connector straight out of the port.

                                    d.   Disconnect the cable from the console or auxiliary device.

                             3.     Plug the female end of the replacement serial cable into the appropriate CONSOLE
                                    or AUXILIARY port (see Figure 78 on page 205). Figure 76 on page 202 shows the




204    ■    Replacing a TX-CIP and Its Cables
                                                                    Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




                        external device ports on the TX-CIP. The port labeled HOST on TX-CIP-0 connects
                        to the Routing Engine in the upper Routing Engine slot (RE0), and the port labeled
                        HOST on TX-CIP-1 connects to the Routing Engine in the lower Routing Engine
                        slot (RE1).
                   4.   Tighten the screws on the connector, using a 2.5-mm flat-blade screwdriver if
                        necessary.
                   5.   Power on the auxiliary or console device.


                   Figure 78: Serial Port Connector




Replacing Cooling System Components
                   For instructions on replace cooling system components, see the following sections:
                   ■    Replacing a Fan Tray on page 205
                   ■    Replacing an Air Filter on page 210

Replacing a Fan Tray
                   The TX Matrix platform has two front fan trays. The front fan trays install horizontally
                   in the front of the chassis. Each front fan tray contains six fans. The two front fan
                   trays are interchangeable, but the rear fan tray is not interchangeable with the front
                   fan trays. The fan trays are hot-insertable and hot-removable.

                   To replace a fan tray, use the following procedures:
                   ■    Removing a Front Fan Tray on page 205
                   ■    Installing a Front Fan Tray on page 206
                   ■    Removing the Rear Fan Tray on page 207
                   ■    Installing a Rear Fan Tray on page 209

                   Removing a Front Fan Tray

                   The upper and lower front fan trays are located above and below the front air filter.
                   Each front fan tray weighs about 18.6 lb (8.4 kg).

                   To remove a front fan tray, follow this procedure (see Figure 79 on page 206):
                   1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                        connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                        about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                   2.   Loosen the captive screws on the corners of the fan tray faceplate, using a Phillips
                        (+) screwdriver, number 2.




                                                              Replacing Cooling System Components   ■   205
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             3.     Grasp the handles and pull the fan tray halfway out of the chassis.


                             WARNING: To avoid injury, keep tools and your fingers away from the fans as you
                             slide the fan tray out of the chassis. The fans might still be spinning.


                             4.     When the fans stop spinning, place one hand under the fan tray to support it
                                    and pull the fan tray completely out of the chassis.


                             Figure 79: Removing a Front Fan Tray




                             Installing a Front Fan Tray

                             To install a front fan tray, follow this procedure (see Figure 80 on page 207):
                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.



206    ■    Replacing Cooling System Components
                                                 Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




2.   Grasp the fan tray by its handles and insert it straight into the chassis.
3.   Tighten the captive screws on each side of the fan tray faceplate to secure it in
     the chassis, using a Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2.


Figure 80: Installing a Front Fan Tray




Removing the Rear Fan Tray

The rear fan tray is mounted vertically on the right side of the rear of the chassis.
The rear fan tray contains eight fans. The rear fan tray weighs about 10 lb (4.5 kg).


CAUTION: To maintain proper cooling, do not operate the TX Matrix platform with
the rear fan tray removed for more than one minute.




                                           Replacing Cooling System Components    ■   207
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             To remove the rear fan tray, follow this procedure (see Figure 81 on page 208):
                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             2.     Loosen the captive screws on the top and bottom of the fan tray faceplate, using
                                    a Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2.
                             3.     Grasp the handles and pull the fan tray halfway out of the chassis.


                             WARNING: To avoid injury, keep tools and your fingers away from the fans as you
                             slide the fan tray out of the chassis. The fans might still be spinning.


                             4.     When the fans stop spinning, grasp the handles and pull the fan tray completely
                                    out of the chassis.


                             Figure 81: Removing the Rear Fan Tray




208    ■    Replacing Cooling System Components
                                                 Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




Installing a Rear Fan Tray

To install a replacement rear fan tray, follow this procedure (see
Figure 82 on page 209):
1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
     connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
     about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
2.   Grasp the fan tray by its handles and insert it straight into the chassis.
3.   Tighten the captive screws on the fan tray faceplate to secure it in the chassis,
     using a Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2.


Figure 82: Installing a Rear Fan Tray




                                           Replacing Cooling System Components    ■   209
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




Replacing an Air Filter
                             The TX Matrix platform has two air filters. The front air filter installs horizontally
                             below the TX-SIB card cage, and the rear air filter installs vertically at the left side of
                             the rear of the TX Matrix platform. The air filters are not interchangeable. The air
                             filters are hot-insertable and hot-removable.

                             To replace an air filter, use the following procedures:
                             ■      Removing the Front Air Filter on page 210
                             ■      Installing the Front Air Filter on page 211
                             ■      Removing the Rear Air Filter on page 212
                             ■      Installing the Rear Air Filter on page 213

                             Removing the Front Air Filter

                             The front air filter is located below the TX-SIB card cage. The front air filter weighs
                             approximately 1 lb (0.5 kg).

                             To remove the front air filter, follow this procedure (see Figure 83 on page 210):
                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             2.     Loosen the captive screws on the corners of the air filter faceplate.
                             3.     Grasp the handles and pull the air filter straight out of the chassis.
                             4.     Remove the filter element from the air filter frame (see Figure 84 on page 211).


                             Figure 83: Removing the Front Air Filter




210    ■    Replacing Cooling System Components
                                                   Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




Figure 84: Replacing the Front Filter Element




Installing the Front Air Filter

To install the front air filter, follow this procedure (see Figure 85 on page 211):
1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
     connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
     about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
2.   Insert the filter element into the air filter frame.
3.   Grasp the air filter by the handles on its faceplate and slide it straight into the
     chassis.
4.   Tighten the captive screws on the corners of the faceplate.


Figure 85: Installing the Front Air Filter




                                             Replacing Cooling System Components   ■   211
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Removing the Rear Air Filter

                             The rear air filter is located at the left rear edge of the chassis. The rear air filter
                             weighs less than 1 lb (0.5 kg). To remove the rear air filter, follow this procedure:
                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             2.     Loosen the captive screws at the top, center, and bottom of the air filter, using
                                    a Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2.
                             3.     Grasp the air filter cover by the captive screws and pull firmly to remove the
                                    cover and honeycomb assembly from the chassis (see Figure 86 on page 212).
                             4.     Press the filter element inward until it clears the hooks at the top and bottom of
                                    the air filter slot, then push it to the left to unseat it.
                             5.     Move the tabs on the filter element to a horizontal position.
                             6.     Grasp the tabs on the filter element and carefully pull it straight out from the
                                    chassis (see Figure 87 on page 213).


                             Figure 86: Removing the Rear Air Filter




212    ■    Replacing Cooling System Components
                                                    Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




Figure 87: Removing the Rear Air Filter Element




Installing the Rear Air Filter

To install the rear air filter, follow this procedure (see Figure 88 on page 214):
1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
     connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
     about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
2.   Holding the filter by the tabs, carefully push the filter all the way into the air filter
     slot.
3.   Holding the filter all the way in, push it to the right side of the slot until it is held
     into place behind the hooks.
4.   Move the tabs to a vertical position.
5.   Place the right edge of the honeycomb against the flange of the air filter slot.
6.   Line up the holes at the top, center, and bottom of the honeycomb with the pins
     in the slot and press the honeycomb into place.




                                              Replacing Cooling System Components   ■    213
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             7.     Replace the air filter cover.
                             8.     Firmly tighten the captive screws at the top, center, and bottom of the filter cover
                                    to secure it to the chassis, using a Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2.


                             Figure 88: Installing the Rear Air Filter




Replacing the Craft Interface
                             The craft interface is hot-insertable and hot-removable. When you install the craft
                             interface, allow several minutes for the display to reflect the current state of the
                             TX Matrix platform.

                             To replace the craft interface, use the following procedures:
                             ■      Removing the Craft Interface on page 214
                             ■      Installing the Craft Interface on page 215

Removing the Craft Interface
                             The craft interface is located on the lower front of the TX Matrix platform below the
                             air filter. The craft interface weighs approximately 2 lb (0.9 kg).

                             To remove the craft interface, follow this procedure (see Figure 89 on page 215):


                             NOTE: Removing the front air filter might make it easier to grasp the craft interface.
                             For instructions, see “Removing the Front Air Filter” on page 210.




214    ■    Replacing the Craft Interface
                                                                      Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




                     1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                          connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                          about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                     2.   Completely loosen the screws at the four corners of the craft interface using a
                          Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 1.
                     3.   Grasp the craft interface by the top and bottom edges and carefully pull it straight
                          out of the chassis.



                     CAUTION: Do not leave the craft interface slot empty for more than a short time
                     while the TX Matrix platform is operational. The craft interface must remain in the
                     chassis for proper airflow.



                     Figure 89: Removing the Craft Interface




Installing the Craft Interface
                     To install the craft interface, follow this procedure (see Figure 90 on page 216):
                     1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                          connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                          about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                     2.   Grasping the craft interface by the top and bottom edges, press it into place.
                     3.   Tighten the screws at the corners of the craft interface.


                     NOTE: When you install the craft interface in an operating TX Matrix platform, allow
                     several minutes for the LEDs on the craft interface to reflect the current state of the
                     TX Matrix platform.




                                                                         Replacing the Craft Interface   ■   215
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 90: Installing a Replacement Craft Interface




Replacing Host Subsystem Components
                             To replace a host subsystem, use the following procedures:
                             ■      Taking the Host Subsystem Offline on page 216
                             ■      Replacing a TX-CB on page 219
                             ■      Replacing a PC Card on page 221
                             ■      Replacing a Routing Engine on page 223

Taking the Host Subsystem Offline
                             The host subsystem is taken offline and brought online as a unit. Before you replace
                             a TX-CB or a Routing Engine, you must take the host subsystem offline.
                             Table 30 on page 216 shows the effect of taking a master, backup, and nonredundant
                             host subsystem offline.

Table 30: Effect of Taking the Host Subsystem Offline

 Type of Host Subsystem          Effect of Taking the Host Subsystem Offline
 Nonredundant host               The TX Matrix platform shuts down.
 subsystem

 Backup host subsystem           The functioning of the TX Matrix platform is not interrupted. The backup host subsystem is
                                 hot-removable and hot-insertable.




216    ■    Replacing Host Subsystem Components
                                                                                    Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




Table 30: Effect of Taking the Host Subsystem Offline (continued)

 Master host subsystem        The backup host subsystem becomes the master. The backup Routing Engine assumes Routing
                              Engine functions. The master host subsystem is hot-pluggable.

                              During the switchover:
                              ■       Graceful Routing Engine switchover (GRES) and nonstop routing (NSR) are both
                                      configured—Packet forwarding and routing are continued without interruption.
                              ■       GRES is configured but NSR is not configured—Packet forwarding continues but routing is
                                      interrupted momentarily.
                              ■       GRES and NSR are not configured—Packet forwarding halts while the standby Routing
                                      Engine becomes the master. The Packet Forwarding Engine components reset and connect
                                      to the new master Routing Engine.

                              NOTE: TX Matrix platform performance might change if the backup Routing Engine's
                              configuration differs from the former master's configuration. For the most predictable
                              performance, configure the two Routing Engines identically, except for parameters unique to
                              each Routing Engine.

                              For information about configuring graceful switchover and nonstop routing, see the JUNOS High
                              Availability Configuration Guide.




                         NOTE: We recommend you run the same JUNOS software release on the master
                         and backup Routing Engines. If you elect to run different JUNOS software releases
                         on the Routing Engines, a change in Routing Engine mastership can cause one or all
                         T640 routing nodes to be logically disconnected from the TX Matrix platform. For
                         more information, see “Running Different JUNOS Software Releases on the Routing
                         Engines” on page 50.


                         To take a host subsystem offline, follow this procedure:
                         1.       Determine whether the host subsystem is functioning as the master or as the
                                  backup, using one of the two following methods:
                                  ■     Check the Routing Engine LEDs on the craft interface. If the green MASTER
                                        LED is lit, the corresponding host subsystem is functioning as the master.
                                  ■     Issue the following CLI command. The master Routing Engine is designated
                                        Master in the Current state field:

                                        user@host> show chassis routing-engine scc

                                        Routing Engine status:
                                          Slot 0:
                                            Current state                       Master
                                        ...




                         2.       If the host subsystem is functioning as the master, switch it to backup using the
                                  CLI command:




                                                                            Replacing Host Subsystem Components      ■   217
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                                       user@host> request chassis routing-engine master switch scc



                                    If the Routing Engines are running the same JUNOS release and are configured
                                    for graceful switchover, the standby Routing Engine immediately assumes Routing
                                    Engine functions and there is no interruption to packet forwarding. Otherwise,
                                    packet forwarding halts while the standby Routing Engine becomes the master
                                    and the Packet Forwarding Engine components reset and connect to the new
                                    master Routing Engine. For information about configuring graceful switchover,
                                    see the section about Routing Engine redundancy in the JUNOS System Basics
                                    Configuration Guide.


                             NOTE: TX Matrix platform performance might change if the standby Routing Engine's
                             configuration differs from the former master's configuration. For the most predictable
                             performance, configure the two Routing Engines identically, except for parameters
                             unique to a Routing Engine, such as the hostname defined at the [edit system]
                             hierarchy level and the management interface (fxp0 or equivalent) defined at the
                             [edit interfaces] hierarchy level.

                             To configure Routing Engine-specific parameters and still use the same configuration
                             on both Routing Engines, include the appropriate configuration statements under
                             the re0 and re1 statements at the [edit groups] hierarchy level and use the apply-groups
                             statement. For instructions, see the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide.



                             3.     On the console or other management device connected to the backup Routing
                                    Engine, enter CLI operational mode and issue the following command. The
                                    command shuts down the Routing Engine cleanly, so its state information is
                                    preserved:

                                       user@host> request system halt scc




                             NOTE: The request system halt scc command halts all Routing Engines on the control
                             plane from which it was issued. To reboot a Routing Engine that has been halted,
                             you must connect through the console. For more information about system
                             commands, see the JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference.


                                    Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system
                                    has halted.

                                    For more information about the command, see the JUNOS System Basics and
                                    Services Command Reference.


                             NOTE: The TX-SIBs might continue forwarding traffic for approximately five minutes
                             after the request system halt command has been issued.




218    ■    Replacing Host Subsystem Components
                                                                     Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




Replacing a TX-CB

                    CAUTION: Before you replace a TX-CB, you must take the host subsystem offline. If
                    there is only one host subsystem, taking the host subsystem offline shuts down the
                    TX Matrix platform. See “Taking the Host Subsystem Offline” on page 216.



                    CAUTION: If the TX-CB to be replaced is associated with the Routing Engine currently
                    functioning as the master Routing engine, switch it to the backup before removing
                    the TX-CB. See “Taking the Host Subsystem Offline” on page 216.


                    To replace a TX-CB, use the following procedures:
                    ■    Removing a TX-CB on page 219
                    ■    Installing a TX-CB on page 220

                    Removing a TX-CB

                    The backup TX-CB is hot-removable and hot-insertable.


                    CAUTION: Before you replace a TX-CB, you must take the host subsystem offline. If
                    there is only one host subsystem, taking the host subsystem offline shuts down the
                    TX Matrix platform. See “Taking the Host Subsystem Offline” on page 216.



                    CAUTION: If the TX-CB to be replaced is associated with the Routing Engine currently
                    functioning as the master Routing engine, switch it to the backup before removing
                    the TX-CB. See “Taking the Host Subsystem Offline” on page 216.


                    To replace a TX-CB, use the following procedures:

                    To remove a TX-CB, follow this procedure (see Figure 91 on page 220):
                    1.   Take the host subsystem offline. See “Taking the Host Subsystem
                         Offline” on page 216.
                    2.   Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
                    3.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                         connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                         about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                    4.   If the routing node is connected to a TX matrix platform, disconnect the cable
                         plugged into the port labeled CIP.
                    5.   Loosen the captive screws (using a Phillips (+) screwdriver, number 2) on the
                         ejector handles on both sides of the TX-CB faceplate.
                    6.   Flip the ejector handles outward to unseat the TX-CB.




                                                               Replacing Host Subsystem Components   ■   219
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             7.     Grasp the ejector handles and slide the TX-CB about halfway out of the chassis.
                             8.     Place one hand underneath the TX-CB to support it and slide it completely out
                                    of the chassis.
                             9.     Place the TX-CB on the antistatic mat.
                             10. If you are not replacing the TX-CB now, install a blank panel over the empty slot.


                             Figure 91: Removing a TX-CB




                             Installing a TX-CB

                             To install a TX-CB, follow this procedure (see Figure 92 on page 221):
                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to an approved site ESD grounding point. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             2.     Carefully align the sides of the TX-CB with the guides inside the chassis.
                             3.     Slide the TX-CB into the chassis, carefully ensuring that it is correctly aligned.
                             4.     Grasp both ejector handles and press them inward to seat the TX-CB.
                             5.     Tighten the captive screws on the ejector handles, using a Phillips (+) screwdriver,
                                    number 2.
                             6.     If applicable, reconnect the cable previously plugged into the CIP port.
                             7.     If power is applied to the Routing Engine and its corresponding TX-CB is
                                    functioning normally, the TX-CB comes online automatically. To verify that the
                                    TX-CB is functioning normally, check the LEDs on its faceplate. The green OK
                                    LED should light steadily a few minutes after the TX-CB is installed. If the FAIL
                                    LED is lit steadily, remove and install the TX-CB again (see “Removing a
                                    TX-CB” on page 219 and “Installing a TX-CB” on page 220). If the FAIL LED still
                                    lights steadily, the TX-CB is not functioning properly. Contact your customer
                                    support representative.

                                    To check the status of the TX-CB, use the CLI command:

                                       user@host> show chassis environment cb scc




220    ■    Replacing Host Subsystem Components
                                                                   Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




                  Figure 92: Installing a TX-CB




Replacing a PC Card
                  A slot labeled PC CARD on the Routing Engine faceplate accepts a Type I PC Card, as
                  defined in the PC Card Standard published by the Personal Computer Memory Card
                  International Association (PCMCIA). The TX Matrix platform is shipped with a PC
                  Card that contains JUNOS software. The PC Card can be used to copy JUNOS software
                  from the PC Card onto the Routing Engine. You can also copy JUNOS software from
                  the Routing Engine onto a PC Card, for example, to create a backup copy of upgrade
                  software that you have obtained from Juniper Networks. Instructions for copying
                  software to a PC Card are available at the Juniper Networks Support Web site
                  (http://www.juniper.net/support/); after logging in, navigate to the Customer Support
                  Center, then to the download page for JUNOS software.


                  NOTE: The software on a PC Card is loaded only onto the Routing Engine into which
                  the PC Card is inserted. It is not automatically copied to the other Routing Engine.


                  To replace a PC Card, perform the following procedures:
                  ■    Removing a PC Card on page 221
                  ■    Installing a PC Card on page 222

                  Removing a PC Card

                  The PC Card is inserted into the slot labeled PC CARD on the Routing Engine. To
                  remove the PC Card, follow this procedure (see Figure 93 on page 222):
                  1.   Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
                  2.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                       connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                       about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                  3.   If the Routing Engine cover is in place, remove the cover by loosening the captive
                       screws on the corners of its faceplate.
                  4.   On the Routing Engine faceplate, press the eject button on the right side of the
                       PC Card slot once to release the button. Press again to release the PC Card.




                                                             Replacing Host Subsystem Components   ■   221
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             NOTE: The Routing Engine in your TX Matrix platform might have two PC Card slots.
                             In this case, use either slot. Do not install more than one PC Card in the Routing
                             Engine.


                             5.     The PC Card pops partially out of the slot. Grasp the card and pull it completely
                                    out of the slot.
                             6.     Place the PC Card on the antistatic mat.
                             7.     If you are not replacing the PC Card now, reinstall the Routing Engine cover and
                                    tighten the screws on the corners of the cover to secure it to the chassis.


                             Figure 93: Removing a PC Card




                             Installing a PC Card

                             To install a PC Card, follow this procedure (see Figure 94 on page 223):
                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             2.     If the Routing Engine cover is in place, remove the cover by loosening the captive
                                    screws on the corners of its faceplate.
                             3.     Insert the PC Card into the PC Card slot on the Routing Engine, with the Juniper
                                    Networks logo facing downward.


                             CAUTION: Be sure to insert the PC Card with the label facing downward. Inserting
                             the PC Card incorrectly might damage the Routing Engine.



                             NOTE: The Routing Engine in your TX Matrix platform might have two PC Card slots.
                             In this case, use either slot. Do not install more than one PC Card in the Routing
                             Engine.




222    ■    Replacing Host Subsystem Components
                                                                    Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




                   4.   Press the card firmly all the way into the slot.
                   5.   Reinstall the Routing Engine cover and tighten the screws on the corners of the
                        cover to secure it to the chassis.


                   Figure 94: Installing a PC Card




Replacing a Routing Engine
                   The Routing Engine is hot-pluggable. If the TX Matrix platform contains a redundant
                   host subsystem, the Routing Engine and control board are hot-removable and
                   hot-insertable. Before you replace a TX-CB or a Routing Engine, you must take the
                   host subsystem offline (see “Taking the Host Subsystem Offline” on page 216).
                   ■    Removing a Routing Engine on page 223
                   ■    Installing a Routing Engine on page 224

                   Removing a Routing Engine

                   The TX Matrix platform can have one or two Routing Engines. They are located in
                   the upper rear of the chassis in the slots marked RE0 and RE1. Each Routing Engine
                   can weigh up to 2.4 lb (1.1 kg).

                   To remove a Routing Engine, follow this procedure (see Figure 96 on page 224):
                   1.   Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface.
                   2.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                        connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                        about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                   3.   Check whether the Routing Engine is functioning as the backup or as the master.
                        If necessary, take the host subsystem offline as described in “Taking the Host
                        Subsystem Offline” on page 216.
                   4.   If the Routing Engine cover is in place, remove the cover by loosening the captive
                        screws on the corners of its faceplate (see Figure 95 on page 224).
                   5.   Press the red tabs on the ejector handles on both sides of the Routing Engine
                        faceplate.




                                                              Replacing Host Subsystem Components   ■   223
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             6.     Flip the ejector handles outward to unseat the Routing Engine.
                             7.     Grasp the Routing Engine by the ejector handles and slide it about halfway out
                                    of the chassis.
                             8.     Place one of your hands underneath the Routing Engine to support it and slide
                                    it completely out of the chassis.
                             9.     Place the Routing Engine on the antistatic mat.
                             10. If you are not replacing the Routing Engine now, reinstall the Routing Engine
                                    cover and tighten the screws on the corners of the cover to secure it to the chassis
                                    (see Figure 98 on page 226).


                             Figure 95: Removing the Routing Engine Cover




                             Figure 96: Removing a Routing Engine




                             Installing a Routing Engine

                             To install a Routing Engine, follow this procedure (see Figure 97 on page 225):
                             1.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             2.     Ensure the ejector handles are not in the locked position. If necessary, press the
                                    red tabs and flip the ejector handles outward.




224    ■    Replacing Host Subsystem Components
                                                 Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




3.   Place one hand underneath the Routing Engine to support it. With the other
     hand, grasp one of the ejector handles on the faceplate.
4.   Carefully align the sides of the Routing Engine with the guides inside the chassis.
5.   Slide the Routing Engine into the chassis until you feel resistance, then press the
     Routing Engine's faceplate until it engages the midplane connectors.
6.   Press both the ejector handles inward to seat the Routing Engine.

     The Routing Engine might require several minutes to boot.
7.   Press the Routing Engine cover into place, then tighten the captive screws on
     the corners of the cover to secure it to the chassis (see Figure 98 on page 226).
8.   If the TX Matrix platform is powered on and the Routing Engine's corresponding
     TX-CB is functioning normally, the Routing Engine comes online automatically.
     To verify that the Routing Engine is installed correctly, check the HOST0 and
     HOST1 LEDs on the craft interface. If the TX Matrix platform is operational and
     the Routing Engine is functioning properly, the green OK LED lights steadily. If
     the red FAIL LED lights steadily instead, remove and install the Routing Engine
     again (see “Removing a Routing Engine” on page 223 and “Installing a Routing
     Engine” on page 224). If the red FAIL LED still lights steadily, the Routing Engine
     is not functioning properly. Contact your customer support representative.

     To check the status of the Routing Engine, use the CLI command:

        user@host> show chassis routing-engine scc



     For more information about using the CLI, see the JUNOS software manuals.


Figure 97: Installing a Routing Engine




                                          Replacing Host Subsystem Components    ■   225
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 98: Reinstalling the Routing Engine Cover




Replacing a TX-SIB and Its Cables
                             Five TX-SIBs are installed in the TX Matrix platform. TX-SIBs are hot-insertable and
                             hot-removable. When you remove a TX-SIB, traffic forwarding continues without
                             any degradation as long as four TX-SIBs remain in the chassis. To replace a TX-SIB
                             and its cables, use the following procedures:
                             ■      Removing a TX-SIB on page 226
                             ■      Installing a TX-SIB on page 228
                             ■      Replacing a Fiber-Optic Array Cable on page 231
                             ■      Verifying the Connections Between the TX-SIBs and T640-SIBs on page 236

Removing a TX-SIB
                             The TX-SIBs are located in the front of the chassis in slots SIB0 through SIB4. Each
                             TX-SIB weighs approximately 35 lb (15.9 kg).

                             To remove a TX-SIB, follow this procedure (see Figure 99 on page 228):
                             1.     Have ready a replacement TX-SIB or TX-SIB blank panel, an antistatic mat for
                                    the TX-SIB, and one dust cover for each fiber-optic array cable connector you
                                    remove from the TX-SIB.
                             2.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             3.     Ensure the fiber-optic array cable connectors plugged into the TX-SIB are labeled
                                    so you can reconnect them correctly.
                             4.     Use one of the following methods to take the TX-SIB offline:
                                    ■   Issue the following CLI command:

                                        user@host> request chassis sib slot slot-number offline scc




226    ■    Replacing a TX-SIB and Its Cables
                                                 Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




         For more information about the command, see the JUNOS System Basics and
         Services Command Reference.
     ■   Press and hold the online/offline button on the craft interface that
         corresponds to the TX-SIB. Hold the button down until all of the LEDs
         surrounding the button are not lit.

5.   Remove each fiber-optic array cable connector (up to four) from the TX-SIB.
     Partially loosen the thumbscrew and captive screw on the fiber-optic array cable
     connector. (Use the supplied small slotted screwdriver to loosen the captive
     screw.) Alternate between the thumbscrew and captive screw until the cable
     connector is removed from the adapter.


WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic array adapter or a connector at the
end of a fiber-optic array cable attached to an adapter. The fiber optics emit laser
light that can damage your eyes.


6.   Install a dust cover on each cable connector you removed from the TX-SIB. Align
     the dust cover with the cable connector and carefully press them together until
     they stop. The cover and the cable connector are keyed to ensure proper mating.
     Secure the dust cover by tightening the thumbscrew and captive screw on the
     connector. (Use the supplied small slotted screwdriver to tighten the captive
     screw.)
7.   Move the fiber-optic array cables to the side of the TX-SIB so they do not interfere
     with the removal of the TX-SIB. You might need to remove the cables from the
     comb panel assembly.
8.   Simultaneously turn both ejector handles on the top and bottom of the faceplate
     counterclockwise to unseat the TX-SIB.
9.   Grasp both ejector handles, pull firmly, and slide the TX-SIB about three-quarters
     of the way out of the chassis.


CAUTION: Be prepared to support the weight of the TX-SIB (approximately
35 lb [15.9 kg]) before you slide it completely out of the chassis.

When the TX-SIB is out of the chassis, do not hold it by its ejector handles or edge
connectors. They cannot support its weight.



10. Place one hand underneath the TX-SIB to support it and slide it completely out
     of the chassis. Place it on the antistatic mat.


CAUTION: Do not stack hardware components on one another after you remove
them. Place each component on an antistatic mat resting on a stable, flat surface.


11. If you are not reinstalling a TX-SIB into the emptied TX-SIB slot within a short
     time, install a blank TX-SIB panel over the slot to maintain proper airflow in the
     TX-SIB card cage.




                                                Replacing a TX-SIB and Its Cables   ■   227
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 99: Removing a TX-SIB




Installing a TX-SIB
                             To install a TX-SIB into the rear of the chassis, follow this procedure (see
                             Figure 100 on page 231):


                             NOTE: While you install the TX Matrix platform or replace a fiber-optic array cable,
                             small deposits of oil, dust, and debris can enter the TX-SIB and T640-SIB fiber-optic
                             array adapters, the fiber-optic array cable connectors, and the loopback connectors
                             and adapters. We recommend you clean the optics in these components, as well as
                             the loopback connector and adapter dust covers, immediately before connecting
                             them. For cleaning instructions, see “Cleaning the Fiber-Optic
                             Components” on page 177.




228    ■    Replacing a TX-SIB and Its Cables
                                                 Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




CAUTION: Be prepared to support the weight of the TX-SIB (approximately
35 lb [15.9 kg]) before you lift it.


1.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
     connect the strap to an approved site ESD grounding point. For more information
     about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
2.   Place one hand under the bottom edge of the TX-SIB and one hand around the
     top of the TX-SIB faceplate.


CAUTION: When the TX-SIB is out of the chassis, do not hold it by its ejector handles
or edge connectors. They cannot support its weight.


3.   Locate the slot in the TX-SIB card cage in which you plan to install the TX-SIB.
4.   Lift the TX-SIB into place and carefully align first the bottom, then the top of the
     TX-SIB with the guides inside the card cage.
5.   Carefully slide the TX-SIB all the way into the card cage until you feel resistance.
6.   Starting with the ejector handles on the top and bottom of the TX-SIB faceplate
     nearly horizontal, simultaneously turn both ejector handles clockwise to seat the
     TX-SIB.
7.   If applicable, remove the protective tape covering each TX-SIB fiber-optic array
     adapter you are connecting to a T640-SIB.
8.   Remove the dust covers from the fiber-optic array cable connectors. Loosen the
     thumbscrew and captive screw on each connector. (Use the supplied small slotted
     screwdriver to loosen the captive screw.) Store the dust covers in a dust-free
     resealable plastic bag.
9.   If you removed the fiber-optic array cables from the comb panel assembly,
     reinstall them in the assembly as described in “Routing the Fiber-Optic Array
     Cables” on page 114.
10. Install each cable connector (up to four) in its corresponding TX-SIB adapter.
     Align the connector with its corresponding TX-SIB adapter and carefully press it
     into the adapter until it stops. The cable connector and adapter are keyed to
     ensure proper mating. Partially tighten the thumbscrew and captive screw on
     the fiber-optic array cable connector. (Use the supplied small slotted screwdriver
     to tighten the captive screw.) Alternate between the thumbscrew and captive
     screw until the cable connector is secured to the adapter.


NOTE: The optics in a fiber-optic array adapter are spring loaded, so you must
continue to apply force to a fiber-optic array cable connector or loopback connector
while securing it to a TX-SIB or T640-SIB adapter.




                                                Replacing a TX-SIB and Its Cables   ■   229
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic array adapter or a connector at the
                             end of a fiber-optic array cable attached to an adapter. The fiber optics emit laser
                             light that can damage your eyes.


                             11. Use one of the following methods to bring the TX-SIB online:
                                    ■   Press and hold the online/offline button on the craft interface that
                                        corresponds to the TX-SIB until the green OK LED next to the button blinks.
                                    ■   Issue the following CLI command:

                                        user@host> request chassis sib slot slot-number online scc


                             12. To verify that the TX-SIB is functioning normally, check the LEDs on the craft
                                    interface. The green OK LED should light steadily a few minutes after the TX-SIB
                                    is installed. If the FAIL LED is lit steadily, remove and install the TX-SIB again
                                    (see “Removing a TX-SIB” on page 226 and “Installing a TX-SIB” on page 228). If
                                    the FAIL LED still lights steadily, the TX-SIB is not functioning properly. Contact
                                    your customer support representative.

                                    To check the status of the TX-SIBs, issue the following CLI commands:

                                        user@host> show chassis environment sib scc



                                        user@host> show chassis sibs



                                        user@host> show chassis fabric sibs scc



                                    For more information and sample output from these commands, see “Verifying
                                    the State of the Routing Matrix” on page 150.




230    ■    Replacing a TX-SIB and Its Cables
                                                                   Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




                    Figure 100: Installing a TX-SIB




Replacing a Fiber-Optic Array Cable

                    NOTE: While you install the TX Matrix platform or replace a fiber-optic array cable,
                    small deposits of oil, dust, and debris can enter the TX-SIB and T640-SIB fiber-optic
                    array adapters, the fiber-optic array cable connectors, and the loopback connectors
                    and adapters. We recommend you clean the optics in these components, as well as
                    the loopback connector and adapter dust covers, immediately before connecting
                    them. For cleaning instructions, see “Cleaning the Fiber-Optic
                    Components” on page 177.




                                                                  Replacing a TX-SIB and Its Cables   ■   231
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             NOTE: If you have previously routed a spare fiber-optic array cable between the
                             TX Matrix platform and T640 routing node, some of the steps in this procedure have
                             already been performed.


                             To replace a fiber-optic array cable, follow this procedure:
                             1.     Bring the interface connected by the fiber-optic array cable offline using one of
                                    the following methods:
                                    ■   Issue the following CLI command:

                                        user@host> request chassis sib slot slot-number lcc lcc-number offline



                                        The slot number can be from 0 through 4 and corresponds to the TX-SIB
                                        chassis slot. The LCC number can be 0 through 3 and corresponds to the
                                        TX-SIB adapters labeled LCC0 through LCC3.
                                    ■   Press and hold the online/offline button next to the TX-SIB adapter until the
                                        RX LED is not lit.

                                    ■   Press and hold the online/offline button on the T640-SIB faceplate until the
                                        RX LED is not lit.

                             2.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             3.     Remove the fiber-optic array cable connectors from the TX-SIB and T640-SIB.
                                    To remove a cable connector, partially loosen the thumbscrew and captive screw
                                    on the fiber-optic array cable connector. (Use the supplied small slotted
                                    screwdriver to loosen the captive screw.) Alternate between the thumbscrew
                                    and captive screw until the cable connector is removed from the adapter.
                             4.     Install a dust cover on each of the two removed cable connectors. Align the dust
                                    cover with the cable connector and carefully press them together until they stop.
                                    The cover and the cable connector are keyed to ensure proper mating. Secure
                                    the dust cover by tightening the thumbscrew and captive screw on the connector.
                                    (Use the supplied small slotted screwdriver to tighten the captive screw.)
                             5.     Remove the fiber-optic array cable. If the cable is greater than 10 m long, we
                                    recommend you reinstall the pulling-eye assembly on one end of the cable to
                                    facilitate pulling the cable through the raceway.
                             6.     Using the supplied label sheets, attach a label to each end of the replacement
                                    fiber-optic array cable to help you identify the corresponding TX-SIB adapter and
                                    T640-SIB. The labels are marked with the chassis ID and the switching plane
                                    (separated with a slash). For example, use the label marked 0/2 to identify a
                                    connection between adapter LCC0 on TX-SIB-2 and T640-SIB-2 in routing node
                                    LCC0 . Table 23 on page 115 lists the connections between TX-SIBs and T640-SIBs.




232    ■    Replacing a TX-SIB and Its Cables
                                                Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




NOTE: You must use the same length for every fiber-optic array cable from a particular
T640 routing node to the TX Matrix platform. However, you do not need to use the
same length for all fiber-optic array cables within a routing matrix.


7.   Route the end of the fiber-optic array cable that plugs into the TX-SIB over the
     TX Matrix platform to the TX-SIB adapter. If you have installed the optional cable
     shelf assembly, use the lowest shelf to support a cable destined to any TX-SIB
     adapter labeled LCC0, use the next shelf up to support a cable destined to any
     TX-SIB adapter labeled LCC1, and so on (see Figure 59 on page 119).


CAUTION: You must maintain a minimum bend radius of 2 in. (5.1 cm). We
recommend you maintain a bend radius of 10 in. (25.4 cm). If you must bend a
fiber-optic array cable to a 2-inch radius, we recommend you do not use more than
two such bends.



CAUTION: Plastic wrap-ties can damage or crimp the fiber-optic array cables (see
Figure 101 on page 233). We recommend you use soft band straps to secure fiber-optic
array cables.

Figure 101: Using Soft Band Straps to Secure Fiber-Optic Array Cables




8.   Grasp the metal cover on the comb within the comb panel assembly that extends
     over the TX-SIB you will be connecting. Firmly pull the cover away from the
     chassis until it is removed from the comb (see Figure 58 on page 118).
9.   While aligning the fiber-optic array cable connector with its corresponding TX-SIB
     adapter, route the cable upward along the comb tooth and press it into the tooth.
     Use the tooth closest to the chassis to support a cable destined to any TX-SIB
     adapter labeled LCC0, use the next tooth away from the chassis to support a
     cable destined to any TX-SIB adapter labeled LCC1, and so on (see
     Figure 59 on page 119).




                                               Replacing a TX-SIB and Its Cables   ■   233
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             10. Reinstall the metal cover on the comb by firmly pressing it toward the chassis
                                    until it stops.
                             11. Route the other end of the fiber-optic array cable to the T640-SIB adapter.
                             12. Dress the fiber-optic array cable so it does not interfere with system airflow and
                                    maintenance access (see Figure 102 on page 234).

                             Figure 102: Maintaining a Minimum Bend Radius of 10 in. (25.4 cm)




                                    For an illustration of airflow through the TX Matrix platform and the T640 routing
                                    node, see Figure 15 on page 31 and the T640 Internet Routing Node Hardware
                                    Guide.
                             13. Remove the dust covers from the fiber-optic array cable connectors. Loosen the
                                    thumbscrew and captive screw on each connector. (Use the supplied small slotted
                                    screwdriver to loosen the captive screw.) Store the dust covers in a dust-free
                                    resealable plastic bag.




234    ■    Replacing a TX-SIB and Its Cables
                                                Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




14. Align the fiber-optic array cable connector with the corresponding TX-SIB adapter
    and carefully press it into the adapter until it stops. The cable connector and
    adapter are keyed to ensure proper mating.


NOTE: The optics in a fiber-optic array adapter are spring loaded, so you must
continue to apply force to a fiber-optic array cable connector or loopback connector
while securing it to a TX-SIB or T640-SIB adapter.



WARNING: Do not look directly into a fiber-optic array adapter or a connector at the
end of a fiber-optic array cable attached to an adapter. The fiber optics emit laser
light that can damage your eyes.


15. Partially tighten the thumbscrew and captive screw on the fiber-optic array cable
    connector. (Use the supplied small slotted screwdriver to tighten the captive
    screw.) Alternate between the thumbscrew and captive screw until the cable
    connector is secured to the adapter.
16. With the fiber-optic array cable extending toward the left side of the chassis (as
    you face the rear), align the cable connector with the T640-SIB adapter and
    carefully press it into the adapter until it stops. The cable connector and adapter
    are keyed to ensure proper mating.
17. Repeat Step 15 for the fiber-optic array cable connector plugged into the T640-SIB
    adapter.
18. Bring the interface connected by the fiber-optic array cable online using one of
    the following methods:
    ■   Issue the following CLI command:

        user@host> request chassis sib slot slot-number lcc lcc-number online



        The slot number can be from 0 through 4 and corresponds to the TX-SIB
        chassis slot. The LCC number can be 0 through 3 and corresponds to the
        TX-SIB adapters labeled LCC0 through LCC3.
    ■   Press and hold the online/offline button next to the TX-SIB adapter until the
        RX LED begins blinking.

    ■   Press and hold the online/offline button on the T640-SIB faceplate until the
        RX LED begins blinking.


    If both the TX and RX LEDs next to the TX-SIB adapter and T640-SIB adapter do
    not steadily light green, look at the display on the craft interface to check the
    status of the TX-SIB. Table 8 on page 15 describes the functions of these LEDs.




                                              Replacing a TX-SIB and Its Cables   ■   235
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




Verifying the Connections Between the TX-SIBs and T640-SIBs
                             After you have replaced a TX-SIB or a fiber-optic array cable, verify the connections
                             between the TX-SIBs and T640-SIBs by following this procedure:
                             1.     Verify that the TX-SIBs and T640-SIBs are online by issuing the show chassis
                                    sibs command:

                                       user@host> show chassis sibs

                                       scc-re0:
                                       --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                       Slot State                 Uptime
                                        0    Spare             133 days, 12 minutes, 41 seconds
                                        1    Online            133 days, 12 minutes, 41 seconds
                                        2    Online            133 days, 12 minutes, 41 seconds
                                        3    Online            133 days, 12 minutes, 41 seconds
                                        4    Online            133 days, 12 minutes, 41 seconds

                                       lcc0-re0:
                                       --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                       Slot State                 Uptime
                                        0    Spare             133 days, 12 minutes, 2 seconds
                                        1    Online            133 days, 12 minutes, 2 seconds
                                        2    Online            133 days, 12 minutes, 2 seconds
                                        3    Online            133 days, 12 minutes, 2 seconds
                                        4    Online            133 days, 12 minutes, 2 seconds

                             2.     Verify the state of the electrical and optical switch fabric links by issuing the
                                    show chassis fabric sibs command:

                                       user@host> show chassis fabric sibs

                                       scc-re0:
                                       --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                       Fabric management SIB state:
                                       SIB #0
                                           plane state: S_SPARE
                                           LCC #0      : Links ok
                                       SIB #1
                                           plane state: S_ACTIVE
                                           LCC #0      : Links ok
                                       SIB #2
                                           plane state: S_ACTIVE
                                           LCC #0      : Links ok
                                       SIB #3
                                           plane state: S_ACTIVE
                                           LCC #0      : Links ok
                                       SIB #4
                                           plane state: S_ACTIVE
                                           LCC #0      : Links ok

                                       lcc0-re0:
                                       --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                       Fabric management SIB state:
                                       SIB #0
                                           plane state: S_SPARE
                                           FPC #0
                                               PFE #0 : Links ok




236    ■    Replacing a TX-SIB and Its Cables
                                                  Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




                   PFE #1 : Links ok
               SCC         : Links ok
         SIB   #1
               plane state: S_ACTIVE
               FPC #0
                   PFE #0 : Links ok
                   PFE #1 : Links ok
               SCC         : Links ok
         SIB   #2
               plane state: S_ACTIVE
               FPC #0
                   PFE #0 : Links ok
                   PFE #1 : Links ok
               SCC         : Links ok
         SIB   #3
               plane state: S_ACTIVE
               FPC #0
                   PFE #0 : Links ok
                   PFE #1 : Links ok
               SCC         : Links ok
         SIB   #4
               plane state: S_ACTIVE
               FPC #0
                   PFE #0 : Links ok
                   PFE #1 : Links ok
               SCC         : Links ok



     Verify that the state of each link is Links ok.
3.   If the state of all TX-SIBs, T640-SIBs, and links displayed in Step 1 through Step
     2 is correct, the connections between the TX-SIBs and the T640-SIBs are operating
     correctly. If the state is incorrect, bring the interface connected by the fiber-optic
     array cable offline, remove the cable, and clean the TX-SIB and T640-SIB adapters
     and the cable connectors plugged into them:
     ■   To bring the interface offline, see Step 1 in “Replacing a Fiber-Optic Array
         Cable” on page 231.
     ■   To remove a cable connector, partially loosen its thumbscrew and captive
         screw. (Use the supplied small slotted screwdriver to loosen the captive
         screw.) Alternate between the thumbscrew and the hex screw until the cable
         connector is removed from the adapter.

     ■   For instructions on cleaning the TX-SIB adapter, T640-SIB adapter, and
         fiber-optic array cable connectors, see “Cleaning the Fiber-Optic
         Components” on page 177.

4.   Reconnect the fiber-optic array cable to the TX-SIB and T640-SIB adapters as
     described in “Replacing a Fiber-Optic Array Cable” on page 231.
5.   Bring the interface connected by the fiber-optic array cable online as described
     in Step 11 in “Installing a TX-SIB” on page 228.
6.   Issue the show commands as described in Step 1 through Step 2. If the state of
     any TX-SIB, T640-SIB, or link is incorrect, contact your customer support
     representative for additional instructions.




                                                 Replacing a TX-SIB and Its Cables   ■   237
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




Replacing Power System Components
                             The TX Matrix platform has two redundant, load-sharing DC power supplies. Each
                             power supply is hot-insertable and hot-removable. When one power supply is powered
                             off or removed, the other power supply automatically assumes the entire electrical
                             load for the TX Matrix platform. To replace a power system component, use the
                             following procedures:
                             ■      Replacing a Two-Input 160-A Power Supply on page 238
                             ■      Replacing a Power Supply Cable on page 243

Replacing a Two-Input 160-A Power Supply

                             Removing a Two-Input 160-A Power Supply

                             The power supplies are located at the lower rear of the chassis. Each two-input 160-A
                             power supply weighs approximately 23 lb (10.5 kg).


                             CAUTION: Do not leave a power supply slot empty for more than 30 minutes while
                             the TX Matrix platform is operational. For proper airflow, the power supply must
                             remain in the chassis or a blank panel must be used in an empty slot.



                             NOTE: After powering off a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning it
                             back on.


                             To remove a two-input 160-A power supply, follow this procedure:
                             1.     Switch off the external circuit breakers. Make sure that the voltage across the
                                    DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that there is no chance that the cables
                                    might become active during the removal process.
                             2.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             3.     Switch both circuit breakers on the power supply faceplate to the OFF position (O).
                             4.     Remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal studs on the faceplate.


                             CAUTION: You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity.
                             The power source cables might be labeled (+) and (–) to indicate their polarity. There
                             is no standard color coding for DC power cables. The color coding used by the external
                             DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power
                             cables that attach to the terminal studs on each power supply.


                             5.     Remove the nuts and washers from the terminal studs (see
                                    Figure 103 on page 239). (Use a 7/16-in. (11 mm) nut driver or wrench.)




238    ■    Replacing Power System Components
                                               Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




Figure 103: Disconnecting Power Cables from a Two-Input 160-A DC Power Supply




6.   Remove the cable lugs from the terminal studs.
7.   Loosen the captive screws on the cable restraints on the right edge of the power
     supply faceplate.
8.   Carefully move the power cables out of the way.
9.   Loosen the captive screws on the lower corners of the power supply faceplate
     completely.
10. Twist the ejector handles on the upper corners of the faceplate counterclockwise
     to unseat the power supply.
11. Grasp the handle on the power supply faceplate and pull firmly. Slide it halfway
     out of the chassis (see Figure 104 on page 240).


WARNING: Do not touch the power connectors on the rear of the power supply (see
Figure 105 on page 240). They can contain dangerous voltages.


12. Place one hand underneath the power supply to support it and slide it completely
     out of the chassis.


CAUTION: Each two-input 160-A power supply weighs approximately 23 lb (10.5 kg).
Be prepared to support the full weight of the power supply as you remove it from
the TX Matrix platform.




                                           Replacing Power System Components   ■   239
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             CAUTION: Do not leave a power supply slot empty for more than a short time while
                             the routing node is operational. For proper airflow, the power supply must remain
                             in the chassis or a blank panel must be used in an empty slot.




                             Figure 104: Removing a Two-Input 160-A Power Supply




                             Figure 105: Rear of the Power Supply Showing Midplane Connectors




240    ■    Replacing Power System Components
                                                 Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




Installing a Two-Input 160-A Power Supply

To install a power supply, follow this procedure (see Figure 106 on page 242):
1.   Make sure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and
     that there is no chance that the cables might become active during installation.


CAUTION: You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity.
The power source cables might be labeled (+) and (–) to indicate their polarity. There
is no standard color coding for DC power cables. The color coding used by the external
DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power
cables that attach to the terminal studs on each power supply.


2.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
     connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
     about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
3.   Switch both circuit breakers on the power supply faceplate to the off position (O).
4.   Using both hands, slide the power supply into the chassis until you feel resistance.
5.   Twist the ejector handles at the upper corners of the power supply faceplate
     clockwise until they stop.
6.   Tighten the captive screws at the lower corners of the power supply faceplate
     to secure the power supply in the chassis.
7.   Remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal studs on the faceplate.
8.   Remove the nuts and washers from the terminal studs.
9.   Attach the lugs on the DC source power cables to the terminal studs.
     a.   Attach the positive (+) DC source power cable lugs to the RTN (return)
          terminals.

     b.   Attach the negative (–) DC source power cable lugs to the –48V (input)
          terminals.

     Secure the cable lugs to the terminal studs, first with the washers, then with the
     nuts. Use a 7/16-in. nut driver or wrench to tighten the nuts. Apply between
     23 lb-in. (2.6 Nm) and 25 lb-in. (2.8 Nm) of torque to each nut.
10. Loosen the captive screws on the cable restraints on the right edge of the power
     supply faceplate.
11. Route the positive and negative DC power cables through the top and bottom
     of each cable restraint.
12. Tighten the cable restraint captive screws to hold the power cables in place.
13. Verify that the ground and power cabling are correct, that they are not touching
     or blocking access to TX Matrix platform components, and that they do not drape
     where people could trip on them.
14. Replace the clear plastic cover over the terminal studs on the faceplate.




                                             Replacing Power System Components   ■   241
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             15. Switch on the external circuit breakers to provide voltage to the DC power source
                                    cable leads.
                             16. Switch the circuit breakers on the power supply to the on position (|) and observe
                                    the LEDs on the power supply faceplate. If the power supply is correctly installed
                                    and is functioning properly, the DC OK LED lights steadily, and the CB ON LED
                                    blinks momentarily, then lights steadily.


                             NOTE: After powering off a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning it
                             back on. After powering on a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning
                             it off.

                             If the system is completely powered off when you power on the power supply, the
                             Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence. If the
                             Routing Engine finishes booting and you need to power off the system again, first
                             issue the CLI request system halt command.

                             After a power supply is powered on, it can take up to 60 seconds for status
                             indicators—such as the output status LEDs on the power supply, the show chassis
                             command display, and messages on the LED display on the craft interface—to indicate
                             that the power supply is functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear
                             during the first 60 seconds.




                             Figure 106: Installing a Power Supply




242    ■    Replacing Power System Components
                                                                  Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




                   Figure 107: Connecting Power Cables to the Power Supply




Replacing a Power Supply Cable
                   To replace a power supply cable, follow this procedure:
                   1.   Locate a replacement power cable that meets the specifications defined in “DC
                        Power Cable Specifications” on page 290.


                   CAUTION: A licensed electrician must attach a cable lug to the power cable that you
                   supply. A cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the TX Matrix platform.


                   2.   Switch off the external circuit breakers for each power supply cable connected
                        to the power supply.
                   3.   Make sure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and
                        that there is no chance that the cables might become active during the removal
                        process.


                   CAUTION: You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity.
                   The power source cables might be labeled (+) and (–) to indicate their polarity. There
                   is no standard color coding for DC power cables. The color coding used by the external
                   DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power
                   cables that attach to the terminal studs on each power supply.


                   4.   Remove the power cable from the external DC power source.




                                                              Replacing Power System Components   ■   243
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             5.     Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                                    connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                                    about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                             6.     Switch both circuit breakers on the power supply faceplate to the off position (O).
                             7.     Remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal studs on the faceplate.
                             8.     Remove the nuts and washers from the terminal studs (see
                                    Figure 103 on page 239). (Use a 7/16–in. nut driver or pliers.)
                             9.     Remove the cable lug from the terminal studs.
                             10. Loosen the captive screw on the cable restraint on the right edge of the power
                                    supply faceplate.
                             11. Carefully move the power cable out of the way.
                             12. Attach the lug on the replacement power cable to the terminal studs, making
                                    sure the cable is not touching or in the way of any TX Matrix platform
                                    components.
                             13. Secure the cable lug to the terminal studs, first with the washers, then with the
                                    nuts (see Figure 107 on page 243).
                             14. Route the power cable through the cable restraint.
                             15. Tighten the cable restraint captive screw to hold the power cable in place.
                             16. Attach the power cable to the DC power source.
                             17. Verify that the DC source power cabling are correct, that they are not touching
                                    or blocking access to TX Matrix platform components, and that they do not drape
                                    where people could trip on them.
                             18. Replace the clear plastic cover over the terminal studs on the faceplate.
                             19. Switch on the external circuit breakers to provide voltage to the DC power source
                                    cables.
                             20. Switch the circuit breakers on the power supply to the on position (|) and observe
                                    the LEDs on the power supply faceplate. If the power supply is correctly installed
                                    and is functioning properly, the DC OK LED lights steadily, and the CB ON LED
                                    blinks momentarily, then lights steadily.




244    ■    Replacing Power System Components
                                              Chapter 17: Replacing Hardware Components




NOTE: After powering off a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning it
back on. After powering on a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning
it off.

If the system is completely powered off when you power on the power supply, the
Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence. If the
Routing Engine finishes booting and you need to power off the system again, first
issue the CLI request system halt command.

After a power supply is powered on, it can take up to 60 seconds for status
indicators—such as the output status LEDs on the power supply, the show chassis
command display, and messages on the LED display on the craft interface—to indicate
that the power supply is functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear
during the first 60 seconds.




                                         Replacing Power System Components    ■   245
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




246    ■    Replacing Power System Components
Part 4
Appendixes
         ■   Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information on page 249
         ■   Environmental Specifications on page 285
         ■   Power Requirements, Guidelines, and Specifications on page 287
         ■   Cable Specifications on page 295
         ■   Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware on page 299
         ■   Cable Connector Pinouts on page 309




                                                                     Appendixes   ■   247
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




248    ■    Appendixes
Appendix A
Safety and Regulatory Compliance
Information

                  To install and use the TX Matrix platform safely, follow proper safety procedures.
                  This appendix discusses the following safety and regulatory compliance information:
                  ■   Definition of Safety Warning Levels on page 249
                  ■   Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 250


Definition of Safety Warning Levels
                  This manual uses the following three levels of safety warnings:


                  NOTE: You might find this information helpful in a particular situation, or might
                  otherwise overlook it.



                  CAUTION: You need to observe the specified guidelines to avoid minor injury or
                  discomfort to you, or severe damage to the TX Matrix platform.



                  WARNING: This symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily
                  injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with
                  electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents.

                  Waarschuwing Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie
                  die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken,
                  dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's en
                  dient u op de hoogte te zijn van standaard maatregelen om ongelukken te voorkomen.

                  Varoitus Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa, joka voi johtaa
                  ruumiinvammaan. Ennen kuin työskentelet minkään laitteiston parissa, ota selvää
                  sähkökytkentöihin liittyvistä vaaroista ja tavanomaisista onnettomuuksien
                  ehkäisykeinoista.

                  Attention Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans
                  une situation pouvant causer des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant de




                                                               Definition of Safety Warning Levels   ■   249
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             travailler sur un équipement, soyez conscient des dangers posés par les circuits
                             électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures couramment utilisées pour éviter
                             les accidents.

                             Warnung Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation,
                             die zu einer Körperverletzung führen könnte. Bevor Sie mit der Arbeit an irgendeinem
                             Gerät beginnen, seien Sie sich der mit elektrischen Stromkreisen verbundenen
                             Gefahren und der Standardpraktiken zur Vermeidung von Unfällen bewußt.

                             Avvertenza Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe
                             causare infortuni alle persone. Prima di lavorare su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre
                             conoscere i pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici ed essere al corrente delle pratiche
                             standard per la prevenzione di incidenti.

                             Advarsel Dette varselsymbolet betyr fare. Du befinner deg i en situasjon som kan
                             føre til personskade. Før du utfører arbeid på utstyr, må du vare oppmerksom på de
                             faremomentene som elektriske kretser innebærer, samt gjøre deg kjent med vanlig
                             praksis når det gjelder å unngå ulykker.

                             Aviso Este símbolo de aviso indica perigo. Encontra-se numa situação que lhe poderá
                             causar danos físicos. Antes de começar a trabalhar com qualquer equipamento,
                             familiarize-se com os perigos relacionados com circuitos eléctricos, e com quaisquer
                             práticas comuns que possam prevenir possíveis acidentes.

                             ¡Atención! Este símbolo de aviso significa peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad
                             física. Antes de manipular cualquier equipo, considerar los riesgos que entraña la
                             corriente eléctrica y familiarizarse con los procedimientos estándar de prevención
                             de accidentes.

                             Varning! Denna varningssymbol signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som
                             kan leda till personskada. Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara
                             medveten om farorna med elkretsar och känna till vanligt förfarande för att förebygga
                             skador.



Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                             This section lists safety guidelines and warnings for installing, operating, and
                             maintaining the TX Matrix platform:
                             ■      General Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 251
                             ■      Fire Safety Requirements on page 254
                             ■      Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 255
                             ■      Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 261
                             ■      Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 265
                             ■      Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 270
                             ■      Agency Approvals on page 281




250    ■    Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                                                        Appendix A: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information




                   ■   Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements on page 282
                   ■   Compliance Statements for Environmental Requirements on page 284
                   ■   Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise on page 284

General Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                   The following guidelines help ensure your safety and protect the TX Matrix platform
                   from damage. The list of guidelines might not address all potentially hazardous
                   situations in your working environment, so be alert and exercise good judgment at
                   all times.
                   ■   Perform only the procedures explicitly described in this manual. Make sure that
                       only authorized service personnel perform other system services.
                   ■   Keep the area around the chassis clear and free from dust before, during, and
                       after installation.
                   ■   Keep tools away from areas where people could trip over them while walking.
                   ■   Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry, such as rings, bracelets, or chains, which
                       could become caught in the chassis.
                   ■   Wear safety glasses if you are working under any conditions that could be
                       hazardous to your eyes.
                   ■   Do not perform any actions that create a potential hazard to people or make the
                       equipment unsafe.
                   ■   Never attempt to lift an object that is too heavy for one person to handle.
                   ■   Never install or manipulate wiring during electrical storms.
                   ■   Never install electrical jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are specifically
                       designed for wet environments.
                   ■   Operate the TX Matrix platform only when it is properly grounded.
                   ■   Do not open or remove chassis covers or sheet metal parts unless instructions
                       are provided in this manual. Such an action could cause severe electrical shock.
                   ■   Do not push or force any objects through any opening in the chassis frame. Such
                       an action could result in electrical shock or fire.
                   ■   Avoid spilling liquid onto the TX Matrix platform chassis or onto any TX Matrix
                       platform component. Such an action could cause electrical shock or damage the
                       TX Matrix platform.
                   ■   Avoid touching uninsulated electrical wires or terminals that have not been
                       disconnected from their power source. Such an action could cause electrical
                       shock.

                   In addition, observe the following warnings and guidelines:
                   ■   Qualified Personnel Warning on page 252
                   ■   Restricted Access Area Warning on page 252
                   ■   Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 254




                                                                    Safety Guidelines and Warnings    ■    251
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Qualified Personnel Warning


                             WARNING: Only trained and qualified personnel should install or replace the router.

                             Waarschuwing Installatie en reparaties mogen uitsluitend door getraind en bevoegd
                             personeel uitgevoerd worden.

                             Varoitus Ainoastaan koulutettu ja pätevä henkilökunta saa asentaa tai vaihtaa tämän
                             laitteen.

                             Attention Tout installation ou remplacement de l'appareil doit être réalisé par du
                             personnel qualifié et compétent.

                             Warnung Gerät nur von geschultem, qualifiziertem Personal installieren oder
                             auswechseln lassen.

                             Avvertenza Solo personale addestrato e qualificato deve essere autorizzato ad
                             installare o sostituire questo apparecchio.

                             Advarsel Kun kvalifisert personell med riktig opplæring bør montere eller bytte ut
                             dette utstyret.

                             Aviso Este equipamento deverá ser instalado ou substituído apenas por pessoal
                             devidamente treinado e qualificado.

                             ¡Atención! Estos equipos deben ser instalados y reemplazados exclusivamente por
                             personal técnico adecuadamente preparado y capacitado.

                             Varning! Denna utrustning ska endast installeras och bytas ut av utbildad och
                             kvalificerad personal.



                             Restricted Access Area Warning


                             WARNING: The router is intended for installation in restricted access areas. A
                             restricted access area is an area to which access can be gained only by service
                             personnel through the use of a special tool, lock and key, or other means of security,
                             and which is controlled by the authority responsible for the location.

                             Waarschuwing Dit toestel is bedoeld voor installatie op plaatsen met beperkte
                             toegang. Een plaats met beperkte toegang is een plaats waar toegang slechts door
                             servicepersoneel verkregen kan worden door middel van een speciaal instrument,
                             een slot en sleutel, of een ander veiligheidsmiddel, en welke beheerd wordt door de
                             overheidsinstantie die verantwoordelijk is voor de locatie.

                             Varoitus Tämä laite on tarkoitettu asennettavaksi paikkaan, johon pääsy on rajoitettua.
                             Paikka, johon pääsy on rajoitettua, tarkoittaa paikkaa, johon vain huoltohenkilöstö
                             pääsee jonkin erikoistyökalun, lukkoon sopivan avaimen tai jonkin muun turvalaitteen
                             avulla ja joka on paikasta vastuussa olevien toimivaltaisten henkilöiden valvoma.




252    ■    Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                                     Appendix A: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information




Attention Cet appareil est à installer dans des zones d'accès réservé. Ces dernières
sont des zones auxquelles seul le personnel de service peut accéder en utilisant un
outil spécial, un mécanisme de verrouillage et une clé, ou tout autre moyen de
sécurité. L'accès aux zones de sécurité est sous le contrôle de l'autorité responsable
de l'emplacement.

Warnung Diese Einheit ist zur Installation in Bereichen mit beschränktem Zutritt
vorgesehen. Ein Bereich mit beschränktem Zutritt ist ein Bereich, zu dem nur
Wartungspersonal mit einem Spezialwerkzeugs, Schloß und Schlüssel oder anderer
Sicherheitsvorkehrungen Zugang hat, und der von dem für die Anlage zuständigen
Gremium kontrolliert wird.

Avvertenza Questa unità deve essere installata in un'area ad accesso limitato. Un'area
ad accesso limitato è un'area accessibile solo a personale di assistenza tramite
un'attrezzo speciale, lucchetto, o altri dispositivi di sicurezza, ed è controllata
dall'autorità responsabile della zona.

Advarsel Denne enheten er laget for installasjon i områder med begrenset adgang.
Et område med begrenset adgang gir kun adgang til servicepersonale som bruker et
spesielt verktøy, lås og nøkkel, eller en annen sikkerhetsanordning, og det kontrolleres
av den autoriteten som er ansvarlig for området.

Aviso Esta unidade foi concebida para instalação em áreas de acesso restrito. Uma
área de acesso restrito é uma área à qual apenas tem acesso o pessoal de serviço
autorizado, que possua uma ferramenta, chave e fechadura especial, ou qualquer
outra forma de segurança. Esta área é controlada pela autoridade responsável pelo
local.

¡Atención! Esta unidad ha sido diseñada para instalarse en áreas de acceso
restringido. Área de acceso restringido significa un área a la que solamente tiene
acceso el personal de servicio mediante la utilización de una herramienta especial,
cerradura con llave, o algún otro medio de seguridad, y que está bajo el control de
la autoridad responsable del local.

Varning! Denna enhet är avsedd för installation i områden med begränsat tillträde.
Ett område med begränsat tillträde får endast tillträdas av servicepersonal med ett
speciellt verktyg, lås och nyckel, eller annan säkerhetsanordning, och kontrolleras
av den auktoritet som ansvarar för området.




                                                 Safety Guidelines and Warnings    ■    253
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage

                             Many TX Matrix platform hardware components are sensitive to damage from static
                             electricity. Some components can be impaired by voltages as low as 30 V. You can
                             easily generate potentially damaging static voltages whenever you handle plastic or
                             foam packing material or if you move components across plastic or carpets. Observe
                             the following guidelines to minimize the potential for electrostatic discharge (ESD)
                             damage, which can cause intermittent or complete component failures:
                             ■      Always use an ESD wrist strap or ankle strap, and make sure that it is in direct
                                    contact with your skin.


                             CAUTION: For safety, periodically check the resistance value of the ESD strap. The
                             measurement should be in the range of 1 to 10 Mohms.


                             ■      When handling any component that is removed from the chassis, make sure the
                                    equipment end of your ESD strap is attached to one of the electrostatic discharge
                                    points on the chassis, which are shown in Figure 2 on page 10 and
                                    Figure 3 on page 11.
                             ■      Avoid contact between the component and your clothing. ESD voltages emitted
                                    from clothing can still damage components.
                             ■      When removing or installing a component, always place it component-side up
                                    on an antistatic surface, in an antistatic card rack, or in an electrostatic bag (see
                                    Figure 108 on page 254). If you are returning a component, place it in an
                                    electrostatic bag before packing it.


                             Figure 108: Placing a Component into an Electrostatic Bag




Fire Safety Requirements
                             In the event of a fire emergency involving routers and other network equipment, the
                             safety of people is the primary concern. Establish procedures for protecting people
                             in the event of a fire emergency, provide safety training, and properly provision
                             fire-control equipment and fire extinguishers.




254    ■    Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                                                          Appendix A: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information




                    In addition, establish procedures to protect your equipment in the event of a fire
                    emergency. Juniper Networks products should be installed in an environment suitable
                    for electronic equipment. We recommend that fire suppression equipment be available
                    in the event of a fire in the vicinity of the equipment, and that all local fire, safety,
                    and electrical codes and ordinances be observed when installing and operating your
                    equipment.

                    Fire Suppression

                    In the event of an electrical hazard or an electrical fire, first turn power off to the
                    equipment at the source. Then use a Type C fire extinguisher, which uses noncorrosive
                    fire retardants, to extinguish the fire. For more information about fire extinguishers,
                    see “Fire Suppression Equipment” on page 255.

                    Fire Suppression Equipment

                    Type C fire extinguishers, which use noncorrosive fire retardants such as carbon
                    dioxide (CO2) and Halotron™, are most effective for suppressing electrical fires. Type
                    C fire extinguishers displace the oxygen from the point of combustion to eliminate
                    the fire. For extinguishing fire on or around equipment that draws air from the
                    environment for cooling, use this type of inert oxygen displacement extinguisher
                    instead of an extinguisher that leave residues on equipment.

                    Do not use multipurpose Type ABC chemical fire extinguishers (dry chemical fire
                    extinguishers) near Juniper Networks equipment. The primary ingredient in these
                    fire extinguishers is monoammonium phosphate, which is very sticky and difficult
                    to clean. In addition, in minute amounts of moisture, monoammonium phosphate
                    can become highly corrosive and corrodes most metals.

                    Any equipment in a room in which a chemical fire extinguisher has been discharged
                    is subject to premature failure and unreliable operation. The equipment is considered
                    to be irreparably damaged.


                    NOTE: To keep warranties effective, do not use a dry chemical fire extinguisher to
                    control a fire at or near a Juniper Networks router. If a dry chemical fire extinguisher
                    is used, the unit is no longer eligible for coverage under a service agreement.


                    We recommend that you dispose of any irreparably damaged equipment in an
                    environmentally responsible manner.

Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                    Observe the following guidelines and warnings before and during TX Matrix platform
                    installation:
                    ■   Chassis Lifting Guidelines on page 256
                    ■   Installation Instructions Warning on page 256




                                                                      Safety Guidelines and Warnings    ■    255
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             ■      Rack-Mounting Requirements and Warnings on page 257
                             ■      Ramp Warning on page 260

                             Chassis Lifting Guidelines

                             The weight of a fully configured chassis is about 495 lb (225 kg). Observe the following
                             guidelines for lifting and moving the TX Matrix platform:
                             ■      Before moving the TX Matrix platform, read the guidelines in “Preparing for
                                    TX Matrix Platform Installation” on page 65 to verify that the intended site meets
                                    the specified power, environmental, and clearance requirements.
                             ■      Do not attempt to lift a fully configured TX Matrix platform by yourself. Using a
                                    mechanical lift to maneuver the TX Matrix platform into a rack is recommended.
                                    If a lift cannot be used, a minimum of four people must lift the TX Matrix
                                    platform, and you must remove components from the chassis before lifting. For
                                    lifting and component removal instructions, see “Initial Installation” on page 63.
                             ■      Before lifting or moving the TX Matrix platform, disconnect all external cables.
                             ■      As when lifting any heavy object, lift most of the weight with your legs rather
                                    than your back. Keep your knees bent and your back relatively straight and avoid
                                    twisting your body as you lift. Balance the load evenly and be sure that your
                                    footing is solid.


                             Installation Instructions Warning


                             WARNING: Read the installation instructions before you connect the router to a
                             power source.

                             Waarschuwing Raadpleeg de installatie-aanwijzingen voordat u het systeem met de
                             voeding verbindt.

                             Varoitus Lue asennusohjeet ennen järjestelmän yhdistämistä virtalähteeseen.

                             Attention Avant de brancher le système sur la source d'alimentation, consulter les
                             directives d'installation.

                             Warnung Lesen Sie die Installationsanweisungen, bevor Sie das System an die
                             Stromquelle anschließen.

                             Avvertenza Consultare le istruzioni di installazione prima di collegare il sistema
                             all'alimentatore.

                             Advarsel Les installasjonsinstruksjonene før systemet kobles til strømkilden.

                             Aviso Leia as instruções de instalação antes de ligar o sistema à sua fonte de energia.

                             ¡Atención! Ver las instrucciones de instalación antes de conectar el sistema a la red
                             de alimentación.




256    ■    Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                                      Appendix A: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information




Varning! Läs installationsanvisningarna innan du kopplar systemet till dess
strömförsörjningsenhet.



Rack-Mounting Requirements and Warnings

Ensure that the equipment rack into which the TX Matrix platform is installed is
evenly and securely supported, to avoid the hazardous condition that could result
from uneven mechanical loading.


WARNING: To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing the router in a rack,
take the following precautions to ensure that the system remains stable. The following
directives help maintain your safety:
■   The router must be installed into a rack that is secured to the building structure.
■   The router should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in
    the rack.
■   When mounting the router in a partially filled rack, load the rack from the bottom
    to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack.
■   If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices, install the stabilizers before
    mounting or servicing the router in the rack.

    Waarschuwing Om lichamelijk letsel te voorkomen wanneer u dit toestel in een
    rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft, moet u speciale
    voorzorgsmaatregelen nemen om ervoor te zorgen dat het toestel stabiel blijft.
    De onderstaande richtlijnen worden verstrekt om uw veiligheid te verzekeren:
    ■   De Juniper Networks router moet in een stellage worden geïnstalleerd die
        aan een bouwsel is verankerd.
    ■   Dit toestel dient onderaan in het rek gemonteerd te worden als het toestel
        het enige in het rek is.

    ■   Wanneer u dit toestel in een gedeeltelijk gevuld rek monteert, dient u het
        rek van onderen naar boven te laden met het zwaarste onderdeel onderaan
        in het rek.

    ■   Als het rek voorzien is van stabiliseringshulpmiddelen, dient u de
        stabilisatoren te monteren voordat u het toestel in het rek monteert of het
        daar een servicebeurt geeft.


Varoitus Kun laite asetetaan telineeseen tai huolletaan sen ollessa telineessä, on
noudatettava erityisiä varotoimia järjestelmän vakavuuden säilyttämiseksi, jotta
vältytään loukkaantumiselta. Noudata seuraavia turvallisuusohjeita:




                                                  Safety Guidelines and Warnings    ■    257
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             ■      Juniper Networks router on asennettava telineeseen, joka on kiinnitetty
                                    rakennukseen.
                             ■      Jos telineessä ei ole muita laitteita, aseta laite telineen alaosaan.
                             ■      Jos laite asetetaan osaksi täytettyyn telineeseen, aloita kuormittaminen sen
                                    alaosasta kaikkein raskaimmalla esineellä ja siirry sitten sen yläosaan.
                             ■      Jos telinettä varten on vakaimet, asenna ne ennen laitteen asettamista telineeseen
                                    tai sen huoltamista siinä.

                             Attention Pour éviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opérations de montage
                             ou de réparation de cette unité en casier, il convient de prendre des précautions
                             spéciales afin de maintenir la stabilité du système. Les directives ci-dessous sont
                             destinées à assurer la protection du personnel:
                             ■      Le rack sur lequel est monté le Juniper Networks router doit être fixé à la structure
                                    du bâtiment.
                             ■      Si cette unité constitue la seule unité montée en casier, elle doit être placée dans
                                    le bas.
                             ■      Si cette unité est montée dans un casier partiellement rempli, charger le casier
                                    de bas en haut en plaçant l'élément le plus lourd dans le bas.
                             ■      Si le casier est équipé de dispositifs stabilisateurs, installer les stabilisateurs avant
                                    de monter ou de réparer l'unité en casier.

                             Warnung Zur Vermeidung von Körperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser
                             Einheit in einem Gestell müssen Sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen, um
                             sicherzustellen, daß das System stabil bleibt. Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur
                             Gewährleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen:
                             ■      Der Juniper Networks router muß in einem Gestell installiert werden, das in der
                                    Gebäudestruktur verankert ist.
                             ■      Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist, sollte sie unten im Gestell
                                    angebracht werden.
                             ■      Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefüllten Gestell ist das Gestell
                                    von unten nach oben zu laden, wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell
                                    anzubringen ist.
                             ■      Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehör geliefert, sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren
                                    zu installieren, bevor Sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten.

                             Avvertenza Per evitare infortuni fisici durante il montaggio o la manutenzione di
                             questa unità in un supporto, occorre osservare speciali precauzioni per garantire che
                             il sistema rimanga stabile. Le seguenti direttive vengono fornite per garantire la
                             sicurezza personale:




258    ■    Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                                      Appendix A: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information




■   Il Juniper Networks router deve essere installato in un telaio, il quale deve essere
    fissato alla struttura dell'edificio.
■   Questa unità deve venire montata sul fondo del supporto, se si tratta dell'unica
    unità da montare nel supporto.
■   Quando questa unità viene montata in un supporto parzialmente pieno, caricare
    il supporto dal basso all'alto, con il componente più pesante sistemato sul fondo
    del supporto.
■   Se il supporto è dotato di dispositivi stabilizzanti, installare tali dispositivi prima
    di montare o di procedere alla manutenzione dell'unità nel supporto.

Advarsel Unngå fysiske skader under montering eller reparasjonsarbeid på denne
enheten når den befinner seg i et kabinett. Vær nøye med at systemet er stabilt.
Følgende retningslinjer er gitt for å verne om sikkerheten:
■   Juniper Networks router må installeres i et stativ som er forankret til
    bygningsstrukturen.
■   Denne enheten bør monteres nederst i kabinettet hvis dette er den eneste enheten
    i kabinettet.
■   Ved montering av denne enheten i et kabinett som er delvis fylt, skal kabinettet
    lastes fra bunnen og opp med den tyngste komponenten nederst i kabinettet.
■   Hvis kabinettet er utstyrt med stabiliseringsutstyr, skal stabilisatorene installeres
    før montering eller utføring av reparasjonsarbeid på enheten i kabinettet.

Aviso Para se prevenir contra danos corporais ao montar ou reparar esta unidade
numa estante, deverá tomar precauções especiais para se certificar de que o sistema
possui um suporte estável. As seguintes directrizes ajudá-lo-ão a efectuar o seu
trabalho com segurança:
■   O Juniper Networks router deverá ser instalado numa prateleira fixa à estrutura
    do edificio.
■   Esta unidade deverá ser montada na parte inferior da estante, caso seja esta a
    única unidade a ser montada.
■   Ao montar esta unidade numa estante parcialmente ocupada, coloque os itens
    mais pesados na parte inferior da estante, arrumando-os de baixo para cima.
■   Se a estante possuir um dispositivo de estabilização, instale-o antes de montar
    ou reparar a unidade.

¡Atención! Para evitar lesiones durante el montaje de este equipo sobre un bastidor,
o posteriormente durante su mantenimiento, se debe poner mucho cuidado en que
el sistema quede bien estable. Para garantizar su seguridad, proceda según las
siguientes instrucciones:




                                                  Safety Guidelines and Warnings    ■    259
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             ■      El Juniper Networks router debe instalarse en un bastidor fijado a la estructura
                                    del edificio.
                             ■      Colocar el equipo en la parte inferior del bastidor, cuando sea la única unidad
                                    en el mismo.
                             ■      Cuando este equipo se vaya a instalar en un bastidor parcialmente ocupado,
                                    comenzar la instalación desde la parte inferior hacia la superior colocando el
                                    equipo más pesado en la parte inferior.
                             ■      Si el bastidor dispone de dispositivos estabilizadores, instalar éstos antes de
                                    montar o proceder al mantenimiento del equipo instalado en el bastidor.

                             Varning! För att undvika kroppsskada när du installerar eller utför underhållsarbete
                             på denna enhet på en ställning måste du vidta särskilda försiktighetsåtgärder för att
                             försäkra dig om att systemet står stadigt. Följande riktlinjer ges för att trygga din
                             säkerhet:
                             ■      Juniper Networks router måste installeras i en ställning som är förankrad i
                                    byggnadens struktur.
                             ■      Om denna enhet är den enda enheten på ställningen skall den installeras längst
                                    ned på ställningen.
                             ■      Om denna enhet installeras på en delvis fylld ställning skall ställningen fyllas
                                    nedifrån och upp, med de tyngsta enheterna längst ned på ställningen.
                             ■      Om ställningen är försedd med stabiliseringsdon skall dessa monteras fast innan
                                    enheten installeras eller underhålls på ställningen.




                             Ramp Warning


                             WARNING: When installing the router, do not use a ramp inclined at more than 10
                             degrees.

                             Waarschuwing Gebruik een oprijplaat niet onder een hoek van meer dan 10 graden.

                             Varoitus Älä käytä sellaista kaltevaa pintaa, jonka kaltevuus ylittää 10 astetta.

                             Attention Ne pas utiliser une rampe dont l'inclinaison est supérieure à 10 degrés.

                             Warnung Keine Rampen mit einer Neigung von mehr als 10 Grad verwenden.

                             Avvertenza Non usare una rampa con pendenza superiore a 10 gradi.

                             Advarsel Bruk aldri en rampe som heller mer enn 10 grader.

                             Aviso Não utilize uma rampa com uma inclinação superior a 10 graus.

                             ¡Atención! No usar una rampa inclinada más de 10 grados




260    ■    Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                                                       Appendix A: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information




                   Varning! Använd inte ramp med en lutning på mer än 10 grader.



Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                   TX-SIBs and T640-SIBs are equipped with laser transmitters, which are considered
                   a Class 1 Laser Product by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration, and are evaluated
                   as a Class 1M Laser Product per EN 60825–1 +A11 +A2 requirements.

                   Observe the following guidelines and warnings:
                   ■   General Laser Safety Guidelines on page 261
                   ■   Laser Safety Standards on page 261
                   ■   Class 1 and Class 1M Laser Product Warning on page 262
                   ■   Class 1 LED Product Warning on page 262
                   ■   Laser Beam Warning on page 263
                   ■   Radiation From Open Port Apertures Warning on page 263
                   ■   Unterminated Fiber-Optic Array Cable Warning on page 264

                   General Laser Safety Guidelines

                   When working around PICs, observe the following safety guidelines to prevent eye
                   injury:
                   ■   Do not look into unterminated ports or at fibers that connect to unknown sources.
                   ■   Do not examine unterminated optical ports with optical instruments.
                   ■   Avoid direct exposure to the beam.


                   WARNING: Unterminated optical connectors can emit invisible laser radiation. The
                   lens in the human eye focuses all the laser power on the retina, so focusing the eye
                   directly on a laser source—even a low-power laser—could permanently damage the
                   eye.




                   Laser Safety Standards

                   The TX Matrix platform is classified by the following laser safety standards:
                   ■   Class 1M laser product (IEC 60825-1 2001–01).
                   ■   Class 1 laser product (complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for
                       deviations pursuant to Laser Notice 50, dated July 26, 2001).




                                                                   Safety Guidelines and Warnings    ■    261
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             The maximum output is less than 10 mW when measured through a 3.5-mm aperture
                             located at a distance of 100 mm and the wavelength is 850 nm from fiber-optic array
                             connectors.

                             Class 1 and Class 1M Laser Product Warning


                             WARNING: The TX Matrix platform is a Class 1 and Class 1M laser product.

                             Waarschuwing Laserproducten van Klasse I (CDRH) en Klasse 1M (IEC).

                             Varoitus Luokan I (CDRH) ja luokan 1M (IEC) lasertuotteita.

                             Attention Produits laser catégorie I (CDRH) et catégorie 1M (IEC).

                             Warnung Laserprodukte der Klasse I (CDRH) und Klasse 1M (IEC).

                             Avvertenza Prodotti laser di Classe I (CDRH) e Classe 1M (IEC).

                             Advarsel Klasse I (CDRH) og klasse 1M (IEC) laserprodukter.

                             Aviso Produtos laser Classe I (CDRH) e Classe 1M (IEC).

                             ¡Atención! Productos láser de Clase I (CDRH) y Clase 1M (IEC).

                             Varning! Laserprodukter av Klass I (CDRH) och Klass 1M (IEC).



                             Class 1 LED Product Warning


                             WARNING: Class 1 LED product.

                             Waarschuwing Klasse 1 LED-product.

                             Varoitus Luokan 1 valodiodituote.

                             Attention Alarme de produit LED Class I.

                             Warnung Class 1 LED-Produktwarnung.

                             Avvertenza Avvertenza prodotto LED di Classe 1.

                             Advarsel LED-produkt i klasse 1.

                             Aviso Produto de classe 1 com LED.

                             ¡Atención! Aviso sobre producto LED de Clase 1.

                             Varning! Lysdiodprodukt av klass 1.




262    ■    Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                                     Appendix A: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information




Laser Beam Warning


WARNING: Do not stare into the laser beam or view it directly with optical
instruments.

Waarschuwing Niet in de straal staren of hem rechtstreeks bekijken met optische
instrumenten.

Varoitus Älä katso säteeseen äläkä tarkastele sitä suoraan optisen laitteen avulla.

Attention Ne pas fixer le faisceau des yeux, ni l'observer directement à l'aide
d'instruments optiques.

Warnung Nicht direkt in den Strahl blicken und ihn nicht direkt mit optischen Geräten
prüfen.

Avvertenza Non fissare il raggio con gli occhi né usare strumenti ottici per osservarlo
direttamente.

Advarsel Stirr eller se ikke direkte p strlen med optiske instrumenter.

Aviso Não olhe fixamente para o raio, nem olhe para ele directamente com
instrumentos ópticos.

¡Atención! No mirar fijamente el haz ni observarlo directamente con instrumentos
ópticos.

Varning! Rikta inte blicken in mot strålen och titta inte direkt på den genom optiska
instrument.



Radiation From Open Port Apertures Warning


WARNING: Because invisible radiation may be emitted from the aperture of the port
when no fiber cable is connected, avoid exposure to radiation and do not stare into
open apertures.

Waarschuwing Aangezien onzichtbare straling vanuit de opening van de poort kan
komen als er geen fiberkabel aangesloten is, dient blootstelling aan straling en het
kijken in open openingen vermeden te worden.

Varoitus Koska portin aukosta voi emittoitua näkymätöntä säteilyä, kun kuitukaapelia
ei ole kytkettynä, vältä säteilylle altistumista äläkä katso avoimiin aukkoihin.

Attention Des radiations invisibles à l'il nu pouvant traverser l'ouverture du port
lorsqu'aucun câble en fibre optique n'y est connecté, il est recommandé de ne pas
regarder fixement l'intérieur de ces ouvertures.




                                                 Safety Guidelines and Warnings    ■    263
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Warnung Aus der Port-Öffnung können unsichtbare Strahlen emittieren, wenn kein
                             Glasfaserkabel angeschlossen ist. Vermeiden Sie es, sich den Strahlungen auszusetzen,
                             und starren Sie nicht in die Öffnungen!

                             Avvertenza Quando i cavi in fibra non sono inseriti, radiazioni invisibili possono
                             essere emesse attraverso l'apertura della porta. Evitate di esporvi alle radiazioni e
                             non guardate direttamente nelle aperture.

                             Advarsel Unngå utsettelse for stråling, og stirr ikke inn i åpninger som er åpne, fordi
                             usynlig stråling kan emiteres fra portens åpning når det ikke er tilkoblet en fiberkabel.

                             Aviso Dada a possibilidade de emissão de radiação invisível através do orifício da
                             via de acesso, quando esta não tiver nenhum cabo de fibra conectado, deverá evitar
                             a exposição à radiação e não deverá olhar fixamente para orifícios que se encontrarem
                             a descoberto.

                             ¡Atención! Debido a que la apertura del puerto puede emitir radiación invisible
                             cuando no existe un cable de fibra conectado, evite mirar directamente a las aperturas
                             para no exponerse a la radiación.

                             Varning! Osynlig strålning kan avges från en portöppning utan ansluten fiberkabel
                             och du bör därför undvika att bli utsatt för strålning genom att inte stirra in i
                             oskyddade öppningar.



                             Unterminated Fiber-Optic Array Cable Warning


                             WARNING: Invisible laser radiation might be emitted from the unterminated
                             connector of a fiber-optic array cable connected to a TX-SIB or T640-SIB adapter. To
                             avoid injury to your eye, do not view the fiber optics with a magnifying optical device,
                             such as a loupe, within 100 mm.

                             Waarschuwing Er kunnen onzichtbare laserstralen worden uitgezonden vanuit het
                             uiteinde van de onafgebroken vezelkabel of connector. Niet in de straal kijken of
                             deze rechtstreeks bekijken met optische instrumenten. Als u de laseruitvoer met
                             bepaalde optische instrumenten bekijkt (zoals bijv. een oogloep, vergrootgras of
                             microscoop) binnen een afstand van 100 mm kan dit gevaar voor uw ogen opleveren.

                             Varoitus Päättämättömän kuitukaapelin tai -liittimen päästä voi tulla näkymätöntä
                             lasersäteilyä. Älä tuijota sädettä tai katso sitä suoraan optisilla välineillä. Lasersäteen
                             katsominen tietyillä optisilla välineillä (esim. suurennuslasilla tai mikroskoopilla) 10
                             cm:n päästä tai sitä lähempää voi olla vaarallista silmille.

                             Attention Des émissions de radiations laser invisibles peuvent se produire à
                             l'extrémité d'un câble en fibre ou d'un raccord sans terminaison. Ne pas fixer du
                             regard le rayon ou l'observer directement avec des instruments optiques.
                             L'observation du laser à l'aide certains instruments optiques (loupes et microscopes)
                             à une distance inférieure à 100 mm peut poser des risques pour les yeux.




264    ■    Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                                                          Appendix A: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information




                   Warnung Eine unsichtbare Laserstrahlung kann vom Ende des nicht angeschlossenen
                   Glasfaserkabels oder Steckers ausgestrahlt werden. Nicht in den Laserstrahl schauen
                   oder diesen mit einem optischen Instrument direkt ansehen. Ein Betrachten des
                   Laserstrahls mit bestimmten optischen Instrumenten, wie z.B. Augenlupen,
                   Vergrößerungsgläsern und Mikroskopen innerhalb eines Abstands von 100 mm kann
                   für das Auge gefährlich sein.

                   Avvertenza L'estremità del connettore o del cavo ottico senza terminazione può
                   emettere radiazioni laser invisibili. Non fissare il raggio od osservarlo in modo diretto
                   con strumenti ottici. L'osservazione del fascio laser con determinati strumenti ottici
                   (come lupette, lenti di ingrandimento o microscopi) entro una distanza di 100 mm
                   può provocare danni agli occhi.

                   Advarsel Usynlig laserstråling kan emittere fra enden av den ikke-terminerte
                   fiberkabelen eller koblingen. Ikke se inn i strålen og se heller ikke direkte på strålen
                   med optiske instrumenter. Observering av laserutgang med visse optiske instrumenter
                   (for eksempel øyelupe, forstørrelsesglass eller mikroskoper) innenfor en avstand på
                   100 mm kan være farlig for øynene.

                   Aviso Radiação laser invisível pode ser emitida pela ponta de um conector ou cabo
                   de fibra não terminado. Não olhe fixa ou diretamente para o feixe ou com
                   instrumentos ópticos. Visualizar a emissão do laser com certos instrumentos ópticos
                   (por exemplo, lupas, lentes de aumento ou microscópios) a uma distância de 100
                   mm pode causar riscos à visão.

                   ¡Atención! El extremo de un cable o conector de fibra sin terminación puede emitir
                   radiación láser invisible. No se acerque al radio de acción ni lo mire directamente
                   con instrumentos ópticos. La exposición del ojo a una salida de láser con determinados
                   instrumentos ópticos (por ejemplo, lupas y microscopios) a una distancia de 100
                   mm puede comportar lesiones oculares.

                   Varning! Osynlig laserstrålning kan komma från änden på en oavslutad fiberkabel
                   eller -anslutning. Titta inte rakt in i strålen eller direkt på den med optiska instrument.
                   Att titta på laserstrålen med vissa optiska instrument (t.ex. lupper, förstoringsglas
                   och mikroskop) från ett avstånd på 100 mm kan skada ögonen.



Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                   As you maintain the TX Matrix platform, observe the following guidelines and
                   warnings:
                   ■   Battery Handling Warning on page 266
                   ■   Jewelry Removal Warning on page 266
                   ■   Lightning Activity Warning on page 268
                   ■   Operating Temperature Warning on page 268
                   ■   Product Disposal Warning on page 269




                                                                      Safety Guidelines and Warnings    ■    265
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Battery Handling Warning


                             WARNING: Replacing the battery incorrectly might result in an explosion. Replace
                             the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
                             Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.

                             Waarschuwing Er is ontploffingsgevaar als de batterij verkeerd vervangen wordt.
                             Vervang de batterij slechts met hetzelfde of een equivalent type dat door de fabrikant
                             aanbevolen is. Gebruikte batterijen dienen overeenkomstig fabrieksvoorschriften
                             weggeworpen te worden.

                             Varoitus Räjähdyksen vaara, jos akku on vaihdettu väärään akkuun. Käytä
                             vaihtamiseen ainoastaan saman- tai vastaavantyyppistä akkua, joka on valmistajan
                             suosittelema. Hävitä käytetyt akut valmistajan ohjeiden mukaan.

                             Attention Danger d'explosion si la pile n'est pas remplacée correctement. Ne la
                             remplacer que par une pile de type semblable ou équivalent, recommandée par le
                             fabricant. Jeter les piles usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.

                             Warnung Bei Einsetzen einer falschen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr. Ersetzen
                             Sie die Batterie nur durch den gleichen oder vom Hersteller empfohlenen Batterietyp.
                             Entsorgen Sie die benutzten Batterien nach den Anweisungen des Herstellers.

                             Avvertenza Pericolo di esplosione se la batteria non è installata correttamente.
                             Sostituire solo con una di tipo uguale o equivalente, consigliata dal produttore.
                             Eliminare le batterie usate secondo le istruzioni del produttore.

                             Advarsel Det kan være fare for eksplosjon hvis batteriet skiftes på feil måte. Skift
                             kun med samme eller tilsvarende type som er anbefalt av produsenten. Kasser brukte
                             batterier i henhold til produsentens instruksjoner.

                             Aviso Existe perigo de explosão se a bateria for substituída incorrectamente. Substitua
                             a bateria por uma bateria igual ou de um tipo equivalente recomendado pelo
                             fabricante. Destrua as baterias usadas conforme as instruções do fabricante.

                             ¡Atención! Existe peligro de explosión si la batería se reemplaza de manera incorrecta.
                             Reemplazar la batería exclusivamente con el mismo tipo o el equivalente
                             recomendado por el fabricante. Desechar las baterías gastadas según las instrucciones
                             del fabricante.

                             Varning! Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Ersätt endast batteriet med samma
                             batterityp som rekommenderas av tillverkaren eller motsvarande. Följ tillverkarens
                             anvisningar vid kassering av använda batterier.



                             Jewelry Removal Warning


                             WARNING: Before working on equipment that is connected to power lines, remove
                             jewelry, including rings, necklaces, and watches. Metal objects heat up when




266    ■    Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                                        Appendix A: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information




connected to power and ground and can cause serious burns or weld the metal object
to the terminals.

Waarschuwing Alvorens aan apparatuur te werken die met elektrische leidingen is
verbonden, sieraden (inclusief ringen, kettingen en horloges) verwijderen. Metalen
voorwerpen worden warm wanneer ze met stroom en aarde zijn verbonden, en
kunnen ernstige brandwonden veroorzaken of het metalen voorwerp aan de
aansluitklemmen lassen.

Varoitus Ennen kuin työskentelet voimavirtajohtoihin kytkettyjen laitteiden parissa,
ota pois kaikki korut (sormukset, kaulakorut ja kellot mukaan lukien). Metalliesineet
kuumenevat, kun ne ovat yhteydessä sähkövirran ja maan kanssa, ja ne voivat
aiheuttaa vakavia palovammoja tai hitsata metalliesineet kiinni liitäntänapoihin.

Attention Avant d'accéder à cet équipement connecté aux lignes électriques, ôter
tout bijou (anneaux, colliers et montres compris). Lorsqu'ils sont branchés à
l'alimentation et reliés à la terre, les objets métalliques chauffent, ce qui peut
provoquer des blessures graves ou souder l'objet métallique aux bornes.

Warnung Vor der Arbeit an Geräten, die an das Netz angeschlossen sind, jeglichen
Schmuck (einschließlich Ringe, Ketten und Uhren) abnehmen. Metallgegenstände
erhitzen sich, wenn sie an das Netz und die Erde angeschlossen werden, und können
schwere Verbrennungen verursachen oder an die Anschlußklemmen angeschweißt
werden.

Avvertenza Prima di intervenire su apparecchiature collegate alle linee di
alimentazione, togliersi qualsiasi monile (inclusi anelli, collane, braccialetti ed orologi).
Gli oggetti metallici si riscaldano quando sono collegati tra punti di alimentazione e
massa: possono causare ustioni gravi oppure il metallo può saldarsi ai terminali.

Advarsel Fjern alle smykker (inkludert ringer, halskjeder og klokker) før du skal
arbeide på utstyr som er koblet til kraftledninger. Metallgjenstander som er koblet
til kraftledninger og jord blir svært varme og kan forårsake alvorlige brannskader
eller smelte fast til polene.

Aviso Antes de trabalhar em equipamento que esteja ligado a linhas de corrente,
retire todas as jóias que estiver a usar (incluindo anéis, fios e relógios). Os objectos
metálicos aquecerão em contacto com a corrente e em contacto com a ligação à
terra, podendo causar queimaduras graves ou ficarem soldados aos terminais.

¡Atención! Antes de operar sobre equipos conectados a líneas de alimentación,
quitarse las joyas (incluidos anillos, collares y relojes). Los objetos de metal se calientan
cuando se conectan a la alimentación y a tierra, lo que puede ocasionar quemaduras
graves o que los objetos metálicos queden soldados a los bornes.

Varning! Tag av alla smycken (inklusive ringar, halsband och armbandsur) innan du
arbetar på utrustning som är kopplad till kraftledningar. Metallobjekt hettas upp när
de kopplas ihop med ström och jord och kan förorsaka allvarliga brännskador;
metallobjekt kan också sammansvetsas med kontakterna.




                                                    Safety Guidelines and Warnings    ■    267
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Lightning Activity Warning


                             WARNING: Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during periods
                             of lightning activity.

                             Waarschuwing Tijdens onweer dat gepaard gaat met bliksem, dient u niet aan het
                             systeem te werken of kabels aan te sluiten of te ontkoppelen.

                             Varoitus Älä työskentele järjestelmän parissa äläkä yhdistä tai irrota kaapeleita
                             ukkosilmalla.

                             Attention Ne pas travailler sur le système ni brancher ou débrancher les câbles
                             pendant un orage.

                             Warnung Arbeiten Sie nicht am System und schließen Sie keine Kabel an bzw.
                             trennen Sie keine ab, wenn es gewittert.

                             Avvertenza Non lavorare sul sistema o collegare oppure scollegare i cavi durante un
                             temporale con fulmini.

                             Advarsel Utfør aldri arbeid på systemet, eller koble kabler til eller fra systemet når
                             det tordner eller lyner.

                             Aviso Não trabalhe no sistema ou ligue e desligue cabos durante períodos de mau
                             tempo (trovoada).

                             ¡Atención! No operar el sistema ni conectar o desconectar cables durante el transcurso
                             de descargas eléctricas en la atmósfera.

                             Varning! Vid åska skall du aldrig utföra arbete på systemet eller ansluta eller koppla
                             loss kablar.



                             Operating Temperature Warning


                             WARNING: To prevent the router from overheating, do not operate it in an area that
                             exceeds the maximum recommended ambient temperature of 104οF (40οC). To
                             prevent airflow restriction, allow at least 6 inches (15.2 cm) of clearance around the
                             ventilation openings.

                             Waarschuwing Om te voorkomen dat welke router van de Juniper Networks router
                             dan ook oververhit raakt, dient u deze niet te bedienen op een plaats waar de
                             maximale aanbevolen omgevingstemperatuur van 40οC wordt overschreden. Om
                             te voorkomen dat de luchtstroom wordt beperkt, dient er minstens 15,2 cm speling
                             rond de ventilatie-openingen te zijn.

                             Varoitus Ettei Juniper Networks router-sarjan reititin ylikuumentuisi, sitä ei saa käyttää
                             tilassa, jonka lämpötila ylittää korkeimman suositellun ympäristölämpötilan 40οC.
                             Ettei ilmanvaihto estyisi, tuuletusaukkojen ympärille on jätettävä ainakin 15,2 cm
                             tilaa.




268    ■    Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                                    Appendix A: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information




Attention Pour éviter toute surchauffe des routeurs de la gamme Juniper Networks
router, ne l'utilisez pas dans une zone où la température ambiante est supérieure à
40οC. Pour permettre un flot d'air constant, dégagez un espace d'au moins 15,2 cm
autour des ouvertures de ventilations.

Warnung Um einen Router der router vor Überhitzung zu schützen, darf dieser nicht
in einer Gegend betrieben werden, in der die Umgebungstemperatur das empfohlene
Maximum von 40οC überschreitet. Um Lüftungsverschluß zu verhindern, achten Sie
darauf, daß mindestens 15,2 cm lichter Raum um die Lüftungsöffnungen herum frei
bleibt.

Avvertenza Per evitare il surriscaldamento dei router, non adoperateli in un locale
che ecceda la temperatura ambientale massima di 40οC. Per evitare che la
circolazione dell'aria sia impedita, lasciate uno spazio di almeno 15.2 cm di fronte
alle aperture delle ventole.

Advarsel Unngå overoppheting av eventuelle rutere i Juniper Networks router Disse
skal ikke brukes på steder der den anbefalte maksimale omgivelsestemperaturen
overstiger 40οC (104οF). Sørg for at klaringen rundt lufteåpningene er minst 15,2
cm (6 tommer) for å forhindre nedsatt luftsirkulasjon.

Aviso Para evitar o sobreaquecimento do encaminhador Juniper Networks router,
não utilize este equipamento numa área que exceda a temperatura máxima
recomendada de 40οC. Para evitar a restrição à circulação de ar, deixe pelo menos
um espaço de 15,2 cm à volta das aberturas de ventilação.

¡Atención! Para impedir que un encaminador de la serie Juniper Networks router se
recaliente, no lo haga funcionar en un área en la que se supere la temperatura
ambiente máxima recomendada de 40οC. Para impedir la restricción de la entrada
de aire, deje un espacio mínimo de 15,2 cm alrededor de las aperturas para
ventilación.

Varning! Förhindra att en Juniper Networks router överhettas genom att inte använda
den i ett område där den maximalt rekommenderade omgivningstemperaturen på
40οC överskrids. Förhindra att luftcirkulationen inskränks genom att se till att det
finns fritt utrymme på minst 15,2 cm omkring ventilationsöppningarna.



Product Disposal Warning


WARNING: Disposal of this product must be handled according to all national laws
and regulations.

Waarschuwing Dit produkt dient volgens alle landelijke wetten en voorschriften te
worden afgedankt.

Varoitus Tämän tuotteen lopullisesta hävittämisestä tulee huolehtia kaikkia
valtakunnallisia lakeja ja säännöksiä noudattaen.




                                                Safety Guidelines and Warnings    ■    269
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Attention La mise au rebut définitive de ce produit doit être effectuée conformément
                             à toutes les lois et réglementations en vigueur.

                             Warnung Dieses Produkt muß den geltenden Gesetzen und Vorschriften entsprechend
                             entsorgt werden.

                             Avvertenza L'eliminazione finale di questo prodotto deve essere eseguita osservando
                             le normative italiane vigenti in materia

                             Advarsel Endelig disponering av dette produktet må skje i henhold til nasjonale lover
                             og forskrifter.

                             Aviso A descartagem final deste produto deverá ser efectuada de acordo com os
                             regulamentos e a legislação nacional.

                             ¡Atención! El desecho final de este producto debe realizarse según todas las leyes y
                             regulaciones nacionales

                             Varning! Slutlig kassering av denna produkt bör skötas i enlighet med landets alla
                             lagar och föreskrifter.



Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                             When working on equipment powered by electricity, follow the guidelines described
                             in the following sections:
                             ■      In Case of Electrical Accident on page 270
                             ■      General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 270
                             ■      DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 275
                             ■      Hazardous Radiation Exposure Warning on page 280

                             In Case of Electrical Accident

                             If an electrical accident results in an injury, take the following actions in this order:
                             1.     Use caution. Be aware of potentially hazardous conditions that could cause further
                                    injury.
                             2.     Disconnect power from the TX Matrix platform.
                             3.     If possible, send another person to get medical aid. Otherwise, assess the
                                    condition of the victim, then call for help.


                             General Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings

                             ■      Install the TX Matrix platform in compliance with the following local, national,
                                    or international electrical codes:




270    ■    Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                                     Appendix A: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information




    ■   United States—National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70), United States
        National Electrical Code.
    ■   Canada—Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, CSA C22.1.

    ■   Other countries—International Electromechanical Commission (IEC) 60364,
        Part 1 through Part 7.

    ■   Evaluated to the TN power system.

■   Locate the emergency power-off switch for the room in which you are working
    so that if an electrical accident occurs, you can quickly turn off the power.
■   Do not work alone if potentially hazardous conditions exist anywhere in your
    workspace.
■   Never assume that power is disconnected from a circuit. Always check the circuit
    before starting to work.
■   Carefully look for possible hazards in your work area, such as moist floors,
    ungrounded power extension cords, and missing safety grounds.
■   Operate the TX Matrix platform within marked electrical ratings and product
    usage instructions.
■   For the TX Matrix platform and peripheral equipment to function safely and
    correctly, use the cables and connectors specified for the attached peripheral
    equipment, and make certain they are in good condition.

Many TX Matrix platform components can be removed and replaced without powering
off or disconnecting power to the TX Matrix platform, as detailed in “Field-Replaceable
Units (FRUs)” on page 4. Never install equipment if it appears damaged.

Grounded Equipment Warning


WARNING: The router is intended to be grounded. Ensure that the router is connected
to earth ground during normal use.

Waarschuwing Deze apparatuur hoort geaard te worden Zorg dat de host-computer
tijdens normaal gebruik met aarde is verbonden.

Varoitus Tämä laitteisto on tarkoitettu maadoitettavaksi. Varmista, että isäntälaite
on yhdistetty maahan normaalikäytön aikana.

Attention Cet équipement doit être relié à la terre. S'assurer que l'appareil hôte est
relié à la terre lors de l'utilisation normale.

Warnung Dieses Gerät muß geerdet werden. Stellen Sie sicher, daß das Host-Gerät
während des normalen Betriebs an Erde gelegt ist.

Avvertenza Questa apparecchiatura deve essere collegata a massa. Accertarsi che il
dispositivo host sia collegato alla massa di terra durante il normale utilizzo.




                                                 Safety Guidelines and Warnings    ■    271
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Advarsel Dette utstyret skal jordes. Forviss deg om vertsterminalen er jordet ved
                             normalt bruk.

                             Aviso Este equipamento deverá estar ligado à terra. Certifique-se que o host se
                             encontra ligado à terra durante a sua utilização normal.

                             ¡Atención! Este equipo debe conectarse a tierra. Asegurarse de que el equipo principal
                             esté conectado a tierra durante el uso normal.

                             Varning! Denna utrustning är avsedd att jordas. Se till att värdenheten är jordad vid
                             normal användning.



                             Midplane Energy Hazard Warning


                             WARNING: High levels of electrical energy are distributed across the TX Matrix
                             platform midplane. Be careful not to contact the midplane connectors, or any
                             component connected to the midplane, with any metallic object while servicing
                             components installed in the TX Matrix platform.


                             Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning


                             WARNING: The TX Matrix platform has more than one power supply connection.
                             All connections must be removed completely to remove power from the unit
                             completely.

                             Waarschuwing Deze eenheid heeft meer dan één stroomtoevoerverbinding; alle
                             verbindingen moeten volledig worden verwijderd om de stroom van deze eenheid
                             volledig te verwijderen.

                             Varoitus Tässä laitteessa on useampia virtalähdekytkentöjä. Kaikki kytkennät on
                             irrotettava kokonaan, jotta virta poistettaisiin täysin laitteesta.

                             Attention Cette unité est équipée de plusieurs raccordements d'alimentation. Pour
                             supprimer tout courant électrique de l'unité, tous les cordons d'alimentation doivent
                             être débranchés.

                             Warnung Diese Einheit verfügt über mehr als einen Stromanschluß; um Strom
                             gänzlich von der Einheit fernzuhalten, müssen alle Stromzufuhren abgetrennt sein.

                             Avvertenza Questa unità ha più di una connessione per alimentatore elettrico; tutte
                             le connessioni devono essere completamente rimosse per togliere l'elettricità
                             dall'unità.

                             Advarsel Denne enheten har mer enn én strømtilkobling. Alle tilkoblinger må kobles
                             helt fra for å eliminere strøm fra enheten.




272    ■    Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                                      Appendix A: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information




Aviso Este dispositivo possui mais do que uma conexão de fonte de alimentação de
energia; para poder remover a fonte de alimentação de energia, deverão ser
desconectadas todas as conexões existentes.

¡Atención! Esta unidad tiene más de una conexión de suministros de alimentación;
para eliminar la alimentación por completo, deben desconectarse completamente
todas las conexiones.

Varning! Denna enhet har mer än en strömförsörjningsanslutning; alla anslutningar
måste vara helt avlägsnade innan strömtillförseln till enheten är fullständigt bruten.



Power Disconnection Warning


WARNING: Before working on the router or near power supplies, unplug the power
cord from an AC router; switch off the power at the circuit breaker on a DC router.

Waarschuwing Voordat u aan een frame of in de nabijheid van voedingen werkt,
dient u bij wisselstroom toestellen de stekker van het netsnoer uit het stopcontact
te halen; voor gelijkstroom toestellen dient u de stroom uit te schakelen bij de
stroomverbreker.

Varoitus Kytke irti vaihtovirtalaitteiden virtajohto ja katkaise tasavirtalaitteiden virta
suojakytkimellä, ennen kuin teet mitään asennuspohjalle tai työskentelet virtalähteiden
läheisyydessä.

Attention Avant de travailler sur un châssis ou à proximité d'une alimentation
électrique, débrancher le cordon d'alimentation des unités en courant alternatif;
couper l'alimentation des unités en courant continu au niveau du disjoncteur.

Warnung Bevor Sie an einem Chassis oder in der Nähe von Netzgeräten arbeiten,
ziehen Sie bei Wechselstromeinheiten das Netzkabel ab bzw. schalten Sie bei
Gleichstromeinheiten den Strom am Unterbrecher ab.

Avvertenza Prima di lavorare su un telaio o intorno ad alimentatori, scollegare il
cavo di alimentazione sulle unità CA; scollegare l'alimentazione all'interruttore
automatico sulle unità CC.

Advarsel Før det utføres arbeid på kabinettet eller det arbeides i nærheten av
strømforsyningsenheter, skal strømledningen trekkes ut p vekselstrømsenheter og
strømmen kobles fra ved strømbryteren på likestrømsenheter.

Aviso Antes de trabalhar num chassis, ou antes de trabalhar perto de unidades de
fornecimento de energia, desligue o cabo de alimentação nas unidades de corrente
alternada; desligue a corrente no disjuntor nas unidades de corrente contínua.

¡Atención! Antes de manipular el chasis de un equipo o trabajar cerca de una fuente
de alimentación, desenchufar el cable de alimentación en los equipos de corriente
alterna (CA); cortar la alimentación desde el interruptor automático en los equipos
de corriente continua (CC).




                                                  Safety Guidelines and Warnings    ■    273
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Varning! Innan du arbetar med ett chassi eller nära strömförsörjningsenheter skall
                             du för växelströmsenheter dra ur nätsladden och för likströmsenheter bryta strömmen
                             vid överspänningsskyddet.



                             TN Power Warning


                             WARNING: The router is designed to work with TN power systems.

                             Waarschuwing Het apparaat is ontworpen om te functioneren met TN
                             energiesystemen.

                             Varoitus Koje on suunniteltu toimimaan TN-sähkövoimajärjestelmien yhteydessä.

                             Attention Ce dispositif a été conçu pour fonctionner avec des systèmes d'alimentation
                             TN.

                             Warnung Das Gerät ist für die Verwendung mit TN-Stromsystemen ausgelegt.

                             Avvertenza Il dispositivo è stato progettato per l'uso con sistemi di alimentazione
                             TN.

                             Advarsel Utstyret er utfomet til bruk med TN-strømsystemer.

                             Aviso O dispositivo foi criado para operar com sistemas de corrente TN.

                             ¡Atención! El equipo está diseñado para trabajar con sistemas de alimentación tipo
                             TN.

                             Varning! Enheten är konstruerad för användning tillsammans med elkraftssystem
                             av TN-typ.



                             Copper Conductors Warning


                             WARNING: Use copper conductors only.

                             Waarschuwing Gebruik alleen koperen geleiders.

                             Varoitus Käytä vain kuparijohtimia.

                             Attention Utilisez uniquement des conducteurs en cuivre.

                             Warnung Verwenden Sie ausschließlich Kupferleiter.

                             Avvertenza Usate unicamente dei conduttori di rame.

                             Advarsel Bruk bare kobberledninger.




274    ■    Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                                      Appendix A: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information




Aviso Utilize apenas fios condutores de cobre.

¡Atención! Emplee sólo conductores de cobre.

Varning! Använd endast ledare av koppar.



DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings

When working with DC-powered equipment, observe the following guidelines and
warnings:
■   DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 275
■   DC Power Disconnection Warning on page 276
■   DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning on page 277
■   DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning on page 278
■   DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning on page 279

DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines

The following electrical safety guidelines apply to a DC-powered TX Matrix platform:
■   A DC-powered TX Matrix platform is equipped with a DC terminal block that is
    rated for the power requirements of a maximally configured TX Matrix platform.
    To supply sufficient power, terminate the DC input wiring on a facility DC source
    capable of supplying at least 76 A @ –48 VDC. The 48 VDC facility DC source
    should be equipped with a circuit breaker rated at 100 A (–48 VDC) minimum.
    Incorporate an easily accessible disconnect device into the facility wiring. In the
    United States and Canada, the 48 VDC facility should be equipped with a circuit
    breaker rated 100 A (–48 VDC) or a minimum of 125% of the power provisioned
    for the input in accordance with the National Electrical Code in the US and the
    Canadian Electrical Code in Canada. Be sure to connect the ground wire or
    conduit to a solid office (earth) ground. A closed loop ring is recommended for
    terminating the ground conductor at the ground stud.
■   Run two wires from the circuit breaker box to a source of 48 VDC. Use appropriate
    gauge wire to handle up to 100 A.
■   A DC-powered TX Matrix platform that is equipped with a DC terminal block is
    intended only for installation in a restricted access location. In the United States,
    a restricted access area is one in accordance with Articles 110-16, 110-17, and
    110-18 of the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70.




                                                  Safety Guidelines and Warnings    ■    275
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             NOTE: Primary overcurrent protection is provided by the building circuit breaker.
                             This breaker should protect against excess currents, short circuits, and earth faults
                             in accordance with NEC ANSI/NFPA70.


                             ■      Ensure that the polarity of the DC input wiring is correct. Under certain conditions,
                                    connections with reversed polarity might trip the primary circuit breaker or
                                    damage the equipment.
                             ■      For personal safety, connect the green and yellow wire to safety (earth) ground
                                    at both the TX Matrix platform and the supply side of the DC wiring.
                             ■      The marked input voltage of –48 VDC for a DC-powered TX Matrix platform is
                                    the nominal voltage associated with the battery circuit, and any higher voltages
                                    are only to be associated with float voltages for the charging function.
                             ■      Because the TX Matrix platform is a positive ground system, you must connect
                                    the positive lead to the terminal labeled RTN, the negative lead to the terminal
                                    labeled –48V, and the earth ground to the chassis grounding points.


                             DC Power Disconnection Warning


                             WARNING: Before performing any of the following procedures, ensure that power
                             is removed from the DC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locate the circuit
                             breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to
                             the OFF position, and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position.

                             Waarschuwing Voordat u een van de onderstaande procedures uitvoert, dient u te
                             controleren of de stroom naar het gelijkstroom circuit uitgeschakeld is. Om u ervan
                             te verzekeren dat alle stroom UIT is geschakeld, kiest u op het schakelbord de
                             stroomverbreker die het gelijkstroom circuit bedient, draait de stroomverbreker naar
                             de UIT positie en plakt de schakelaarhendel van de stroomverbreker met plakband
                             in de UIT positie vast.

                             Varoitus Varmista, että tasavirtapiirissä ei ole virtaa ennen seuraavien toimenpiteiden
                             suorittamista. Varmistaaksesi, että virta on KATKAISTU täysin, paikanna tasavirrasta
                             huolehtivassa kojetaulussa sijaitseva suojakytkin, käännä suojakytkin
                             KATKAISTU-asentoon ja teippaa suojakytkimen varsi niin, että se pysyy
                             KATKAISTU-asennossa.

                             Attention Avant de pratiquer l'une quelconque des procédures ci-dessous, vérifier
                             que le circuit en courant continu n'est plus sous tension. Pour en être sûr, localiser
                             le disjoncteur situé sur le panneau de service du circuit en courant continu, placer
                             le disjoncteur en position fermée (OFF) et, à l'aide d'un ruban adhésif, bloquer la
                             poignée du disjoncteur en position OFF.

                             Warnung Vor Ausführung der folgenden Vorgänge ist sicherzustellen, daß die
                             Gleichstromschaltung keinen Strom erhält. Um sicherzustellen, daß sämtlicher Strom
                             abgestellt ist, machen Sie auf der Schalttafel den Unterbrecher für die
                             Gleichstromschaltung ausfindig, stellen Sie den Unterbrecher auf AUS, und kleben
                             Sie den Schaltergriff des Unterbrechers mit Klebeband in der AUS-Stellung fest.




276    ■    Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                                      Appendix A: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information




Avvertenza Prima di svolgere una qualsiasi delle procedure seguenti, verificare che
il circuito CC non sia alimentato. Per verificare che tutta l'alimentazione sia scollegata
(OFF), individuare l'interruttore automatico sul quadro strumenti che alimenta il
circuito CC, mettere l'interruttore in posizione OFF e fissarlo con nastro adesivo in
tale posizione.

Advarsel Før noen av disse prosedyrene utføres, kontroller at strømmen er frakoblet
likestrømkretsen. Sørg for at all strøm er slått AV. Dette gjøres ved å lokalisere
strømbryteren på brytertavlen som betjener likestrømkretsen, slå strømbryteren AV
og teipe bryterhåndtaket på strømbryteren i AV-stilling.

Aviso Antes de executar um dos seguintes procedimentos, certifique-se que desligou
a fonte de alimentação de energia do circuito de corrente contínua. Para se assegurar
que toda a corrente foi DESLIGADA, localize o disjuntor no painel que serve o circuito
de corrente contínua e coloque-o na posição OFF (Desligado), segurando nessa
posição a manivela do interruptor do disjuntor com fita isoladora.

¡Atención! Antes de proceder con los siguientes pasos, comprobar que la alimentación
del circuito de corriente continua (CC) esté cortada (OFF). Para asegurarse de que
toda la alimentación esté cortada (OFF), localizar el interruptor automático en el
panel que alimenta al circuito de corriente continua, cambiar el interruptor automático
a la posición de Apagado (OFF), y sujetar con cinta la palanca del interruptor
automático en posición de Apagado (OFF).

Varning! Innan du utför någon av följande procedurer måste du kontrollera att
strömförsörjningen till likströmskretsen är bruten. Kontrollera att all strömförsörjning
är BRUTEN genom att slå AV det överspänningsskydd som skyddar likströmskretsen
och tejpa fast överspänningsskyddets omkopplare i FRÅN-läget.



DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning

An insulated grounding conductor that is identical in size to the grounded and
ungrounded branch circuit supply conductors, but is identifiable by green and yellow
stripes, is installed as part of the branch circuit that supplies the unit. The grounding
conductor is a separately derived system at the supply transformer or motor generator
set.

For further information, see “Chassis Grounding” on page 291 and “DC Power Cable
Specifications” on page 290.


WARNING: When installing the router, the ground connection must always be made
first and disconnected last.

Waarschuwing Bij de installatie van het toestel moet de aardverbinding altijd het
eerste worden gemaakt en het laatste worden losgemaakt.

Varoitus Laitetta asennettaessa on maahan yhdistäminen aina tehtävä ensiksi ja
maadoituksen irti kytkeminen viimeiseksi.




                                                  Safety Guidelines and Warnings    ■    277
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Attention Lors de l'installation de l'appareil, la mise à la terre doit toujours être
                             connectée en premier et déconnectée en dernier.

                             Warnung Der Erdanschluß muß bei der Installation der Einheit immer zuerst
                             hergestellt und zuletzt abgetrennt werden.

                             Avvertenza In fase di installazione dell'unità, eseguire sempre per primo il
                             collegamento a massa e disconnetterlo per ultimo.

                             Advarsel Når enheten installeres, må jordledningen alltid tilkobles først og frakobles
                             sist.

                             Aviso Ao instalar a unidade, a ligação à terra deverá ser sempre a primeira a ser
                             ligada, e a última a ser desligada.

                             ¡Atención! Al instalar el equipo, conectar la tierra la primera y desconectarla la última.

                             Varning! Vid installation av enheten måste jordledningen alltid anslutas först och
                             kopplas bort sist.



                             DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning


                             WARNING: Wire the DC power supply using the appropriate lugs. When connecting
                             power, the proper wiring sequence is ground to ground, +RTN to +RTN, then -48 V
                             to -48 V. When disconnecting power, the proper wiring sequence is -48 V to -48 V,
                             +RTN to +RTN, then ground to ground. Note that the ground wire should always
                             be connected first and disconnected last.

                             Waarschuwing De juiste bedradingsvolgorde verbonden is aarde naar aarde, +RTN
                             naar +RTN, en –48 V naar – 48 V. De juiste bedradingsvolgorde losgemaakt is en
                             –48 V naar – 48 V, +RTN naar +RTN, aarde naar aarde.

                             Varoitus Oikea yhdistettava kytkentajarjestys on maajohto maajohtoon, +RTN varten
                             +RTN, –48 V varten – 48 V. Oikea irrotettava kytkentajarjestys on –48 V varten –
                             48 V, +RTN varten +RTN, maajohto maajohtoon.

                             Attention Câblez l'approvisionnement d'alimentation CC En utilisant les crochets
                             appropriés à l'extrémité de câblage. En reliant la puissance, l'ordre approprié de
                             câblage est rectifié pour rectifier, +RTN à +RTN, puis -48 V à -48 V. En débranchant
                             la puissance, l'ordre approprié de câblage est -48 V à -48 V, +RTN à +RTN, a alors
                             rectifié pour rectifier. Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours être relié d'abord et
                             débranché pour la dernière fois. Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours être relié
                             d'abord et débranché pour la dernière fois.

                             Warnung Verdrahten Sie die Gleichstrom-Versorgung mit den passenden Ansätzen
                             am Verdrahtung Ende. Wenn man Energie anschließt, wird die korrekte Verdrahtung.
                             Reihenfolge gerieben, um, +RTN zu +RTN, dann -48 V bis -48 V zu reiben. Wenn
                             sie Energie trennt, ist die korrekte Verdrahtung Reihenfolge -48 V bis -48 V,+RTN




278    ■    Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                                     Appendix A: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information




zu +RTN, rieb dann, um zu reiben. Beachten Sie, daß der Erdungsdraht immer zuerst
angeschlossen werden und zuletzt getrennt werden sollte.

Avvertenza Mostra la morsettiera dell alimentatore CC. Cablare l'alimentatore CC
usando i connettori adatti all'estremità del cablaggio, come illustrato. La corretta
sequenza di cablaggio è da massa a massa, da positivo a positivo (da linea ad L) e
da negativo a negativo (da neutro a N). Tenere presente che il filo di massa deve
sempre venire collegato per primo e scollegato per ultimo.

Advarsel Riktig tilkoples tilkoplingssekvens er jord til jord, +RTN til +RTN, –48 V
til – 48 V. Riktig frakoples tilkoplingssekvens er –48 V til – 48 V, +RTN til +RTN,
jord til jord.

Aviso Ate con alambre la fuente de potencia cc Usando los terminales apropiados
en el extremo del cableado. Al conectar potencia, la secuencia apropiada del cableado
se muele para moler, +RTN a +RTN, entonces -48 V a -48 V. Al desconectar potencia,
la secuencia apropiada del cableado es -48 V a -48 V, +RTN a +RTN, entonces molió
para moler. Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre primero y
desconectar por último. Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre
primero y desconectar por último.

¡Atención! Wire a fonte de alimentação de DC Usando os talões apropriados na
extremidade da fiação. Ao conectar a potência, a seqüência apropriada da fiação é
moída para moer, +RTN a +RTN, então -48 V a -48 V. Ao desconectar a potência,
a seqüência apropriada da fiação é -48 V a -48 V, +RTN a +RTN, moeu então para
moer. Anote que o fio à terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e
desconectado por último. Anote que o fio à terra deve sempre ser conectado
primeiramente e desconectado por último.

Varning! Korrekt kopplingssekvens ar jord till jord, +RTN till +RTN, –48 V till – 48
V. Korrekt kopplas kopplingssekvens ar –48 V till –48 V, +RTN till +RTN, jord till
jord.



DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning


WARNING: When stranded wiring is required, use approved wiring terminations,
such as closed-loop or spade-type with upturned lugs. These terminations should be
the appropriate size for the wires and should clamp both the insulation and conductor.

Waarschuwing Wanneer geslagen bedrading vereist is, dient u bedrading te gebruiken
die voorzien is van goedgekeurde aansluitingspunten, zoals het gesloten-lus type of
het grijperschop type waarbij de aansluitpunten omhoog wijzen. Deze aansluitpunten
dienen de juiste maat voor de draden te hebben en dienen zowel de isolatie als de
geleider vast te klemmen.

Varoitus Jos säikeellinen johdin on tarpeen, käytä hyväksyttyä johdinliitäntää,
esimerkiksi suljettua silmukkaa tai kourumaista liitäntää, jossa on ylöspäin käännetyt
kiinnityskorvat. Tällaisten liitäntöjen tulee olla kooltaan johtimiin sopivia ja niiden
tulee puristaa yhteen sekä eristeen että johdinosan.




                                                 Safety Guidelines and Warnings    ■    279
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Attention Quand des fils torsadés sont nécessaires, utiliser des douilles terminales
                             homologuées telles que celles à circuit fermé ou du type à plage ouverte avec cosses
                             rebroussées. Ces douilles terminales doivent être de la taille qui convient aux fils et
                             doivent être refermées sur la gaine isolante et sur le conducteur.

                             Warnung Wenn Litzenverdrahtung erforderlich ist, sind zugelassene
                             Verdrahtungsabschlüsse, z.B. für einen geschlossenen Regelkreis oder gabelförmig,
                             mit nach oben gerichteten Kabelschuhen zu verwenden. Diese Abschlüsse sollten
                             die angemessene Größe für die Drähte haben und sowohl die Isolierung als auch den
                             Leiter festklemmen.

                             Avvertenza Quando occorre usare trecce, usare connettori omologati, come quelli
                             a occhiello o a forcella con linguette rivolte verso l'alto. I connettori devono avere la
                             misura adatta per il cablaggio e devono serrare sia l'isolante che il conduttore.

                             Advarsel Hvis det er nødvendig med flertrådede ledninger, brukes godkjente
                             ledningsavslutninger, som for eksempel lukket sløyfe eller spadetype med
                             oppoverbøyde kabelsko. Disse avslutningene skal ha riktig størrelse i forhold til
                             ledningene, og skal klemme sammen både isolasjonen og lederen.

                             Aviso Quando forem requeridas montagens de instalação eléctrica de cabo torcido,
                             use terminações de cabo aprovadas, tais como, terminações de cabo em circuito
                             fechado e planas com terminais de orelha voltados para cima. Estas terminações de
                             cabo deverão ser do tamanho apropriado para os respectivos cabos, e deverão
                             prender simultaneamente o isolamento e o fio condutor.

                             ¡Atención! Cuando se necesite hilo trenzado, utilizar terminales para cables
                             homologados, tales como las de tipo "bucle cerrado" o "espada", con las lengüetas
                             de conexión vueltas hacia arriba. Estos terminales deberán ser del tamaño apropiado
                             para los cables que se utilicen, y tendrán que sujetar tanto el aislante como el
                             conductor.

                             Varning! När flertrådiga ledningar krävs måste godkända ledningskontakter användas,
                             t.ex. kabelsko av sluten eller öppen typ med uppåtvänd tapp. Storleken på dessa
                             kontakter måste vara avpassad till ledningarna och måste kunna hålla både isoleringen
                             och ledaren fastklämda.



                             Hazardous Radiation Exposure Warning


                             WARNING: Do not perform procedures that are not included in this document. Doing
                             so might expose you to hazardous radiation.

                             Waarschuwing Het gebruik van regelaars of bijstellingen of het uitvoeren van
                             procedures anders dan opgegeven kan leiden tot blootstelling aan gevaarlijke straling.

                             Varoitus Säätimien tai säätöjen käyttö ja toimenpiteiden suorittaminen ohjeista
                             poikkeavalla tavalla voi altistaa vaaralliselle säteilylle.




280    ■    Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                                                       Appendix A: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information




                   Attention L'utilisation de commandes, de réglages ou de procédures autres que ceux
                   spécifiés peut entraîner une exposition dangereuse à des radiations.

                   Warnung Die Verwendung von nicht spezifizierten Steuerelementen, Einstellungen
                   oder Verfahrensweisen kann eine gefährliche Strahlenexposition zur Folge haben.

                   Avvertenza L'adozione di controlli, regolazioni o procedure diverse da quelle
                   specificate può comportare il pericolo di esposizione a radiazioni.

                   Advarsel Bruk av kontroller eller justeringer eller utførelse av prosedyrer som ikke
                   er spesifiserte, kan resultere i farlig strålingseksponering.

                   Aviso O uso de controles, ajustes ou desempenho de procedimentos diferentes dos
                   especificados pode resultar em exposição prejudicial de radiação.

                   ¡Atención! La aplicación de controles, ajustes y procedimientos distintos a los
                   especificados puede comportar una exposición peligrosa a la radiación.

                   Varning! Om andra kontroller eller justeringar än de angivna används, eller om andra
                   processer än de angivna genomförs, kan skadlig strålning avges.



Agency Approvals
                   The TX Matrix platform complies with the following standards:
                   ■   Safety
                       ■   CAN/CSA-22.2 No. 60950-1-03/UL 60950-1, Safety of Information Technology
                           Equipment
                       ■   EN 60825-1 Safety of Laser Products - Part 1: Equipment Classification,
                           Requirements and User's Guide

                       ■   EN 60825-2 Safety of Laser Products - Part 2: Safety of Optical Fibre
                           Communication Systems

                       ■   EN 60950-1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment

                   ■   EMC
                       ■   AS/NZS 3548 Class A (Australia/New Zealand)
                       ■   EN55022 Class A (Europe)

                       ■   FCC Part 15 Class A (USA)

                       ■   VCCI Class A (Japan)

                   ■   BSMI Class A (Taiwan)
                   ■   Immunity




                                                                   Safety Guidelines and Warnings    ■    281
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                                    ■   EN-61000-3-2 Power Line Harmonics
                                    ■   EN-61000-3-3 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker

                                    ■   EN-61000-4-2 ESD

                                    ■   EN-61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity

                                    ■   EN-61000-4-4 EFT

                                    ■   EN-61000-4-5 Surge

                                    ■   EN-61000-4-6 Low Frequency Common Immunity

                                    ■   EN-61000-4-11 Voltage Dips and Sags

                             ■      ETSI
                                    ■   ETSI EN-300386-2 Telecommunication Network Equipment. Electromagnetic
                                        Compatibility Requirements

                             ■      NEBS
                                    ■   GR-63-Core: NEBS, Physical Protection
                                    ■   GR-1089-Core: EMC and Electrical Safety for Network Telecommunications
                                        Equipment

                                    ■   SR-3580 NEBS Criteria Levels (Level 3 Compliance)


Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements

                             Canada

                             This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

                             Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

                             European Community

                             This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
                             interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.




282    ■    Safety Guidelines and Warnings
                                     Appendix A: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information




Declaration of Conformity




Japan




Translation:

This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
VCCI-A

United States

The TX Matrix platform has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment




                                                 Safety Guidelines and Warnings    ■    283
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
                             radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
                             instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
                             Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference
                             in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Compliance Statements for Environmental Requirements

                             Lithium Battery

                             Batteries in this product are not based on mercury, lead, or cadmium substances.
                             The batteries used in this product are in compliance with EU Directives 91/157/EEC,
                             93/86/EEC, and 98/101/EEC. The product documentation includes instructional
                             information about the proper method of reclamation and recycling.

Compliance Statements for Acoustic Noise
                             Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung - 3. GPSGV, der höchste Schalldruckpegel
                             beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gemäss EN ISO 7779

                             Translation:

                             The emitted sound pressure is below 70 dB(A) per EN ISO 7779




284    ■    Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Appendix B
Environmental Specifications

                 ■      TX Matrix Platform Environmental Specifications on page 285


TX Matrix Platform Environmental Specifications
                 Table 31 on page 285 specifies the environmental specifications required for normal
                 TX Matrix platform operation. In addition, the site should be as dust-free as possible.
                 Dust can clog air intake vents, reducing cooling system efficiency. Check the vents
                 frequently, cleaning them as necessary. For more information, see “Hardware
                 Maintenance Overview” on page 171.

                 Table 31: TX Matrix Platform Environmental Specifications

                     Description              Value

                     Altitude                 No performance degradation to 10,000 ft (3048 m)

                     Relative humidity        Normal operation ensured in relative humidity range of 5% to
                                              90%, noncondensing

                     Temperature              Normal operation ensured in temperature range of 32°F (0°C) to
                                              104°F (40°C)

                                              Nonoperating storage temperature in shipping crate: –40°F (–40°C)
                                              to 158°F (70°C)

                     Seismic                  Tested to meet Telcordia Technologies Zone 4 earthquake
                                              requirements

                     Maximum thermal output   15,559 BTU/hour (4560 W)




                 NOTE: Install the TX Matrix platform only in restricted areas, such as dedicated
                 equipment rooms and equipment closets, in accordance with Articles 110-16, 110-17,
                 and 110-18 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70.

                 For additional safety guidelines and requirements, see “Safety and Regulatory
                 Compliance Information” on page 249.




                                                      TX Matrix Platform Environmental Specifications   ■    285
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




286    ■    TX Matrix Platform Environmental Specifications
Appendix C
Power Requirements, Guidelines, and
Specifications

                 For site wiring and power system guidelines, requirements, and specifications, see
                 the following sections:
                 ■      Power System Specifications on page 287
                 ■      Power Supply Electrical Specifications on page 288
                 ■      TX Matrix Platform Power Requirements on page 288
                 ■      Calculating Power Consumption on page 289
                 ■      DC Power Cable Specifications on page 290
                 ■      Chassis Grounding on page 291
                 ■      Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines on page 292

                 For a description of the DC power supply, including its components, see “Power
                 Supplies” on page 29. For instructions on connecting the DC power and grounding
                 cables during initial installation, see “Connecting Power to the TX Matrix
                 Platform” on page 112. For instructions on replacing a DC power cable, see “Replacing
                 a Power Supply Cable” on page 243.


Power System Specifications
                 Table 32 on page 287 lists the power system electrical specifications.

                 Table 32: Power System Electrical Specifications

                     Item                       Specification

                     DC input voltage           Operating range: –40.5 to –72 VDC

                                                NOTE: If the input voltage from the DC power source drops below
                                                –40.5 VDC, the routing platform automatically shuts down. During
                                                automatic shutdown, the circuit remains active. When the input
                                                voltage returns to –42.75 VDC, the router automatically starts up
                                                again and the system returns to normal operation within 30
                                                minutes. No operator intervention is required.

                     DC system current rating   95 A @ –48 VDC (nominal)




                                                                          Power System Specifications   ■    287
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             NOTE: If you plan to operate a DC-powered TX Matrix platform at less than the
                             maximum configuration and do not provision an 100 A (–48 VDC) circuit breaker,
                             we recommend that you provision a circuit breaker for each DC power supply input
                             rated for at least 125 percent of the continuous current that the system draws at
                             –48 VDC.



Power Supply Electrical Specifications
                             Table 33 on page 288 lists the power supply electrical specifications.

Table 33: Power Supply Electrical Specifications

 Item                                                   Specification

 Maximum input power                                    4560 W

 DC input voltage                                       Nominal –48, –60 VDC
                                                        Operating range: –40.5 to –72 VDC

                                                        NOTE: If the input voltage from the DC power source drops below
                                                        –40.5 VDC, the routing platform automatically shuts down. During
                                                        automatic shutdown, the circuit remains active. When the input voltage
                                                        returns to –42.75 VDC, the router automatically starts up again and
                                                        the system returns to normal operation within 30 minutes. No operator
                                                        intervention is required.

 Input DC current rating                                68 A @ –48 VDC (nominal) for each input



TX Matrix Platform Power Requirements
                             Table 34 on page 288 lists the system current requirements for various hardware
                             components when the TX Matrix platform is operating under typical voltage
                             conditions.

                             Table 34: Component Power Requirements

                                                                                                   System Current
                                                                                                   Requirement (Amps @
                               Component                                                           –48 VDC)

                               Base system (includes five TX-SIBs, one host subsystem, two         59.4 A
                               TX-CIPs, two power supplies, cooling system, and craft interface)

                               TX-SIB                                                              10 A

                               Host subsystem (Routing Engine and TX-CB)                           2.6 A

                               TX-CIP                                                              0.1 A

                               Power supply                                                        1.7 A




288     ■   Power Supply Electrical Specifications
                                                     Appendix C: Power Requirements, Guidelines, and Specifications




                 Table 34: Component Power Requirements (continued)

                                                                                       System Current
                                                                                       Requirement (Amps @
                     Component                                                         –48 VDC)

                     Cooling system (normal speed)                                     6.7 A

                     Cooling system (full speed)                                       22 A



Calculating Power Consumption
                 You can use the information in Table 34 on page 288 to calculate power consumption
                 for various hardware configurations, input current from a different source voltage,
                 and thermal output, as shown in the following examples.
                 ■      Power consumption for minimum configuration:

                          Base System =
                          59.4 A @ –48 VDC = 2851 W

                 ■      Power consumption for maximum configuration:

                          Base System + 1 Host =
                          59.4 A + 2.6 A = 62 A @ –48 VDC = 2976 W


                 NOTE: The power system rating is 4560 W.


                 ■      Current requirement adjustment for fans running at full speed (high temperature
                        environment or cooling component failure):

                          Calculated system current (X) – Cooling (normal) + Cooling (full speed) =
                          X A – 6.7 A + 22 A = X A + 15.3 A

                 ■      Low line maximum input current for maximum configuration (see
                        Figure 14 on page 29):

                          Input 0 of PEM (lower input): 60 A @ –42 VDC (with fans running at high speed)
                          Input 1 of PEM (upper input): 37.5 A @ –42 VDC

                 ■      Input current from a DC source other than –48 VDC (based on maximum
                        configuration):

                          (–54 VDC input) x (input current X) = (–48 VDC) x (input current Y)
                          54 x X = 48 x 62 A
                          X = 48 x 62 A/54 = 55 A

                 ■      System thermal output for maximally configured TX Matrix platform:

                          Watts DC/0.293 = BTU/hr
                          2976 W/0.293 = 10,157 BTU/hr




                                                                        Calculating Power Consumption    ■    289
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




DC Power Cable Specifications
                             Most sites distribute DC power through a main conduit that leads to frame-mounted
                             DC power distribution panels, one of which might be located at the top of the rack
                             that houses the TX Matrix platform. A pair of cables (one input and one return)
                             connects each set of terminal studs to the power distribution panel.

                             The accessory box shipped with the TX Matrix platform includes the cable lugs that
                             attach to the terminal studs of each power supply (see Figure 110 on page 292). (The
                             cable lug shown in Figure 110 on page 292 is also used for the grounding the chassis.)


                             CAUTION: Before TX Matrix platform installation begins, a licensed electrician must
                             attach a cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply. A cable with
                             an incorrectly attached lug can damage the TX Matrix platform.


                             Table 35 on page 290 summarizes the specifications for the power cables, which you
                             must supply.

                             Table 35: Power and Grounding Cable Specifications

                              Cable Type       Quantity and Specification             Connector Specification

                              Power            Eight 4-AWG (21.2 mm2 ) (minimum)      Cable lug; dual hole, sized to fit
                                               copper conductor, or as permitted by   1/4-20 UNC terminal studs at
                                               the local code.                        15.86-mm (0.625-in.) center line.




                             CAUTION: You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity.
                             The power source cables might be labeled (+) and (–) to indicate their polarity. There
                             is no standard color coding for DC power cables. The color coding used by the external
                             DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power
                             cables that attach to the terminal studs on each power supply.


                             Figure 109 on page 291 shows a typical DC source cabling arrangement.




290    ■    DC Power Cable Specifications
                                                   Appendix C: Power Requirements, Guidelines, and Specifications




                    Figure 109: Typical DC Source Cabling to the TX Matrix Platform




                    WARNING: For field-wiring connections, use copper conductors only.

                    For other electrical safety information, see “Electrical Safety Guidelines and
                    Warnings” on page 270.




                    CAUTION: Power cords and cables must not block access to TX Matrix platform
                    components or drape where people could trip on them.



Chassis Grounding
                    To meet safety and electromagnetic interference (EMI) requirements and to ensure
                    proper operation, the TX Matrix platform must be adequately grounded before power
                    is connected. Two pairs of threaded inserts (PEM nuts) are provided on the right rear
                    of the chassis for connecting the TX Matrix platform to earth ground.


                    CAUTION: Before TX Matrix platform installation begins, a licensed electrician must
                    attach a cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply. A cable with
                    an incorrectly attached lug can damage the TX Matrix platform (for example, by
                    causing a short circuit).


                    To ground the TX Matrix platform, connect a grounding cable to earth ground and
                    then attach it to the chassis grounding points using two screws. The left pair of
                    grounding points fits M6 screws (European), and the right pair fits UNC 1/4–20 screws
                    (American). The grounding points are spaced at 0.625-in. (15.86-mm) centers. The
                    accessory box shipped with the TX Matrix platform includes the cable lug that attaches
                    to the grounding cable (see Figure 110 on page 292) and two UNC 1/4–20 screws
                    used to secure the grounding cable to the right pair of grounding points. (The cable




                                                                                  Chassis Grounding    ■    291
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                              lug shown in Figure 110 on page 292 is also used for the DC power cables.) The
                              grounding cable must be able to handle up to 63 A. The accessory box shipped with
                              the TX Matrix platform includes the cable lug that attaches to the grounding cable
                              (see Figure 110 on page 292).

                              Figure 110: Grounding Cable Lug




                              The grounding cable must meet the requirements in Table 36 on page 292.

                              Table 36: Grounding Cable Specifications

                                Cable Type      Quantity and Specification             Connector Specification

                                Grounding       One 8-AWG (8.35 mm2 ) (minimum)        Cable lug; dual hole.
                                                copper conductor, or as permitted by
                                                the local code.                        Left pair: sized to fit M6 grounding
                                                                                       studs.

                                                                                       Right pair: sized to fit 1/4-20 UNC
                                                                                       grounding studs.



Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines
                              When planning the electrical wiring at your site, consider the factors discussed in
                              the following sections.

Distance Limitations for Signaling
                              Improperly installed wires can emit radio interference. In addition, the potential for
                              damage from lightning strikes increases if wires exceed recommended distances, or
                              if wires pass between buildings. The electromagnetic pulse (EMP) caused by lightning
                              can damage unshielded conductors and destroy electronic devices. If your site has
                              previously experienced such problems, you might want to consult experts in electrical
                              surge suppression and shielding.

Radio Frequency Interference
                              You can reduce or eliminate the emission of radio frequency interference (RFI) from
                              your site wiring by using twisted-pair cable with a good distribution of grounding
                              conductors. If you must exceed the recommended distances, use a high-quality
                              twisted-pair cable with one ground conductor for each data signal when applicable.




292    ■    Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines
                                                   Appendix C: Power Requirements, Guidelines, and Specifications




Electromagnetic Compatibility
                   If your site is susceptible to problems with electromagnetic compatibility (EMC),
                   particularly from lightning or radio transmitters, you might want to seek expert
                   advice. Strong sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI) can destroy the signal
                   drivers and receivers in the TX Matrix platform and conduct power surges over the
                   lines into the equipment, resulting in an electrical hazard. It is particularly important
                   to provide a properly grounded and shielded environment and to use electrical
                   surge-suppression devices.


                   CAUTION: To comply with intrabuilding lightning/surge requirements, intrabuilding
                   wiring must be shielded, and the shield for the wiring must be grounded at both
                   ends.




                                                                     Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines   ■   293
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




294    ■    Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines
Appendix D
Cable Specifications

                   ■   Cabling Preparations and Considerations on page 295


Cabling Preparations and Considerations
                   This section covers the following topics:
                   ■   Control Plane Connections and Considerations on page 295
                   ■   Fiber-Optic Array Cable Connections and Considerations on page 295
                   ■   Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications on page 297

Control Plane Connections and Considerations
                   The control plane connections between the T640 routing nodes and the TX Matrix
                   platform are provided by UTP Category 5 Ethernet cables between the RJ-45 ports
                   on the TX-CIPs in the TX Matrix platform and the T-CBs in the T640 routing nodes.
                   The maximum length supported is 100 m. The UTP Category 5 cables do not have
                   to be the same length. The cable wiring is straight-through (not crossover).

                   For more information on connecting the control planes, see “Control Plane
                   Connections” on page 136.


                   NOTE: For troubleshooting only, you can access a T640 routing node by connecting
                   a T640-CIP to an external management device (for more information, see
                   “Troubleshooting Hardware Components” on page 185). However, you manage the
                   routing matrix through external management devices connected to the TX-CIPs on
                   the TX Matrix platform.



Fiber-Optic Array Cable Connections and Considerations
                   The fiber-optic array cables connect the switching planes of the T640 routing nodes
                   to the TX Matrix platform by connecting the T640-SIBs to the TX-SIBs (for more
                   information, see “Connecting an Offline T640 Routing Node to the TX Matrix
                   Platform” on page 147 or “Converting and Connecting the Switching
                   Planes” on page 158). When planning your installation site, consider the following
                   fiber-optic array cable requirements:




                                                           Cabling Preparations and Considerations   ■   295
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             ■      You must use the same length for every fiber-optic array cable from a particular
                                    T640 routing node to the TX Matrix platform. However, you do not need to use
                                    the same length for all fiber-optic array cables within a routing matrix. For
                                    example, if your routing matrix contains two T640 routing nodes, you can use
                                    6-meter fiber-optic array cables to one routing node and 100-meter fiber-optic
                                    array cables to the other routing node.
                             ■      You must maintain a minimum bend radius of 2 in. (5.1 cm). We recommend
                                    you maintain a bend radius of 10 in. (25.4 cm). If you must bend a fiber-optic
                                    array cable to a 2-inch radius, we recommend you do not use more than two
                                    such bends.
                             ■      Plastic wrap-ties can damage or crimp the fiber-optic array cables (see
                                    Figure 111 on page 296). We recommend you use soft band straps to secure
                                    fiber-optic array cable.

                             Figure 111: Using Soft Band Straps to Secure Fiber-Optic Array Cables




                             ■      The fiber-optic array cable connectors must fit through your site's cable conduits.
                                    For the connector dimensions, see Figure 112 on page 297.

                             In addition, consider the following when planning your installation site:
                             ■      Make sure any existing T640 routing nodes are close enough to the location of
                                    the TX Matrix platform, particularly in a distributed configuration. Consider the
                                    length of the longest fiber-optic array cables (100 meters), along with their routing
                                    through overhead raceways and mounting racks.
                             ■      When you plug a fiber-optic array cable into a T640-SIB, the cable extends toward
                                    the left side of the T640 routing node (as viewed from the rear of the chassis)
                                    due to the horizontal orientation of the connectors (see Figure 19 on page 35).
                                    To facilitate the fiber-optic array cable routing, particularly in a centralized
                                    configuration, we recommend you install the TX Matrix platform to the right of
                                    the T640 routing nodes (as viewed from the front of the chassis). This chassis
                                    placement might allow you to use shorter fiber-optic array cables—such as 4 m
                                    or 5 m—and helps you manage the bend radius of the cable. Figure 27 on page
                                    67 shows the recommended centralized configuration.
                             ■      Plan the management of the fiber-optic array cables between the T640 routing
                                    nodes and the TX Matrix platform, keeping in mind the following considerations:




296    ■    Cabling Preparations and Considerations
                                                                                Appendix D: Cable Specifications




                       ■   With four T640 routing nodes, you can have a total of 20 fiber-optic array
                           cables in a routing matrix.


                   NOTE: We recommend you purchase one additional fiber-optic array cable for each
                   T640 routing node in the TX Matrix platform in case one of the cables becomes
                   damaged. We recommend you route the spare cables when you route the main
                   cables, particularly in a distributed configuration.


                       ■   The fiber-optic array cables must not interfere with TX Matrix platform and
                           T640 routing node airflow and maintenance access. For an illustration of
                           the TX Matrix platform airflow, see Figure 15 on page 31.

                       ■   The fiber-optic array cable weighs 0.22 lb (0.10 kg) per meter and each cable
                           connector weighs 0.5 lb (0.23 kg).

                       ■   With four T640 routing nodes, you can have a total of 128 PICs in a routing
                           matrix, and each PIC can contain up to 10 cables (for example, the 10-port
                           Gigabit Ethernet PIC), for a total of 1,280 cables. Consider PIC cabling as
                           part of your overall cable management planning. For more information about
                           PICs and their cables, see the T640 Internet Routing Node Hardware Guide
                           and the T640 PIC Guide.


                   Figure 112: Fiber-Optic Array Cable




Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications
                   For management and service operations, you connect the Routing Engine to an
                   external console or management network through ports on the corresponding TX-CIP.
                   You can also connect the TX Matrix platform to external alarm-reporting devices
                   through the alarm relay contacts on the TX-CIP. (For more information, see “Craft
                   Interface” on page 23.)

                   Table 37 on page 298 lists the specifications for the cables that connect to management
                   ports and the wires that connect to the alarm relay contacts.




                                                            Cabling Preparations and Considerations   ■    297
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Table 37: Cable and Wire Specifications for Routing Engine Management and Alarm
                             Interfaces

                                                                                                         TX Matrix
                                                  Cable              Cable/Wire         Maximum          Platform
                              Port                Specification      Supplied           Length           Receptacle

                              Routing Engine      RS-232 (EIA-232)   One 6-ft           6 ft (1.83 m)    DB-9 male
                              console or          serial cable       (1.83-m) length
                              auxiliary                              with DB-9/DB-9
                              interface                              connectors

                              Routing Engine      Category 5 cable   One 15-ft          328 ft (100 m)   RJ-45
                              Ethernet            or equivalent      (4.57-m) length                     autosensing
                              interface           suitable for       with RJ-45/RJ-45
                                                  100Base-T          connectors
                                                  operation

                              Alarm relay         Wire with gauge    No                 None             —
                              contacts            between
                                                  28-AWG and
                                                  14-AWG (0.08
                                                  and 2.08 mm2)




298    ■    Cabling Preparations and Considerations
Appendix E
Contacting Customer Support and
Returning Hardware

                This appendix describes how to return the TX Matrix platform or individual
                components to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement:
                ■   Locating Component Serial Numbers on page 299
                ■   Contacting Customer Support on page 305
                ■   Return Procedure on page 305
                ■   Tools and Parts Required on page 306
                ■   Packing the TX Matrix Platform for Shipment on page 307
                ■   Packing Components for Shipment on page 308


Locating Component Serial Numbers
                Before contacting Juniper Networks, Inc. to request a Return Materials Authorization
                (RMA), you must find the serial number on the TX Matrix platform or component.
                To list all of the TX Matrix platform components and their serial numbers, enter the
                following command-line interface (CLI) command:

                user@host> show chassis hardware scc
                scc-re0:
                --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                Hardware inventory:
                Item             Version Part number Serial number       Description
                Chassis                                                  TX Matrix
                Midplane         REV 04   710-004396   RB0011            SCC Midplane
                FPM GBUS         REV 04   710-004617   HN6536            SCC FPM Board
                FPM Display      REV 03   710-004619   HR0810            SCC FPM
                CIP 0            REV 01   710-010218   HS5727            SCC CIP
                CIP 1            REV 01   710-010218   HS5736            SCC CIP
                PEM 0            Rev 01   740-002595   MF16627           Power Entry Module
                PEM 1            Rev 01   740-002595   MF16628           Power Entry Module
                Routing Engine 0 REV 01   740-008883   212058900123      RE-4.0 (RE-1600)
                Routing Engine 1 REV 01   740-008883   212047100123      RE-4.0 (RE-1600)
                CB 0             REV 01   710-011709   HS0659            Control Board (CB-TX)
                CB 1             REV 01   710-011709   HR5963            Control Board (CB-TX)
                SPMB 0           REV 09   710-003229   HW5232            T-series Switch CPU
                SPMB 1           REV 09   710-003229   HW5239            T-series Switch CPU
                SIB 0            REV 01   710-005839   HR5304            SIB-S8-F16




                                                           Locating Component Serial Numbers   ■   299
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                               B    Board        REV   01   710-005840   HR5305          SIB-S8-F16   (B)
                             SIB    1            REV   01   710-005839   HR5306          SIB-S8-F16
                               B    Board        REV   01   710-005840   HR5307          SIB-S8-F16   (B)
                             SIB    2            REV   01   710-005839   HR5308          SIB-S8-F16
                               B    Board        REV   01   710-005840   HR5309          SIB-S8-F16   (B)
                             SIB    3            REV   01   710-005839   HR5310          SIB-S8-F16
                               B    Board        REV   01   710-005840   HR5311          SIB-S8-F16   (B)
                             SIB    4            REV   01   710-005839   HR5312          SIB-S8-F16
                               B    Board        REV   01   710-005840   HR5313          SIB-S8-F16   (B)

                             Most components also have a small rectangular serial number ID label (see
                             Figure 113 on page 300) attached to the component body.

                             Figure 113: Serial Number ID Label




                             The following sections describe the label location on each type of component:
                             ■      TX Matrix Chassis Serial Number Label on page 300
                             ■      TX-CB Serial Number Label on page 301
                             ■      TX-CIP Serial Number Label on page 301
                             ■      Craft Interface Serial Number Label on page 302
                             ■      Power Supply Serial Number Label on page 303
                             ■      Routing Engine Serial Number Label on page 303
                             ■      TX-SIB Serial Number Label on page 304

TX Matrix Chassis Serial Number Label
                             The chassis serial number is located on the side of the chassis (see
                             Figure 114 on page 301).




300    ■    Locating Component Serial Numbers
                                                 Appendix E: Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware




                   Figure 114: TX Matrix Chassis Serial Number Label




TX-CB Serial Number Label
                   The serial number is located on the top of the TX-CB (see Figure 115 on page 301).

                   Figure 115: TX-CB Serial Number Label




TX-CIP Serial Number Label
                   The serial number label is located at the top of the left side of the TX-CIP (see
                   Figure 116 on page 302).




                                                                Locating Component Serial Numbers    ■    301
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 116: TX-CIP Serial Number Label




Craft Interface Serial Number Label
                             The serial number is located on the back of the craft interface panel, behind the
                             alarm LEDs (see Figure 117 on page 302).

                             Figure 117: Craft Interface Serial Number Label




302    ■    Locating Component Serial Numbers
                                                 Appendix E: Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware




Power Supply Serial Number Label
                   The serial number label is located on the left side of the power supply faceplate (see
                   Figure 118 on page 303).

                   Figure 118: Power Supply Serial Number Label




Routing Engine Serial Number Label
                   The serial number label is located on the left side of the top of the Routing Engine
                   (see Figure 119 on page 304).




                                                                Locating Component Serial Numbers    ■    303
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             Figure 119: Routing Engine Serial Number Label




TX-SIB Serial Number Label
                             The serial number label is located on the top of the right side of the TX-SIB (see
                             Figure 120 on page 304).

                             Figure 120: TX-SIB Serial Number Label




304    ■    Locating Component Serial Numbers
                                                  Appendix E: Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware




Contacting Customer Support
                   You can contact Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) 24 hours a
                   day, seven days a week in one of the following ways:
                   ■   On the Web, using the Case Manager link at:

                       http://www.juniper.net/support/

                   ■   By telephone:

                       From the US and Canada: 1-888-314-JTAC

                       From all other locations: 1-408-745-9500

                       If contacting JTAC by phone, enter your 11-digit case number followed by the #
                       key if this is an existing case, or press the * key to be routed to the next available
                       support engineer.


Information You Might Need to Supply to JTAC
                   When requesting support from JTAC by telephone, be prepared to provide the
                   following information:
                   ■   Your existing case number, if you have one
                   ■   Details of the failure or problem
                   ■   Type of activity being performed on the TX Matrix platform when the problem
                       occurred
                   ■   Configuration data using one or more of the show commands


Return Procedure
                   If the problem cannot be resolved by the JTAC technician, an RMA is issued. This
                   number is used to track the returned material at the factory and to return repaired
                   or new components to the customer as needed.


                   NOTE: Do not return any component to Juniper Networks, Inc. unless you have first
                   obtained an RMA number. Juniper Networks, Inc. reserves the right to refuse
                   shipments that do not have an RMA. Refused shipments will be returned to the
                   customer via collect freight.


                   For more information about return and repair policies, see the customer support
                   Web page at http://www.juniper.net/support/guidelines.html.

                   For product problems or technical support issues, contact the Juniper Networks
                   Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) using the Case Manager link at
                   http://www.juniper.net/support/, or at 1-888-314-JTAC (within the United States) or
                   1-408-745-9500 (from outside the United States).




                                                                        Contacting Customer Support   ■    305
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             When you need to return a component, follow this procedure:
                             1.     Determine the part number and serial number of the component. For instructions,
                                    see “Locating Component Serial Numbers” on page 299.
                             2.     Obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number from the Juniper Networks
                                    Technical Assistance Center (JTAC). You can send e-mail or telephone as described
                                    above.
                             3.     Provide the following information in your e-mail message or during the telephone
                                    call:
                                    ■   Part number and serial number of component
                                    ■   Your name, organization name, telephone number, and fax number

                                    ■   Description of the failure

                             4.     The support representative validates your request and issues an RMA number
                                    for return of the component.
                             5.     Pack the TX Matrix platform or component for shipment, as described “Packing
                                    the TX Matrix Platform for Shipment” on page 307 or “Packing Components for
                                    Shipment” on page 308.


Tools and Parts Required
                             To remove components from the TX Matrix platform or the TX Matrix platform from
                             a rack, you need the following tools and parts:
                             ■      2.5-mm flat-blade (–) screwdriver, for detaching alarm relay terminal block
                             ■      3/8-in. nut driver
                             ■      7/16-in. nut driver
                             ■      Blank panels to cover empty slots
                             ■      Electrostatic bag or antistatic mat, for each component
                             ■      Electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding wrist strap
                             ■      Flat-blade (–) screwdriver, number 1, for detaching fiber-optic array cable
                                    connectors
                             ■      Mechanical lift, if available
                             ■      Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 and 2
                             ■      Dust covers for fiber-optic array cables
                             ■      Wire cutters




306    ■    Tools and Parts Required
                                                Appendix E: Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware




Packing the TX Matrix Platform for Shipment
                 To pack the TX Matrix platform for shipment, follow this procedure:
                 1.   Retrieve the shipping crate and packing materials in which the TX Matrix platform
                      was originally shipped. If you do not have these materials, contact your Juniper
                      Networks representative about approved packaging materials.
                 2.   Attach an electrostatic discharge (ESD) grounding strap to your bare wrist and
                      connect the strap to one of the ESD points on the chassis. For more information
                      about ESD, see “Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage” on page 254.
                 3.   On the console or other management device connected to the master Routing
                      Engine, enter CLI operational mode and issue the following command to shut
                      down the TX Matrix platform software. (If two Routing Engines are installed,
                      also issue the command on the backup Routing Engine.)

                          user@host> request system halt scc




                 NOTE: The request system halt scc command halts all Routing Engines on the control
                 plane from which it was issued. To reboot a Routing Engine that has been halted,
                 you must connect through the console. For more information about system
                 commands, see the JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference.


                      Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system
                      has halted.

                      For more information about the command, see the JUNOS System Basics and
                      Services Command Reference.


                 NOTE: The TX-SIBs might continue forwarding traffic for approximately five minutes
                 after the request system halt command has been issued.


                 4.   Shut down power to the TX Matrix platform by pressing the power switch for all
                      power supplies to the off (O) position.
                 5.   Disconnect power from the TX Matrix platform. For instructions, see “Replacing
                      a Power Supply Cable” on page 243.
                 6.   Remove the cables that connect to all external devices. For instructions, see
                      “Replacing Connections to TX-CIP Ports” on page 202 and “Replacing a TX-SIB
                      and Its Cables” on page 226.
                 7.   Remove all Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) from the TX Matrix platform.
                 8.   Remove the TX Matrix platform from the rack:
                      ■   If you are using a mechanical lift, place the lift platform under the TX Matrix
                          platform, unscrew and remove the mounting screws from the rack, and
                          move the TX Matrix platform to the shipping crate.




                                                        Packing the TX Matrix Platform for Shipment   ■   307
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                                    ■   If you are not using a mechanical lift and the TX Matrix platform weight is
                                        fully supported by a shelf or another TX Matrix platform, unscrew and remove
                                        the mounting screws from the rack. Four people can then lift the TX Matrix
                                        platform and move it to the shipping crate.

                                    ■   If you are not using a mechanical lift and the TX Matrix platform weight is
                                        not fully supported by a shelf, four people should grasp the TX Matrix
                                        platform while a fifth person unscrews and removes the mounting screws
                                        from the rack. The four lifters can then move the TX Matrix platform to the
                                        shipping crate.

                             9.     Place the TX Matrix platform in the shipping crate or onto the pallet. If on a
                                    pallet, bolt the TX Matrix platform to the pallet.
                             10. Cover the TX Matrix platform with an ESD bag and place the packing foam on
                                    top of and around the TX Matrix platform.
                             11. Replace the accessory box on top of the packing foam.
                             12. Securely tape the box closed or place the crate cover over the TX Matrix platform.
                             13. Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking.



Packing Components for Shipment
                             To pack and ship individual components, follow these guidelines:
                             ■      When you return components, make sure they are adequately protected with
                                    packing materials and packed so that the pieces are prevented from moving
                                    around inside the carton.
                             ■      Use the original shipping materials if they are available.
                             ■      Place individual boards in electrostatic bags.
                             ■      Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking.



                             CAUTION: Do not stack any of the TX Matrix platform components.




308    ■    Packing Components for Shipment
Appendix F
Cable Connector Pinouts

                 This appendix describes the pinouts for the following cable connectors:
                 ■       RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine ETHERNET Port on page 309
                 ■       DB-9 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine AUXILIARY and CONSOLE
                         Ports on page 309


RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine ETHERNET Port

                 The port on the TX-CIP labeled ETHERNET is an autosensing 10/100-Mbps Ethernet
                 RJ-45 receptacle that accepts an Ethernet cable for connecting the Routing Engine
                 to a management LAN (or other device that supports out-of-band management). For
                 more information, see “Routing Engine Ports” on page 28. Table 38 on page 309
                 describes the RJ-45 connector pinout.

                 Table 38: RJ-45 Connector Pinout

                     Pin             Signal

                     1               TX+

                     2               TX –

                     3               RX+

                     4               Termination network

                     5               Termination network

                     6               RX–

                     7               Termination network

                     8               Termination network



DB-9 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine AUXILIARY and CONSOLE Ports

                 The ports on the TX-CIP labeled AUXILIARY and CONSOLE are DB-9 receptacles that
                 accept RS-232 (EIA-232) cable. The AUXILIARY port connects the Routing Engine to
                 a laptop, modem, or other auxiliary unit, and the CONSOLE port connects it to a




                                        RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine ETHERNET Port   ■   309
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




                             management console. The ports are configured as data terminal equipment (DTE).
                             For more information, see “Routing Engine Ports” on page 28. Table 39 on page 310
                             describes the DB-9 connector pinouts.

                             Table 39: DB-9 Connector Pinout

                              Pin                Signal             Direction           Description

                              1                  DCD                <–                  Carrier Detect

                              2                  RxD                <–                  Receive Data

                              3                  TxD                –>                  Transmit Data

                              4                  DTR                –>                  Data Terminal Ready

                              5                  Ground             —                   Signal Ground

                              6                  DSR                <–                  Data Set Ready

                              7                  RTS                –>                  Request To Send

                              8                  CTS                <–                  Clear To Send

                              9                  RING               <–                  Ring Indicator




310    ■    DB-9 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine AUXILIARY and CONSOLE Ports
Part 5
Index
         ■   Index on page 313




                                 Index   ■   311
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




312    ■    Index
Index
                                                                                          Switch Interface ASIC............................................59
                                                                                          T-series Internet Processor....................................59
Symbols                                                                              auxiliary port...............................................................28
#, comments in configuration statements.................xxiii                        auxiliary port (for Routing Engine management)
( ), in syntax descriptions..........................................xxiii                cable
< >, in syntax descriptions......................................xxiii                         connection during initial installation............121
[ ], in configuration statements.................................xxiii                         connector pinouts (DB-9).............................309
{ }, in configuration statements................................xxiii                          replacement instructions.............................204
| (pipe), in syntax descriptions..................................xxiii                        specifications...............................................297


A                                                                                    B
accessory box                                                                        battery
      parts list................................................................75        environmental compliance.................................284
      removing..............................................................74            lithium................................................................284
agency approvals.......................................................281           booting the TX Matrix platform..................................123
air filter                                                                           braces, in configuration statements...........................xxiii
      routine inspection of...........................................171            brackets
air filters                                                                               angle, in syntax descriptions..............................xxiii
      maintaining........................................................172              square, in configuration statements...................xxiii
      replacing.............................................................210
airflow
      required clearance around chassis for...................71                     C
alarms                                                                               cable
      cutoff/lamp test button..........................................23                auxiliary or console port (for Routing Engine
      handling by Routing Engine..................................54                        management)
      LEDs (red and yellow) on craft interface...............23                                connecting during initial installation............121
      messages, list of..................................................187                   replacing......................................................204
      mode for LED display...........................................25                  DB-9 serial............................................................31
      relay contacts.......................................................28            Ethernet port (for Routing Engine management)
            wire specifications.......................................297                      connecting during initial installation............121
      temperature, displaying......................................190                         replacing......................................................203
altitude, acceptable range..........................................285                  Fiber-optic array...................................................31
antistatic mat, using...................................................254              fiber-optic array
approvals, agency......................................................281                     site preparation...........................................295
architecture                                                                             grounding See grounding cables
      control plane                                                                      UTP Category 5.....................................................31
            TX Matrix platform........................................55             cable management system
      data flow                                                                          install....................................................................92
            T640 routing node.........................................59             cable shelf assembly
      Packet Forwarding Engines...................................59                     install....................................................................92
      switch fabric                                                                  case number, for JTAC...............................................305
            routing matrix...............................................57          chassis...........................................................................9
ASICs                                                                                    alarm messages See alarm, messages
      Layer2/Layer 3 Packet Processing ASIC.................59                           dimensions.............................................................9
      Queuing and Memory Interface ASIC....................59                            ESD points..............................................................9




                                                                                                                                               Index      ■      313
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




     grounding points...................................................11           console port (for Routing Engine management)
     installing in rack...................................................89              cable
     lifting guidelines..................................................255                   connection during initial installation............121
     process (software module in Routing Engine).......43                                      connector pinout (DB-9)...............................309
     weight.....................................................................9              connector pinout (RJ-45)..............................309
checklist for site preparation........................................65                       replacement instructions.............................204
cleaning                                                                                       specifications...............................................297
     fiber-optic array adapter.....................................177               control boards
     fiber-optic array cable.........................................177                  maintaining........................................................174
clearance, around rack.................................................71            control plane
CLI                                                                                       connecting..........................................................295
     as troubleshooting tool........................................185              control plane ports.......................................................28
     command                                                                         control planes
           to display chassis alarm messages...............187                            connections........................................................136
           to display serial number..............................299                 conventions
     tools provided in                                                                    notice icons.........................................................xxii
           for accessing and controlling software...........44                            text and syntax...................................................xxii
           for monitoring software.................................45                convert
comb panel assembly                                                                       T640 routing node
     install....................................................................92             offline..........................................................145
command-line interface See CLI                                                                 operational..................................................155
commands                                                                             converting
     ping....................................................................185          T640 routing node
     show chassis alarms...........................................187                         overview......................................................135
     show chassis hardware.......................................299                 cooling system
     traceroute...........................................................185             description............................................................30
comments, in configuration statements....................xxiii                            troubleshooting...................................................190
compatibility, electromagnetic...................................293                 craft interface
compliance                                                                                alarm cutoff/lamp test button................................23
     EMC requirements..............................................282                    description............................................................23
     general standards...............................................281                  host subsystem LEDs............................................25
components                                                                                LED display...........................................................24
     chassis....................................................................9         LEDs
     cooling system......................................................30                    alarm (red and yellow)...................................23
     craft interface.......................................................23             replacing.............................................................214
     field replacement....................................................4               routine inspection of...........................................171
     host subsystem.....................................................15                TX-SIB online/offline buttons................................26
     midplane..............................................................12        curly braces, in configuration statements..................xxiii
     overview.................................................................9      customer support......................................................xxix
     power supplies......................................................29               contacting JTAC..................................................xxix
     redundancy.............................................................5
     Routing Engine.....................................................16
     software See JUNOS software                                                     D
     TX-CB...................................................................21      DB-9 cable connector pinouts (auxiliary and console
     TX-CIP..................................................................26       ports)......................................................................309
     TX-SIBs.................................................................13      DC power cables
configuration                                                                            lugs.....................................................................290
     files, storage by Routing Engine............................54                      specifications......................................................290
     TX Matrix platform.............................................131              DC power supplies See grounding chassis before
           merging.......................................................143          connnecting power
connect                                                                                  cables See DC power cables
     T640 routing node                                                                   description............................................................29
           offline..........................................................145          electrical specifications.......................................288
           operational..................................................155              grounding...........................................................290
                                                                                         LEDs.....................................................................30




314       ■      Index
                                                                                                                                                                Index




    maintaining........................................................182          field-replaceable units
    replacing DC power supply cable........................243                            listed.......................................................................4
documentation set                                                                   fire safety specifications.............................................254
    comments on...................................................xxviii            font conventions........................................................xxii
                                                                                    forwarding tables.........................................................40
                                                                                    fuses............................................................................29
E
earthquakes
     site preparation for...............................................70          G
     tested toleration for seismic................................285               graceful switchover....................................................140
EIA rack standards.......................................................69         grounding (electrical) specifications
electrical specifications..............................................288              DC-powered TX Matrix platform.........................291
electricity                                                                         grounding cables
     safety warnings...................................................270              lug......................................................................291
     site wiring guidelines..........................................292
electromagnetic
     compatibility See EMC                                                          H
     pulse...................................................................292    hardware components
electrostatic                                                                            power requirements...........................................288
     bag, using to store components..........................254                         returning for repair or replacement....................299
EMC (EMI)                                                                           host subsystem
     compliance with requirements............................282                         description............................................................15
     standards............................................................281            LEDs.....................................................................25
     suppression........................................................293              maintaining........................................................174
EMP...........................................................................292        taking offline.......................................................216
environmental specifications.....................................285                hot-pluggable components, description..........................4
ESD                                                                                 humidity (relative), acceptable...................................285
     preventing damage to components by................254
Ethernet port (for Routing Engine management)
     cable                                                                          I
           connection during initial installation............121                    immunity standards...................................................281
           replacement instructions.............................203                 installation
           specifications...............................................297              DC power, connecting........................................112
     description............................................................28           parts received, verifying........................................75
ETSI rack standards.....................................................69               power requirements...........................................287
                                                                                         preparing to install................................................73
                                                                                         TX Matrix platform.........................................87, 95
F                                                                                        unpacking the TX Matrix platform........................74
fan trays                                                                           installation handle
     description............................................................30           attach....................................................................87
     maintaining........................................................172              remove.................................................................91
     replacing.............................................................205      installation instructions
     troubleshooting...................................................190               alarm relay contact wires
fiber-optic array adapter                                                                      during initial installation..............................122
     cleaning..............................................................177                 tools required..............................................111
     testing.................................................................125         cable, auxiliary or console port (for Routing Engine
fiber-optic array cable                                                                     management)
     cleaning..............................................................177                 during initial installation..............................121
     connections........................................................137                    for maintenance or replacement.................204
     replacing.............................................................231                 tools required..............................................111
     routing................................................................114          cable, Ethernet port (for Routing Engine
     site preparation...................................................295                 management)
     testing.................................................................128               during initial installation..............................121
     weight.................................................................295                for maintenance or replacement.................203
fiber-optic array loopback adapter.............................128                             tools required..............................................111
fiber-optic array loopback connector..........................125




                                                                                                                                               Index      ■      315
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




     DC power and grounding cables                                                 LEDs
          tools required..............................................111                alarm (red and yellow on craft interface)
     fiber-optic array cables cables                                                          description.....................................................23
          tools required..............................111, 145, 155                      DC power supplies................................................30
     fiber-optic array loopback adapter                                                  host subsystem.....................................................25
          tools required..............................................111                on components...................................................186
     fiber-optic array loopback connector                                                on craft interface................................................186
          tools required..............................................111                safety warnings...................................................261
instructions                                                                             SIB........................................................................26
     packing                                                                             TX-CB...................................................................22
          TX Matrix platform for shipment.................307                            TX-SIB...................................................................14
interface                                                                          lithium battery compliance........................................284
     command-line See CLI                                                          lug for grounding cables.............................................291
     process (software module in Routing Engine).......43                          lugs for DC power cables............................................290
interference
     electromagnetic..................................................293
     radio frequency...................................................292         M
                                                                                   maintaining
                                                                                       air filters.............................................................172
J                                                                                      DC power supplies..............................................182
Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center                                           fan trays.............................................................172
  (JTAC).....................................................................190       host subsystem...................................................174
JUNOS software                                                                         TX-SIBs...............................................................175
     chassis process.....................................................43        maintenance guidelines
     CLI See CLI                                                                       warnings.............................................................265
     interface process...................................................43        management
     kernel (Routing Engine)........................................44                 process (software module of Routing Engine).......44
     kernel synchronization process.............................44                 manuals
     management process............................................44                  comments on...................................................xxviii
     MIB II process.......................................................44       MIB II process (software module in Routing
     modularity and scalability.....................................54               Engine).....................................................................44
     overview...............................................................37     midplane......................................................................12
     routing protocol process.......................................38                 description............................................................12
     SNMP process.......................................................44             functions...............................................................12
     tools                                                                         MPLS protocols............................................................38
          for accessing and configuring........................44                  multicast routing protocols...........................................38
          for monitoring...............................................45
     upgrade of............................................................45
     VPNs.....................................................................43   N
                                                                                   NEBS standards..........................................................281
                                                                                   notice icons................................................................xxii
K
kernel (software in Routing Engine).............................44
kernel synchronization                                                             O
    process (software module of Routing Engine).......44                           open-frame rack See rack
                                                                                   overview
                                                                                       T640 routing node................................................33
L                                                                                      TX Matrix platform.............................................3, 4
laser safety guidelines................................................261
LED display on craft interface
     alarm mode..........................................................25        P
     description............................................................24     Packet Forwarding Engines
     idle mode..............................................................24         architecture and data flow....................................59
                                                                                   parentheses, in syntax descriptions...........................xxiii
                                                                                   PC Card, replacing.....................................................221
                                                                                   PEMs See power supplies




316       ■     Index
                                                                                                                                                               Index




physical specifications....................................................9            power system components.................................238
PIC                                                                                     Routing Engine...................................................223
     SONET/SDH                                                                          TX-CBs................................................................219
          alarm messages...........................................187                  TX-CIPs...............................................................198
ping command...........................................................185              TX-SIBs...............................................................226
pinouts                                                                            RFI.............................................................................292
     DB-9 cable connector ports                                                    RJ-45 cable connector pinouts....................................309
        (auxiliary/console)...........................................309          routing
     RJ-45 Ethernet cable connector port...................309                          policy....................................................................42
policy, routing..............................................................42         protocol process (software module of Routing
power                                                                                      Engine)..............................................................38
     requirements and specifications.........................287                        protocols
     requirements for hardware components.............288                                      IPv4...............................................................38
     surges.................................................................293                IPv6...............................................................40
power supplies See DC power supplies                                                    tables....................................................................40
power system                                                                       Routing Engine
     troubleshooting...................................................191              alarm handling by.................................................54
power system components                                                                 change in mastership............................................50
     replacing.............................................................238          chassis process.....................................................43
powering off the TX Matrix platform..........................124                        components..........................................................16
powering on the TX Matrix platform..........................123                                software.........................................................38
                                                                                        configuration files, storage....................................54
                                                                                        description............................................................16
R                                                                                       interface process...................................................43
rack                                                                                    JUNOS software releases.......................................50
     clearance around, required...................................71                    kernel...................................................................44
     front-mount flange hole spacing...........................70                       kernel synchronization process.............................44
     mounting bracket hole spacing.............................70                       maintaining........................................................174
     securing to building..............................................70               management ports
     size and strength required....................................69                          cable and wire specifications.......................297
     standards, EIA and ETSI........................................69                  management process............................................44
rack mounting                                                                           MIB II process.......................................................44
     brackets................................................................79         packet counting....................................................54
     front-mount flanges..............................................79                pinouts for cable connections.............................309
     shelves..................................................................79        ports on TX-CIP
     spacer bars...........................................................79                  console port...................................................28
radio frequency interference, preventing...................292                          replacing.............................................................223
rear fan tray                                                                           routing
     replacing.....................................................145, 156                    protocol process............................................38
redundancy....................................................................5                table maintenance.........................................54
regulatory compliance................................................249                SNMP process.......................................................44
relative humidity, acceptable.....................................285                   switchover..........................................................140
removal instructions                                                                    taking offline.......................................................216
     cable
          auxiliary or console port (for Routing Engine
             management)...........................................204             S
          Ethernet port (for Routing Engine                                        safety information......................................................249
             management)...........................................203                  See also warnings
repair of TX Matrix platform or components..............299                        safety standards.........................................................281
replacing                                                                          seismic (earthquake), designed level..........................285
     air filters.............................................................210   serial number
     craft interface.....................................................214            in output from show chassis hardware
     fan trays.............................................................205             command........................................................299
     fiber-optic array cable.........................................231
     PC card...............................................................221
     power supply cord..............................................243




                                                                                                                                             Index      ■      317
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




shipping crate                                                                     T
     repacking............................................................307      T-CBs
     unpacking.............................................................74           maintaining........................................................174
     weight...................................................................74   T-series Internet Processor...........................................59
show chassis alarms command..........................187, 190                      T640 routing node
show chassis hardware command.............................299                           connect
SIBs                                                                                          offline..................................................145, 147
     LEDs.....................................................................26              operational..................................................155
signaling, distance limitations....................................292                  convert
Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP                                                   offline..........................................................145
site                                                                                          operational..................................................155
     electrical wiring specifications............................292                    converting
     environmental specifications..............................285                            overview......................................................135
     preparation                                                                        powering on........................................................149
           checklist........................................................65          replacing
     routine inspection...............................................171                     CBs..............................................................146
site preparation                                                                              SIBs.............................................................146
     fiber-optic array cable.........................................295                rolling back.........................................................164
SNMP                                                                               tables, routing and forwarding.....................................40
     as tool for monitoring...........................................45           taking components offline
     process (software module in Routing Engine).......44                               TX-SIBs.................................................................26
software, JUNOS See JUNOS software                                                 taking host subsystem offline.....................................216
specifications                                                                     technical support
     cable                                                                              contacting JTAC..................................................xxix
           power .........................................................290      telco rack See rack
           Routing Engine management ports..............297                        temperature, acceptable range...................................285
     clearance around rack...........................................71            testing
     electrical                                                                         fiber-optic array adapter.....................................125
           cable and wiring..........................................292                fiber-optic array cable.........................................128
     environmental....................................................285               TX Matrix platform.............................................125
     fire safety............................................................254    thermal output...........................................................285
     power                                                                         tolerances..................................................................285
           drawn by hardware components.................288                        tools required
     power system.....................................................288               chassis
     rack                                                                                     returning for repair or replacement.............306
           connection to building structure....................70                       converting the T640 routing node.......................135
           front-mount flange hole spacing....................70                        hardware components
           mounting bracket hole spacing......................70                              returning for repair or replacement.............306
           size and strength...........................................69               maintaining........................................................171
     thermal output....................................................285              replacement........................................................197
     wires to external alarm-reporting devices...........297                       traceroute command..................................................185
standalone mode.......................................................125          troubleshooting
standards compliance................................................281                 CLI commands....................................................185
startup, system                                                                         cooling system....................................................190
     monitoring..........................................................123            fans.....................................................................190
support, technical See technical support                                                power system.....................................................191
surge protection.........................................................292            TX-SIB connections.............................................193
switch fabric                                                                      TX-CBs
     architecture and data flow....................................57                   components..........................................................22
Switch Interface ASIC...................................................59              description............................................................21
switching planes                                                                        LEDs.....................................................................22
     connections........................................................137             maintaining........................................................174
syntax conventions....................................................xxii              replacing.............................................................219
                                                                                        taking offline.......................................................216




318       ■     Index
                                                                                                Index




TX-CIPs
    alarm relay contacts..............................................28
    control plane ports................................................28
    description............................................................26
    replacing.............................................................198
    Routing Engine ports............................................28
TX-SIBs
    components..........................................................14
    description............................................................13
    LEDs.....................................................................14
    maintaining........................................................175
    online/offline buttons............................................26
    replacing.............................................................226
    troubleshooting
         connections.................................................193
TX Matrix chassis
    physical specifications............................................9
    weight.....................................................................9
TX Matrix Connector Interface Panel See TX-CIPs
TX Matrix Control Boards See TX-CBs
TX Matrix platform
    component overview..............................................9
    configuration......................................................131
         merging.......................................................143
    installing with lift..................................................87
    installing without lift.............................................95
    parts list................................................................75
    testing.................................................................125
    unpacking.............................................................74
TX Matrix platform Switch Interface Boards See TX-SIBs


U
U (rack unit).................................................................69
unicast routing protocols
     IPv4......................................................................38
     IPv6......................................................................40
unpacking the TX Matrix platform...............................74
upgrading
     firmware
          FPC..............................................................142
     FPC
          firmware......................................................142
     JUNOS software..................................................140


W
warnings
     electrical.............................................................270
     general................................................................251
     installation..........................................................255
     laser and LED.....................................................261
     levels defined......................................................249
     maintenance and operational.............................265
wiring, electrical See electricity




                                                                                    Index   ■   319
TX Matrix Platform Hardware Guide




320    ■    Index

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Categories:
Stats:
views:119
posted:5/12/2010
language:English
pages:350